Electrical Design Guidlines - GEM Revision 0 (October 2016 Issue)

CHAPTER 5 DESIGN GUIDELINES
SECTION 5.5 ELECTRICAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page No.
5.5.1. ELECTRICAL............................................................................................................... 8
A. General......................................................................................................................... 8
1. Introduction................................................................................................................... 8
2. Applicability................................................................................................................... 9
3. Definitions..................................................................................................................... 9
4. Abbreviations............................................................................................................... 13
5. General Requirements................................................................................................. 16
6. Environmental Conditions............................................................................................16
7. Codes.......................................................................................................................... 17
8. Standards.................................................................................................................... 18
9. Related Sections.......................................................................................................... 21
10. Approvals..................................................................................................................... 21
B. Commissioning............................................................................................................ 21
1. References.................................................................................................................. 21
C. Power Systems............................................................................................................ 21
1. Electrical Characteristics............................................................................................. 21
2. Site Power Distribution................................................................................................ 24
3. Equipment................................................................................................................... 24
4. Equipment Derating..................................................................................................... 24
5. Power Calculations and Analyses...............................................................................26
D. Electrical Rooms.......................................................................................................... 30
1. General........................................................................................................................ 30
2. Main Electrical Rooms................................................................................................. 31
3. Distribution Electrical Rooms.......................................................................................31
E. Backup Power Systems............................................................................................... 32
1. General........................................................................................................................ 32
2. Sources....................................................................................................................... 35
3. Emergency Systems.................................................................................................... 38
4. Standby Systems......................................................................................................... 39
F. Transfer Switches........................................................................................................ 40
1. General........................................................................................................................ 40
2. Types........................................................................................................................... 40
3. Operation..................................................................................................................... 40
RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

Rev. 0 5.5 - i
4. Configuration............................................................................................................... 41
5. Applications................................................................................................................. 41
G. Electrical Distribution Equipment.................................................................................42
1. Medium Voltage Switchgear........................................................................................42
2. Low Voltage Switchgear and Switchboards.................................................................42
3. Panelboards................................................................................................................ 47
4. Low Voltage Circuit Breakers.......................................................................................47
5. Fuses........................................................................................................................... 49
6. Motors.......................................................................................................................... 49
7. Motor Controllers......................................................................................................... 49
8. Wiring Devices............................................................................................................. 50
9. Power Monitoring......................................................................................................... 50
H. Transformers............................................................................................................... 50
1. General........................................................................................................................ 50
2. Community Area Transformer......................................................................................51
3. Industrial Area Transformer.........................................................................................51
4. Transformers for Existing Facilities with Discontinued Voltages..................................52
5. References.................................................................................................................. 52
I. Conduits, Ducts and Busways.....................................................................................52
1. General........................................................................................................................ 52
2. Selection of Raceway Type......................................................................................... 52
3. Raceway Types........................................................................................................... 53
4. Surface Installations.................................................................................................... 54
5. Underfloor Installations................................................................................................ 54
6. Underground Installations............................................................................................55
7. Cable Trays and Cable Trenches................................................................................55
8. Wires and Cables........................................................................................................ 56
9. Busways...................................................................................................................... 57
10. Conduit Fill................................................................................................................... 57
J. Grounding.................................................................................................................... 57
1. General........................................................................................................................ 57
2. System Grounding....................................................................................................... 58
3. Equipment Grounding.................................................................................................. 58
4. Grounding System Calculations..................................................................................58
5. Grounding of Various System Installations..................................................................58

Rev. 0 5.5 - ii
6. Installation Requirements............................................................................................ 59
7. Grounding to Eliminate Hazards from Static Electricity................................................59
8. Corrosion Protection for Grounding Systems..............................................................59
9. Additional Grounding Protection by Residual Current Devices (RCD).........................61
10. References.................................................................................................................. 61
K. Lightning Protection Systems......................................................................................62
1. General........................................................................................................................ 62
2. Applications................................................................................................................. 62
3. Principal Components for Lightning Protection System...............................................62
4. Minimum Lightning Protection Features......................................................................63
L. Surge Protection Devices............................................................................................ 63
1. General........................................................................................................................ 63
2. Types of surge protection............................................................................................ 64
M. Lighting........................................................................................................................ 65
1. General........................................................................................................................ 65
2. Light Source................................................................................................................ 66
3. Interior Lighting............................................................................................................ 72
4. Exterior Lighting........................................................................................................... 79
5. Lighting Calculations.................................................................................................... 85
N. Lighting Control Systems............................................................................................. 86
1. General........................................................................................................................ 86
2. Interior......................................................................................................................... 86
3. Exterior........................................................................................................................ 90
4. Lighting Control Strategies..........................................................................................90
5.5.2. TELECOMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................... 93
A. General........................................................................................................................ 93
1. Scope.......................................................................................................................... 93
2. Definitions.................................................................................................................... 93
3. Abbreviations.............................................................................................................. 107
4. Codes......................................................................................................................... 118
5. Standards and References......................................................................................... 119
B. Commissioning........................................................................................................... 123
1. References................................................................................................................. 123
C. Communications Systems..........................................................................................123
1. Local Area Network.................................................................................................... 123

Rev. 0 5.5 - iii
2. Metropolitan Area Network.........................................................................................126

3. FTTH.......................................................................................................................... 129
4. Data Centers.............................................................................................................. 138
5. Wireless Local Area Network......................................................................................145
6. Telephone and Intercom............................................................................................. 153
7. Structured Cabling...................................................................................................... 169
8. Distributed Television System.....................................................................................177
9. Master Clock System.................................................................................................. 184
10. Public Address and General Alarm.............................................................................186
11. Audio/Visual Systems................................................................................................. 189
D. Safety and Security Systems......................................................................................195
1. Access Control System............................................................................................... 195
2. Automatic Number Plate Recognition (ANPR)............................................................197
3. Intrusion Detection Systems.......................................................................................200
4. Vehicle Barriers.......................................................................................................... 207
5. Video Surveillance Systems.......................................................................................208
6. Security Screening...................................................................................................... 210
E. Utilities........................................................................................................................ 210
1. Outside Plant Infrastructure........................................................................................ 210
2. Power Distribution, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)............................................216
3. Earthing and Bonding................................................................................................. 216
5.5.3. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS....................................................................219
A. General....................................................................................................................... 219
1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 219
2. Scope......................................................................................................................... 219
3. Exclusions.................................................................................................................. 220
4. References – Units of Measurement..........................................................................220
5. Definitions................................................................................................................... 221
6. Abbreviations.............................................................................................................. 225
7. Codes And Standards................................................................................................ 228
8. Environmental Conditions........................................................................................... 230
B. Control System Architectures.....................................................................................233
1. General....................................................................................................................... 233
2. Scope......................................................................................................................... 234
3. Building Automation System (BAS) Architecture........................................................234

Rev. 0 5.5 - iv
4. Process Control System (PCS) Architecture...............................................................235

5. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA.....................................................237
6. Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System.....................................................238
C. Control Strategies....................................................................................................... 239
1. General....................................................................................................................... 239
2. Principals of Automation............................................................................................. 240
3. Advanced Control Systems........................................................................................242
4. Equipment Operating Modes......................................................................................242
5. Consoles, Workstations and Control Networks...........................................................243
6. Redundancy – Fault Tolerance...................................................................................244
7. Centralized Enterprise, MIS/ERP System...................................................................245
8. Segregation - Risk Levels – Safety Integrity levels.....................................................248
9. Spare and Expansion Capabilities..............................................................................250
D. Instrumentation – Basic Design Criteria......................................................................251
1. General....................................................................................................................... 251
2. Online Continuous Measurement or Analog Type Instrumentation.............................254
3. Online Discrete Type Instrumentation.........................................................................255
4. On-line Final Control Elements...................................................................................255
5. Custody Metering....................................................................................................... 258
E. Instrumentation and Control System Cabinets...........................................................259
1. General....................................................................................................................... 259
F. Electrical Systems for Instrumentation........................................................................261
1. General....................................................................................................................... 261
2. Electrical Wiring.......................................................................................................... 261
3. Power Supply............................................................................................................. 262
4. Power Distribution within PCS Cabinets.....................................................................262
5. Power Supply and Distribution to PCS Consoles and Workstations...........................263
6. Utility Power................................................................................................................ 263
7. Grounding................................................................................................................... 263
G. Process Automation Network (PAN)...........................................................................264
1. General....................................................................................................................... 264
2. Process Automation Network Design.........................................................................264
3. Physical and Logical Separation.................................................................................264
4. Engineering and Maintenance Network (E&MN)........................................................264
5. Wireless Communications..........................................................................................264

Rev. 0 5.5 - v
6. HART.......................................................................................................................... 265
7. Profibus...................................................................................................................... 266
8. BACNET..................................................................................................................... 267
9. Control Network Cabling............................................................................................. 267
H. Control System Access and Security..........................................................................268
1. General....................................................................................................................... 268
2. Foundational Requirements........................................................................................ 268
3. Defense in Depth:....................................................................................................... 268
4. Countermeasures....................................................................................................... 269
5. Security Zones............................................................................................................ 269
6. Conduits..................................................................................................................... 270
7. Local and Remote Access.......................................................................................... 270
8. Data Protection and Retention....................................................................................271
I. System Integration...................................................................................................... 271
1. General....................................................................................................................... 271
2. DCS, PLC and SCADA (MTU, RTU)..........................................................................272
3. Historian..................................................................................................................... 272
4. Instrumentation Asset Management Systems (IAMS).................................................273
5. Condition Monitoring Systems (CMS).........................................................................273
6. Emergency Shutdown and Isolation Systems (ESD)..................................................274
J. Control System Software............................................................................................ 277
1. General....................................................................................................................... 277
2. Standards................................................................................................................... 278
3. Licensing.................................................................................................................... 278
K. Control Buildings and/or Control Rooms.....................................................................278
1. General....................................................................................................................... 278
2. Control Room requirements........................................................................................279
3. Server (Rack) Room requirements.............................................................................280
4. Engineering Room requirements................................................................................280
5. Electrical – Power, Wiring, Lighting, Grounding requirements....................................280
6. UPS and Battery Room requirements........................................................................281
7. Environmental requirements.......................................................................................281
L. Fire Alarm and Gas Detection Systems and Fire Suppression Control System..........281
1. Fire Alarm System...................................................................................................... 281
M. Documentation........................................................................................................... 297

Rev. 0 5.5 - vi
1. General....................................................................................................................... 297
2. Required Instrumentation Documents........................................................................298
5.5.4 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE............................................................................304
A. General....................................................................................................................... 304
1. Introduction................................................................................................................. 304
2. Definitions and Abbreviations.....................................................................................304
B. Public/Government..................................................................................................... 304
1. Athletic Venues........................................................................................................... 304
2. Aviation....................................................................................................................... 307
3. Community Center...................................................................................................... 309
4. Hospital....................................................................................................................... 310
5. Libraries...................................................................................................................... 313
6. Mosque....................................................................................................................... 315
7. Museum...................................................................................................................... 317
8. Ports/Docks................................................................................................................ 319
9. Schools....................................................................................................................... 320
C. Commercial................................................................................................................ 323
1. Hospitality................................................................................................................... 323
2. Office.......................................................................................................................... 325
3. Retail/Restaurants...................................................................................................... 327
4. Theaters..................................................................................................................... 328
D. Residential.................................................................................................................. 330
1. Multi-Family Housing.................................................................................................. 330
2. Single-Family Housing................................................................................................ 332
E. Industrial..................................................................................................................... 333
1. General Industrial....................................................................................................... 333
2. Chemical Processing.................................................................................................. 335
F. Specialty Applications................................................................................................. 337
1. Military........................................................................................................................ 337
2. Water Treatment and/or Power Plants (Desalination).................................................339

Rev. 0 5.5 - vii
SUBSECTION 5.5.1 ELECTRICAL
5.5.1. ELECTRICAL
A. General
(a) Introduction
b. General
1) This Section provides the basis for design and installation of electrical systems
and services. The guidelines apply to the following systems within the sites and
premises of Residential, Commercial, Institutional and Light Industrial facilities:
(a) Primary and Secondary Power Distribution Systems:
(1) 34.5 kV and 13.8 kV for Jubail Industrial City
(2) 33 kV and 34.5 kV for Ras Al-Khair Industrial City
(b) Low Voltage Power Distribution
(c) Lighting Systems
c. Health Safety and Welfare Considerations
1) All work undertaken in relation to these guidelines shall be completed in full
compliance with the respective health and safety requirements established by
the following:
(a) Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
(1) Legislation, Regulation, Standards and Codes
(2) Royal Commission’s Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM)
(3) Royal Commission’s Guiding Procurement and Construction
Specifications (GPCS)
(4) Royal Commission’s Typical Construction Detail Drawings (TCDD)
(b) A/E and/or EPC Contractor
(1) Health and Safety Standards, and System as accepted by the Royal
Commission
2) In the absence of any or all of the above, best international industry practices,
with reference to health, safety and welfare, shall be employed and utilized
throughout.
d. Electrical systems designed using these Guidelines shall consider the following
features:
1) Safety of personnel, building and plant.
2) Design with consideration for energy efficiency and sustainability.
3) Compliance with standard voltage levels established for the development, as
detailed in this Guideline and the latest SEC Standards DPS-02 and SDMS-01.
4) A design arrangement that allows minimum interruption to the system during
maintenance that is carried out on a part of the system.
5) Allowances for future load growth and system expansion.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
6) Economy, considering overall building and plant cost as well as electrical

system costs.
7) Adequate interrupting capacity for circuit interrupting devices.
8) Proper coordination of all elements of the system with regards to insulation
levels, protective relaying, fusing and mechanical strength.
9) Power factor correction to address concerns associated with the electrical
distribution network.
10) Consideration for minimizing the impacts harmonics associated with non-linear
loads.
11) Applicability
e. This Section applies to facility types defined in Subsection 5.5.4 Guidelines by
Building Type.
f. Definitions
g. For a list of general definitions refer to Section 2.2 Definitions and Abbreviations.
h. This Section contains definitions for acronyms, abbreviations, words, and terms as
they are used in this Chapter. For definitions not listed, the latest issue of the
following Documents shall apply:
1) Saudi Building Code
2) International Electrotechnical Commission Glossary
3) IEC Electropedia, http://www.electropedia.org
4) Comprehensive Dictionary of Measurement and Control, International Society
for Measurement and Control
i. Definitions Specific to the Subsection:
1) “Ambien t Temperature” Average temperature of air or another medium in the
vicinity of the luminaire. Ambient temperature is expressed in degrees Celsius.
2) “Ampacity” The current, in amperes, that a conductor can carry continuously
under the conditions of use without exceeding its temperature rating.
3) “Backup Power System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged for
automatic, delayed, or manual connection to the alternate power source and
that serves all of the loads identified as essential for the facility.
4) “Bonded (Bonding)” Connected to establish electrical continuity and
conductivity.
5) “Bonding Jumper” A reliable conductor to ensure the required electrical
conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected.
6) “Bonding Jumper, Equipment” The connection between two or more portions of
the equipment grounding conductor at the service.
7) “Cabinet” An enclosure that is designed for either surface mounting of flush
mounting and is provided with a frame, mat or trim in which a swinging door or
doors are or can be hung .

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
8) “Circuit Breaker” A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-

automatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined
overcurrent without damage to itself when properly applied within its rating.
9) “CIE color group” a grouping system for the color rendering and color
appearance of light sources.
10) “Classified Areas” An area where the hazardous classification is defined by
three main criteria as follows: 1) The type of hazard (groups), 2) The auto-
ignition temperature of the hazardous material (temperature or “T” rating), and
3) The likelihood of the hazard being present in flammable concentrations
(zones).
11) “Color Rendering Index” Quantitative measure of the ability of a light source to
reveal the colors of various objects faithfully in comparison with an ideal or
natural light source.
12) “Concealed” Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the building.
Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even though they may
become accessible by withdrawing them.
13) “Conduit” Part of a closed wiring system of general circular cross-section for
insulated conductors and/or cables in electrical or communication installations,
allowing them to be drawn in and/or replaced.
14) “Continuous Load” A load where the maximum current is expected to continue
for 3 hours or more.
15) “Coordination (Selective)” Localization of an overcurrent condition to restrict
outages to the circuit or equipment affected, accomplished by the choice of
overcurrent protection devices and their ratings or settings.
16) “Critical Branch” A subsystem of the emergency system consisting of feeders
and branch circuits supplying energy to task illumination, special power circuits,
and selected receptacles serving areas and functions related to patient care
and that are connected to alternate power sources by one or more transfer
switches during interruption of normal power source.
17) “DALI” a lighting control protocol that allows the use of digital addressing of
lighting components to function and to communicate using 2 way digital
communications specified by IEC62386.
18) “Demand or Diversity Factor” - The ratio of the maximum demand of a system,
or part of a system, to the total connected load of a system for the part of the
system under consideration.
19) “Device” A unit of an electrical system that carries or controls electric energy as
its principal function.
20) “Disconnecting Means” or “Isolator” A device, or group of devices, or other
means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their
source of supply.
21) “Distribution Board (DB)” A single panel or group of panel units designed for
assembly in the form of a single panel, including buses and automatic
overcurrent devices, and equipped with or without switches for the control of
light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or cutout box
placed in or against a wall, partition, or other support; and accessible only from
the front.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
22) “Duct” A pipe provided to facilitate the installation of cables and provides
protection for the cables.
23) “Duct Bank” A multiple array of ducts.
24) “Emergency Systems” Electrical systems legally required to be installed and
that supply loads essential to safety and life.
25) “Enclosed” Surrounded by a case, housing, fence, or wall(s) that prevents
persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.
26) “Enclosure” The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls
surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting
energized parts or to protect the equipment from physical damage.
27) “Equipment” A general term, including material, fittings, devices, appliances,
luminaires, apparatus, machinery, and the like used as a part of, or in
connection with, an electrical installation.
28) “Equipment System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged for delayed,
automatic, or manual connection to the alternate power source and that serves
primarily 3-phase power equipment.
29) “Feeder (Electrical)” All circuit conductors between the service equipment, the
source of a separately derived system, or other power supply source and the
final branch-circuit overcurrent device.
30) “Handhole” A small jointing chamber of the joint box category but restricted to
footway use only.
31) “Interface Point (I.P.)” A location established for demarcation of contractual
responsibilities.
32) “Interrupting rating” The highest current at rated voltage that a device is
intended to interrupt under standard test conditions.
33) “Isolator” Refer to “Disconnecting Means”.
34) “Joint (splice)” The connection of two or more lengths of wire or cable at a
single point.
35) “Joint Box” A jointing chamber the top of which consists of fully removable
covers.
36) “Labeled” Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol,
or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to the Royal
Commission and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic
inspection of production of labeled equipment or materials, and by whose
labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate standards or
performance in a specified manner.
37) “Life Safety Branch” A subsystem of the emergency system consisting of
feeders and branch circuits intended to provide adequate power needs to
ensure safety to building occupants and that are automatically connected to
alternate power sources during interruption of the normal power source.
38) “Luminaire” Apparatus which distributes, filters or transforms the light emitted
from one or more lamps and which includes all the parts necessary for fixing
and protecting the lamps and, where necessary, circuit auxiliaries together with
the means for connecting them to the electric supply. The words "luminaire"
and "lamp system" are often assumed to be synonymous. For the purposes of

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
this standard, the word "luminaire" is restricted to apparatus used for

distributing light in general lighting, while "lam p system" implies use of lamps
in other than general lighting applications.
39) Luminaire Efficacy: Quotient of the luminous flux emitted by the power
consumed by the Iuminaire. The efficacy is ex pressed in lm /W.
40) “Luminaire Lifetime” Length of time during which 70% of the measured initial
luminous flux value are provided, as a function of maximum operating
temperature range. The luminaire lifetime of the module is expressed in hours.
41) “Lumen Maintenance” Value of the luminous flux at a given time in the life of a
Iuminaire divided by the initial value of the luminous flux of the luminaire and
expressed as a percentage “x” of the initial luminous flux value. The lumen
maintenance of a Iuminaire is the effect of decrease of lumen output which is
sometimes referred to as depreciation or lumen loss factor.
42) “Manhole” A jointing chamber, accessed via a restricted opening in the top.
43) “Main Distribution Board” Board in the building which fulfills all the functions of
a main electrical distribution for the supply building area assigned to it and
where the voltage drop is measured for operating the safety services.
44) “Main Incomer” Refer to “Service”.
45) “Neutral Conductor” The conductor connected to the neutral point of a system
that is intended to carry current under normal conditions.
46) “Nonlinear Load” A load where the wave shape of the steady-state current does
not follow the wave shape of the applied voltage.
47) “Operating Temperature Range” Ambient temperature range within which the
luminaire with regard to the specification can be operated. The operating
temperature range is expressed in degrees Celsius.
48) “Overcurrent” Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or the
ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload, short circuit, or ground
fault.
49) “Panelboard” Refer to “Main Distribution Board”, “Sub Main Distribution Board”
and “Distribution Board”.
50) “Residual Current Device” A mechanical switching device or association of
devices intended to cause the opening of the contacts when the residual
current attains a given value under specified conditions.
51) “Ring Main Unit” A Ring Main Unit includes two load break switches for the
connection of the substation to the ring and a transformer protection unit.
52) “Separately Derived System” A premises wiring system whose power is
derived from a source of electric energy or equipment other than a service.
Such systems have no direct electrical connection, including a solidly
connected ground conductor, to supply conductors originating in another
system.
53) “Service” The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the
serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served. Also referred to as
“Supply Intake” or “Main Incomer”.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
54) “Short Circuit Current Rating” The prospective symmetrical fault current at a
nominal voltage to which an apparatus or system is able to be connected
without sustaining damage exceeding defined acceptance criteria.
55) “Splice” See Joint.
56) “Standby Systems” Include alternate power systems for such applications
where interruption of normal power would cause discomfort to personnel or
damage to product.
57) “Sub Main Distribution Board” Any distribution board which is neither a Main
Distribution Board nor a Distribution Board
58) “Surround Ratio” The average illuminance just outside the edge of the
carriageway in proportion to the average illuminance just inside the edge of
carriageway. Acceptable surround ratio values allows drivers to see
pedestrians and other road users who may be about to cross the road.
59) “Switchboard” A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels on which are
mounted on the face, back, or both, switches, overcurrent and other protective
devices, buses, and usually instruments. Switchboards are generally
accessible from the rear as well as from the front and are not intended to be
installed in cabinets.
60) “Task lighting” is lighting directed to a specific surface or area to provide
illumination for visual and/or manual tasks.
61) “TN-C System” A system in which neutral and protective functions are
combined in a single conductor throughout the system.
62) “TN-S System” A system having separate neutral and protective conductors
throughout the system.
63) “Vacuum Interrupter Switch” A current interrupting switch for power distribution
systems comprising an outer case and a plurality of vacuum interrupter bottle
switches positioned in the case.
64) “Voltage (of a circuit)” The greatest root-mean-square (rms) (effective)
difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit concerned.
65) “Voltage, Nominal” A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the
purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (such as 400/230 volts).
The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can vary from the nominal within
a range that permits satisfactory operation of equipment.
66) Abbreviations
j. For a list of general abbreviation refer to Subsection 2.2 Definitions and
Abbreviations.
k. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection :
1) A: Amperes
2) AC: Alternating Current
3) ACB: Air Circuit Breakers
4) A/E: Architect/Engineer
5) AFF: Above Finished Floor

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
6) AFFL: Above Finished Floor Level

7) AGL: Above Ground Level
8) ANSI: American National Standards Institute
9) ATF: Active Tracking Filters
10) ATS: Automatic Transfer Switch
11) AVG: Average
12) BAS: Building Automation System
13) BIL: Basic Impulse Insulation Level
14) BITS: Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch
15) BMS: Building Management System
16) CB: Circuit Breaker
17) CCT: Correlated Color Temperature
18) CAD: Computer Aided Design
19) CEN European Committee for Standardization (Lighting control
protocol)
20) CIE: Commission Internationale De L’eclairage (International
Commission on Illumination)
21) CR: Critical
22) CRI: Color Rendering Index
23) CT: Current Transformer
24) DALI Digital Application Lighting Interface
25) DB: Distribution Board
26) DP: Distribution Panel
27) ECG Electronic Control Gear (Lighting)
28) EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing
29) EPC: Engineering Procurement and Construction
30) EPR: Ethylene Propylene Rubber
31) FLA: Full Load Amps
32) FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit
33) FNC: Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit
34) GPCS: Guiding Procurement and Construction Specifications
35) HCIS: High Commission for Industrial Security
36) HID: High Intensity Discharge
37) HVAC: Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning
38) HZ: Hertz
39) IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
40) IESNA: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

4 IFC: Issued for Construction
1
)
42) IP: Ingress Protection
43) KA: Kilo-amperes
44) KW: Kilo-watts
45) KV: Kilo-volts
46) KVA: Kilo-volt-amperes
47) LED: Light Emitting Diode
48) LFMC: Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit
49) LMS Lighting Management System
50) LS: Life Safety
51) LV: Low Voltage
52) MCB: Miniature Circuit Breaker
53) MCCB: Molded Case Circuit Breaker
54) MDB: Main Distribution Board
55) MIN: Minimum
56) MIS: Metering Installation Standard
57) MIS1: Metering and Interface Standards
58) MTS: Manual Transfer Switch
59) MV: Medium Voltage
60) NA: Not Applicable
61) NEC: National Electrical Code
62) NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
63) OS: Optional Standby
64) PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride
65) RCD: Residual Current Device
66) RCJ: Royal Commission for Jubail
67) RMU: Ring Main Unit
68) RMS: Root Mean Squared
69) RNC: Rigid Non-metallic Conduit
70) RSC: Rigid Steel Conduit
71) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standards Organization or Saudi Standards,
Metrology and Quality Organization
72) SBC: Saudi Building Code
73) SDS: Saudi Distribution Standards

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
74) SDCS: Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Construction Standard

75) SDMS: Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Materials Specification
76) SDPS: Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Planning Standard
77) SEC: Saudi Electricity Company
78) SEC-EOA: Saudi Electricity Company – Eastern Operating Area
79) SMDB: Sub Main Distribution Board
80) SMSS: Saudi Electricity Company Material Standard Specification
81) SPD: Surge Protection Device
82) TCDD: Typical Construction Detail Drawing
83) UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply
84) V: Volts
85) VIS: Vacuum Interrupter Switch
86) XLPE: Cross-linked Polyethylene
5. General Requirements
a. Equipment and Material Selection
1) Equipment and materials manufactured in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia which
meet the GPCS and Standards shall be used.
2) All equipment and materials shall be selected in consideration of the following:
(a) Performance
(b) Ability to withstand the environmental conditions
(c) Availability and ease of shipment
(d) Ease of installation
(e) Maintenance characteristics
3) All equipment and materials shall be the standard products of approved
manufacturers, regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and
materials and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design.
4) Specifications shall clearly state all requirements to meet environmental
conditions and special provisions for equipment installed outdoors. Refer to
Subsection 5.2.1.H Corrosion Protection for additional information.
a. Environmental Conditions
b. All parts of an Electrical Installation must be suitably designed, constructed and
maintained so as to operate safely and carry out their designated function in the
expected operating environment in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
c. Equipment Enclosures
1) All equipment enclosures shall meet the following Ingress Protection rating as
defined by IEC 60529. The object of these standards is to give:
(a) Definitions for degrees of protection provided by enclosures of electrical
equipment as regards:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
(1) Protection of persons against access to hazardous parts inside the

enclosure;
(2) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of
solid foreign objects;
(3) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against harmful
effects due to the ingress of water.
(b) Measures to protect both the enclosure and the equipment inside the
enclosure against external influences or conditions such as:
(1) Mechanical impacts
(2) Corrosion
(3) Corrosive solvents (for example, cutting liquids)
(4) Fungus
(5) Vermin
(6) Solar radiation
(7) Icing
(8) Moisture (for example, produced by condensation)
(9) Explosive atmospheres
(10) And the protection against contact with hazardous moving parts
external to the enclosure
2) The following IP Ratings shall apply as a minimum requirement for the
following equipment.
(a) Low Voltage Switchgear (Indoor) – IP52
(b) Sub Main Distribution Board (Indoor) – IP52
(c) Sub Main Distribution Board (Outdoor) – IP65
(d) Distribution Board (Indoor) – IP52
(e) Distribution Board (Outdoor) – IP65
For SEC related equipment, follow SEC Standards and Specifications for IP
ratings.
3) All enclosures located outside which are not sheltered or made from stainless
steel shall have a white finish to lower the internal temperature.
4) All enclosures with a lens or transparent display cover subject to direct sunlight
shall be glass or as a minimum UV resistant.
5) Codes
d. Refer to Chapter 3 Codes and Performance Standards for a list of applicable Codes.
e. In addition to the aforementioned - All electrical equipment and material and its
installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following authorities:
1) Saudi Building Code 401 Electrical
2) Occupations Safety and Health Act (OSHA)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 10
3) Saudi Building Code 501 Mechanical Requirements

4) Saudi Building Code 201 Architectural Requirements
5) Saudi Building Code 701 Sanitary Requirements
6) Saudi Arabian Distribution Code
7) Saudi Building Code 801 Fire Protection Requirements
8) Civil Defense Department (CDD)
9) Standards
f. All work shall conform to the applicable industry Codes, Standards and
Associations.
g. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used wherever
applicable. These standards are listed alphabetically and do not indicate the priority
for application with regards to design of the electrical systems. In case of conflict, the
A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall propose equipment conforming to one group of
Codes and Standards.
1) CIE International Commission on Illumination
2) EN Euro-norms published by CEN
3) EN 13201 Road lighting
4) EN 12464 Workplace Lighting Outdoor Spaces
5) EN 12193 Light and Lighting Sports Lighting
6) IEC International Electro-Technical Commission
7) IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
8) NFPA National Fire Protection Association
9) SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
10) SDCS Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Construction Standards
11) SDMS Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Materials Specification
12) SDPS Saudi Electrical Company Distribution Planning Standard
13) SDS Saudi Electric Company Distribution Standard
h. Specific Standards which are referenced in this Section of the guidelines include the
following:
1) BS 7430 Code of practice for protective earthing of electrical installations
2) CIE 115 Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic.
3) IEC 60076 Power transformers
4) IEC 60079 Explosive atmospheres
5) IEC 60227 Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and
including 450/750 V
6) IEC60228 Conductors of insulated cables
7) IEC 60332 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions

Rev. 0 5.5 - 11
8) IEC 60364 Low-voltage electrical installation - Electrical installations of

buildings (including all sub-parts)
9) IEC 60427 High-voltage alternating current circuit-breakers
10) IEC 60502 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for
rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
11) IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
12) IEC 60644 Specification for high-voltage fuse-links for motor circuit
applications
13) IEC 60715 Dimensions of low-voltage switchgear and control gear.
Standardized mounting on rails for mechanical support of electrical devices
in switchgear and control gear installations.
14) IEC 60724 Short-circuit temperature limits of electric cables with rated
voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3.6 kV)
15) IEC 60754 Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from
cables
16) IEC 60787 Application guide for the selection of fuse-links of high-voltage
fuses for transformer circuit application
17) IEC 60898, Circuit breakers for overcurrent protection for household and
similar installations.
18) IEC 60981 Extra heavy duty rigid steel conduits
19) IEC 61000-3-3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) – part 3-3
20) IEC 61034 Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under defined
conditions
21) IEC 61340 Electrostatics
22) IEC 61386 Conduit systems for electrical installations
23) IEC 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
24) IEC 61537 Cable management – Cable tray systems and cable ladder
systems
25) IEC 61643 Low-voltage surge protective devices
26) IEC 62031 LED Modules
27) IEC 62305 Lightning Protection
28) IEC 62384 Performance Requirements for Electrical Control Gear for LED
Modules
29) IEC 62471 Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamps Systems
30) IEC62504 General Lighting – LEDs and LED Modules – Terms and
Definitions
31) IEC 62560 Self-ballast LED Lamps (>50V)
32) IEC 62717 LED Modules Performance
33) IEC 62722-2-1 LED Luminaires Performance

Rev. 0 5.5 - 12
34) IEEE STD 80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding

35) IEEE STD 142 Recommended practice for grounding of industrial and
commercial power systems
36) IEEE STD 1453 Recommended Practice for Measurements and Limit of
Voltage Fluctuations and Associated Light Fluctuations and Associated Light
Flicker on AC Power Systems
37) IESNA Lighting Handbook
38) IESNA LEM-3 Design Considerations for Effective Building Lighting Energy
Utilization
39) IESNA LM-5 Guide for Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports
Lighting Installation
40) IESNA RP-1 Practice for Office Lighting
41) IESNA RP-7 Practice for Industrial Lighting
42) IESNA RP-16 Nomenclature and Definitions for Illuminating Engineering
43) IESNA RP-24 Practice for Lighting Offices Containing Computer Visual
Display Terminals
44) IESNA RR-96 Lighting Ready Reference / Energy Management
45) IES/IESNA LM-79-08 Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric
Measurement of Solid-State Lighting Products
46) IES/IESNA LM-80-08 Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance
of LED Light Sources
47) NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) ( Applicable only if guidance is not
available in IEC)
48) NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
49) NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
50) NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
51) NFPA 111 Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby
Power Systems
52) AASHTO LTS-2 Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway
Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals
53) AASHTO GTB-77 Guide for Selecting, Locating, and Designing Traffic
Barriers
54) Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
55) SASO 55 PVC-insulated cables with circular copper conductors
56) SEC SDCS-02, Distribution Construction Standard – Construction Standard
for Underground Distribution Network
57) SEC DPS-01, Distribution Planning Standards – Estimation of Customer
Load Guideline
58) SEC DPS-02, Distribution Planning Standards – Design Guideline of
Underground Low Voltage Network to Supply Customers

Rev. 0 5.5 - 13
59) SEC DPS-09, Distribution Planning Standards – General Guidelines for

Design of Electrical Distribution Networks of Private Plot Plans
60) SEC SDMS, Distribution Material Specification
61) SEC SDS-5, Metering Installation Standard
62) Related Sections
i. Refer to Section 3.4 Sustainability.
j. Refer to Subsection 5.3.2.E.4 Lighting.
k. Refer to Subsection 5.3.2.F Site Lighting
l. Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.4.d Roadway Lighting.
m. Refer to Subsection 5.7.7 Electrical for information regarding service utilities.
n. Refer to Section 5.4 Mechanical.
o. Refer to Subsection 5.2.1.I Corrosion Protection.
p. Approvals
q. The RCJ will review and approve all design reports, plans and specifications. Refer
to Section 1.1 Introduction/Background.
B. Commissioning
• References
b. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 Startup, Commissioning and Training for commissioning
requirements.
C. Power Systems
1- Electrical Characteristics
b. General
1) The frequency of all alternating current power systems shall be 60 Hz.
2) Phase rotation shall be in accordance with latest SEC Standard DPS.
3) All systems shall be grounded. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.J Grounding.
c. System Voltage Level and application
1) Nominal voltages, standard for all new projects shall be in accordance with the
latest SEC Standard DPS-02 and as indicated in Table 5.5.1.A Standard
Voltages and Applications.
d. Voltage Identification
1) All voltage levels shall be identified in accordance with the values provided in
the latest SEC Standard DPS-02 and 01-SDMS-01.
e. Voltage Range
1) Minimum and maximum permitted service voltage ranges are identified in the
latest SEC Standards DPS-02 and 01-SDMS-01. The designer shall ensure
that the distribution system design shall provide proper utilization voltage at the
consumer appliances and equipment.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 14
TABLE 5.5.1.A: STANDARD VOLTAGES AND APPLICATIONS
Nominal System
Application
Voltage (V)
All facility types, - this voltage is being discontinued

120 Note 1, 2 and is only to be used for specific applications as
approved by the RCJ.
240 Note 1, 2 and is only to be used for specific applications as
220/127 Note 1, 2 and is only to be used for specific applications as
Residential, - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors,
receptacles and miscellaneous.
Commercial - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors,

400/230 Institutional - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors,

Healthcare Facilities – Lighting, Air Conditioning,
motors, receptacles and miscellaneous.
Industrial – Lighting, Air conditioning, and motors.
All facility types, this voltage is being discontinued

Industrial and Large Commercial applications.

4160
Large motors over 150 kW and other loads.
Main Distribution in Community, Institutional, and

13800
Light Industrial Areas.
Main Distribution in Industrial Areas for Ras Al-Khair

33000
Industrial City.
Main Distribution in Industrial Areas for Jubail

34500
Industrial City.
Sub Transmission Network in Community and

115000
Industrial Areas

Rev. 0 5.5 - 15
Main Transmission Network Supply to Primary

230000
Industries.
Main Transmission Network Supply to Primary

380000
Industries.
Table 5.5.1.A Notes:
1- Discontinued voltage may be allowed only if all following conditions
are met:
A- Electrical service with the discontinued voltage is already
existing.
B- Requested service is for a new facility which is located in an area
that is served by a discontinued voltage.
C- Newly added equipment to be compatible with existing and
current in county voltage (400/230V).
2- Discontinued voltage will be dealt with in the following two phases:
A- Preliminary Stage Voltage change: The change of system
voltage, to customers in existing area, shall take place by
9/20/1441H. The change requires that all added (new)
equipment to be compatible with both existing and current in
county voltage (400/230V).
B- Final Stage Voltage change: The final stage of system voltage
change, to customers in existing area, shall take place between
9/20/1441H and 9/20/1456H. The change requires upgrading all
electrical system to the current in county voltage (400/230V).
f. Voltage Drop
1) The electrical system shall be designed to account for voltage drop for the
entire electrical distribution system. The electrical components including
feeders and branch circuits shall be sized and selected to limit the total voltage
drop from source to loads as follows:
(a) For network voltage drop design shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the latest SEC Distribution Planning Standard DPS-02.
(b) For Consumers’ (customers) installations voltage drop design shall be in
accordance with SBC 401, section 52-5.
g. Power Factor
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the utilization power factor for
the facility and determine whether power factor correction is required to
maintain operation within the required power factor ratio of 0.95.
h. Fault Levels
1) Fault levels for facilities with all voltage ratings including 400/230 V, 4.16 kV,
13.8 kV, 33 kV and 34.5 kV systems shall utilize the maximum allowable
symmetrical short circuit values from the latest SEC as the available fault level
to the facility.
2) Fault levels for facilities with discontinued voltage ratings including 240 V, 120
V, 220Y/127 V, and 380Y/220 V (where used with specific approval from the

Rev. 0 5.5 - 16
RCJ) may not be identified in the latest SEC Standards. For these systems the
designer shall select the equipment to limit the fault current to a reasonable
value and ensure that interrupting devices have the required ratings for the
available short circuit.
2. Site Power Distribution
a. Site development power distribution at 380 kV, 230 kV, 115 kV, 34.5 kV, 33 kV and
13.8 kV are developed by the Royal Commission in accordance with the latest SEC
Standards including but not limited to the following SDCS-02, 01-SDMS-01, DPS-01,
DPS-02, and DPS-09. The system improvements are completed and turned over to
the SEC for operation and maintenance.
b. Refer to Subsection 5.7.7. Electrical for a description of the electric service utility for
the various types of facilities.
c. Equipment
d. Uniformity and Standardization
1) Uniformity in the design of electrical system components is important to
minimize the number of spare parts required to be stocked for maintenance
and repairs.
2) The design for the electrical system shall be standardized to reduce the
number of different types of transformers, switchgear, panelboards and cable
sizes used.
e. Insulation Levels
1) The BIL ratings for equipment shall be specified to be in accordance with the
latest SEC Standard 01-SDMS-01
2) Equipment Derating
f. General
1) The high temperatures prevalent in Saudi Arabia must be considered when
selecting the appropriate capacities of electrical cables and equipment. When
ambient temperatures exceed a certain threshold, the current carrying capacity
shall be derated to compensate for the environmental conditions. The standard
service conditions for electrical system design are identified in latest SEC
Standards DPS-02 and 01-SDMS-01.
2) Derating of electrical system components shall be determined in accordance
with latest SEC Standard DPS-02.
3) The manufacturers of all specified electrical system components and
equipment shall be consulted to ensure that the proper derating factors are
applied to the electrical equipment.
g. Derating of Cables
1) Temperature Correction Factor
(a) The rate of heat dissipation from cable to surrounding depends upon the
temperature difference between them. If the temperature of surrounding
is high, then the temperature difference between cable and surrounding
will be less resulting in less heat dissipation from cable to surroundings.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 17
(b) The cable ampacities are specified at certain ambient temperature. It is

required to correct the cable ampacities by applying temperature
correction factor depending upon surrounding ambient temperature.
(c) Ampacity of the cable passing through different temperature zones shall
be corrected by applying appropriate temperature correction factor for
highest zone temperature through which the cable is passing.
(d) SBC 401 Tables A.52-14 to A.52-16 shall be used as reference.
2) Group Derating Factor
(a) Where a number of circuits are installed in close proximity to one
another, consideration must be given to the mutual heating effect.
(1) Cables installed on the outside of the group will be able to dissipate
heat outwards, but will be restricted in dissipation towards other
warm cables.
(2) Cables installed between others near the center of the group may
be challenged to dissipate heat at all and will rise further in
temperature.
(b) The cables in the group shall be derated by applying appropriate group
derating factor.
(c) Selection of cable derating factors shall consider the following:
(1) Method of installation of the cables: i.e. whether the cable is laid in
trench, duct bank or surface mounted.
(2) Group and loading of cables: may contain cables carrying load
current and standby cables not carrying current. Under such
circumstances consider the number and configuration of load
carrying cables only.
(d) SBC 401 Tables A.52-2 to A.52-17 shall be used as reference.
3) Cable Derating for SEC feeders:
(a) LV cables shall be derated in accordance with SEC Standard DPS-02
Rev. 02.
(b) MV cables up to 38kV shall be derated in accordance with SEC
Standard DPS Rev. 01.
4) Calculations
(a) Cable capacity calculations for services and feeders shall be in
accordance with latest SEC Standard DPS-01.
h. Derating of Transformers
1) Transformers shall be derated for the environmental conditions where they are
installed.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 18
2) Where a transformer serves non-linear, high-harmonic loads, the transformer

shall be derated to account for excessive heat associated with the increase in
harmonic currents.
(a) Loads with these non-linear, harmonic-rich currents include electronic
lighting ballasts, computers, adjustable frequency drives, and other
switch mode power supplies.
(b) These types of loads are common for commercial and small industrial
facilities and the design of the electrical systems for these facilities shall
consider the adverse effects on the electrical transformers.
3) Operating limits of transformers shall be derated in accordance with the
requirements of IEC 60076.
i. Derating of Distribution Equipment – Switchgear and Switchboards
1) Switchgear and switchboards shall be derated for the environmental conditions
where they are installed.
2) Where distribution equipment serves non-linear, high-harmonic loads, the
equipment shall be derated to account for excessive heat associated with the
increase in harmonic currents.
(a) Loads with these non-linear, harmonic-rich currents include electronic
lighting ballasts, computers, adjustable frequency drives, and other
switch mode power supplies.
(b) These types of loads are common for commercial and small industrial
facilities and the design of the electrical systems for these facilities shall
consider the adverse effects on the electrical transformers.
j. Equipment Labeling Requirements
1) Equipment nameplates shall be provided to indicate the capacity rating of the
equipment for the ambient temperature to which the equipment is designed.
2) Power Calculations and Analyses
k. The responsible A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare calculations as required to
support the selection and sizing of the electrical equipment and components for
each facility. Power calculations shall justify the size of cables, raceways,
equipment bus, transformers, overcurrent protective devices, generator(s), etc.
1) Calculations shall be prepared in accordance with the latest SEC and IEC
Standards.
2) Calculations shall be prepared for all new construction and renovation projects.
3) Submit all calculations to the Royal Commission for approval.
4) Submit calculations required by the utility company, SEC, to obtain the
necessary approvals for service and equipment sizing.
l. Voltage Drop Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which confirm compliance with the voltage drop limitations
identified in the latest SBC 401 52-5, SEC Standards DPS-02 and DPS-09.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 19
m. Power Factor Assessment and Calculations

1) Prepare a power factor assessment summary which identifies the loads served
and anticipated power factor for the facility. The results of this assessment shall
be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to provide a recommendation on
whether power factor correction shall be provided for the facility. The
assessment shall be submitted to the Royal Commission to obtain confirmation
of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation.
2) For facilities where power factor correction is anticipated to be below 0.9
lagging, The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit calculations
which identify the magnitude and approach for this equipment. Refer to SBC
401, Chapter 801.
n. Fault Level Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which identify the available fault levels throughout the
electrical system for a facility. The results of the calculations shall be used to
identify the required equipment ratings on the drawings and equipment
specifications.
2) The requirement for provision of an independent study is recommended to be
provided for each facility to ensure compliance with the original design, identify
the required ratings for the provided equipment, and provide a level of quality
assurance for the electrical installation. Include the requirement for this
independent study in the project specifications.
o. Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study
1) An overcurrent protective device coordination study shall be prepared to
demonstrate the proposed system performance for the specified overcurrent
protective devices. This study shall be utilized for comparison of the provided
electrical equipment to ensure that the intent of the original design is closely
replicated by the manufacturer of the provided equipment.
2) The requirement for provision of an independent study is recommended to be
provided for each facility to ensure compliance with the original design,
demonstrate appropriate coordination of the provided equipment, and provide a
level of quality assurance for the electrical installation. Include the requirement
for this independent study in the project specifications.
p. Harmonic Distortion Calculations
1) Prepare a harmonics assessment summary which identifies the potential
source and extent of non-linear, high harmonics loads for each facility. The
results of this assessment shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to
provide a recommendation on whether further harmonic calculations are
required. The assessment shall be submitted to the Royal Commission to
obtain confirmation of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation.
2) For facilities that are determined to have non-linear, high harmonic loads which
exceed 15%, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare and submit
calculations for reduction in cable capacities in accordance with the latest SBC
401, Annex D.52.
3) For facilities that are determined to have non-linear, high harmonic loads which
exceed 33%, prepare and submit calculations which identify the anticipated
voltage and current total harmonic distortion (THD) at the various electrical
equipment throughout the facility. The results of these calculations shall be

Rev. 0 5.5 - 20
utilized by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to develop a strategy for application
of active and/or passive components to mitigate harmonic distortion.
q. Load Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which identify the connected and demand electrical loads
for each facility. The calculations shall identify the electrical loads by type and
size and shall identify all diversity factors applied in accordance with the latest
SEC Standard DPS-01.
2) Calculations shall be prepared for each piece of electrical distribution
equipment and also summarized for the service entry.
r. Backup Power Assessment Analysis
1) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare an assessment of the
requirement for provision of backup power for each facility. The assessment
shall identify the occupancy for the facility and establish the critical functions
which may warrant the provision of backup power. The assessment shall
summarize the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation for application of
backup power which will be reviewed by the Royal Commission.
s. Generator Calculations
1) Generator Sizing
(a) Prepare calculations which justify the selection of generator, or paralleled
generators to supply the backup electrical loads for each facility.
(b) The calculations shall be prepared to determine the capacity required
and to demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment to accept all of the
load types that are supplied.
(c) The calculations shall account for the specific load types and adverse
effects that may result for motors, non-linear loads, uninterruptable
power supplies, etc.
(d) The calculations shall identify load type, magnitude, step loading utilized,
etc. to justify the equipment selection and establish the loading sequence
to be applied for loads controlled by other disciplines.
(e) Calculations shall be performed with the generator manufacturer’s
software and shall include the following:
(1) Generator sizing with running kW, starting kW, running kVA, starting
kVA, voltage dip, and frequency dip for each load starting step.
2) Sound Performance
(a) Prepare calculations to identify the anticipated sound levels for the
backup generator installation. The calculations shall be used to
demonstrate compliance with IEC Standard 60034, all local ordinances,
and the sound performance requirements identified herein this
document. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E.2.b.5.b Noise.
t. Transfer Switch Application
1) Prepare transfer switch application recommendations for Royal Commission
approval. Refer to Table 5.5.1.D Transfer Switch Application
Recommendation.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 21
u. Battery System Calculations

1) Prepare calculations which justify the sizing of the battery system to supply the
backup electrical loads for each facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
also submit recommendations for modifications to the backup duration which is
different than the minimum identified in this document. Refer to Subsection
5.5.1.E.2.c.3).
2) The calculations shall be prepared to determine the capacity required and to
demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment to accept all of the load types that
are supplied for the desired duration.
3) The calculations shall identify load type, magnitude, step loading utilized, etc.
to justify the equipment selection and establish the loading sequence to be
applied for loads controlled by other disciplines.
v. Uninterruptible Power Supply Calculations
1) Prepare calculations which justify the selection of the UPS to supply the
backup electrical loads for each facility.
2) The calculations shall be prepared to determine the capacity required and to
demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment to accept all of the load types that
are supplied for the desired duration.
3) The calculations shall identify load type, magnitude, step loading utilized, etc.
to justify the equipment selection and establish the loading sequence to be
applied for loads controlled by other disciplines.
4) Prepare calculations which justify the sizing of the battery system to support
UPS loads for each facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also submit
recommendations for modifications to the backup duration which is different
than the minimum identified in this document. Refer to Subsection
5.5.1.E.2.d.4)(a).
w. Lightning Protection Calculations
1) Prepare a lightning risk assessment in accordance with the latest SBC 401
Chapter 802 to demonstrate the potential exposure for each facility. The
results of these calculations shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to
provide a recommendation on whether a lightning protection system is
required. The assessment shall be submitted to the Royal Commission to
obtain confirmation of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation.
x. Electrostatic Discharge Assessment
1) For facilities where electrical installations are classified as hazardous in
accordance with the latest SBC 401, Chapter 720, prepare an assessment
regarding the potential risks associated for electrostatic discharge for each
facility in accordance with IEC Standard 61340. The results of this assessment
shall be used by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor to provide a recommendation
on whether an electrostatic discharge control system is required. The
assessment shall be submitted to the Royal Commission to obtain confirmation
of the A/E and/or EPC Contractor’s recommendation.
2) Hazardous Area Classification;
3) For classified area refer to IEC 60079

Rev. 0 5.5 - 22
D. Electrical Rooms
• General
b. Electrical Rooms shall be adequately sized to accommodate all electrical equipment
and also provide all appropriate clearances for access and maintenance in
accordance with IEC 60364 for low voltage electrical installations and in accordance
with the following Table 5.5.1.B for Working Clearances around exposed live part of
electrical equipment.
TABLE 5.5.1.B: WORKING CLEARANCES
600 V and 601 V to 9.0 kV to

Working Condition
below 9.0 kV 25.0 kV
Exposed live parts on one side of the

working space and no live or grounded
parts on the other side of the working
900 mm 1200 mm 1500 mm
space, or exposed live parts on both
sides effectively guarded by wood or
other insulating materials.
Exposed live parts on one side of the
working space and grounded parts on
the other side of the working space. 1100 mm 1500 mm 1800 mm
Concrete, brick, or tile walls shall be
considered grounded.
Exposed live parts on both sides of the

working space (not guarded as
1200 mm 1800 mm 2800 mm
provided in the first working condition)
with operator between.
c. Electrical Rooms shall be provided with adequate illumination to facilitate

maintenance procedures. The lighting for these rooms shall include at least one
fixture supplied from the backup power source to facilitate trouble shooting during
power interruptions. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.M Lighting for additional information
regarding illumination for Electrical Rooms.
d. Normal and backup power equipment shall be located in separate Electrical Rooms
for the main service equipment. This will prevent the catastrophic failure of one
system from damaging the alternate power source.
1) Exception: Where the transfer function between power sources utilizes
devices which are mounted integral in the normal equipment.
e. Refer to Subsection 5.3. Architectural for additional guidance on the design of
Electrical Rooms.
f. Refer to Section 5.4 Mechanical for additional guidance on heating, ventilation and
air conditioning provisions for Electrical Rooms.
g. Refer to Section 5.4.1 Fire Suppression for additional guidance on fire protection for
Electrical Rooms.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 23
2. Main Electrical Rooms

a. The Main Electrical Room shall be located at the service entrance and shall house
the normal electric service equipment including but not limited to the following:
1) Main switchgear
2) Main distribution boards
3) Sub main distribution boards
4) Distribution boards
5) Switchboards
6) Motor control centers
7) Lighting control relay panels
8) Individually mounted enclosed circuit breakers
9) Individually mounted disconnect switches
10) Individually mounted motor controllers
11) Power factor correction equipment
12) Harmonics mitigation equipment
13) Surge protective devices
14) Electrical metering equipment
15) Spare fuse cabinet
16) Grounding bus bar
b. Service transformers are typically located outside of the building however, a
situation may arise that warrants installation inside of the building to address
aesthetic or security concerns. In this situation, the service transformer shall be
located in a separate dedicated room constructed with adequate fire rating,
ventilation, access and working clearances for the installed equipment. For indoor
installations, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consult with the SEC to determine
the specific requirements for the service installation.
1) Refer to Table 5.5.1.B Working Clearances.
c. Where the building is supported by a backup power source, the electrical equipment
associated with the backup power source shall be housed in an Electrical Room
separated from the normal electrical equipment.
1) Exception: Where the transfer function between power sources utilizes
devices which are mounted integral in the normal equipment.
2) Distribution Electrical Rooms
d. Distribution Electrical Rooms shall be provided throughout the facility as necessary
to accommodate the distribution electrical equipment including but not limited to the
following:
1) Sub main distribution boards
2) Distribution boards
3) Lighting control relay panels

Rev. 0 5.5 - 24
4) Individually mounted enclosed circuit breakers

5) Individually mounted disconnect switches or isolators
6) Individually mounted motor controllers
7) Harmonics mitigation equipment
8) Surge protective devices
9) Electrical metering equipment
10) Grounding bus bar
E. Backup Power Systems
(a) General
b. Emergency and standby power systems shall comply strictly with the following
directives issued in the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
1) Council of Ministers Decision No. 27 of 20 December 1980.
2) Ministry of Interior Decision No. 2847/401 of 14 June 1981.
3) Minister of Industry and Electricity Ministerial Decision No. 924 of 6 July 1981.
c. The power distribution system provides for parallel feeders from two different source
substations to most of the institutional, commercial and industrial facilities. In case
of failure of power on one feeder, the facility can be switched to the other feeder.
This dual feeder arrangement provides an inherent service redundancy; however the
provision of a backup power system shall be carefully evaluated and provided where
necessary.
d. The requirement for a backup power supply will depend on the facility type and
particular application. The provision of backup power for each facility requires
careful determination during the early stages of the design. A list of loads proposed
to be supplied from the backup power source shall be provided to the Royal
Commission to obtain confirmation prior to proceeding with the design. Table
5.5.1.C Backup Power Matrix has been developed to assist the consultant with the
determination of the backup power loads for each facility.
e. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the backup power source
configuration to determine the best approach for the facility.
1) Where the facility is a single building, the source configuration would be a
single location with one or more backup power source devices as required to
satisfy the loads.
2) Where the development is multiple buildings, the following backup power
source configurations shall be considered:
(a) Distributed Backup Power Source: A separate backup power source
dedicated for each building and distributed throughout the development.
(b) Regional Backup Power Plants: Multiple regional plants with one or more
backup power sources to supply a district of the development. An
underground feeder network would be used to distribute the backup
power to the various buildings in each region of the development. This
approach shall consider the various distribution voltage opportunities to
optimize the feeder network. Medium voltage backup power sources

Rev. 0 5.5 - 25
may be suitable but will require careful consideration and may

necessitate the provision of transformers at each building.
(c) Central Backup Power Plant: One central plant with one or more backup
power sources to supply the buildings throughout the entire
development. An underground feeder network would be used to
distribute the backup power to the various buildings in the development.
This approach shall consider the various distribution voltage
opportunities to optimize the feeder network. Medium voltage backup
power sources may be suitable but will require careful consideration and
may necessitate the provision of transformers at each building.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 26
TABLE 5.5.1.C: BACKUP POWER MATRIX MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

Facility Types
Commercial Schools University Civic Public Safety Health Safety Infrastructure Religious
Load Description
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
OS
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
LS
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
U
N
Fire Alarm        
Egress Lighting & Exit Signs        
Elevators (< 5 Stories)        
Elevator (5 Stories or more)        
Security Systems                
Hazardous Gas Monitoring    NA    NA
HVAC
Controls        
Smoke Control        
Stair Pressurization        
Chiller        
Chilled Water Pumps        
Laboratory Exhaust NA   NA  NA NA
Fumehood Exhaust NA   NA  NA NA
Hazardous Exhaust NA   NA  NA NA
Supply Air       
Cooling Towers       
Electrical
Switchgear Controls        
Generator Accessories
Controls        
Battery Charger        
Motorized Louvers        
Fuel Supply        
Plumbing
Sump Pumps        
Water Purification       
RO Water System NA   NA NA NA NA NA
RO System Pumps NA   NA NA NA NA NA
Domestic Water Pumps        
Tepid Water Pumps NA   NA NA NA NA NA
Fire Supression
Fire Pump        
Jockey Pump        
Dry/Pre-Action Compressors        
Fire Suppression Controls        
IT Systems and Equipment

Data Center Servers & Drives        
Data Center Air Conditioning        
Data Center Fire Supression        
Essential Computers              
Non-essential Computers        
Network Switch        
Infrastructure
Traffic Signals NA NA NA NA NA NA  NA
Pumping Stations NA NA NA NA NA NA  NA
ABBREVIATIONS: FACILITY TYPE DESCRIPTIONS:

LS Life Safety Commercial Office Buildings, Retail Shops, Hotels, Restuarants, Athletic Clubs
CR Critical Schools Facilities for Pre-primary, Primary, Intermediate and Secondary Education
OS Optional Standby University College and University Buildings for Instruction, Research, Residency, and Support
Activities U Uninterruptible Power Supply Civic Theaters, Exhibition Halls, Museums, Libraries,
Municipality Offices
N Normal Public Safety Police Stations, Fire Stations
NA Not Applicable Health Safety Hospitals, Health Centers, Outpatient Facilities
Infrastructure Traffic Signaling, Pumping Stations, Sewage
Treatment Religious Mosques

Rev. 0 5.5 - 27
f. Additional Provisions
1) In all cases, each important sub-system in all facilities such as fire alarm,
telephone, public address, intercom, emergency and exit lights, and security
system shall be provided with an individual, integral, rechargeable battery pack
and charger.
2) All critical equipment such as computers and life support systems shall be fed
from a UPS system, which is generally integral with such equipment.
g. Backup power systems shall be configured with separate branches for the various
load types. Categories for load segregation shall include emergency and standby.
Refer to the descriptions for each of these categories in Subsections 5.5.1.E.3
Emergency Systems and 5.5.1.E.4. Standby Systems.
h. Sources
i. The following are the various types of backup power sources which are available.
They can be used individually or in combination as required by the facility.
1) Local Generators
2) Batteries
3) Uninterruptible Power Supply
j. Generators
1) Local generation is advisable where emergency power is required for power
and lighting loads.
(a) Generators shall be engine driven.
(b) Fuel source for engine driven units shall be diesel. The of the fuel
source needs to consider fuel availability, capacity and storage
requirements. Fuel source shall comply with the Royal Commission
Environmental Regulations.
(c) Generator circuit breaker shall be included in the generator set and shall
be suitable, specifically designed and tested for the application.
2) Generators are available in various ratings as follows:
(a) Standby Rated: Application is to supply emergency power for a limited
duration during a power outage. Standby generators shall be used for
applications where operation is roughly 200 hours per year and they are
not recommended for parallel operation with the utility source.
(b) Prime Rated: Application is to supply loads for an unlimited number of
hours per year in a variable load setting. It is not advisable to that the
variable load exceed 70% average of the prime power rating during any
operation period of 250 hours. If operating at 100% of prime power
rating, yearly hours should not exceed 500.
(c) Continuous Rated: Application to supply a constant 100% load for an
unlimited number of hours each year. Continuous power rated units are
most widely used in applications where the power grid is unreachable.
Such applications include mining, agriculture or military operations.
3) Generators for backup power to most facilities shall be standby rated unless
there is a specific critical need as determined by the A/E and/or EPC

Rev. 0 5.5 - 28
Contractor. The justification for use of prime or continuous rated generator(s)

shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
4) Generator voltage, frequency and phase relationship shall be the same as the
normal system. Size shall be adequate to carry the required emergency loads
of the facility. Where the backup power loads exceed the capacity of a single
generator, multiple units shall be operated in a parallel configuration.
Paralleled units may also be justified for extremely critical loads such as
hospitals or data centers. Automatic transfer shall be provided for all
emergency loads.
5) Backup generators with standby rating shall be sized to be loaded between
50% minimum and 80% maximum of their nameplate rating. Calculations shall
be performed to justify the equipment selection and performance. Refer to
Subsection 5.5.1.C.5.i Generator Sizing.
(a) Generator sizing shall include 10% spare capacity for load growth.
6) Installation Requirements
(a) Enclosure
(1) For outdoor installations, the enclosure shall be design to withstand
the environmental conditions and provide a minimum protection
rating of IP65. All openings for ventilation and access shall be
designed to maintain the weather-proof requirement.
(2) Weather-proof enclosures shall be walk-in type where space
permits. If adequate space is not available for the walk-in
enclosure, a skin tight enclosure with access doors is permitted with
the approval of the Royal Commission.
(b) Noise:
(1) The radiated engine noise shall be addressed as follows:
(i) Outdoor locations shall incorporate sound attenuation into the
enclosure. The level of attenuation shall limit the sound level at
the property line to meet the requirements of the Royal
Commission Environmental Regulations.
7) Refer to Chapter 5.2 Structural for additional information regarding installation
requirements for generators including:
(a) Structural
(b) Vibration
8) Refer to Chapter 5.3 Architectural for additional information regarding
installation requirements for generators including:
(a) Indoor space
(b) Acoustical considerations
9) Refer to Chapter 5.4 Mechanical for additional information regarding
installation requirements for generators including:
(a) Ventilation
(b) Fuel supply

Rev. 0 5.5 - 29
(c) Engine exhaust

k. Batteries
1) Where the load requirements are not large enough to require local generators,
centrally located batteries may be provided as the backup power source.
Sealed lead acid, nickel-lead-alkaline or nickel cadmium types may be used.
Ampere-hour capacity shall be adequate for power requirements. Battery
charging equipment shall be included.
2) The initial battery system shall be sized to provide 20% spare capacity to
accommodate additional loads in the future.
3) Battery storage shall be sufficient to supply the loads (connected and initial
spare capacity) for a minimum duration 1.5 hours . Longer backup durations
may be desirable or recommended by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for
unique conditions. These special considerations shall be presented to the
Royal Commission for review and approval.
4) Batteries shall be located in well ventilated rooms, and mounted on racks to
facilitate regular maintenance.
l. Uninterruptible Power Supply
1) UPS systems shall be battery - static inverter type, packaged pre-engineered
units. kVA and time rating shall be adequate for the application.
2) UPS systems are costly and shall only be applied for critical loads which
cannot tolerate even extremely short power interruptions including but not
limited to the following:
(a) Hospital life support systems
(b) Critical data centers
(c) Critical computer systems
(d) Critical security systems
(e) Critical building control systems
(f) Critical communications systems
3) The initial UPS system shall be sized to provide 20% spare capacity to
accommodate additional loads in the future.
4) Battery Storage
(a) The battery storage for the UPS shall be sized to provide the appropriate
backup duration for the application. Battery storage shall be sufficient to
supply the loads (connected and initial spare capacity). The minimum
duration for a stand-alone UPS system shall be 1.5 hours for the full
capacity of the UPS. Longer backup durations may be desirable or
recommended by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for unique conditions.
These special considerations shall be presented to the Royal
Commission for review and approval.
(b) The UPS may also be supported by a backup generator as another level
of redundancy. When this configuration is implemented, the battery
storage associated with the UPS system shall be sized to provide the
appropriate duration of backup. Typically this would include a reduced
duration to allow these critical loads to remain operational while the

Rev. 0 5.5 - 30
generator is activated and is ramping up to accept the loads. For this

situation, a minimum battery backup of 15 minutes for the full capacity of
the UPS shall be provided to bridge the outages between the normal and
emergency power sources. Longer backup durations may be desirable
or recommended by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor for unique
conditions. These special considerations shall be presented to the Royal
5) UPS units are available with modular construction and hot swappable modules.
This configuration is beneficial to facilitate system expansion and also allows
maintenance to be performed without interruption to the critical loads. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall evaluate the use of these equipment features and
provide recommendations to the Royal Commission for approval prior to
developing the specifications for this equipment.
6) UPS systems shall be installed in clean dry locations away from occupied
areas.
7) UPS systems shall be located in well ventilated rooms, and mounted in
cabinets to protect the equipment.
8) There are additional special occupancies associated with telecommunication
systems that warrant the application of a dedicated UPS. These special
conditions and the associated requirements are described further in Paragraph
5.5.2.E.2. Power Distribution, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).
2. Emergency Systems
a. Electrical systems legally required to be installed and that supply loads essential to
safety and life. This load category is typically referred to as the Life Safety Branch
and supplies the following loads:
1) Egress lighting and exit signs
2) Fire alarm
3) Security systems
4) Generator accessories: controls, fuel supply, and motorized dampers
5) Fire pumps
6) Dry/Pre-action fire protection system compressors
7) Fire suppression controls
8) Smoke control systems
9) Stair pressurization systems
10) Elevators (Highrise Buildings)
11) Generator battery charger
12) Hospital communication systems
13) Sewage disposal
14) Dangerous industrial processes
b. Refer to Table 5.5.1.C Backup Power Matrix for guidance on emergency power
requirements for each building type.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 31
3. Standby Systems
a. Alternate power systems for such applications where interruption of normal power
would cause discomfort to personnel or damage to product. This load category is
typically broken into Critical Equipment and Optional Standby. The loads associated
with each of these branches are described as follows:
1) Critical Equipment
(a) Task Illumination and selected receptacles for the following areas and
functions related to patient care in healthcare facilities:
(1) Critical Care
(2) Patient Care
(3) Infant Nurseries
(4) Medication Prep
(5) Pharmacy Dispensing
(6) Selected Acute Nursing Areas
(7) Psychiatric Bed Areas
(8) Ward Treatment Rooms
(9) Nurses Stations
(b) Hospital communications systems including nurse call and telephones.
(c) Security systems.
2) Optional Standby
(a) Building management and control systems
(b) Security systems
(c) Data Center air conditioning systems
(d) Laboratory exhaust air systems
(e) Laboratory supply air systems
(f) Chilled water generation – chillers, cooling towers, and pumps
(g) Water purification systems
(h) Domestic water pumping system
(i) Essential computers
(j) Elevators (other than Highrise Buildings)
(k) Supply, return and exhaust systems for healthcare facilities including:
(1) Operating Rooms
(2) Delivery Rooms
(3) Airborne Infectious/Isolation Rooms
(4) Protective Environment Rooms
(5) Clinical Laboratories

Rev. 0 5.5 - 32
(6) Nuclear Medicine Areas

b. Refer to Table 5.5.1.C Backup Power Matrix for guidance on emergency power
requirements for each building type.
F. Transfer Switches
• General
b. A transfer switch is an electrical switch that is able to transfer electrical loads
between two sources. There are several types and numerous features for this
equipment that shall be considered when selecting the appropriate equipment for
each application.
c. Types
d. Manual transfer switches allow electrical loads to be supplied from multiple sources
and facilitates manual transfer from one source to another when there is a failure of
one source or there is some other special situation to initiate this transfer. Examples
for special situations include load balancing between service feeders or in response
to a request from the utility company to avoid an overload condition. Manual transfer
switches are not used for life safety or critical backup power loads but may be
applied to optional standby loads.
e. Automatic transfer switches allow electrical loads to be supplied from multiple
sources and facilitates automatic transfer from the primary to the secondary source
when the primary source fails. The automatic transfer also occurs from the
secondary to the primary source when the primary source returns to normal.
Automatic transfer switches are commonly used for all backup power loads including
life safety, critical and optional standby.
f. Bypass isolation automatic transfer switches allow electrical loads to be supplied
from multiple sources and, in addition to the automatic transfer capability, provides a
means to manually bypass and isolate the transfer switch to allow for maintenance
procedures. The bypass isolation switch is connected both in series and in parallel
with the automatic transfer switch to facilitate this operation. Bypass isolation
transfer switches are used for all backup power loads where the criticality of the load
warrants this additional feature to allow for routine maintenance without interruption
to the equipment operation. This equipment is most commonly utilized for health
safety type facilities such as hospitals but can also be applied to other facilities
where the occupancy or function is determined to be critical.
g. Operation
h. Single operator transfer switches utilize a single electrical component to initiate the
transfer from one source to the other. This method of operation does not provide the
capability to incorporate any delays in the transfer process and is appropriate for the
most critical loads which need to transfer as quickly as possible.
i. Dual operator transfer switches utilize two electrical components to initiate the
transfer between power sources. The first initiates the break from the connected
source and the second initiates the connection to the alternate source. The dual
operator provides flexibility for programming delays that may be desirable for certain
types of loads to avoid detrimental impacts to the power distribution system.
j. Open transition transfer includes a break-before-make operation where there is a
delay between separation from one source and connection to the next. This is the
typical operation and shall be the normal selection for all facilities.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 33
k. Closed transition transfer includes a make-before-break operation where the two

sources are momentarily paralleled to avoid outages to the critical loads. Use of this
operation method requires careful consideration and shall only be selected when it
has been justified for the critical application. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
provide documentation to support the selection of this operating means to the Royal
Commission for review and approval. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall also
coordinate with the SEC to establish the acceptability of closed transition transfer
and the protective safety features required for implementation of this operation.
l. Configuration
m. Four (4) pole transfer switches include separate poles for all three phases and the
neutral. This transfer switch provides isolation of source neutrals and is the
preferred configuration. Four (4) pole transfer switches shall be the normal selection
for all facilities. This approach requires special attention to the grounding of the
backup power source. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E.2 Backup Power Source.
n. Three (3) pole transfer switches include separate poles for all three phases but the
neutral is solid and does not have the capability to be isolated between the normal
and emergency power sources. Applications for this configuration shall be limited to
existing facilities where the existing transfer switches are 3 pole type and their use
will maintain the electrical system consistency and avoid confusion for maintenance
procedures. The selection of this configuration shall be reviewed with the Royal
Commission to obtain approval. Refer to the transfer switch application
recommendation process described in Subsection 5.5.1.F.5 Applications and Table
5.5.1.D Transfer Switch Application Recommendation.
2. Applications
a. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider all of the backup power applications
for a facility and shall provide the Royal Commission with recommendations for the
transfer switch application utilizing the following Table 5.5.1.D. Typical
recommendations for transfer switch applications are provided as follows:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 34
TABLE 5.5.1.D: TRANSFER SWITCH APPLICATION RECOMMENDATION

Config-
Type Operation Optional Features
uration
Transfer
Switch Branch
Transitio
Transitio
Operato
Operato
No.
Closed
Single
3 Pole
4 Pole
Open
BITS
Dual
MTS
ATS
D
n
n
r
r
1 Life Safety      
Critical
2     
Equipment
Optional
3      
Standby
ABBREVIATIONS: OPTIONAL FEATURES:

MTS Manual Transfer A Engine-Generator Exerciser
Switch
ATS Automatic Transfer Switch B Digital Metering
BITS Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch C Programmed Neutral Switch Position
D In-Phase Monitor
G. Electrical Distribution Equipment

1. Medium Voltage Switchgear
a. General
1) All medium voltage switchgear and cables shall be designed in accordance
with the latest SEC Specifications SDMS.
2) This includes the following medium voltage electrical equipment:
(a) Ring Main Units (RMU)
(b) Interrupter Switches
(c) Oil-filled switches
(d) Manual Transfer Switches
(e) Automatic Transfer Switches
(f) Metal Clad Distribution Switchgear
(g) Relays, Instruments and Meters
2. Low Voltage Switchgear and Switchboards
a. General
1) All low voltage switchgear and controlgear shall be designed in accordance
with the IEC 60439 and IEC 60947.
2) Low voltage switchgear and switchboards are utilized for distribution of power
to the panelboards and electrical loads throughout a facility. This equipment is

Rev. 0 5.5 - 35
critical to the operation of the facility and shall be carefully designed to best
meet the operational requirements and budget limitations for the facility.
3) Switchgear construction offers the following characteristics:
(a) Lower maintenance costs
(b) Higher interrupting ratings
(c) Enhanced coordination capabilities and operational safety
(d) Higher quality and reliability
4) Switchboard construction offers the following characteristics:
(a) Lower equipment costs
(b) More compact dimensions
b. Construction
1) Switchgear
(a) Self-supporting, free-standing equipment with metal enclosure to
accommodate the overcurrent protective devices, metering equipment,
surge suppression devices and other auxiliary components.
(b) Modular construction with individual compartments for each overcurrent
protective device.
(c) Forms of internal separation between components within the Low
Voltage Switchgear shall conform to IEC 60439-1 7.7. This provides
higher degree of protection based on the requirement.
(d) Integral steel channel base for increased rigidity.
(e) Overcurrent protective devices are draw-out type to facilitate
maintenance of the devices.
2) Switchboards
(a) Self-supporting, free-standing equipment with metal enclosure to
accommodate the overcurrent protective devices, metering equipment,
surge suppression devices and other auxiliary components.
(b) Separate cubicles for main circuit breaker and distribution feeder circuit
breakers.
3) Fault current ratings for equipment shall be in accordance with the results of
the fault calculations. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.C.5.e Fault Level Calculations.
Equipment ratings shall be selected for the next standard level above the
calculated levels.
c. Application
1) The type of distribution equipment shall be selected to satisfy the requirements
of the facility and the application. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall make
recommendations regarding the appropriate equipment type based on
consideration for the following criteria:
(a) Magnitude of the loads served
(b) Type of facility

Rev. 0 5.5 - 36
(c) Budget limitations

(d) Maintenance capabilities and procedures
(e) Economic impact of interruptions
(f) Space availability
2) Table 5.5.1.E Switchgear Vs. Switchboard Application Guide has been
developed to assist the A/E and/or EPC Contractor with the determination of
3) the selection for distribution equipment for each facility type.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 37

Rev. 0 5.5 - 38
TABLE 5.5.1.E: SWITCHGEAR VS. SWITCHBOARD APPLICATION GUIDE

Main Circuit Feeder Circuit
Construction Access
Breakers Breakers
Equipment
Individual Fixed
Individual Fixed
Group Mounted
Front and Rear
Facility Type Rating
Switchboard
(Amps)
Switchgear
Front Only
Drawout
Drawout
≤ 2000    
Commercial > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
Schools > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
University > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
Civic > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000   
Public Safety > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
Health Safety > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
Infrastructure > 2000    
≥ 4000    
≤ 2000    
Religious > 2000    
≥ 4000    
FACILITY TYPE DESCRIPTIONS:
Commercial Office Buildings, Retail Shops, Hotels, Restaurants, Athletic Clubs
Schools Facilities for Pre-primary, Primary, Intermediate and Secondary Education
University College and University Buildings for Instruction, Research, Residency, and Support
Activities
Civic Theaters, Exhibition Halls, Museums, Libraries, Municipality
Offices
Public Safety Police Stations, Fire Stations
Health Safety Hospitals, Health Centers, Outpatient Facilities
Infrastructure Traffic Signaling, Pumping Stations, Sewage Treatment
Religious Mosques

Rev. 0 5.5 - 39
3. Panelboards
a. General
1) Electric systems in commercial and industrial buildings shall include
panelboards, which utilize circuit breaker devices. Fused devices are not
recommended unless specifically required for specific protection requirements
or coordination purposes. An example is fuses may be used for control circuits
of instrument or monitoring devices.
2) Panelboards are generally classified into the following categories:
(a) Main distribution boards
(b) Sub main distribution boards
(c) Distribution boards
b. Features
1) Panelboards and associated circuit breakers shall be fully rated for available
fault current. Series rating of the equipment is not acceptable.
2) Panelboards shall be rated to accept the calculated loads and shall include
20% spare capacity for future growth.
3) Panelboards shall be provided with 20% bussed space suitable to accept
future circuit breakers.
4) Panelboards shall be provided with 10% spare circuit breakers. Provide at
least (1) spare breaker with rating to match the other active breakers in the
panelboard.
5) Panelboards shall include door-in-door construction with hinged door to
facilitate access to the breakers and wireways.
6) Fault current ratings for panelboards shall be in accordance with the results of
the fault calculations. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.C.5.e Fault Level Calculations.
Panelboard ratings shall be selected for the next standard level above the
calculated levels. Minimum ratings shall be as follows:
(a) Bracing – 20 kA
(b) Overcurrent Protective Devices – 14 kA
c. Selection of Installation
1) Surface mounted panelboards shall be used in electrical rooms and other
spaces where the surface mounted enclosure is not aesthetically objectionable.
2) Recessed mounted panelboards shall be utilized where installed in finished
spaces and where surface mounting is undesirable.
3) Low Voltage Circuit Breakers
d. General
1) Low voltage circuit breakers used in the Royal Commission installations are
used at the voltage levels below 600 V. These circuit breakers generally fall
under 3 classifications.
(a) Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)
(b) Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 40
(c) Air Circuit Breaker (ACB)

2) Circuit breakers shall be a quick-make and quick-break switching device, which
will operate both manually for normal switching functions and automatically
under overload and short-circuit conditions.
3) Circuit breakers shall be electrically and mechanically trip free. The RMS
symmetrical interrupting capacity for each breaker shall be adequate for the
available fault but shall have a minimum rating of 14 kA for 400 V systems.
Circuit breakers shall be either de-rated or calibrated if installed in an ambient
temperature higher than 40°C.
(a) When ambient temperature is within allowable limits, the circuit breakers
shall have electronic trip with long and short time uniform tripping
characteristics throughout the temperature range from 25 to 50°C.
(b) Circuit breakers located in environments where the temperature varies,
while the load is in constant, such as submersible pumps, shall be
ambient temperature compensated to 50°C.
(c) Refer to Paragraph 5.5.1.C.4 Equipment Derating.
4) Circuit breaker selection and application shall be in accordance with the
following:
(a) Residential facilities – IEC Standard 60898.
(b) Commercial, education, public safety, health safety, religious and
industrial facilities – IEC Standard 60947.
(c) Circuit breaker trip ratings shall be industry standard in accordance with
the IEC Standards. The standard ampere rating for circuit breakers shall
be considered are1.6, 2, 2.5, 3.2, 4, 5, 6.3, 8, 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 32,
40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 225, 25, 320, 400, 500, 630, 800,
1000, 1250, 1600
e. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
1) Miniature circuit breakers are preferred for residential, commercial, institutional,
and industrial branch circuit loads feeding lighting loads, small receptacle loads
etc.
f. Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
1) Molded case circuit breakers are preferred to fuses and shall be used in
distribution panelboards for distribution of power to various loads such as
lighting panelboards, power panelboards, motor loads, etc.
g. Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)
1) For low voltage switchgear with higher ratings (greater than 1000 amps),
drawout type air circuit breakers are preferred over molded case circuit
breakers.
2) Air circuit breakers shall be provided with microprocessor based trip units to
facilitate the adjustment of the tripping characteristics to best suit the
application. These trip units vary in sophistication, communications and
metering capabilities including the following:
(a) Adjustable protection and coordination
(b) System diagnostics

Rev. 0 5.5 - 41
(c) System monitoring

(d) System communications
(e) Optional features for enhanced maintenance
3) The type of microprocessor trip unit used for each application shall be
determined by the A/E and/or EPC Contractor and recommendations shall be
submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
4) Fuses
h. General
1) Low voltage fuses used in the Royal Commission installations are used at the
voltage levels below 600 V. Fuses are generally available with the following
operating characteristics:
(a) Fast-acting which open quickly when their current rating is exceeded.
These fuses are generally used for resistive or other type loads with low
inrush currents.
(b) Time-delay which are designed to open only on an excessive current
draw for a defined of time. These fuses are typically used for protection
of inductive and capacitive loads that experience heavy inrush currents.
2) The use of fuses for overcurrent protection shall be on a limited basis
determined by the specific application. The Royal Commission prefers the use
of circuit breakers for overcurrent protection but understands that there may be
applications which warrant the use of fuses. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall submit recommendations for fuse applications to the RCJ for review and
approval.
3) Fuse selection and application shall be in accordance with the following:
(a) All facility types – IEC Standard 60269.
(b) Fuse ratings shall be industry standard in accordance with the IEC
Standards.
(c) Motors
i. General
1) Motors requirements are addressed in Section 5.4 Mechanical. Refer to
Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.f Motors and Motor Controllers.
2) Motor Controllers
j. General
1) Motors controller requirements are addressed in Section 5.4 Mechanical.
Refer to Subsection 5.4.3.C.4.e Motors and Motor Controllers.
k. Motor Control Centers
1) Where multiple motors are located in the same space or area, it is preferred to
control them from a centralized location such as a motor control center.
2) A motor control center is an assembly of individual starters for various motors
mounted on a fixed or draw-out type of chassis and located in a common
enclosure. Motor control centers shall be modular construction with a separate
compartment for each starter. Common wireways shall be provided in each

Rev. 0 5.5 - 42
cubicle of the motor control center and shall be utilized for low voltage control
wiring.
4. Wiring Devices
a. The wiring devices for facilities throughout Jubail Industrial City shall be provided
with the ratings and configurations associated with the standard 400/230 volt, 60 Hz
electrical system.
b. All wiring devices shall be selected to meet the requirements of the latest applicable
SASO 444 standard. These standards shall guide the A/E and/or EPC Contractor in
the selection of wiring devices for the following:
1) Plugs and socket-outlets for domestic and similar general use
2) Plugs and socket-outlets for commercial and similar purposes
3) Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes
4) Switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations
c. The selection of wiring devices and installation methods shall be coordinated with
the raceway system to facilitate a physically and aesthetically acceptable result.
d. Power Monitoring
e. Power Monitoring System shall be provided as required by the RCJ.
f. Power Monitoring Equipment shall be provided to the following as minimum;
1) MV and LV Switchboard main and the distribution circuit breakers.
2) Secondary low voltage circuit breaker of unit/packaged substation.
3) Automatic Transfer Switches.
4) Generator Paralleling Switchboards.
5) Major distribution panel boards as maybe required by RCJ.
g. Power Monitoring functions shall include but not limited to the following;
1) Voltage
2) Current
3) KWh
4) kW, kVA and kVAR.
5) Power Factor
6) Total Harmonic Distortion (Voltage and Current)
H. Transformers
• General
b. All service transformers and associated medium voltage switchgear for all
residential, commercial, institutional, and industrial facilities shall be in accordance
with the latest SEC Specification SDMS.
c. All features for the service transformers and associated equipment shall be in
accordance with the latest SEC Specifications SDMS.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 43
d. Sizing of all transformers shall be in accordance with the latest SEC Standards DPS-
01 and DPS-02.
e. Configuration and arrangements for transformers and associated equipment shall be
in accordance with the latest SEC Standard SDCS-02.
f. Transformer application restrictions:
1) Liquid filled transformers shall not use polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) fluid.
2) Oil filled transformers shall not be utilized for indoor applications to the extent
possible.
3) Installation of oil filled transformers for indoor application shall meet NFPA fire
protection installation and vault requirement.
4) Dry type transformers shall only be used when approval has been obtained
from the Royal Commission and they shall not be installed outdoors.
g. Transformer Noise Levels
1) Service transformer noise levels shall be in accordance with the latest SEC
Specifications SDMS.
2) Community Area Transformer
h. Community area includes residential, commercial, and institutional facilities.
i. The standard service transformer for facilities in the Community Area shall be
outdoor type, liquid filled, self-cooled, dead front, and pad mounted.
j. Exceptional cases may allow the use of indoor transformers. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall provide recommendations regarding the indoor transformer (liquid
filled or dry type) and justification for this application to the RCJ for approval. Indoor
installations will require special provisions for fire separation, noise control, and
ventilation. Refer to Section 5.3 Architectural and 5.4 Mechanical for additional
information regarding special provisions for indoor installations.
k. Installation Requirements
1) All terminations shall be in accordance with the latest SEC Specifications
SDMS.
2) All transformers and associated equipment shall be installed on a concrete pad
3) Industrial Area Transformer
l. The standard service transformer for facilities in the Industrial Area shall be outdoor
type, liquid filled, self-cooled, dead front, and pad mounted.
m. Exceptional cases may allow the use of indoor transformers. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall provide recommendations regarding the indoor transformer (liquid
filled, dry type, or cast coil) and justification for this application to the RCJ for
approval. Indoor installations will require special provisions for fire separation, noise
control, and ventilation. Refer to Section 5.3 Architectural and 5.4 Mechanical for
additional information regarding special provisions for indoor installations.
n. Installation Requirements
1) All terminations shall be in accordance with the latest SEC Specifications
SDMS.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 44
2) All transformers and associated equipment shall be installed on a concrete pad

3) The secondary winding of all industrial transformers shall be grounded wye
connection.
4) Transformers for Existing Facilities with Discontinued Voltages
o. The Royal Decree for transition to the new standard voltages for all RC facilities has
eliminated various voltage ratings. There are existing facilities which will not be
required to transition to the new standard voltage ratings until economically justified.
p. For work in existing facilities, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop
modification concepts and make recommendations regarding the economic
justification for converting from the discontinued voltages to the new standard
voltage. This justification shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review
and approval.
q. When determined that the discontinued voltages are to remain, transformers shall
be used to establish the required voltages for existing equipment and loads. These
transformers shall have the following characteristics:
1) Indoor
2) Dry type
3) Enclosed ventilated
4) Encapsulated type is acceptable in controlled environments for ratings 112.5
kVA or less
5) Cast coil type for industrial polluted areas
6) References
1) Refer to Chapter 5.2 Structural for additional information regarding foundation
requirements for transformers.
I. Conduits, Ducts and Busways
1. General
a. This Section addresses the application requirements for electrical raceways, ducts
and busways for Royal Commission facilities.
b. An electrical raceway is any channel of metallic or non-metallic materials designed
expressly for holding wires, cables or busbars.
c. Electrical raceways and shall be applied in accordance with the latest edition of SBC
401, IEC 61386, and IEC 60529.
d. Selection of Raceway Type
e. The type of raceway shall be selected to suit the location and method of installation
which are grouped in the following basic classifications:
1) Surface mounted installations include:
(a) Raceways concealed in plenums and hollow spaces for residential,
commercial and institutional type facilities.
(b) Raceways exposed in utility type spaces for residential, commercial and
institutional type facilities.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 45
(c) Raceways exposed in industrial type facilities.

2) Embedded installations include raceways in floor slabs or walls.
3) Underground installations include raceways located below the floor slabs inside
a building and raceways located below grade outside of the building.
f. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the following when selecting the
appropriate electrical raceway for each RCJ facility:
1) Protection of personnel against electrical injury.
2) Protection of property from damage resulting from a fire.
3) Protection of circuitry against mechanical damage or injury.
4) Atmospheric conditions such as corrosive or hazardous environment.
2. Raceway Types
a. The electrical raceway types that are typically used for installation and protection of
electrical wiring include the following:
1) Rigid Steel Conduits (RSC)
(a) Rigid steel conduit shall conform to IEC 61386 and IEC 60981 for extra
heavy duty electrical rigid steel conduits.
(b) Rigid steel conduit larger than Trade Size 6 shall not be used for routing
the cables.
2) Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
(a) Electrical metallic tubing larger than Trade Size 2 shall not be used.
(b) Electrical metallic tubing shall generally be used for routing the cables for
branch circuits, control circuits and signal circuits.
3) Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (RNC)
(a) Rigid non-metallic heavy wall conduit shall conform to IEC 61386.
(b) The conduits and fittings shall be made from suitable non-metallic
material such as PVC that is resistant to moisture and chemical
atmospheres.
4) Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC)
(a) Flexible metal conduit shall conform to IEC 61386.
(b) Flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection between equipment
that is subject to vibration such as motors or which requires movement
for adjustment and permanent raceways or for connecting two parts of
the building across an expansion joint.
(c) The flexible metal conduit shall be circular in cross section and made of
helically wound, formed, interlocked metal strip.
5) Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC)
(a) Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall conform to IEC 61386.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 46
(b) Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection between
equipment that is subject to vibration such as motors or which requires
movement for adjustment and permanent raceways or for connecting two
parts of the building across an expansion joint.
(c) Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be used for outdoor installations
and other applications subject to ingress of solid objects and/or water in
accordance with IEC 60529.
6) Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit (FNC)
(a) Flexible non-metallic conduit (spiral wound) shall be manufactured in
accordance with IEC 61386.
(b) Flexible non-metallic conduit shall be used for connection between
equipment which requires movement for adjustment and permanent
raceways.
(c) These conduits shall be used in the places where there is no danger of
mechanical damages such as connection between outlet boxes and
luminaires in false ceilings.
(d) Surface Installations
b. Industrial Facilities
1) Surface raceway installations shall utilize extra heavy duty rigid steel conduit
which satisfies the requirements of IEC Standards 60981 and 61386.
c. Residential, Commercial and Institutional Facilities
1) Electrical raceways shall be concealed above ceilings, in walls or in shafts
wherever possible. These raceways shall be medium duty steel conduit which
satisfies the requirements of IEC Standard 61386.
2) Surface raceway installations in areas subject to physical damage shall utilize
extra heavy duty rigid steel conduit which satisfies the requirements of IEC
Standards 60981 and 61386.
3) Cable trunking or gutters may be used for installations where accessibility of
the cables is of prime importance. Cable trunking shall not be used where
subjected to corrosive vapors or severe physical damage. Cable trunking shall
be steel with painted finish and removable or hinged cover.
4) Cable trunking shall conform to IEC 61084.
5) Underfloor Installations
d. Applications
1) In commercial and institutional facilities where large open areas are required
and/or moveable systems furniture is utilized, underfloor raceways and ducts
shall be used for distribution of electrical cables.
2) Underfloor raceways and ducts shall be used to support electrical cables for
power, lighting, signal, and telecommunications to workstations, work benches
and tables which are not located adjacent to a wall.
3) Underfloor raceways and ducts shall not be used for hazardous locations or
where subject to corrosive vapors or severe physical damage.
e. Underfloor Raceway Characteristics

Rev. 0 5.5 - 47
1) Underfloor raceways and ducts shall utilize welded rectangular steel

construction with multiple compartments as necessary to accommodate the
various electrical wiring.
2) Underfloor raceways shall be sized to accommodate the installed cables. Size
of raceways with a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future cable installation.
3) Underfloor raceways shall be provided with continuous separators between all
different cable types.
4) Underfloor raceway system shall include junction boxes to facilitate access to
cables and activation fittings to accommodate devices for the various electrical
services.
5) Underground Installations
f. Applications
1) Underground raceways in areas which are not subjected to traffic and/or
severe physical damage may be direct buried conduit.
2) Underground raceways in traffic areas or others areas subject to disruption or
severe physical damage shall be concrete encased.
g. Raceway Characteristics
1) Direct buried raceways in residential, commercial and institutional areas shall
be PVC conduit.
2) Direct buried raceways in industrial areas shall be PVC coated extra heavy
duty rigid steel conduit.
3) Concrete encased raceways shall be PVC conduit.
4) Raceways installed in structural or reinforced concrete envelope shall be PVC
conduit.
5) Underground raceways (direct buried and/or concrete encased) in hazardous
areas shall be PVC coated extra heavy duty rigid steel conduit.
6) Raceways installed below roadways shall be concrete encased.
7) Cable Trays and Cable Trenches
h. Applications
1) Industrial Facilities
(a) In substations and mechanical and electrical rooms, cable trays and
cable trenches may be used.
(b) Cable trays shall not be used for outdoor applications unless specifically
approved by the Royal Commission.
2) Residential, Commercial and Institutional Facilities
(a) In substations and mechanical and electrical rooms, cable trays and
cable trenches may be used.
(b) Cable trays shall not be used for interior distribution of electrical cables
where they are exposed to view unless specifically approved by the
Royal Commission.
i. Cable Tray Characteristics

Rev. 0 5.5 - 48
1) Cable trays shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 61537.

2) Cable trays shall be ladder type, aluminum with natural finish or steel with hot-
dipped galvanized finish.
3) Cable trays shall be of the width and depth required to accommodate the
installed cables plus a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future cable
installation. Minimum depth shall be 100 mm. Rung spacing shall be
adequate for support of installed cables but shall not exceed 230 mm.
j. Cable Trench Characteristics
1) Cable trenches shall be of the width and depth required to accommodate the
installed cables plus a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future cable
installation.
2) Cable trenches shall include removable covers to facilitate access to the
cables. Covers shall be rated to withstand the environmental conditions.
3) Wires and Cables
k. Copper Conductors
1) All wires and cables shall have copper conductors.
2) Cables shall be manufactured in accordance with SASO and IEC Standards.
3) Cable installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest
SEC Standards and Distribution Materials Specifications.
4) Standard millimeter size cables shall be used and shall be in accordance with
IEC 60228.
5) Minimum size power cable used shall be 2.5 mm².
l. Low Voltage Wires and Cables for Major Feeders
1) Low voltage wires and cable (600 V and below) for major feeders installed in
underground ducts and for indoor installation in raceways, conduits and
wireways shall be 90°C rated, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated
andPVC sheathed in accordance with IEC 60502 and flame retardant per IEC
60332-3, B
m. Low Voltage Building Wiring
1) General purpose low voltage building wiring for use in conduit (for receptacle
and lighting circuits) shall be PVC Insulated, 85Deg C, 450/750V (IEC 60227 &
SASO 55) wires flame retardant in accordance with IEC 60332-1
n. Low Voltage Cables for Direct Burial
1) Low voltage cables for direct burial shall be armored, minimum 90°C rated,
PVC or XLPE insulated and PVC jacketed in accordance with IEC 60502
o. High Voltage Cables
1) High voltage cables (above 1000 V) shall be 90°C rated, be EPR or XLPE
insulated and have metallic shield. Cables used for direct burial purposes shall
have an outer jacket.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 49
p. Cable Ampacity and Electrical Characteristics

1) Cable ampacity, electrical characteristics, and insulating thickness shall
conform to the latest IEC 60364, IEC 60228 and SBC 401.
2) The types of insulation used within a building and their maximum operating
temperatures are identified in SBC 401 Table 52-4.
q. Cable glands shall be in accordance with IEC 62444.
r. LSZH, LSOH, LSFH, or OHLS (Low Smoke Zero Halogen) material classification in
accordance with IEC 60754 and IEC 61034 typically used for cable jacketing for
wires which emit limited smoke and no halogen when exposed to a high heat
source. This type of cable is required to be used in confined spaces, poorly
ventilated areas, such as plenums, with a large amount of cables in close proximity
to humans or sensitive electronic equipment. Mass transit and central office facilities
are common applications for LSOH cable.
s. Busways
t. Electrical busways for electrical distribution shall be in accordance with IEC 61439.
u. Busways shall utilize copper bus rated and shall be protected with a metal
enclosure. Steel or aluminum enclosures are acceptable.
v. The busway assembly shall include a separate bus for each phase, neutral and
ground. The busway enclosure shall not be utilized as the ground conductor.
w. Neutral bus shall be increased in capacity over the phase conductors when the
busway supplies loads with high harmonic currents. The A/E and/or EPC contractor
shall complete an assessment of the loads served and provide recommendations to
the Royal Commission for approval.
x. Conduit Fill
y. For a total of 1 conductor inside the electrical conduit, filling of conduit shall not
exceed 53%.
z. For a total of 2 conductors inside the electrical conduit, filling of conduit shall not
exceed 31%.
aa. For more than 2 conductors inside the electrical conduit, filling of conduit shall not
exceed 40%
J. Grounding
1. General
a. All facilities shall be provided with grounding systems designed in accordance with
the requirements of the latest SEC Standards and the SBC 401 Chapter 54.
b. Grounding systems shall be designed to achieve the following:
1) Eliminate potential of electrical shock to personnel
2) Enable protection devices to operate correctly to minimize duration of fault
currents
3) Equalize the voltage potential of normally non-current carrying metal work
4) Prevent electrostatic charge of facility elements to avoid potential problems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 50
c. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate the design for all related grounding and
protection components including the system grounding, equipment grounding,
lightning protection, surge protection, and electrostatic discharge.
d. System Grounding
e. All low voltage power distribution systems shall have supply transformer secondary
neutrals solidly grounded.
f. The low voltage earthing system shall be of TN-S type unless installations for special
locations are required.
g. Medium voltage distribution systems (e.g. 4160 V, 13800 V, 33000 V and 34500 V)
shall be resistance grounded to minimize ground fault levels.
h. Equipment Grounding
i. The metal frames of all electrical equipment, machinery, lighting fixtures, enclosures,
raceways, cable trays, outlet boxes, appliances and non-electric equipment in close
proximity to electrical equipment shall be grounded for safety. Two grounding
connections shall be provided to the frames of large electrical equipment such as
unit substations, power transformers, motor control centers and switchgear.
j. Grounding System Calculations
k. SBC 401 Chapters 41 and 54 shall be used as a basis of design for the grounding
system. Grounding calculations shall be conducted based on selected calculations
method listed in IEEE 142, IEEE 80, or BS 7430. Soil resistivity values from the
Geotechnical Investigation Report, as detailed in Section 4.4.2.F shall be used for
the determination of the grounding calculations. Grounding calculations shall
demonstrate that the calculated resistance does not exceed the maximum
resistance allowed for the system.
l. Grounding of Various System Installations
m. Substation and Industrial Plant
1) System and equipment grounding in substations and industrial plants is
particularly important because of the multiplicity of electrical equipment and
locations in isolated areas. These shall be provided with a ground loop or grid
consisting of multiple spaced ground rods interconnected by adequately sized
bare or insulated copper cable(s).
n. Commercial, Institutional and Light Industrial Facilities
1) For equipment grounding in commercial, institutional and light industrial
facilities, a ground loop shall be provided outside the building foundation. If this
is not possible, a ground grid shall be provided under the basement or ground
floor. System grounding at the facility transformer(s) shall be interconnected to
this loop. Interconnection cables may be bare or insulated.
o. Residential
1) In residential areas, residences shall be supplied with a single ground rod at
the service entrance. Grounding to incoming water supply pipe alone is not
acceptable. All exposed metallic pipes shall be bonded to the grounding
system.
p. Communication Equipment

Rev. 0 5.5 - 51
1) All communications equipment over voltage protection system devices shall be

directly grounded to the facility ground rod, grid or loop. Ground leads from
power distribution systems or facility metalwork shall not be shared by the
communications equipment over voltage protection device ground lead.
q. Floodlighting
1) All floodlighting, area lighting, sports lighting, roadway and street lighting
fixtures shall be grounded.
r. Backup Power Source
1) It is the preference that backup power sources such as generators are
grounded as a separately derived electrical system.
2) Existing facilities may not utilize a separately derived ground configuration. A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall evaluate the backup power source grounding
configuration for an existing facility and provide the Royal Commission with
recommendations whether the existing configuration shall remain or be
modified. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall obtain approval of this
recommendation from the Royal Commission prior to proceeding with the
design.
3) Refer to subsection 5.5.1.F Transfer Switches for additional information
regarding equipment requirements for separately derived and combine
grounding for a backup power source.
4) Installation Requirements
s. All grounding systems shall be interconnected below grade for each facility.
t. System grounding and equipment grounding shall use a common ground loop or
grid, wherever possible. Separate grounding conductors shall be run from the
systems (transformers neutrals) and equipment to terminate on the ground loop or
grid via wall mounted ground bus.
u. Grounding to Eliminate Hazards from Static Electricity
v. Various facilities and occupancies have sensitivity toward electrostatic discharge
which may cause damage to equipment or facilities. To address these potential
hazards, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall assess the need for provision of an
electrostatic discharge control program in accordance with IEC Standard 61340.
w. Typical facilities, occupancies or activities that warrant consideration include but are
not limited to the following:
1) Manufacturing of electronic parts, assemblies or equipment
2) Assemble, install, packaging, servicing, testing of electronic equipment
3) Industrial facilities which involve operations with gas, coal, paper, and grain
processing and handling
4) Commercial facilities such as dry cleaning plants and others
x. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete an assessment and submit
recommendations to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
y. Corrosion Protection for Grounding Systems
z. General

Rev. 0 5.5 - 52
1) The environmental conditions may result in undesirable deterioration to the

grounding systems for facilities. To protect against this potential, the following
measures shall be implemented to address exposure to underground and
atmospheric conditions:
2) Underground Conditions
(a) The nature of the soil and high water table with salt water content for the
Jubail area results in soil resistivities which are generally low. These
physical conditions make it easy to obtain good ground resistance values
however these same conditions can also cause severe corrosion of
metals leading to deterioration of ground resistance values with time. Not
only does the grounding copper corrode but buried steel in the vicinity
can also be corroded by galvanic interaction with the copper. To avoid
the adverse effects of the physical conditions, the following features shall
be considered and applied as appropriate:
(1) Interruption of Couple: Where possible, the buried steel shall be
separated from the grounding system. Buried lengths of pipework
shall be fitted with insulated flanges at points of connection to the
general mass of grounded equipment. Electrical equipment
mounted in such runs of buried or part-buried pipework shall be
grounded but insulated from the pipework.
(2) Elimination of Buried Steel: Where possible, when choosing
between burying or not burying a steel structure, pipe or conduit; the
non-buried choice is the Royal Commission’s preference. The
alternative approach shall consider the use of non-ferrous materials.
(3) Reduction of Effect of Buried Copper: At any location where ground
faults can cause large currents to flow between the body of earth
and the grounding system, extensive buried un-insulated grounding
conductor is necessary to control voltage gradients and ensure that
the whole complex remains as one resistance area. It is therefore
not possible to eliminate buried copper but its corrosion effects can
be reduced as follows:
(i) Grounding conductors shall be lead jacketed or tinned where
the corrosion risk is high, otherwise un-tinned conductors shall
be used.
(ii) Where possible, locate grounding conductors at least 7 m away
from buried steel work. This applies particularly to the grid
conductors extending through plant areas.
(iii) Grounding conductors linking equipment and ground grid
conductors shall be PVC insulated where within approximately
7 m of buried steel work. Connections shall be thermite welded
or compression types and coated with bitumen compound
protected by PVC green tape.
3) Atmospheric Conditions
(a) The following relates to corrosion resulting from atmospheric conditions
on non-buried parts of the grounding system, and is unrelated to any
level of soil resistivity. Wherever dissimilar metals are in contact, a risk of
corrosion from electrolytic action exists. The following safeguards shall
be observed:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 53
(1) Where possible, bare grounding conductors shall be spaced from

surfaces of a dissimilar metal. Where contact between surfaces is
unavoidable and especially outdoors, a coating such as bitumastic
No. 50 or equal, shall be introduced between them (except at
electrical joint faces).
(2) Termination hardware such as Servit connectors, etc., may often be
selected for its compatibility with the metals being connected.
Manufacturer's catalogs give details in this respect. Care shall be
taken in selecting such hardware that it is suitable for its application
from a corrosion aspect.
(3) Conductors passing through short lengths of metal conduit, such as
used for kick-pipes shall be coated with bitumastic No. 50 or equal.
The pipes shall be self-draining and the upper ends mastic sealed.
aa. Special Materials
1) Ground Rods
(a) Materials and dimensions of the earth electrodes shall be selected to
withstand corrosion and to have adequate mechanical strength.
(b) For commonly used materials, the common minimum sizes from the
point of view of corrosion and mechanical strength for earth electrodes
where embedded in the soil are given in SBC 401 Table 54.1.
(c) All connections between ground rods and conductors shall be coated
with bitumastic and mastic tape as part of the final installation.
(d) Additional Grounding Protection by Residual Current Devices (RCD)
bb. The use of residual current devices (RCD) is intended only to augment extra
measures of protection against direct contact.
cc. The use of such devices is not recognized as a sole means of protection.
dd. Application of residual current devices in the system shall conform to the latest SBC.
ee. References
ff. Refer to the following TCDDs:
1) 260526-001 Typical Ground Rod Connection
2) 260526-002 Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch Grounding
Configuration Detail 4 Pole
3) 260526-003 Emergency Generator and Transfer Switch Grounding
Configuration Detail 3 Pole
4) 260526-004 Main Electrical Room Ground Bar Details
5) 260526-005 Distribution Electrical Room Ground Bar Detail

Rev. 0 5.5 - 54
K. Lightning Protection Systems

1. General
a. Lightning protection shall be considered for all facilities to protect them from damage
and/or disruption caused by a lightning strike. Provision of a lightning protection
system shall include consideration for the following:
1) Impacts to health and safety of the facility occupants
2) Economic impacts associated with damage to facility or equipment
3) Economic impacts associated with facility downtime
4) Impacts or interruption to public services
5) Impacts to commercial or industrial activities
6) Impacts to individuals in residential facilities
7) Impacts to groups in places of assembly
b. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete a lightning risk assessment in
accordance with the latest SBC 401, Chapter 802 Code, and IEC Standard 62305 to
summarize the associated risks and provide a recommendation regarding the need
for this protective means for the facility.
c. Where a lightning protection system is required, the components, features and
installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest SBC 401,
Chapter 802.
d. The design for the lightning protection system shall be closely coordinated with the
grounding and surge protection provisions for each facility.
e. Applications
f. Lightning protection for underground electrical distribution is not anticipated to be
extensive due to the routing of the power network below grade. A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall determine the characteristics of lightning arrestors at all substations
to coordinate with the other surge protective devices for each facility.
g. Lightning protection for ordinary buildings and structures is typically provided for the
following facilities. The final determination shall be the result of the lightning risk
assessment and approval by the Royal Commission.
1) Buildings and structures over 30 m in height.
2) Health safety buildings including hospitals, clinics, etc.
3) Public safety buildings including police stations and fire stations
4) School buildings
5) University buildings
6) Places of assembly
7) Data centers
8) Principal Components for Lightning Protection System
h. Principal components for the lightning protection system include air terminals,
ground rods and down conductors with adequate number of test points.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 55
i. Selection of the appropriate materials will be dependent on the location and

construction materials. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select materials which are
compatible with the building finishes to ensure adequate protection and avoidance of
any corrosion.
j. Materials selections and installation shall be in accordance with the latest SBC 401,
Chapter 802.
k. Minimum Lightning Protection Features
l. The lightning protection system shall be designed in accordance with the latest SBC
401, Chapter 802.
m. Separate ground rods shall be provided for each down conductor. The down
conductor shall be directly connected to the ground rod. Adequate number of test
points shall be installed. The minimum distance to other earth pits has to be
maintained.
n. The lightning protection ground rods shall be interconnected below grade to the
ground loop which provides the system and equipment ground for the facility.
• Surge Protection Devices
1. General
a. Protection of buildings, equipment, and operations is critical for facilities throughout
the Jubail Industrial City. Provision of the appropriate surge protection devices shall
include consideration for the following:
1) Impacts to health and safety of the facility occupants
2) Economic impacts associated with damage to facility or equipment
3) Economic impacts associated with facility downtime
4) Impacts or interruption to public services
5) Impacts to commercial or industrial activities
6) Impacts to individuals in residential facilities
7) Impacts to groups in places of assembly
8) Extent and location of protection system devices
b. Critical Facilities that warrant special consideration include:
1) Health Safety – Hospitals and Health Clinics
2) Public Safety – Police and Fire Stations
3) Educational – schools and training centers
4) Transportation - Signaling
5) Data Centers
6) Telecommunications
7) Industrial
c. Determination for surge protection shall include an assessment of the facility to

analyze the potential exposure and to develop a recommendation for the level of

Rev. 0 5.5 - 56
protection. Consult IEC standards to complete this assessment and provide a

recommendation to the Royal Commission early in the design phase.
d. Coordinate the surge protection installation with the electrical grounding and
lightning protection system provisions.
e. Sample application levels of surge protection for the various facility types are
summarized in the following Table 5.5.1.F:
TABLE 5.5.1.F: TYPICAL SURGE PROTECTION APPLICATION LEVELS
Facility Type
Telecommunications
Health Safety
Public Safety
Protection Application
Commercial
Data Center
Residential
Industrial
Civic
Service Entrance        
Distribution Panels      
Branch Circuit panels    
Critical Equipment       
Tertiary Devices
 
(Receptacles)
2. Types of surge protection:

a. Surge Protection Devices (SPD)
1) Parallel-connected, non-linear protective devices for limiting surge voltages on
equipment by discharging, bypassing, or diverting surge current.
b. Filtering/Line Conditioning
1) Units designed to provide clean AC power by helping to eliminate or
dramatically reduce high-voltage transients and low-voltage electrical noise
that degrade microprocessor-based equipment.
(a) Active Tracking Filters (ATF)
(b) Harmonic Filters
(c) Line Conditioners
(d) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 57
c. Data/signal Line Devices

1) Devices designed to protect signal lines from harmful surges.
• Lighting
1. General
a. This RCJ GEM covers the minimum mandatory requirements for lighting
installations.
b. All lighting systems for interior applications shall be designed in accordance with the
latest edition of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)
Lighting Handbook.
c. In order to optimize the effective utilization of Iighting energy, interior lighting design
requirements for new buildings shall be in accordance with the IESNA Lighting
Ready Reference / Energy Management IESNA RR-96. Design components for
lighting energy management shall be per considerations in IESNA LEM-3.
d. Lighting design for Industrial Lighting shall be in accordance with IESNA RP-7, as
supplemented by this GEM.
e. Lighting design shall be designed for energy efficient operation.
f. Photometric measurements of sports lighting, when required shall be performed as
per the IESNA LM-5, supplemented by this GEM.
g. Lighting system power supplies consisting of 400/230 Volt, three- phase, three-wire
or four-wire; and 400 Volt, two-wire shall be acceptable. The choice of voltage and
distribution system for lighting installations shall depend on the area to be supplied
and the required lighting load.
h. Direct-control switches and switching contacts used on lighting circuits other than
fluorescent luminaires shall have a continuous current rating of at least 1.5 times the
steady-state current of the lighting load.
i. Direct-control switches and switching contacts used on fluorescent lighting circuits
shall have a continuous current rating of at least twice the steady-state current of the
lighting load.
j. Mounting method of luminaires shall be based on the best arrangement for
illuminance, as well as easy and safe access during installation and maintenance.
k. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall determine the appropriate lighting solutions
based on the best application of light source, lamp types, required illumination
levels, distribution configuration, and luminaire type for each application associated
with the facility.
l. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the energy efficiency associated with
the recommended lighting solutions and explore opportunities to reduce the energy
consumption by selecting sources and luminaires with high efficiencies and also
capitalize on the use of available daylight.
m. Energy conservation strategies shall conform to latest SBC 601.
n. Luminaires shall be suitable for the environment where they are installed.
Luminaires installed outdoor shall be approved as weather proof and dust tight.
o. Luminaires shall be marked, listed or labeled by an independent third party
laboratory (notified body) the associated certificate shall state either that the

Rev. 0 5.5 - 58
luminaires meet appropriate designated standards or have been tested and found
suitable for use in a specified manner.
p. All public lighting systems for exterior use shall be designed in accordance with the
CEN standards see table in section for full list of applicable standards.
q. All lighting systems for exterior and roadway applications shall be designed in
accordance with CIE 115 and the associated CEN standards.
r. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall determine the appropriate lighting solutions
based on the best application of light source, lamp types, required lighting design
criteria, distribution configuration, and luminaire type for each application associated
with the facility.
s. Light Source
t. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the light source which is appropriate for
each residential, commercial, institutional, and industrial facility, and shall ensure
that the selected light fixtures are available in the local market at the time of design
and provide cut sheets showing the fixture performance characteristics and
aesthetics to be included in the RFP. Mercury vapor luminaires and incandescent
luminaires shall not be used.
u. Only luminaires with a minimum efficacy of 45 lm/w and lamps with minimum
efficacy of 65 lm/w shall be used.
v. The various light sources have advantages and disadvantages and the A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall consider the available sources and provide recommendations
regarding the appropriate light sources to be used throughout a facility.
1) Selection of the light source shall consider the following:
(a) Source efficacy
(b) Installation requirements
(c) Color rendition characteristics
(d) Dimming capabilities
(e) Maintenance requirements (and associated health and safety risks)
(f) Availability
(g) Life cycle cost
(h) Internal ambient air temperature (35° C)
(i) Outside ambient air conditions (50° C)
(j) Desired aesthetic result
(k) Correlated Color Temperature
w. The three commonly used light sources along with their characteristics include
fluorescent, high intensity discharge (HID), and light-emitting diode. A relative
comparison of the operational characteristics for these light sources is summarized
in Table 5.5.1.G. Each characteristic is rated from 1 to 4 where 1 = the highest and 4
= the lowest in that category.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 59
TABLE 5.5.1.G: LIGHT SOURCE OPERATION COMPARISON
Starting Characteristics
Color Rendition
Light Source
Initial Cost
Dimmable
Lamp Life
Efficacy
Fluorescent 2 2 2 3 2 2
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Note

2 1/4 2 4 2
Metal Halide 1
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Note

1/2 4 1-2 4 2
HPS 1
Light-emitting Diode (LED) 1/2 1-3 2 1 2 4
Table 5.5.1.G Notes:

1. Source is only dimmable with specialized control gear.
x. Lamps
1) The lamps selected for each facility shall be standardized as much as possible
to minimize the variety of lamps sources used to achieve the desired aesthetic
results. This standardization will facilitate the maintenance of the lighting
throughout a facility.
2) Fluorescent Lamps
(a) Fluorescent lamps are acceptable for use in all residential, commercial,
institutional and industrial facilities. These lamps have typically been the
most common selection due to the color rendition characteristics, source
life, availability of lighting fixtures, energy efficiency, and associated cost
effectiveness
(b) Compact fluorescent lamps are available in various shapes, wattages
and color temperatures and have become a replacement alternative for
applications that previously utilized incandescent lamps. Compact
fluorescent lamps are acceptable for use in RCJ’s facilities and shall be
compared with other source alternatives to determine the most
appropriate applications.
(c) Energy-Efficient type T5 and compatible energy efficient electronic
ballasts having less than l0% THD (voltage total harmonic distortion)
shall be used. Efficacy of Compact fluorescent lights (CFL) shall not be
less than 65-70 Lumen/Watt.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 60
(d) Fluorescent lamps shall be used for the following specific applications:
(1) Electrical substations
(2) Electrical switchyard buildings
(3) Control rooms
(4) Offices
(5) Plant rooms
(6) Store rooms
(7) Large ceiling voids and Maintenance access
(e) Fluorescent lamps are available in different shapes, diameters, wattages,
lumen outputs, and color temperatures. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor
shall utilize standard fluorescent lamps that are commercially available
and minimize the types of lamps used throughout the facility. The
following Table 5.5.1.H. provides a list of the commonly used lamps
types, however other wattage and type shall be discussed and approved
by RCJ
TABLE 5.5.1.H: FLUORESCENT LAMPS
Type Control Initial Life

Watts Gear Lumens CRI
Description Hours
E, DE 380
8 T5, 288mm 85 20,000
E, DE 680
13 T5, 517mm 85 20,000
E, DE 1,350
14 T5/HO,549mm 85 20,000
E, DE 2,000
24 T5/HO, 549mm 85 20,000
E, DE 2900
28 T5, 1149mm 85 20,000
E, DE 3650
35 T5, 1449mm 85 20,000
E, DE 4900
49 T5/HO, 1449mm 85 20,000
E, DE 5000
54 T5/HO, 1149mm 85 20,000

Rev. 0 5.5 - 61
(f) Fluorescent lamps are available with output in a variety of color

temperatures ranging from 3000 to 6500° kelvin.
(1) The lamp color temperature output shall be selected as appropriate
for the application.
(2) The lamp color temperature shall preferably be consistent for all
fluorescent lamps throughout a facility to facilitate maintenance.
3) High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps
(a) HID lamps are used for the following applications:
(1) Indoor Commercial and Institutional facilities
(2) Indoor and outdoor Industrial facilities
(3) Outdoor facilities for public circulation spaces, parks, sporting
venues, street lighting and parking
(4) Security lighting
(b) HID lamps have good efficiencies and lamp life however, their color
rendering index (CRI) is lower than other sources and controllability is
less desirable due to warm up and restrike requirements. Specialized
Hot restrike control gear is available for special situations such as public
venues for instant light.
(c) HID lamps are available in the following options:
(1) Metal halide lamps are available in a wide range of wattages and
have the best CRI but the lowest efficacy of the HID options. These
characteristics lend themselves towards applications where color
rendition is critical to the occupancy. Typical applications include
indoor sports facilities, public circulation spaces, and large assembly
spaces such as auditoriums and convention halls and decorative
external lighting where white light and high color rendering are
important.
(2) High pressure sodium lamps are also available in a wide range of
wattages and shapes. The efficacy is higher than metal halide but
their CRI is lower. These characteristics lend themselves towards
applications where color rendition is less critical to the occupancy.
Typical applications include indoor storage, loading docks, vehicular
circulation and outdoor parking, street lighting and security.
(3) Low pressure sodium lamps are outdated technology and shall not
be used without prior agreement with the RCJ. LED /HPS is the
preferred choice for traditional uses. Low pressure sodium lamps
are the most efficient of the HID options but have the lowest CRI.
The light output is monochromatic and typically used in limited
applications which do not require distinction of color. Typical
application is for outdoor security.
(d) Where HID lamps are used the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall utilize
standard HID lamps that are commercially available and minimize the
types of lamps used throughout the facility. The following Table 5.5.1.I.
provides a list of the commonly used lamps types.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 62
TABLE 5.5.1.I: HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS
Type Initial
Watts Life Hours Base
Description Lumens
High Pressure Med,E27,Doule

70 6,000 24,000
Sodium ended
High Pressure Med,E27, Double

100 9,200 24,000
Sodium ended
High Pressure Med,E27,Double

150 16,000 24,000
Sodium ended
High Pressure Mogul,E40,Double

250 28,000 24,000
Sodium ended
High Pressure Mogul,E40,Double

400 51,000 24,000
Sodium ended
High Pressure
1000 140,000 24,000 Mogul,E40
Sodium
7,500 Vert. MedE27,Double

70 Metal Halide 5,200
6,000 Hor. ended
7,500 Vert. Med,E27,Double

6,000 Hor. ended
10,000Vert. Med,E27,Double
7,500 Hor ended
10,000 Ver. Mogul,E40,

6,000 Hor. Double ended
20,000 Ver. Mogul,E40,Double

15,000 Hor. ended
15,000 Ver.
1000 Metal Halide 108,000 Mogul,E40
11,000 Hor.
170,000 6,000
1500 Metal Halide Mogul
220,000 9,000
2000 Metal Halide Double ended
4) Light-emitting Diodes (LED) Lamps

(a) LED lamps are acceptable for indoor use in all residential, commercial,
institutional and industrial facilities. where a point source distribution is
required. Where an area source is required, LED is and an option to be

Rev. 0 5.5 - 63
compared with high efficiency linear fluorescent lamp (T5, either HE or

HO). These lamps have not typically been utilized due to the availability
and cost. Recent developments have increased the availability and
reduced the associated costs. These developments have resulted in the
use of this source for more applications.
(b) LED lamps can have good efficacy and long life but need to be obtained
from a reputable manufacturer. Quality of the driver is also an issue.
Luminaire lumens (LLm) and not bare LED lumens should be used in
calculations. The ambient thermal conditions are critical to the
performance of LEDs and Luminaire Manufacturers are required to
design their thermal management systems to allow the LEDs to operate
to the published values in an ambient air temperature of 35 deg C. which
can easily be present in an unventilated ceiling void and 50 deg C
externally LEDs and they are available in a wide range of color
temperatures. This source is becoming more typical for all types of
applications and thus shall be considered for residential, commercial,
institutional and industrial facilities.
(c) LED for external lighting shall be of high quality manufacturer from
recognized major suppliers from the following list:
(1) Cree
(2) Philips Lumileds
(3) Tridonic
(4) Osram
(5) Nicha
(6) LG
(7) Citizen
(8) GE
Other LED suppliers may only be used with the express consent of the
RCJ. ALL LEDs shall be capable of providing a minimum efficacy of
100lm/w at forward design current of less than 500mA with external
ambient air temperature of 50 deg C. all LEDs shall be color consistent
within 5 macadam ellipses. The CRI of LEDs shall be not less than
60Ra. The life expectancy shall be quoted at 80% of initial Lumens and
for a minimum life of 50000hrs. The early life failure of LEDs shall not be
greater than 10% at the quoted life expectancy. All LEDs are to be
warranted by the LED manufacturer operating within the luminaire for a
minimum of half the rated life of the LEDs.
(d) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete an economic analysis to
compare LED lamps to others options to determine the best solution.
This analysis shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and
approval.
(e) Designer is responsible for selecting the LED luminaire system
components. This includes as applicable; LED driver and luminaire
controls, heat-sink, self-ballasted or non-self-ballasted, etc.
(f) The luminaire manufacturer shall provide certificate issued by third
party agency (notified body) verifying the luminaire’s performance

Rev. 0 5.5 - 64
including declared luminaire lifetime and lumen maintenance based on

the operating temperature range specified in this standard.
(g) Reflectors or filters shall be provided to control the glare and harmful
light spectrum to safe level. Guidelines and limits of IEC 62471 and /or
the lES handbook shall be applied.
(h) Additional Requirements for LED
(1) The LED circuitry shall prevent flicker perceptible to the unaided eye
over the voltage range specified as per IEC 61000-3-3 or IEEE
1453.
(2) All LED components to be designed to tolerate between -20°C and
65°C at 100% Relative Humidity (RH) during non-operating/daytime.
(3) Voltage THD induced into an AC power line by a luminaire shall not
exceed 10%.
(4) Thermal management shall be passive by design .The use of fans
or other mechanical devices shall not be allowed.
5) Control Gear and Drivers
(a) All ballasts and drivers for fluorescent, HID and LED lamps shall be
manufactured to meet the requirements of IEC Standards and Pre-
standard Specifications for lamp controlgear.
(1) Fluorescent ballasts shall be DALI HF electronic type. Dimming
electronic ballasts shall be standard for all areas where daylight is
present..
(2) HID ballasts shall be electronic type up to 150 watts.
(3) LED drivers shall be DALI electronic type constant current.
(4) For external luminaires all ballasts and drivers shall be rated to a
minimum of IP 23 and have Ta 50 deg C and Tc 80 deg C.
(5) All ballasts and drivers shall have a minimum design life of 50,0000
hrs in their prescribed operating conditions.
(6) ALL LED drivers shall operate to protect the LEDs should the
temperature exceed their maximum operating temperature. Firstly
by dimming the output of the LEDs up to 80% of full output and then
by switching off the LEDs should the temperature still be high. An
alarm shall be generated by the ballast in line with the DALI protocol
and communicated to the LMS as high level alarm.
(7) LED drivers should be capable of being mounted in the base of
poles and operating the LEDs remotely for up to 25m distance.
(a) Interior Lighting
b. Illumination levels for spaces in all residential, commercial, institutional and industrial
applications shall be selected in accordance with the procedures and
recommendations provided in the latest edition of the IESNA Lighting Handbook.
1) Illumination levels shall consider the following criteria:
(a) The task being performed

Rev. 0 5.5 - 65
(b) The ages of the occupants

(c) The importance of speed and accuracy
(d) Luminaire mounting height
(e) Workplane height
2) The selection of the appropriate light source, lamp and luminaires shall
consider the following criteria:
(a) Source efficacy
(b) Lamp lumen output
(c) Lamp operation characteristics including lamp lumen depreciation
(d) Environment characteristics and associated dirt depreciation
(e) Utilization Factor
(f) Room shape and size
(g) Room finish characteristics including reflectances
(h) Availability of natural daylight
(i) Correlated Color Temperature
3) The quality of the lighting solution designed for each space shall include
consideration for the following:
(a) Glare shall be reduced by utilizing the appropriate luminaire features.
The application of direct, direct/indirect, or indirect distribution shall be
evaluated to apply the appropriate system for each space. The light
control mechanism including lens, louver, etc. shall be selected to
minimize the adverse effects of glare.
(b) The lighting shall be distributed evenly over the task to maintain
illuminance uniformity. The following are the average to minimum ratios
which should be considered when designed the lighting system for
interior applications:
(1) Uniformity ratio of 2:1 is considered excellent and should be used
for critical tasks.
(2) Uniformity ratio of 3:1 is considered good and is the typical
uniformity to be used for the majority of applications.
(3) Uniformity ratio of 4:1 is considered fair and is appropriate for used
in applications which are less critical.
(c) Color rendering characteristics of the source is identified as the color
rendering index (CRI) and shall be carefully considered when selecting
the source for each application.
(1) CRI between 75 and 100 is considered excellent.
(2) CRI between 65 and 75 is considered good.
(3) CRI between 55 and 65 is considered fair.
(4) CRI below 55 is considered poor.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 66
4) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate illumination levels
for all spaces within a facility. The standard illumination levels for various
locations and occupancies are listed in Table 5.5.1.J.
TABLE 5.5.1.J: ILLUMINATION LEVEL RECOMMENDATIONS BY OCCUPANCY
Horizontal Vertical Elevation of

Illumination Illumination Working
Location/Occupancy Level in Lux Level in Lux Plane (mm)
CONTROL AND DISPATCH
General 500 800
Vertical Panels 500 1700

Desks 500 800
DINING FACILITIES
Dining Areas (Leisure Service) 300 800
Dining Areas (Quick Service) 500 800

Food Preparation 500 900
Entrance Hall 300 Floor
ELECTRICAL ROOM
Substation (General) 200 Floor

Vertical Face of Switchgear 300 1700
Battery Room 300 Floor
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Telecom Equipment Room 200 Floor

OFFICES
Regular 500 800

Conference Room 500 800
Drafting (Mixed CAD and Paper Tasks) 500 800

Corridors 200 Floor
Stairways 300 Floor
Elevator 200 Floor
Washrooms 300 900

WAREHOUSE
Indoor Bulk Storage 100 Floor

Indoor Barrel Storage 100 Floor
Countertops 300 1200

Rev. 0 5.5 - 67
Parts Storage 300 900

RELIGIOUS PLACES
Mosque 300 Floor

SPORTS AND RECREATION
Volleyball 300 Floor
Basketball 300 Floor

WORK SHOPS
General 300 Floor

Rough Bench or Machine Work 500 900
Medium Bench or Machine Work 500 900

Fine Bench or Machine Work 3000 900
Corridors 200 Floor
Washrooms 100 900
SCHOOLS
Chalkboards 500 Task

Classrooms 500 800
Science Laboratories 500 300 900
Shops 500 900

Art Rooms 500 800
Music Rooms 500 800
Library 300 800
Corridors 200 Floor

HOSPITAL
Examination Rooms 500 800

Patient Rooms 50 900
Procedure Rooms 500 900

Laboratories 500 900
Therapy 300 Floor
Nurse Stations 500 800
Corridors Nursing Areas 100 Floor

Corridors Procedure Areas 500 900
Waiting Room 300 Floor

Rev. 0 5.5 - 68
Table 5.5.1.J Notes:

1. Illumination levels for locations and occupancies not listed in this table
shall be in accordance with IESNA Lighting Handbook.
c. Residential Lighting
1) Residential facilities typically utilize a mixture of LED and fluorescent
lamps/luminaires due to the excellent color rendering capabilities, availability of
lighting fixtures, dimming capability, and cost.
2) Development and availability of compact fluorescent lamps has resulted in the
replacement of incandescent lamps..
3) Recent developments with LED lamps has improved availability and associated
cost and their use is anticipated to increase as the availability of luminaires
improves. The LED sources offer good color rendering, high efficacy and
excellent control capabilities.
4) For decorative purposes, a combination of recessed, pendant, track mounted,
and wall mounted luminaires are utilized to provide adequate illumination and
satisfy aesthetic objectives.
5) The voltages used for residential lighting shall be in accordance with
Table 5.5.1.A: Voltage Level Applications.
d. Commercial and Institutional Lighting
1) Commercial and Institutional type facilities typically utilize a mixture of
fluorescent, high intensity discharge and LED lamps/luminaires.
(a) Fluorescent lamps/luminaires are the primary source.
(1) Compact fluorescent lamps/luminaires are utilized in applications
where incandescent lamps/fixtures were typically used.
(2) High output fluorescent lamps/luminaires are acceptable for spaces
with high ceilings where instant start characteristic of this source is
advantageous. These occupancies include gymnasiums, highbay
storage spaces and other similar occupancies.
(b) High intensity discharge lamps/luminaires may be used for interior high
ceiling applications, loading docks, storage areas, parking facilities, and
other similar occupancies.
(1) Metal halide lamps/luminaires are the preferred source for interior
applications where color rendition is critical. Examples include
public circulation, indoor sports arenas, gymnasiums, and places of
assembly.
(2) High pressure sodium lamps/luminaires are applicable to interior
occupancies where color rendition is not as critical and include
loading docks, storage areas, and parking garages,

Rev. 0 5.5 - 69
(c) Recent developments with LED lamps has improved availability and
associated cost and their use is anticipated to increase as the availability
of luminaires improves. The LED sources offer good color rendering,
high efficacy and excellent control capabilities. This source shall be
considered for all interior applications in Commercial and Institutional
facilities to determine the cost effectiveness.
2) The voltages used for commercial and institutional lighting shall be in
accordance with Table 5.5.1.A: Voltage Level Applications.
e. Industrial Lighting
1) Industrial type facilities typically utilize a mixture of fluorescent, high intensity
discharge and LED lamps/luminaires.
2) Lighting for industrial facilities shall be selected in accordance with the
procedures and recommendations provided in the latest edition of the
American National Standard Practice for Industrial Lighting: ANSI IESNA RP-7.
(a) Fluorescent lamps/luminaires are acceptable for use for industrial
facilities.
(1) Availability of high output fluorescent lamps has resulted in the
increased application of fluorescent lamps/luminaires for highbay
spaces. This source is advantageous due to its instant start and
instant restrike characteristics.
(2) Compact fluorescent lamps/luminaires shall be considered for
industrial applications where instant start is required for the
application.
(b) High intensity discharge shall be given preference for use in industrial
facilities.
(1) Metal halide lamps/luminaires have the higher CRI and shall be
applied to occupancies that require this higher color rendering for
performance of the tasks.
(2) High pressure sodium fixtures have a lower CRI and are acceptable
for occupancies where color rendering is not as critical for
performance of tasks.
3) The voltages used for industrial lighting shall be in accordance with Table
5.5.1.A: Voltage Level Applications.
f. Emergency Lighting
1) Emergency lighting shall be provided throughout each facility to illuminate the
designated means of egress, including the exit discharge, to allow the
occupants to safely exit in the event of a power outage. Minimum duration of
emergency lighting in the event of normal power failure shall be one-and-one
half hours.
(a) Illumination levels for the means of egress shall be in accordance with
the requirements of the latest SBC 801.
(b) The egress path lighting shall be supplied from the life safety branch of
the backup power system or may be supplied from a self-contained
integral battery power source.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 70
(c) Duration of operation for means of egress lighting shall be in accordance

with the latest SBC 801.
(d) The power source for emergency lighting shall be supplied ahead of the
switch or control device.
2) Supplemental emergency lighting shall also be considered for special
occupancies in critical facilities such as hospitals, important offices,
communications centers, etc. to facilitate normal operation of these critical
facilities during a normal power interruption.
(a) Lighting levels for these special occupancies during normal power
interruptions shall be selected to allow safe operation. The A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall provide recommendations for the special
applications and associated lighting levels to the Royal Commission for
approval.
(b) These supplemental emergency lighting applications shall be supplied
from the standby branch of the backup power system or may be supplied
from a self-contained battery power source.
(c) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate the duration of
operation for supplemental emergency lighting with the Royal
Commission to ensure that it is sufficient for the criticality of the
occupancy.
3) Emergency lighting shall be provided in electrical rooms. A minimum
emergency illumination level of 100 lux shall be provided at finished floor level.
4) Luminaires installed in the control room shall provide shadowless illumination.
In addition, lighting for control rooms shall be designed for maximum flexibility
to permit flicker-free variation of illumination levels above each group of
operator workstations. Luminaires shall be installed to minimize reflections and
glare at operating screens.
5) Normal and emergency task lighting of at least 200 lux shall be provided for
the following;
(a) In plant areas to illuminate equipment required for use in emergencies,
such as: emergency telephones, shutdown and emergency isolation
stations, fire water pump areas, central foam concentrate mixing
areas, fire control panels, breathing apparatus & fire extinguisher
station, and stand-by generators.
(b) In evacuation assembly areas and in off-shore platform escape capsule
areas and boat landing.
6) The preferred power supply for emergency lighting is the backup power source.
However, in the event a central backup power source is not provided as part of
the building infrastructure, the emergency lighting may be supplied from a self-
contained battery power source.
7) Illuminated exit signs shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with
NFPA 101 requirements.
g. Exit Signs
1) Exit signs shall be located throughout each facility in accordance with the
requirements of the latest SBC 801.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 71
2) Exits signs shall be internally illuminated in accordance with the latest SBC
801.
3) The preferred power supply for exit signs is the backup power source.
However, in the event a central backup power source is not provided as part of
the building infrastructure, the emergency lighting may be supplied from a self-
contained battery power source. Nickel cadmium batteries are not permitted.
4) Duration of operation for exit signs shall be in accordance with the latest SBC
801.
5) Exterior Lighting
h. General
1) This section covers Building floodlighting, Area lighting, Sports lighting, and
Security lighting.
(a) Refer to Subsection 5.3.2.F Site Lighting for additional information
requirements pertaining to exterior lighting associated with Site
Development for Buildings.
(b) Refer to Subsection 5.6.3.C.4.d Roadway Lighting for additional
information and requirements pertaining to exterior lighting associated
with roadways, parking areas and sidewalk lighting.
2) Illumination levels for exterior spaces in all residential, commercial, institutional
and industrial applications shall be selected in accordance with the procedures
and recommendations provided in the latest edition of the Illuminating
Engineering Society of North America, Lighting Handbook and reference
should be made to CIE 115 and the associated CEN standards and guidance
for road and exterior lighting. All public spaces are to be lit to the CEN
methodology.
3) Illumination levels for exterior applications shall consider the following criteria:
(a) The task being performed
(b) Security and safety of the occupants
4) The selection of the appropriate light source, lamp and luminaires shall
consider the following criteria:
(a) Source efficacy
(b) Lamp lumen output
(c) Lamp operation characteristics including lamp lumen depreciation
(d) Luminaire efficiency
(e) Color Rendering Index
(f) Correlated Color Temperature
5) The quality of the lighting solution designed for each exterior application
shall include consideration for the following:
(a) Horizontal illumination
(b) Vertical illumination
(c) Uniformity ratios

Rev. 0 5.5 - 72
(d) Color rendering characteristics of the source is identified as the color

rendering index (CRI) and shall be carefully considered when selecting
the source for each application.
(1) CRI between 75 and 100 is considered excellent.
(2) CRI between 60 and 75 is considered white light.
(3) CRI between 20 and 60 is considered semi-monochromatic.
(4) CRI below 20 is considered monochromatic.
The CIE color groups also give good indication of color rendering and
color appearance.
6) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate illumination
levels for all exterior applications. The standard illumination levels for
exterior locations and occupancies are listed in Table 5.5.1.K.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 73
TABLE 5.5.1.K: ILLUMINATION LEVEL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR EXTERIOR
Horizontal Vertical Elevation

Illumination Illumination of Working Uniformity
Location/Occupancy Level in Lux Level in Lux Plane Ratio
BUILDING FLOODLIGHTING
Not Vertical 5:1
Façade (Dark Surroundings) 35
Applicable Plane Note 2
Not Vertical 5:1
Facade (Bright Surroundings) 90
Applicable Plane Note 2
AREA LIGHTING
2 1 20:1
Parking - Basic Ground
Minimum Minimum Max:Min
5 2.5 15:1
Parking – Enhanced Security Ground
Minimum Minimum Max:Min
15 20
Public Park Ground 4:1 Avg:Min
Minimum Avg @ 1.5m
Common and/or Sitting Areas 6 6
Ground 4:1 Avg:Min
(CEN EN 13201) Minimum Min @ 1.5m
6 6
Walkways Ground 4:1 Avg:Min
Minimum Min @ 1.5m
SPORTS LIGHTING
Not 4:1 or less
Soccer (Class IV) 500 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
Not 4:1 or less
Volleyball (Class IV) 200 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
Not 4:1 or less
Basketball (Class IV) 200 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
Not 4:1 or less
Tennis (Class IV) 500 Ground
Applicable Max:Min
SECURITY LIGHTING
Not 4:1 or less
Entrance 100 Ground
Applicable Avg:Min
Not 4:1 or less
Perimeter 5 Ground
Applicable Avg:Min
Table 5.5.1.K Notes:

1. All public areas are to be lit in accordance with road lighting section
5.6.3. .
2. Uniformity ratio is lighted surface to immediate surroundings.
3. All external lighting is required to meet the obstructive lighting standard’s
identified within sections 5.6.3, and 5.3.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 74
7) Luminaires
(a) Luminaires shall be heavy-duty, weather-proof type suitable for use in the
Jubail outdoor environment to a minimum of IP 65 IK08.
(b) All components and features shall be suitable to withstand the
environmental conditions and shall be selected to minimize maintenance
requirements.
(c) Luminaires use for decorative applications shall use bollards sparingly.
Bollards shall be used mainly for aesthetic function and not as the prime
illumination source. Bollards can be used as a prime illumination for
walkways, gardens, and like places. Typical bollard applications include
landscaped areas, shopping arcades, walkways at building entrances,
etc.
(d) LED luminaires shall be fully designed by the luminaire manufacturer to
take account of the high ambient air temperature and relative humidity
the light output of the luminaire should be quoted on the basis of a
luminaire operation in an environment of 50 deg C and 95% RH min. The
luminaire manufacturer shall take overall responsibility for the functioning
of the LEDs, drivers and the luminaire body to enable the stated
operating parameter of the system to be maintained through life.
(e) The luminaire body shall be made of high quality diecast aluminum and
shall be coated with a finish which is dust shedding and the body
designed to comply with IEC 60068-2 Part 2 Test L.
(f) The luminaire optics shall be made of borosilicate glass and shall be
treated with a coating to prevent the accumulation of dust. The optic
seals shall be tested to ensure that the thermal effects of heating and
cooling does not damage the seals.
(g) The luminaire shall be designed to accept the RCJs chosen LMS
system.
(h) The luminaire body shall have 2 separate compartments for Lamp/LEDs
and control gear.
8) Poles
(a) Exterior lighting poles shall be fiberglass, stainless steel, hot-dipped
galvanized steel, anodized aluminum or precast concrete. Painted poles
can be used if decorative poles are required but with special treatment
before paint and also special paint type to resist corrosion Painted poles
shall not be used without the express agreement with the RCJ. Typical
pole selections are summarized in Table 5.5.1.L: Exterior Lighting Pole
Applications.
TABLE 5.5.1.L: EXTERIOR LIGHTING POLE APPLICATIONS
Pole Material
Application Galvanized Anodized
Fiberglass Precast Concrete
Steel Aluminum
Walkways
Sports Facilities

Rev. 0 5.5 - 75
Security
Freeways
Expressways
Collectors
Corniche
Interchanges
Local 2 & 4 Lane
Residential Road
Cul-de-sac
Cycleways
(b) Metallic lighting poles shall be provided with slip-base plate and break
away fuses which is designed to slide off a lower plate upon impact,
except where the speed limit for the road is less than 60 km/hr or where
poles are located behind elevated curbs. In these latter cases, the poles
shall be provided with fixed bases.
(c) Poles and associated foundations shall be designed using EN 40 for a
sustained wind speed of 30m/s and intermittent 3 sec gusts in a 30min
period of 45m/s..
(d) Poles shall be positioned at the rear of footpaths ideally.
(e) The use of outreach arms shall be minimized and outreach arms over
2.5m should not be used without the express approval of the RCJ.
(f) Where trees are present outreach arms should bring the luminaire to the
front of the agreed tree canopy. Trees are to be coordinated with
landscape design so the agreed separation distance of 6m can be
maintained.
9) Grounding
(a) Metallic poles, posts, luminaire housings and all non-current carrying
metallic parts shall be grounded.
(b) Individual ground rods shall be provided for each pole of a minimum of
2.5m in depth to achieve a resistivity of 25 ohms .
(c) Where the concentration of poles or bollards is heavy, consideration
shall be given to sharing the ground rods between locations and/or
grounding conductor(s) may be run from the nearest panel i.e. less than
6m.
(d) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide recommendations
regarding grounding provisions for exterior lighting to the Royal
Commission for approval.
10) The voltages used for all exterior lighting shall be in accordance with
Table 5.5.1.A: Voltage Level Applications.
i. Building Floodlighting

Rev. 0 5.5 - 76
1) Floodlighting for the exterior of a facility may be considered for security and/or
aesthetic purposes.
(a) Application of building floodlighting for security purposes shall be
discussed and approved by the Royal Commission.
(b) Application of building floodlighting for aesthetic purposes shall only be
allowed if specifically requested and approved by the Royal Commission.
Facade lighting illuminance shall meet the obtrusive light requirement
outlined in sections 5.6.3, and 5.3.
j. Area Lighting
1) Area lighting includes illumination for parking areas, public parks and walkways
which are not adjacent to roadways.
2) Exterior Area lighting may utilize a mixture of fluorescent, HID and LED
lamps/luminaires.
(a) HID sources are the most common with metal halide being used where
color rendition is critical and high pressure sodium used for less critical
applications.
(b) Fluorescent lamps/luminaires are utilized for decorative applications and
where instant start is required.
(c) LED lamps/luminaires for exterior applications shall conform to the RCJ
Exterior Lighting specification. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall
confirm the acceptability of LED source for exterior application with the
Royal Commission.
3) Installation requirements
(a) Direct buried armored cable shall be used for lighting circuits.
(b) Cables routed under roadways shall be routed through concrete encased
ductbanks.
k. Sports Lighting
1) Sports lighting shall utilize either High Intensity Discharge or LED light sources.
(a) Metal halide, or LED lamps/luminaires shall be used for most
applications to provide good color rendering capabilities of more than
60Ra.
(b) High pressure sodium lamps/luminaires may be used for applications
where color rendition is not critical. Several example applications
include, golf driving range, archery range, and other similar sports
venues.
(a) Underground lighting circuits shall be routed around and not under sports
fields and tracks. This will prevent future disruption to playing surfaces.
(b) Direct buried armored cable or direct buried PVC conduits with
conductors shall be used for lighting circuits.
(c) Cables routed in locations subject to possible mechanical damage or
under roadways shall be routed through concrete encased ductbanks.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 77
3) Sports lighting shall utilize LED light sources.
l. Security Lighting
1) Security lighting shall be provided for selected facilities as determined by the
Royal Commission. Security lighting shall be designed in accordance with the
Directives of the High Commission for Industrial Security (HCIS) Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia.
2) Security lighting shall utilize high or low pressure sodium light sources.
(a) Security lighting shall be located to be inaccessible to intruders and
protected from vandalism.
(b) Security lighting fixtures shall include vandal resistant features.
(c) Direct buried armored cable shall be used for lighting circuits.
(d) Cables routed under roadways shall be routed through concrete encased
ductbanks.
m. Illumination of Areas Adjacent to Roadway
1) People and objects adjacent to the roadway need to be seen by the driver.
Such locations include unmade verges, footways and cycle paths and the
emergency lanes of motorways.
2) The lighting for these areas should conform to the lighting criteria including
surround ratio as stated in Lighting of Roads for Motor And Pedestrian Traffic -
International Commission on Illumination Technical Report (CIE 115).
n. Lighting Recommendations for Conflict Areas
1) A conflict area is one in which traffic flows merge or cross, e.g. at intersections
or roundabouts, or where vehicles and other road users, are in close proximity,
e.g. on a shopping street or at a pedestrian crossing.
2) The lighting for these areas should conform to the lighting criteria as stated in
Lighting of Roads for Motor And Pedestrian Traffic - International Commission
on Illumination Technical Report (CIE 115) Minimum illumination requirement
for pedestrian crossings shall be as per CIE S 015/E:2005.
3) Lighting Calculations
o. Approved lighting criteria shall be developed for all interior and exterior applications.
1) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare a summary of the recommended
maintained illumination levels for all interior occupancies. Refer to Table
5.5.1.J maintained Illumination Level Recommendations by Occupancy. This
summary shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
This summary shall be part of the 30% design submissions.
2) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare a summary of the recommended
maintained illumination levels for all exterior applications. Refer to Table
5.5.1.K maintained Illumination Level Recommendations Exterior. This
summary shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
This summary shall be part of the 30% design submissions.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 78
p. Lighting calculations shall be performed using either the lumen or point-by-point

methods utilizing approved RCJ software package(s). The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall prepare lighting calculations plan and at the 30% design stage for
approval by RCJ. Lighting calculations to be conducted for all differing spaces
associated with the facility.
1) Interior calculations should be carried out using approved computer software.
Approved software packages are DiaLux, ReLux, and AGI32.
2) Point-by-point method is used for more complicated geometric spaces, where
lighting performance is critical, and for exterior applications. These
calculations are typically prepared utilizing commercially available software
such as Dialux or AGi32 which was developed by Lighting Analysts, Inc.
3) Prepared calculations shall identify the performance of the selected
source/fixture with respect to the recommended lighting criteria.
4) The results of these calculations may be presented in tabular or graphic format
to illustrate the lighting performance in a formal calculation submission at the
60% design stage for the Royal Commission for review and approval.. The
results of the calculations shall be summarized in tabular form on the design
drawings.
5) The calculations shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for review and
approval.
q. Interior Lighting
1) All interior lighting calculations shall be prepared using point-by-point method
and shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for approval.
r. Exterior Lighting
1) All exterior lighting calculations shall be prepared using point-by-point method
and shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for approval.
• Lighting Control Systems
1. General
a. Controls for lighting systems are intended to provide the occupants with the
capability to manually operate the artificial lighting for convenience and comfort. In
addition, automatic controls are intended to be used to enhance the security for
facilities and reduce the energy use associated with artificial lighting throughout a
facility.
b. Lighting control energy conservation strategies shall conform to the latest SBC 601.
c. Interior
d. Localized Room Controls
1) Manual Switches
(a) Local switches shall be applied in all spaces to provide the occupants
with capability to manually control the lighting fixtures.
(b) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the provision of multiple
switches to facilitate zone control and/or multiple lighting levels to suit the
functional requirements of the space.
2) Occupancy Sensors

Rev. 0 5.5 - 79
(a) Occupancy sensors shall be applied in spaces to allow the artificial

lighting to be automatically turned off when the space is unoccupied.
(b) Occupancy sensors shall be interconnected with the local switching to
facilitate manual operation by the occupants.
(c) Occupancy sensors types and locations shall be carefully selected for
the space controlled.
(d) Occupancy sensor types and common applications include the following:
(1) Ultrasonic sensors are typically applied to corridor applications due
to the increased spacing coverage.
(2) Dual technology (ultrasonic and passive infrared) are typically
applied to most applications
(e) Occupancy sensor mounting shall utilize the following options:
(1) Combination wall switch/occupancy sensor may be used for small
rooms where the location of the sensor in the wall switch adequately
covers the entire room.
(2) Wall or ceiling mounted occupancy sensors separate from the
manual wall switches are typical utilized to optimize the coverage.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate
mounting location to provide the best coverage and the least
opportunity for false activation.
3) Daylighting Sensors
(a) Daylighting sensors shall be applied in spaces with ample natural light to
automatically turn off artificial lighting when the daylight contributions are
sufficient to satisfy the lighting level requirements.
(b) Daylighting control may be applied using a space-by-space or central
system approach.
(1) Space-by-space approach includes provision of photocells to
measure the daylight contribution within the spaces and control the
lighting fixtures within that space. The daylighting control shall be
integrated with the other control means including any manual
switches and/or occupancy sensors.
(2) Central system approach includes provision of photocell(s) in a
space to measure the daylight contribution within the space and
control of the lighting in that space through the central lighting
control system.
(c) Daylighting control may be applied using the following approaches:
(1) On/off control of individual lamps within lighting fixtures.
(2) On/off control of banks of lighting fixtures in zones.
(3) Dimming control of lamps within lighting fixtures.
4) Emergency Transfer Devices
(a) Occupancies which require emergency lighting for safe egress but
require these lights to be turned off for various activities shall utilize an
emergency transfer device for the lighting controls. Emergency transfer

Rev. 0 5.5 - 80
devices sense the status of the normal power source and automatically
energize the emergency lighting in the event of a power interruption
regardless of the on/off status prior to the interruption.
5) Dimmer Switches
(a) Manual dimmer switches shall be applied in spaces where dimming of
the lighting fixtures is required.
(b) Diming switches shall be selected to coordinate with the lighting source
and associated ballast/driver.
6) Digital Timer Switch
(a) Digital timer switches shall be utilized in spaces where occupancy
sensors are not appropriate for automatic control of the lighting. Typical
applications for digital timer switches include Mechanical Equipment
Rooms, Telecom Rooms, and other spaces that are typically only
occupied for short durations.
e. Central Lighting Controls
1) General
(a) A central lighting control system shall be applied where the economics of
a central system are justified.
(b) The extent of a central lighting control system may include all spaces in
the facility or only a portion of the spaces. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall provide recommendations for the extent of a central
system approach to the Royal Commission for approval.
2) Relay Based System
(a) Typical central lighting control systems utilize a network of intelligent
relay panels to control the lighting circuits.
(1) The control panels house multiple relays and the lighting circuits are
routed through the panels to facilitate control of these circuits.
(2) The control panels are interconnected via cable and the system
uses a microprocessor to control the lighting from a time clock
function and/or other external devices such as switches, occupancy
sensors, photocell, etc.
3) Wireless System
(a) Wireless control is available from many manufacturers protocols
including Enocean and ZigBee. The use of wireless control devices shall
be considered by A/E and/or EPC Contractor when selecting the
appropriate central lighting control system.
(b) Use of a wireless lighting control system shall coordinate with other
functions in the facility to ensure that there are no impacts to other
wireless system in the facility. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall provide
recommendations for application of wireless lighting controls to the Royal
Commission for approval.
4) Integration
(a) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall consider the benefits of integrating the
lighting control system with the direct digital control system for HVAC.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 81
(b) Integration is best done using interposed change over relay contacts or
by manufacturer proven protocol interfaces bespoke software/firmware is
not recommended.
(c) This integration may be desirable to initiate other control function in the
facility. Examples of possible control functions include:
(1) Use of occupancy sensors to initiate HVAC setback sequence when
a space is unoccupied.
(2) Use of photocell for activation of ceiling fans for air circulation.
f. Dimming Controls
1) Architectural Dimming System
(a) Occupancies that warrant a multi-zone, preset lighting control system
with dimming capability shall be provided with an architectural dimming
system.
(1) Architectural dimming system shall be provided with dimming and
control components necessary for the quantity of zones served.
(2) A master control station shall be provided and located to facilitate
the setup of preset scenes appropriate for the occupancy.
(3) Remote control stations shall be located at all entrances and other
appropriate control points such as lectern, demonstration station,
control station, etc.
(4) Common applications for architectural dimming systems include
conference rooms, meeting rooms, seminar rooms, classrooms,
public lobbies, etc.
(5) Interface with audio visual controls may also be desirable to
facilitate a single control point for various applications. A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall coordinate between the lighting control and
audio visual requirements and provide a recommendation for
integration of these systems to the Royal Commission for approval.
(6) A standard protocol is to be utilized. DALI is preferred choice
alternatives may be submitted for approval at the 10% design stage.
2) Theatrical Dimming System
(a) Various occupancies such as auditoriums, mosques and other
performance venues may warrant a more substantial dimming control
system to facilitate the required control for the associated lighting
equipment. For these unique applications, a theatrical dimming system
shall be utilized.
(1) Theatrical dimming system shall be provided with separate
cabinet(s) to house the dimming modules for all required control
channels.
(2) Control stations shall be conveniently located to facilitate setup and
control of lighting fixtures from all required control points.
(3) Interface with audio visual controls may also be desirable to
facilitate a single control point for various applications. A/E and/or
EPC Contractor shall coordinate between the lighting control and

Rev. 0 5.5 - 82
audio visual requirements and provide a recommendation for

integration of these systems to the Royal Commission for approval.
(4) DMX512 is the preferred protocol for theatrical systems.
(5) Exterior
g. Building floodlighting circuits shall be switched automatically by photocell controlled
lighting contactor(s).
1) Include manual override (On-Off-Auto Selector Switch) and locate at the
source panel.
2) Photocell shall be located at a tamperproof height.
h. Area lighting circuits shall be switched automatically by photocell controlled lighting
contactor(s).
source panel.
i. Sports lighting circuits shall be switched on and off by the energizing of master
override control. Secondary controls downstream of the master override shall
include photocell and time clock controlled lighting contactor(s).
source panel.
j. Security lighting circuits shall be switched automatically by photocell controlled
lighting contactor(s).
source panel.
3) Lighting Control Strategies
k. A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall select the appropriate control strategies for each
application. The recommended control strategies for typical applications are
summarized in Table 5.5.1.M for interior and Table 5.5.1.N. for exterior. The A/E
and/or EPC Contractor shall develop recommendations for locations and
occupancies not identified in these tables and submit to the Royal Commission for
approval.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 83
TABLE 5.5.1.M: INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL RECOMMENDATIONS
Localized Room Control Central Control System
Occupancy Sensors (linked to DALI system
Photocells for Daylighting Control (linked to

Low Voltage Switches or Preset Stations
Architectural Dimming System DALI
Toggle Switches – Multiple Levels
Toggle Switches – Zoned Control
Photocell for Daylighting Control
Theatrical Dimming DMX 512

Toggle Switch – Single Level
Emergency Transfer Device
Emergency Transfer Device

Occupancy Sensor(s)
Central Relay Panels

Digital Timer Switch
Dimmer Switch
DALI system)
Location/Occupancy
Offices     
Conference Rooms      
Classrooms    
Gymnasium   
Assembly Space   1 
Auditorium    1 
Public Lobby   1 
Atrium   1 
Warehouse  
Repair Shop  
Central Plant  
Corridors   1 
Restrooms   1
Electrical Room 
Mechanical Room   
Telecom Room  
Table 5.5.1.M Notes:
1. Manual On/Auto/Off, Absence detection a time delay of 15 minutes.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 84
TABLE 5.5.1.N: EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL RECOMMENDATIONS
Localized Control Central Control
Contactor with Astronomical Time Clock
Street lighting LMS (DALI wireless)

Architectural lighting control (DALI)
Programmed time clock

Occupancy Sensor(s)
Multi-pole Contactor
Occupancy Sensors
Photocell at Fixture
Common Photocell
Toggle Switch
Location/Occupancy
Building Floodlighting    
Public Park
Walkways (public) 
Parking (public)  
Walkways (private)  
Parking (private) 
Sports Lighting  
Security    

Rev. 0 5.5 - 85
SUBSECTION 5.5.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
5.5.2. TELECOMMUNICATIONS
A. General
(a) Scope
b. General
1) The Telecommunication Design Guidelines provide:
(a) The basis to be followed by all parties making calculations and/or
preparing drawings and specifications of telecommunications
networks within RCJ Industrial Cities including the engineering
design phase of Contracts where Engineering, Procurement and
Construction are combined (EPC Contracts).
(b) The framework within which work will be performed by all A/E and/or
EPC Contractors to ensure uniformity throughout the infrastructure
of the Project and compatibility within the Royal Commission
Boundary.
c. This Subsection does not provide design information normally found in
available textbooks, handbooks, codes and standards, nor does it attempt to
duplicate design criteria within the expertise of the A/E and/or Contractor.
Decisions are to be developed for specific applications as design progresses.
d. The purpose of this chapter is to indicate the minimum level of quality required
by the RCJ in order to:
1) Define the role of the Authorized Representatives and the
responsibilities of the A/E and/or Contractors, and
2) Provide a reference basis for Saudi Arabian and International Codes
and standards, and for the Guideline Specifications and Guideline
Details issued by the RCJ.
e. Where works interface with Saudi Telecommunication Company (STC), the
equipment/materials and installation shall comply with STC standards latest
revision, and shall be reviewed and approved by the STC.
f. Definitions
g. The following definitions apply to this Subsection :
1) “Address” An identifying name, label, or number for a data terminal,
source, or storage location calculation.
2) “Alarm Notification Appliance” A fire alarm system component such as a
bell, horn, speaker, light, or text display that provides audible, tactile, or
visible outputs, or any combination thereof.
3) “Ampacity” The current, in amperes, that a conductor can carry
continuously under the conditions of use without exceeding its
temperature rating.
4) “Analog data” Data represented by scalar values.
5) “Annunciator” A unit containing one or more indicator lamps,
alphanumeric displays, or other equivalent means in which each
indication provides status information about a circuit, condition, or
location.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
6) “Application Account” Refers to the account name used to run

applications as either a service or a background process.
7) “Application Software” The software written specifically to perform
functional requirements for an individual plant when standard software
packages cannot be configured to meet the requirements. Application
software works with the standard operating software and access the
SCADA real-time and historical database data.
8) “Assigned Line” Cable pair which is connected to the Main Distribution
Frame (MDF), and currently being used as a subscriber's line.
9) “Attenuation” A measure of the decrease in energy transmission “or loss
of light” expressed in decibel (dB). In optical fibers, attenuation is
primarily due to absorption and scattering losses.
10) “Audible Alarm Notification Appliance” A notification appliance that alerts
by the sense of hearing.
11) “Audio Amplifier or Pre-amplifier” Electronic equipment that increases
the current or voltage, or both, potential of an audio signal intended for
use by another piece of audio equipment.
12) “Availability” The percent of time a system or component remains on
line and performs as specified.
13) “Backup Power System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged
for automatic, delayed, or manual connection to the alternate power
source and that serves all of the loads identified as essential for the
facility.
14) “BACnet” A communications protocol for building automation and
control networks. It is an ASHRAE, ANSI, and ISO standard protocol.
BACnet allows communication of building automation and control
systems for applications such as heating, ventilating and air-
conditioning control, lighting control, access control, and fire detection
systems and their associated equipment. BACnet is addressed in
ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135 - 2012, and became ISO 16484-5 in
2003 - is a communications protocol for building automation and control
networks and provides mechanisms for computerized building
automation devices to exchange information, regardless of the
particular building service they perform.
15) “Bandwidth” In electrical transmission systems, the range between the
highest and lowest frequencies of a transmission channel.
16) “Bidirectional” Providing for information transfer in both directions
between master and remote terminals (of a communication channel).
17) “Binary digit” A character used to represent one of the two digits in the
binary number system and the basic unit of information in a two-state
device. The two states of a binary digit are usually represented by “0”
and “1”. Synonym: bit.
18) “Bonded (Bonding)” Connected to establish electrical continuity and
conductivity.
19) “Bonding Jumper” A reliable conductor to ensure the required electrical
conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
20) “Bonding Jumper, Equipment” The connection between two or more

portions of the equipment grounding conductor at the service.
21) “Buffer” A device in which data are stored temporarily in the course of
transmission from one point to another; used to compensate for a
difference in the flow of data, or time of occurrence of events, when
transmitting data from one device to another.
22) “Cabinet” A large, above ground connection point.
23) “Cable, Coaxial” A cable constructed with a wire conductor surrounded
by a concentric outer conductor spaced by a dielectric.
24) “Cable, Distribution” A cable usually connecting the cross connection
point to the subscriber point.
25) “Cable, Feeder” A cable connecting the exchange to a cross-connection
point or directly to a subscriber.
26) “Cable, Lateral Distribution” A cable branching from a main distribution
cable to access subscribers on side streets.
27) “Cable, Main Distribution” An arterial cable, originating at a cross-
connect cabinet, and extending the cabinet pairs to the lateral
distribution cables.
28) “Cable, VF Telephone” A number of insulated conductors arranged in
pairs, each pair capable of voice frequency transmission.
29) “Cable Count (reading)” A method of designating and identifying the
individual pairs in a multi-pair cable.
30) “Call Up Time” The time between when the operator initially enters a
display request and when all objects, lines, values (good or invalid),
trends and other parts of the display have been fully presented to the
operator.
31) “Carrying Plant” That portion of telephone Outside Plant (ducts, jointing
chambers, etc.) that is used to carry and route telephone cable and
terminals.
32) “Central Office (C.O.)” See Exchange.
33) “Central Office Homerun” Type of Centralized FTTH architecture where
splitters are located inside the central office & no splitting beyond.
34) “Centralized Topology FTTH” Type of FTTH architecture where fiber
optic cable from OLT is split only once before reaching customers.
There are two types of Centralized FTTH topology namely: Central
Office Homerun and Local Convergence Point.
35) “Centrex Services” Subscriber group services utilizing the central office
PBX facility, rather than a customer owned EPABX.
36) “Circuit Breaker” A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-
automatic means and to open the circuit automatically on a
predetermined overcurrent without damage to itself when properly
applied within its rating.
37) “Coating” A layer of composite plastic material covering the fiber to
provide mechanical protection.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
38) “Color Rendering Index” Quantitative measure of the ability of a light

source to reveal the colors of various objects faithfully in comparison
with an ideal or natural light source.
39) “Community Antenna Television System (CATV)” A cable system
distributing television and radio programs from a central
reception/control point to individual subscribers, normally on a coaxial
cable.
40) “Command” Commands are sent by operators or by applications.
Commands can be binary or analog (set-point). Commands require
reliable, secure, and timely delivery. Command data shall be delivered
to its target as quickly as possible, typically in the order of seconds or
sub-seconds. If a command cannot be delivered or acted upon, the
SCADA system shall report this to the operator.
41) “Communication channel” A facility that permits signaling between two
terminals i.e. a path between master station and an RTU, PLC or a
subsystem.
42) “Communication Equipment Room (CER)” Buildings drop point to house
indoor FDT cabinets, FAT and ONT's.
43) “Communications Subsystem” The hardware and software that
performs the transmitting and receiving of digital information.
44) “Concealed” Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the
building. Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even
though they may become accessible by withdrawing them.
45) “Conduit” A single duct inside a building.
46) “Configurable” - The capability to select and connect standard hardware
modules to create a system, or the capability to change functionality or
sizing of software functions by changing parameters without having to
modify or regenerate software.
47) “Console” A collection of one or more workstations and associated
equipment such as printers and communications devices used by an
individual to interact with the SCADA and perform other functions.
48) “Continuous Load” A load where the maximum current is expected to
continue for 3 hours or more.
49) “Cross-Connection Point (CCP) or flexibility point” In the local cable
network, equipment which enables an incoming pair in a cabinet to be
connected to any of the outgoing pairs in a separate cable, by use of
jumper wires or their equivalent.
50) “Cross-Connection or Distribution Area” The geographical area served
from a cross-connection cabinet.
51) “Crosstalk” The unwanted transfer of energy from one circuit to another.
52) “Cycle” The scanning of inputs, execution of algorithms and
transmission of output values to devices.
53) “Cyclic Polling (data request)” The process by which a data acquisition
system selectively requests data from one or more of its RTUs. An RTU

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
may be requested to respond with all, or a selected portion of, the data
available.
54) “Dead Band” The range through which an input signal may be varied
without initiating an action or observable change in output signal.
55) “Dead Pair” - Within a cable, an extension of a pair that has been used,
or a pair that is not terminated at either end.
56) “Demand or Diversity Factor” - The ratio of the maximum demand of a
system, or part of a system, to the total connected load of a system for
the part of the system under consideration.
57) “Device” A unit of an electrical system that carries or controls electric
energy as its principal function.
58) “Direct Exchange Line (DEL)” A telephone pair connected between a
local switch and subscriber, by whatever means.
59) “Direct Service Area” The area in which subscriber pairs are connected
directly to the exchange without passing through a cross-connection
point.
60) “Directional Coupler” A splitter in which the attenuation between any two
output ports exceeds the sum of the attenuations between the input port
and each of those output ports.
61) “Disconnecting Means” or “Isolator” A device, or group of devices, or
other means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected
from their source of supply.
62) “Distributed / Cascaded” Type of FTTH architecture where fiber from
OLT is split twice (outside the Exchange/ or one in the Exchange & one
outside the Exchange) before reaching customers location. Splitting
may be located in Exchange, FDT, manholes, handholes or in FAT.
63) “Distribution” In conventional method of FTTH deployment this is
equivalent to the secondary cables in copper network. These are the
fiber cables that connect FDT or Cross Connect Cabinet to the last
distribution point (an FAT or a splice in a handhole) before Drops. In
short, it is the cable in between the Feeder and the Drops.
64) “Distribution Amplifier” - An amplifier designed to feed one or more
branch or spur feeders. Note: This is a general term embracing branch
amplifier and line extender amplifier.
65) “Distribution Points (DP)” The last point in the exchange area cable
network from which pairs are extended to individual subscribers.
66) “Drops” The fiber from the last distribution point up to customer's
location.
67) “Duct” A pipe provided to facilitate the installation of cables and provides
protection for the cables.
68) “Duct Bank” A multiple array of ducts.
69) “Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)” The interference in signal
transmission or reception resulting from the radiation of undesirable
frequency interfering electrical or magnetic and electrical fields.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
70) “Emergency Systems” Electrical systems legally required to be installed

and that supply loads essential to safety and life.
71) “Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications” Dedicated manual or
automatic facilities for originating and distributing voice instructions, as
well as alert and evacuation signals pertaining to a fire emergency, to
the occupants of a building.
72) “Enclosed” Surrounded by a case, housing, fence, or wall(s) that
prevents persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.
73) “Enclosure” The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls
surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally
contacting energized parts or to protect the equipment from physical
damage.
74) “Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)” Is software that allows the
integration of operations and resources and manages them through one
program. This approach to management is called Integration. Most
large companies in the world use ERP to manage various aspects of
their businesses. These are product planning, parts planning, parts
procurement and inventory management, interacting with suppliers,
providing customer service, and tracking orders. It can also include
applications to manage finance and human resources.
75) “Equipment” A general term, including material, fittings, devices,
appliances, luminaires, apparatus, machinery, and the like used as a
part of, or in connection with, an electrical installation.
76) “Equipment Side” That side of the MDF that is connected to equipment,
often called Horizontal side.
77) “Equipment System” A system of circuits and equipment arranged for
delayed, automatic, or manual connection to the alternate power source
and that serves primarily 3-phase power equipment.
78) “Erlang” A dimensionless unit that is used in telephony as a measure of
offered load or carried load on service-providing elements such as
telephone circuits or telephone switching equipment.
79) “Exchange (central office)” A system of switches enabling individual
telecommunication circuits to be automatically connected.
80) “Exchange Area” An area served by the local exchange.
81) “Faceplate” - A graphic element that mimics the front panel of an analog
controller instrument, hardwired push-button or switch.
82) “Fail-Over” Occurs automatically without user intervention, transparent
to the user.
83) “Feeder (Telecommunications)” Equivalent to the primary cables in the
copper network. The fiber cables that connect the exchange to the FDT
or a splice point in manhole that serve as a cross connect to Distribution
network.
84) “Fiber Access Terminal (FAT)” A distribution point in the distribution end
that distributes the drop fibers to each customer. It can also house
splitters to distribute drops to homes and offices

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
85) “Fiber Distribution Frame (FDF)” Exchange termination equipment

where fibers from OLT are split and jointed to Feeder cable when there
is mass FTTH deployment.
86) “Fiber Distribution Terminal (FDT)” A hub where all the fiber from the
telecom provider's central office is split and distributed to the end users.
87) “Fiber Termination Box (FTB)” Customer Lead-In Unit, installed at the
customer outer wall for termination of incoming & indoor fibers.
88) “Fiber to the Home (FTTH)” Access technology architecture that brings
fiber optic cable from the exchange direct to customer's location at high
bandwidth delivering triple play (voice, video and data) from a single
fiber.
89) “Fire Alarm” The giving, signaling or transmission to any public fire
station, or company or to any officer or employee thereof, whether by
telephone, spoken word or otherwise, of information to the effect that
there is a fire at or near the place indicated by the person giving,
signaling, or transmitting such information.
90) “Fire Alarm Control Unit” A system component that receives inputs from
automatic and manual fire alarm devices and is capable of supplying
power to detection devices and transponder(s) of off-premises
transmitter(s). The control unit is capable of providing a transfer of
power to the notification appliances and transfer of condition to relays of
devices.
91) “Fire Alarm Signal” A signal initiated by a fire alarm-initiating device
such as a manual fire alarm box, automatic fire detector, water-flow
switch, or other device whose activation is indicative of the presence of
a fire or fire signature.
92) “Fire Alarm System” A system or portion of a combination system
consisting of components and circuits arranged to monitor and
annunciate the status of fire alarm or supervisory signal-initiating
devices and to initiate the appropriate response to those signals.
93) “Fire Command Center” The principal attended or unattended location
where the status of the detection, alarm communications and control
systems is displayed, and from which system(s) can be manually
controlled.
94) “Fire Detector, Automatic” A device designed to detect the presence of a
fire signature and to initiate action.
95) “Fire Protection System” Approved devices, equipment and systems or
combinations of systems used to detect a fire, activate and alarm,
extinguish or control a fire, control or manage smoke and products of a
fire or any combination thereof.
96) “Fire Safety Functions” Building and fire control functions that are
intended to increase the level of life safety for occupants or to control
the spread of the harmful effects of fire.
97) “Flag” A character that signals the occurrence of some event. Usually, a
field of 1 bit.
98) “Footway” An area not normally accessible to vehicular traffic.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
99) “Foreign Exchange Line” A telephone connection from one local

exchange which serves a telephone station in the serving area of
another local exchange (out of area working).
100) “Gigabit Passive Optical Network (GPON)” ITU G.984 Recommendation
that describes a flexible optical fiber access network cable of supporting
bandwidth requirements of subscriber and covers system with nominal
line rates of 1.2 Gbps and 2.4 Gbps in downstream direction; and 155
Mbps up to 2.4 Gbps in the upstream direction.
101) “Handhole” A small jointing chamber of the joint box category but
restricted to footway use only.
102) “Heat Detector” A fire detector that senses heat produced by burning
substances.
103) “Initiating Device” A system component that originates transmission of a
change-of-state condition, such as in a smoke detector, manual fire
alarm box, or supervisory switch.
104) “Initiating Device Circuit (IDC)” A circuit to which automatic or manual
initiating devices are connected where the signal received does not
identify the individual device operated.
105) “Insertion Loss” The attenuation at a fixed frequency of a test tone
inserted at one end of a circuit measured at the far end of the same
circuit in a resistive termination, and recorded in dB at 20 °C.
106) “Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED)” An intelligent electronic device that
perform specific control and/or data gathering function.
107) “Intercom System” A communication system linking different rooms
within a building or other facilities.
108) “Interrupting rating” The highest current at rated voltage that a device is
intended to interrupt under standard test conditions.
109) “Installed Pair” Cable pair that has been placed and jointed.
110) “Isolator” Refer to “Disconnecting Means”.
111) “Jack” A receptacle used with a plug to make an electrical connection
between communication circuits. Jacks are considered the female
component of a jack/plug connector.
112) “Joint (splice)” The connection of two or more lengths of wire or cable at
a single point.
113) “Joint Box” A jointing chamber the top of which consists of fully
removable covers.
114) “Jointing Chamber” A general term for underground structures in which
cables are placed and jointed.
115) “Labeled” Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label,
symbol, or other identifying mark of an organization that is acceptable to
the Royal Commission and concerned with product evaluation, that
maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or
materials, and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a specified

manner.
116) “Line Extender Amplifier” An amplifier to compensate for the attenuation
in a spur feeder.
117) “Line Side” That side of the MDF that connects to outside plant cable
and that includes protectors. Often called Vertical side.
118) “Life Safety Branch” A subsystem of the emergency system consisting
of feeders and branch circuits intended to provide adequate power
needs to ensure safety to building occupants and that are automatically
connected to alternate power sources during interruption of the normal
power source.
119) “Listed” Equipment or materials included on a list published by an
approved testing laboratory, inspection agency or other organization
concerned with current product evaluation that maintains periodic
inspection of production of listed equipment or materials, and whose
listing states that equipment or materials comply with approved
nationally recognized standards and have been tested or evaluated and
found suitable for use in a specified manner.
120) “Local Convergence Point (LCP)” Type of Centralized FTTH
architecture where splitters are concentrated in an FDT or a manhole
outside the exchange.
121) “Local Area Network (LAN)” A LAN is a network used for bit serial
communication of information between interconnected, independent
devices and is completely under user jurisdiction and limited to being
within a user’s premises.
122) “Logs” Files or printouts of information in chronological order.
123) “Local Exchange” An exchange which serves subscribers in a defined
and limited geographical area.
124) “Local Exchange Code” A letter designation used to indicate the
exchange. This alpha designation will be used as part of the
designation of each jointing chamber, Interface Cabinet or Cross
Connect Cabinet, and each cable.
125) “Loudspeaker” Equipment that converts an AC electric signal into an
acoustic signal.
126) “Main Distribution Frame (MDF)” Location where copper OSP cables
are terminated inside the exchange for access to Network switch.
127) “Management Information System (MIS)” Provides information which is
needed to manage organizations efficiently and effectively.
Management Information Systems involve three primary resources:
people, technology, and information or decision making. Management
information systems are distinct from other information systems in that
they are used to analyze operational activities in the organization.
128) “Manhole” A jointing chamber, accessed via a restricted opening in the
top.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
129) “Manual Fire Alarm Box” A manually operated device used to initiate an
alarm signal.
130) “Main Incomer” Refer to “Service”.
131) “Maintenance Pair” A cable pair terminated on both ends, one end of
which assigns the pair a count and the other end terminated at a
subscriber’s premises, but not connected to subscriber apparatus.
132) “Master Station” Server or servers and software responsible for
communicating with the field equipment (RTUs, PLCs, etc.), and then to
the HMI software running on workstations in the control room, or
elsewhere. Master station may include multiple servers, distributed
software applications, and disaster recovery sites. The Master Station
includes all networks switch and connectivity devices required to
communicate with RTUs and remote sites.
133) “Multimode Fiber (MMF)” A fiber that allows more than one optical mode
to propagate. Used for shorter distances; usually a larger diameter fiber
of plastic or other low-cost material.
134) “Multiple-Station Alarm Device” Two or more single-station alarm
devices that can be interconnected such that activation of one causes
all integral or separate audible alarms to operate. It also can consist of
one single-station alarm device having connections to other detectors or
a manual fire alarm box.
135) “Multiple-Station Smoke Alarm” Two or more single-station alarm
devices that are capable of interconnection such that activation of one
causes all integral or separate audible alarms to operate.
136) “Neutral Conductor” The conductor connected to the neutral point of a
system that is intended to carry current under normal conditions.
137) “Nonlinear Load” A load where the wave shape of the steady-state
current does not follow the wave shape of the applied voltage.
138) “Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC)” A circuit or path directly connected
to a notification appliance.
139) “Nuisance Alarm” An alarm caused by mechanical failure, malfunction,
improper installation, or lack of proper maintenance, or an alarm
activated by a cause that cannot be determined.
140) “Operating System” Software that runs on computers and manages the
computer hardware and provides common services for execution of
application software.
141) “Operating Wavelength” The light wavelength at which a system is
specified, normally expressed in nanometers (nm). Most single mode
fibers can operate at 1300 or 1550 nm.
142) “Optical Distribution Frame (ODF)” Location where fibers from OLT
ports are terminated then interfaced to Feeder cable of FTTH.
143) “Optical Line terminal (OLT)” Located inside the exchange and serve as
the termination point of OSP Feeder fiber cables. This is an FTTH
access platform designed for ITU-T GPON standard to easily deliver RF

Rev. 0 5.5 - 10
video and TDM voice services while providing a smooth migration path
to IP Triple Play services.
144) “Optical Link Loss Budget” Total losses allowed for satisfactory
operation of an optical fiber system.
145) “Optical Network Terminal (ONT)” A media converter that is usually
installed outside/inside the home or buildings designed for delivering
multi line POTS, Data and Video.
146) “Optical Network Unit (ONU)” A unit located outside customer's area to
serve more customers.
147) “Outside Plant” That portion of telephone plant (including carrying plant)
between the telephone exchange building and the subscriber's
premises.
148) “Overcurrent” Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment or
the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload, short circuit,
or ground fault.
149) “Paging” Calling out the names of persons (especially by a loudspeaker
system).
150) “Panelboard” Refer to “Main Distribution Board”, “Sub Main Distribution
Board” and “Distribution Board”.
151) “Passive Optical Network (PON)” An architecture using optical
transmission system designed to carry signals via fiber optic cable from
the central office directly to end users such as businesses and multi
dwelling units. Passive means that there is no active or powered
element in between the exchange and the customer's location.
152) “Passive Optical Splitter (POS)” Split the signal bi-directionally from a
single fiber to multi fiber without any power application.
153) “Pay Telephone” A coin/card operated telephone for use by the general
public.
154) “Plug” The male component of a connection providing a method to
connect communication equipment to the communication outlets.
155) “Protocol” A strict procedure required to initiate and maintain
communication with the RTU or a PLC. Open Industry Standard
communication protocol is defined as a protocol that has a published
specification and available for all suppliers to read and implement and
will not lock the customer into a particular vendor or group. The Protocol
may be extended, or offered in subset form and supported by
publication of reference information.
156) “Public Address System” An electronic amplification system used as a
communication system in public areas.
157) “Redundant Configuration” A system and/or subsystem that provides for
a standby module with automatic switchover from the primary unit to the
standby module, in the event of a failure, without loss of a system
function. Both active and standby modules utilize diagnostics to assist
in identifying and locating failures and to permit modules to be removed
for repair and/or replacement.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 11
158) “Registered Jack (RJ)” Registered jack wiring configurations developed

by Bell System for the connection of customer premises equipment to
the public network. Registered jacks serve telephone and data
applications. The most common types are RJ45 and RJ11.
159) “Report-by-Exception” The reporting of data (e.g., from RTU to master
station) only when the data either changes state (e.g., for a status or
digital input point) or exceeds a predefined dead-band (e.g., for an
analog input point).
160) “Right-of-Way (ROW)” A bounded strip of land reserved exclusively for
one utility.
161) “Round Trip Delay (latency)” The time required for a packet of data to
travel from a specific source to a specific destination and back again.
Latency is measured by sending a packet that is returned to the sender
and the round-trip time is considered the latency.
162) “Scan” The process by which a data acquisition system interrogates
remote terminals or points for data.
163) “Security Code” A group of data bits calculated by a transmitting
terminal from the information within its message by use of a
prearranged algorithm, appended to the transmitted message, and
tested by the receiving terminal to determine the validity of the received
message.
164) “Self-Diagnostic” The capability of an electronic device to monitor its
own status and indicate faults that occur within the device.
165) “Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)” A circuit path between any combination of
addressable appliances or devices, circuit interfaces, control units, or
transmitters over which multiple system input signals or output signals
or both are carried.
166) “Single Mode Fiber (SMF)” A fiber that supports the propagation of only
one mode. Used for maximum distances; usually a small, precise
diameter (8 to 9 microns) fiber of monolithic quartz.
167) “Single-Station Smoke Alarm” An Assembly incorporating the detector,
the control equipment, and the alarm-sounding device in one unit,
operated from a power supply either in the unit or obtained at the point
of installation.
168) “Smoke Alarm” A single or multiple-station alarm responsive to smoke
and not connected to a system.
169) “Smoke Detector” A listed device that senses visible or invisible
particles of combustion.
170) “Spare Pair” A cable pair which has been terminated at one end, but is
not in service.
171) “Splice” See Joint.
172) “Splice Loss” The amount of loss of light energy caused by angular
misalignment, fiber end separation or lateral displacement of fiber axis.
173) “Splitter” A device in which the signal power at the input port is divided
equally or unequally between two or more output ports.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 12
174) “Spur Feeder” A feeder to which splitters, subscriber taps or looped

system outlet are connected.
175) “Standby Systems” Include alternate power systems for such
applications where interruption of normal power would cause discomfort
to personnel or damage to product.
176) “Station Equipment” The portion of telephone equipment installed at the
subscriber's premises.
177) “Subscribers' Apparatus” A terminal equipment which may be connected
to the public telephone network, such as telephone instruments and
sets, data terminals, telex machines, and PBX.
178) “Subscriber's Lead-in” That part of the outside plant that includes the
subscriber's line between the distribution point and subscriber's
premises.
179) “Subscriber's Lines” - The circuits connecting the subscriber's apparatus
to the local exchange.
180) “Subscriber's Service Line” - That part of the subscriber's lead-in
between the distribution point and the telephone set.
181) “Subscriber Termination” That portion of telephone plant that includes
the interface between outside plant and station equipment, normally
including the station protector.
182) “Supervisory Control” A telemetry based process control command
initiated from a Master Central Station either manually by operator or
automatically by an application to initiate an action and/or change
analog set point in a remotely located Control Stations over a
bidirectional communications link using specific communication
protocol. Such command is dependent of having quality process related
alarm/event data and follows timely bidirectional confirmation and
acknowledgment executing sequences between the master and the
station known as select/check before Operate (CBO).
183) “Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)” Refers to an
industrial computer telemetry based control system that monitors and
controls remotely connected processes.
184) “Supervising Station” A facility that receives signals and at which
personnel are in attendance at all times to respond to these signals.
185) “Supervisory Service” The service required to monitor performance of
guard tours and the operative condition of fixed suppression systems or
other systems for the protection of life and property.
186) “Supervisory Signal” A signal indicating the need of action in connection
with the supervision of guard tours, the fire suppression systems or
equipment, or the maintenance features of related systems.
187) “Supervisory Signal-Initiating Device” An initiating device such as a
valve supervisory switch, water level indicator, or low-air pressure
switch on a dry-pipe sprinkler system whose change of state signals an
off-normal condition and its restoration to normal of a fire protection or
life safety system; or a need for action in connection with guard tours,

Rev. 0 5.5 - 13
fire suppression systems or equipment, or maintenance feature of

related systems.
188) “Switchboard” A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels on
which are mounted on the face, back, or both, switches, overcurrent
and other protective devices, buses, and usually instruments.
Switchboards are generally accessible from the rear as well as from the
front and are not intended to be installed in cabinets.
189) “System Account” Refers to account names used by the operating
system.
190) “Telephone Density (line density or penetration)” Is the number of
telephones (or lines) relative to a characteristic element such as
number of inhabitants (telephones per 100 population), number of
house-holds, business premises, area units, income groups, etc., used
generally for planning purposes.
191) “Telephone Subscriber” An individual or corporation (including
government agencies, municipal authorities) with a current subscription
of one line or more.
192) “Telephone Instrument” Any apparatus equipped with a microphone and
earphone (sender and receiver) which is or may be connected to a
telephone system and which may be used for voice telephone
conversation.
193) “Telephone Station” A telephone instrument installed and connected to a
public telephone system.
194) “Terminal Block” A passive electrical device used to terminate and
cross-connect outside plant and central office equipment.
195) “Termination” The point at which pairs in a cable are terminated.
196) “Toll Cable” The cable that carries toll circuits.
197) “Toll Circuits” Circuits between one toll center and another. (such as Al-
Jubail Industrial City and Dammam).
198) “Transaction” A sequence of messages between cooperating terminals
to perform a specific function. Usually, a minimum of one message in
each direction that is comprised of a command followed by a response.
199) “Trouble Signal” A signal initiated by the fire alarm system or device
indicative of a fault in a monitored circuit or component.
200) “Trunk Amplifier” An amplifier to compensate for the attenuation in a
trunk feeder.
201) “Trunk Cable (junction cable)” A cable connecting two local telephone
exchanges.
202) “Trunk Circuit (junction circuit)” A circuit between two local telephone
exchanges.
203) “Trunk Feeder” A feeder used for the transmission of signals between a
head-end station and a distribution point or between distribution points.
204) “Twisted Pair Cable (TP)” A type of communication transmission cable
in which two individually insulated wires are twisted around each other

Rev. 0 5.5 - 14
to reduce induction (thus interference) from one wire to other. The pair
may be surrounded by a shield, insulating jacket, to form Shielded
Twisted Pair (STP) cable, otherwise it is Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP).
205) “Unit Cable” A unit shall consist of 25 cable pairs, specifically color
coded. Cables larger than 25 pairs shall be assembled as groups of
units where each unit is separated from all other units by a colored unit
binder as defined in the Guideline Specifications.
206) “Visible Alarm Notification Appliance” - notification appliance that alerts
by sense of sight.
207) “Voltage (of a circuit)” The greatest root-mean-square (rms) (effective)
difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit
concerned.
208) “Voltage, Nominal” A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for
the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (such as
400/230 volts). The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can vary
from the nominal within a range that permits satisfactory operation of
equipment.
209) “Wave Division Multiplexing (WDM)” - Multiplexing of signals by
transmitting them at different wavelengths through the same fiber.
210) “Wireless Protection System” - A system or a part of a system that can
transmit and receive signals without the aid of wire.
211) “Zone” A defined area within the protected premises. A zone can define
an area from which a signal can be received, an area to which a signal
can be sent, or an area in which a form of control can be executed.
212) Abbreviations
h. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection :
1) A: Amperes
2) AAC: Advanced Application Controllers
3) AC: Alternating Current
4) ACD: Automatic Call Distribution
5) ACI: Adjacent Channel Interference
6) ADSL: Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
8) AES: Advanced Encryption Standard
9) AFF: Above Finished Floor
10) AFFL: Above Finished Floor Level
11) AGL: Above Ground Level
12) AIM: Automated Infrastructure Management
13) ALMS: Alarm Management System
14) AND: Access Network Development

Rev. 0 5.5 - 15
15) ANN: Artificial Neural Networks

16) ANPR: Automatic Plate Number Recognition
18) AON: Active Optical Network
19) AOS: Application Object Servers
20) AP: Access Points
21) AP1: Access Service Provider
22) AP2: Application Program Interface
23) APC: Angled Physical Contact Optical Fiber Connection
24) APON: ATM Passive Optical Network
25) ARP: Address Resolution Protocol
26) ASC: Advanced Specific Controllers
27) ASI: Asynchronous Serial Interface
28) ATF: Active Tracking Filters
29) ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode
30) ATS: Automatic Transfer Switch
31) AV: Audiovisual
32) AVC: Advanced Video Coding
33) BACnet: Building Automation & Control Networks
35) BC: Building Controllers
36) BIL: Basic Impulse Insulation Level
37) BIM: Building Information Modeling
38) BITS: Bypass Isolation Transfer Switch
40) BPON: Broadband Passive Optical Network
41) BYOD: Bring Your Own Device
42) CAD: Computer-Aided Design
43) CAN: Customer Access Network
44) CAT: Category
45) CATV: Community Antenna Television System
46) CB: Customer Building
47) CBD: Central Business District
48) CBO: Check Before Operate
49) CCI: Co-Channel Interference

Rev. 0 5.5 - 16
50) CCMP: Counter Mode Cipher Block Chaining Message

Authentication Code Protocol
51) CCP: Cross-Connection Point
52) CCSO: Co-located Cabinet for Shared Operators
53) CCTV: Closed Circuit Television
54) CER: Communication Equipment Room
55) CI: Circuit Integrity
56) CMS: Condition Monitoring System
57) CO: Central Office
58) CoPP: Control Plane Protection
59) COTS: Commercial-Off-The-Shelf
60) CPE: Customer Premises Equipment
61) CR: Critical
62) CRI: Color Rendering Index
63) DAHS: Data Acquisition and Historization System
64) DAI: Dynamic ARP Inspection
65) dB: Decibel
66) dBm: Decibel-milliwatts
67) dBmV: Decibel-millivolts
68) dBµV: Decibel-microvolts
69) DC: Direct Current
70) DCS: Distributed Control System
71) DDC: Direct Digital Control
72) DEL: Direct Exchange Line
73) DFS: Dynamic Frequency Selection
74) DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
75) DID: Direct Inward Dial
76) DMS: Dynamic Message Signs
77) DMW: Digital Microwave Radio
78) DNP: Distributed Network Protocol
79) DNS: Domain Name System
80) DOD: Direct Outward Dial
81) DONCP: Device Object Naming Convention Plan
82) DP: Distribution Point
83) DSCP: Differentiated Services Code Point

Rev. 0 5.5 - 17
84) DTMF: Dual-tone Multi-Frequency Signaling

85) DVB-S: Digital Video Broadcasting — Satellite
86) DWDM: Dense Wave Division Multiplexing
87) E2E: End To End
88) EBU: Enterprise Business Unit
89) EDA: Equipment Distribution Area
90) EF: Entrance Facility
91) EIA: Electronic Industries Association
92) EIRP: Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power
93) EKTS: Electronic Key Telephone Service
94) EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility
95) EMC1: Electrical Metallic Tubing
96) EMCS: Energy Management and Control System
97) EMI: Electromagnetic Interference
98) EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing
99) EPABX: Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange
101) EPON: Ethernet Passive Optical Network
102) ER: Entrance Room
103) ER1: Equipment Room
104) ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning
105) ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute
106) FAT: Fiber Access Terminal
107) FAT1: Factory Acceptance Test
108) FC: FC Optical Fiber Connector Designation
109) FCC: Federal Communication Commission
110) FDDI: Fiber Distributed Data Interface
111) FDF: Fiber Distribution Frame
112) FDH: Fiber Distribution Hub
113) FDT: Fiber Distribution Terminal
114) FF: Foundation Fieldbus System
115) FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit
116) FNC: Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit
117) FNF: Flexible NetFlow
118) FO: Fiber Optic

Rev. 0 5.5 - 18
119) FOES: Fiber Optic Ethernet Switch

120) FSAN: Full Service Access Network
121) FSD: Functional Specification Document
122) FTB: Fiber Termination Box
123) FTP: File Transfer Protocol
124) FTTB: Fiber To the Building
125) FTTC: Fiber To the Curb (Electronic cabinets)
126) FTTH: Fiber To The Home
127) FTTP: Fiber to the Premises (Home & Business)
128) FTTX: Fiber to the (Refer to FTTB, FTTC, FTTH and FTTP)
129) GB: Gigabyte
130) Gbps: Gigabits Per Second
131) GEM Guiding Engineering Manual
132) GHz: Gigahertz
133) GI: Galvanized Iron
134) GIS: Geographical Information System
135) GPCS Guiding Procurement Construction Specifications
136) GPON: Gigabit Passive Optical Network
137) GPRS: General Practice Radio Service
138) GPS: Global Positioning System
139) GSM: Global System for Mobile
140) GUI: Graphic User Interface
141) HART: Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
142) HBU: Home Business Unit
143) HC: Horizontal Crossconnect
144) HCIS: High Commission for Industrial Security
145) HD: High Definition
146) HDA: Horizontal Distribution Area
147) HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface
148) HDPE: High Density Polyethylene
149) HDTV: High Definition Television
150) HFC: Hybrid Fiber Coaxial
151) HH: Handhole
152) HID: High Intensity Discharge
153) HMI: Human Machine Interface

Rev. 0 5.5 - 19
154) HTTP: Hypertext Transfer Protocol

155) HTTPS: HTTP Secure
157) Hz: Hertz
158) I&R: Department of Installation & Repair
159) IAMS: Instrument Asset Monitoring System
160) IC: Intermediate Crossconnect
161) ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association
162) ID: Inner Diameter
163) IDC: Initiating Device Circuit
164) IDF: Intermediate Distribution Frame
166) IED: Intelligent Electronic Devices
167) IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
168) IESNA: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
169) IFC: Issued for Construction
170) IGMP: Internet Group Management Protocol
171) IMS: Information Management System
172) IP: Internet Protocol
173) IPxx: International Protection Marking, IP Code
174) IPTV: Internet Protocol Television
175) IPv4: Internet Protocol Version 4
176) IPv6: Internet Protocol Version 6
177) IR: Infrared
178) IRD: Integrated Receiver Decoder
179) ISO: The International Organization for Standardization
180) IT: Information Technology
181) ITS: Intelligent Transportation System
182) ITU: International Telecommunication Union
183) ITU-T: ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector
184) Kbps: Kilobit Per Second
185) KHz: Kilo-hertz
187) KVM: Keyboard/Video/Mouse
188) KW: Kilo-watts

Rev. 0 5.5 - 20
189) LAN: Local Area Network

190) LC: Optical Fiber Connector Designation
191) LCD: Liquid Crystal Diode
192) LCP: Local Convergence Point
193) LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
195) LNB: Low-Noise Block Downconverter
196) LS: Life Safety
197) LV: Low Voltage
198) MAC: Media Access Control (Common use is MAC Address)
199) MAN: Metropolitan Area Network
200) Mbps: Megabits Per Second
201) MC: Main Cross-Connect
202) MC1: Media Converter
203) MCIT: Ministry of Communication and Information Technology
204) MDA: Main Distribution Area
205) MDB: Main Distribution Board
206) MDF: Main Distribution Frame
207) MDNS: Multicast Domain Name System
208) MDU: Multi Dwelling Unit
209) MH: Manhole
210) MHz: Megahertz
211) MIMO: Multiple Input/Multiple Output
212) MIS:: Metering Installation Standard
213) MLD: Multicast Listener Discovery
214) MMF: Multimode Fiber
215) MPEG: Moving Picture Experts Group
216) MPLS: Multiprotocol Label Switching
217) MPLS-TP: Multiprotocol Label Switching Transport Profile
218) MPTS: Multiple Program Transport Stream
219) MRO: Multicast Rate Optimization
220) MTU: Master Terminal Unit
221) MU-MIMO Multiple User - Multiple Input/Multiple Output
222) MVA: Mega-volt-amperes
223) MW: Mega-watts

Rev. 0 5.5 - 21
224) NAC: Notification Appliance Circuit

225) NAG: Needed Acoustical Gain
226) NAP: Network Access Point
227) NAT: Network Address Translation
228) NC: Noise Criteria
229) Ne: Network Engineer Tool System
230) NEC: National Electrical
Code 231)
233) Nm: Nanometer
234) NTP: Network Time Protocol
235) NVR: Network Video Recorder
236) OCR: Optical Character Recognition
237) ODB: Optical Distribution Box
238) ODF: Optical Distribution Frame
239) ODN: Optical Distribution Network
240) OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer
241) OFNP: Optical Fiber Nonconductive Plenum
242) OLT: Optical Line Termination
243) OM3: Optical Multimode Fiber Designation
244) ONT: Optical Network Terminal
245) ONU: Optical Network Unit
246) OS: Optional Standby
247) OSP: Outside Plant (Cabling)
248) OTDR: Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
249) P2MP: Point To Multi Point
250) PAG: Potential Acoustic Gain
251) PAN: Plant Automatic Network
252) PAS: Process Automation System
253) PBX: Private Branch Exchange
254) PC: Personal Computer
255) PCS: Process Control System
256) PD: Powered Device (PoE)
257) PDA: Personal Digital Assistant
258) PDR: Preliminary Design Review

Rev. 0 5.5 - 22
259) PDU: Power Distribution Unit

260) PEC: Polyethylene Corrugated
261) PF: Power Factor
262) PHY: Physical Layer
263) PIP: Picture in Picture
264) PIR: Passive Infrared
265) PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
266) PMD: Physical Medium Dependent Layer
267) PoE: Power Over Ethernet
268) PoE+: PoE Plus
269) PON: Passive Optical Network
270) POP: Point Of Presence.
271) POS: Passive Optical Splitter
272) POTS: Plain Old Telephone System
273) PPE: Personal Protective Equipment
274) PSE: Power Sourcing Equipment (PoE)
275) PSK: Pre-Shared Key
276) PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network
277) PTP(P2P): Point To Point
278) PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride
279) QAM: Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
280) QoS: Quality of Service
281) R2-MFC: R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling System
282) RA Guard: Router Advertisement Guard
283) RBE: Report by Exception
284) RC: Royal Commission
286) RF: Radio Frequency
287) RFC: Request For Comments
288) RFI: Radio Frequency Interference
289) RMU: Ring Main Unit
290) RJ: Registered Jack
291) RMS: Root Mean Squared
292) RNC: Rigid Non-metallic Conduit
293) ROADM: Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

Rev. 0 5.5 - 23
294) ROW: Right of Way

295) RSC: Rigid Steel Conduit
296) RSSI: Received Signal Strength
297) RTP: Real-time Transport Protocol
298) RTCP: RTP Control Protocol
299) RTSP: Real Time Streaming Protocol
300) RTU: Remote Terminal Unit
301) RU: Rack Unit
302) SA: Smart Actuators
303) SAES: Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards
304) SAN: Storage Area Network
305) SAR: Specific Absorption Rate
306) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standards Organization or Saudi
Standards, Metrology and Quality Organization
307) SATV: Satellite Television
309) SC: SC Optical Fiber Connector Designation
310) SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
311) SD: Standard Definition
313) SDMS: SEC Distribution Materials Specification
314) SFP: Small Form-Factor Pluggable
315) SFP+: Enhanced Small Form-Factor Pluggable
316) SLC: Signal Line Circuit
317) SDU: Single Dwelling Unit
318) SDV:: Switched Digital Video
319) SEI: Software Engineering Institute
320) SFU: Single Family Unit
321) SI: International System of Units
322) SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
323) SMF: Singlemode Fiber
324) SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
325) SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol
326) SNTP: Simple Network Time Protocol
327) SOA: Service Oriented Architecture

Rev. 0 5.5 - 24
328) SO/HO: Small Office/Home Office

329) SOIC: Single Operator Independent Cabinet
330) SLC: Signaling Line Circuits
331) SPD: Surge Protection Device
332) SPTS: Single Program Transport Stream
333) SQL: Database Product of Microsoft Corporation
334) SS: Smart Sensors
335) SSDP: Simple Service Discovery Protocol
336) ST: ST Optical Fiber Connector Designation
337) STB: Set Top Box
338) STP: Shielded Twisted Pair
339) STC: Saudi Telecom Company
340) TCDD: Typical Construction Drawing Details
341) TCP: Transmission Control Protocol
342) TDM: Time Division Multiplexing in Downstream
343) TDMA: Time Division Multiple Access in Upstream
344) TE: Telecommunications Enclosures
345) TGB: Telecommunications Grounding Busbar
346) TKIP: Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
347) TMC: Traffic Management Center
348) TMGB: Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar
349) TOS: Type of Service
350) TP: Twisted Pair
351) TPC: Transmit Power Control
352) TR: Telecommunications Rooms
353) TSP: Telecommunications Service Provider
354) TV: Television
355) TVSS: Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
356) UDDI: Universal Description Discovery and Integration
357) UDP: User Datagram Protocol
358) UHF: Ultra High Frequency
359) UL: Underwriters Laboratories
360) UPOE: Universal Power over Ethernet
362) uPVC: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride

Rev. 0 5.5 - 25
363) UPnP: Universal Plug and Play

364) USB: Universal Serial Bus
365) UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair
366) UV: Ultraviolet
367) V: Volts
368) VESDA: Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus
369) VCP: Vendor Control Panel
370) VF: Voice Frequency
371) VID: Video Image Detection
372) VGA: Video Graphics Array
373) VHF: Very High Frequency
374) VHT: Very High Throughput
375) VLAN: Virtual Local Area Network
376) VMS: Vibration Monitoring System
377) VN: Virtual Network Interface
378) VOD: Video on Demand
379) VoIP: Voice over Internet Protocol
380) VPN: Virtual Private Network
381) W: Watts
382) WAN: Wide Area Network
383) WAP: Wireless Access Point
384) WDM: Wavelength Division Multiplexing
385) WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy
386) Wi-Fi: Wi-Fi Alliance Trademark for IEEE 802.11 WLAN Products
387) WIPS: Wireless Intrusion Prevention System
388) WLAN: Wireless Local Area Network
389) WMM: Wi-Fi Multimedia
390) WPA2: Wi-Fi Protected Access II
391) WUXGA: Widescreen Ultra Extended Graphics Array
392) XFP: 10 Gigabit Small Form-Factor Pluggable
393) XML: Extensible Markup Language
394) ZDA: Zone Distribution Area
2. Codes
a. Refer to Chapter 3 Codes and Performance Standards for a list of applicable
Codes.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 26
b. In addition to the aforementioned - All equipment and material and its

installation shall conform to the current requirements of the following
authorities:
1) Saudi Building Code 401 Electrical Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code 501 Mechanical Requirements
4) Saudi Building Code 201 Architectural Requirements
6) Saudi Building Code Chapter 801 Fire Protection Requirements
8) Standards and References
c. All work shall conform to the applicable industry Codes, Standards and
Associations.
d. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used wherever
applicable. These standards are listed alphabetically and do not indicate the
priority for application with regards to design of the telecommunications
systems. In case of conflict, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall propose
equipment conforming to one group of Codes and Standards.
1) AISI American Iron and Steel Institute/Steel Product Manual
2) ANSI American National Standards Institute
3) ANSI/ISA American National Standards Institute / The
Instrumentation Society of Automation
4) API American Petroleum Institute
5) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers
6) ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
7) BSI British Standards Institution
8) BICSI Building Industries Consulting Service International
9) EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
10) EPRI Electric Power Research Institute
11) ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
12) FCI Fluid Control Institute
13) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
14) IEC International Electro-Technical Commission
16) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
17) INFOCOMM Infocomm International
18) ISA The International Society of Automation

Rev. 0 5.5 - 27
19) ISO International Organization for Standardization

20) MIL-STD Military Standard
21) NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
22) NECA National Exchange Carrier Association
24) ONVIF Open Network Video Interface Forum
25) RCER Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
26) SAEP Saudi Aramco Engineering Procedures
27) SAES Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards
28) SAMSS Saudi Aramco Material System Specifications
30) SDMS Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Materials
Specification
33) STES Saudi Electricity Company Transmission Engineering
Standard
34) SEI Software Engineering Institute
35) TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
36) UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
37) Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Alliance Trademark for IEEE 802.11 WLAN
Products
e. Specific Standards which are referenced in this Subsection of the GEM include
the following:
1) ANSI/BICSI 001-2009, Information Transport Systems Design Standard
for K-12 Educational Institutions
2) ANSI/BICSI 002-2011, Data Center Design and Implementation Best
Practices
3) ANSI/BICSI 003-2014, Building Information Modeling (BIM) Practices
for Information Technology Systems
4) ANSI/BICSI 004-2012, Information Technology Systems Design and
Implementation Best Practices for Healthcare Institutions and Facilities
5) ANSI/BICSI 005-2013, Electronic Safety and Security (ESS) System
Design and Implementation Best Practices
6) ANSI/IES RP-7, American National Standard Practice for Industrial
Lighting
7) ANSI/INFOCOMM 1M-2009, Audio Coverage Uniformity in Enclosed
Listener Areas

Rev. 0 5.5 - 120
8) ANSI/INFOCOMM 2M-2010, Standard Guide for Audiovisual Systems

Design and Coordination Processes
9) ANSI/INFOCOMM 3M-2011, Projected Image System Contrast Ratio
10) ANSI/INFOCOMM 4:2012, Audiovisual Systems Energy Management
11) ANSI/INFOCOMM 10:2013, Audiovisual Systems Performance
Verification
12) ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006, Standard for Installing Commercial
Building Telecommunications Cabling
13) ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises
14) ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
15) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling
and Components
16) ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components
17) ANSI/TIA-568-C.4, Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components
18) ANSI/TIA-569-C, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
19) ANSI/TIA-570-C, Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure
Standard
20) ANSI/TIA-606-B, Administration Standard Telecommunications
Infrastructure
21) ANSI/TIA-607-B, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and
Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
22) ANSI/TIA-758-A, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications
Cabling Standard
23) ANSI/TIA-862-A, Building Automation Cabling Standard
24) ANSI/TIA-942-A, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data
Centers
25) ANSI/TIA-1005-A, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for
Industrial Premises
26) ANSI/TIA-1152, Requirements for Field Test Instruments and
Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling
27) ANSI/TIA-1179, Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure
28) ANSI/TIA-1183, Measurement Methods and Test Fixtures for Balun-
Less Measurements of Balanced Components and Systems
29) BICSI Electronic Safety and Security Design Reference Manual, 3rd
Edition
30) BICSI Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual,
6th Edition
31) BICSI Network Systems and Commissioning (NSC) reference, 1st
Edition

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
32) BICSI Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 5th Edition

33) BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 13th Edition
34) ETSI ETS 300 119-X Equipment Engineering
35) IEC 60332 Tests On Electric and Optical Fibre Cables Under Fire
Conditions
36) IEC 60581-7 High Fidelity Audio Equipment and Systems: Minimum
Performance Requirements. Part 7: Loudspeakers
37) IEC 60754 Test On Gases Evolved During Combustion of Electric
Cables
38) IEC 60849 Sound Systems for Emergency Purposes
39) IEEE 802.1, Bridging & Management
40) IEEE 802.2, Logical Link Control
41) IEEE 802.3, Ethernet
42) IEEE 802.11, Wireless LANs
43) IEEE 802.15, Wireless PANs
44) IEEE 802.16, Broadband Wireless MANs
45) IEEE 802.17, Resilient Packet Rings
46) IEEE 802.20, Mobile Broadband Wireless Access
47) IEEE 802.21, Media Independent Handover Services
48) IEEE 802.22, Wireless Regional Area Networks
49) IES/INFOCOMM RP-38-1X, Videoconferencing Lighting
50) INFOCOMM 5M-201X, Display Image Size for 2D Content
51) INFOCOMM 8M-201X, Audio System Spectral Balance
52) ISA/INFOCOMM 111.01, Unified Automation for Buildings - Part 1:
Terminology and Concepts
53) ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.2, Customer Premises
54) ISO 11064 Ergonomic Design of Control Centres
55) ISO/IEC 15018 Edition 1.0, Generic Cabling for Homes
56) ISO/IEC 14763-2 Edition 1.0, Planning and Installation
57) ISO/IEC 14763-3 Edition 1.1, Testing of Optical Fiber Cabling
58) ISO/IEC 18598 Draft, Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM)
Systems
59) ISO/IEC 24702 Edition 1.0, Industrial Premises
60) ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0, Generic Cabling Systems For Data Centers
61) ITU-T G.652D, Characteristics of Single Mode Optical fibers
62) ITU-T G.657A, Characteristics of bending loss insensitive single mode
optical fiber and cable for the access network

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
63) Mobily Design Guidelines, Access Network Development (AND+)

Phase III Revision – 05 (09.09.2013)
64) Mobily Micro Bundled Duct Specification
65) Mobily Standard UPL-2012
66) NECA/BICSI 607-2011, Standard for Telecommunications Bonding and
Grounding Planning and Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings
67) ONVIF Open Network Video Interface Forum
68) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) Engineering Standards and
Specifications, latest edition
69) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) TS 2111, Cables, Fiber Optic, Single
Mode (SM)
70) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) TS 2116, Cables, Fiber Optic, Single
Mode (SM), Mini Type, (Outdoor)
71) Saudi Telecom Company (STC), Fiber to the Home (MoP & Guidelines)
STC-2005
72) Saudi Telecom Company (STC), FTTH Design Guidelines
73) TIA TSB-140, Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and
Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems
74) TIA TSB-155-A, Guidelines for the Assessment and Mitigation of
Installed Category 6 Cabling to Support 10GBASE-T
75) TIA TSB-162-A, Telecommunications Cabling Guidelines for Wireless
Access Points
76) TIA TSB-184, Guidelines for Supporting Power Delivery Over Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling
77) TIA TSB-190, Guidelines on Shared Pathways and Shared Sheaths
78) TIA/EIA-598A, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
B. Commissioning
• References
b. Refer to Subsection 4.5.9 Startup, Commissioning and Training for
commissioning requirements.
C. Communications Systems
(a) Local Area Network
b. System Description
1) Where the works interface with Telecom Service Provider (TSP), such
as Saudi Telecom (STC), the equipment/materials and installation shall
comply with most recent STC regulation and standards.
2) The system provided shall be compatible with existing installed RCJ
network appliances and Network Management System (NMS).

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
3) Local Area Network (LAN) within each RCJ facility shall be connected to
the RCJ Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) via an uplink from the LAN
core / distribution switch.
4) Internet connectivity for RCJ facilities is generally provided through the
RCJ MAN. Dedicated firewall appliances are generally not provided
within local facilities.
5) All network solutions must be designed to be fault tolerant, with fallback,
diverse routed solution that will allow continued connectivity if single
point failures occur.
6) All components of the Structured Cabling System shall be supplied from
a single manufacturer and be installed by qualified technicians. A
manufacturer’s warranty for the system shall be issued lasting for a
minimum of 10 years commencing from hand over of the building.
7) The projects shall provide and install all necessary cable and related
hardware to connect all existing servers within the Royal Commission
backbone switch that shall ensure dedicated individual communication
speeds up to 10 Gbps within the core/distribution down to the access
layer. Exceptions exist for facilities that do not require 10 Gbps such as
utility equipment buildings and spaces with low bandwidth
requirements.
8) The project shall include remote management tools that, at a minimum,
provide full network management, real time reports of performance, and
alert notifications in graphic format, to support groups or helpdesk.
9) All site tests in accordance with approved test procedures shall be
provided to ensure that the equipment and related accessories comply
with specifications and operational requirements. All tests are subject to
witnessing by the Royal Commission’s representative. Site tests are
listed in the GPCS.
c. Network Equipment
1) The network equipment shall be compatible with existing installed network
appliances and Network Management System (NMS).
2) The cabled LAN components shall be provided in facility Telecom Rooms.
3) The LAN shall be provisioned with 20% spare port capacity on all access
layer switches for future.
4) LAN switches shall have the option of integrated wireless controller
capability with up to 40G of wireless capacity per switch, support for up to 50
access points and 2000 wireless clients on each switching entity (switch or
stack).
5) LAN switches shall be configured with 24 / 48 port 10/100/1000BASE-T
Ethernet copper interfaces or 12 / 24 / 48 SFP ports for optical connections.
6) LAN access switches shall be built to offer stacking throughput architecture,
allowing additions, deletions and redeployment without interruption.
Additionally, power stacking among stack members shall permit power
redundancy.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
7) LAN access switches shall be configured with dual redundant, modular

power supplies and modular fans providing redundancy.
8) LAN access switches shall contain full IEEE 802.3 at (PoE+) with 30W
power on all copper ports in 1 rack unit (RU) form factor.
9) Provide software support for IPv4 and IPv6 routing, multicast routing,
modular quality of service (QoS), Flexible NetFlow (FNF), and enhanced
security features.
10) Configure LAN access switches for PoE/PoE+ on all ports.
11) Configure LAN access switches with uplinks as required supporting
singlemode fiber. The LAN shall support uplink modules consisting of
Gigabit Ethernet or 10 Gigabit Ethernet with Small Form-Factor Pluggable
(SFP) and SFP+ receptacles.
12) Enable security features for wired plus wireless users such as IEEE 802.1x,
port security, Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Snooping and
Guard, Dynamic ARP Inspection, RA Guard, IP Source Guard, control plane
protection (CoPP), and wireless intrusion prevention systems (WIPSs).
13) The LAN shall be optimized for multicast for wired plus wireless. Implement
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping.
14) Access switches shall support both layer 2 switching and layer 3 routing
protocols.
15) Enable Inter-VLAN IP routing for full Layer 3 routing between 2 or more
VLANs.
16) Provision QoS and VLAN’s per RCJ requirements.
17) Provide network management software for centralized management.
18) A maintenance support contract with next-business day replacement and
free phone technical assistance shall be available from the product
manufacturer directly.
19) In installations where existing switches are in place, PoE injectors may be
required:
(a) PoE injector shall deliver connectivity to 802.3 at-compliant devices.
(b) PoE injector shall provide two 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet ports: 1
data uplink, 1 power+data
(c) PoE injector shall be equipped with LED to indicate power.
20) Proactive Maintenance Program
(a) Program shall provide global 24-hour access to system experts
(b) Self-help support through online communities, resources, and tools
(c) Advanced hardware replacement options, including 2-hour, 4-hour and
next business day
(d) Operating System software updates applicable to licensed feature set
(e) On-site support for remedial hardware maintenance service
(f) Proactive diagnostics and immediate alerts on core network devices

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
2. Metropolitan Area Network

a. System Description
1) Wide Area Network connectivity shall be provided to sites/nodes as
identified by the RJC using a Metropolitan Area Network (MAN).
(a) The network connectivity shall support site/node connections
including but not limited to:
(1) IP based security cameras
(2) Intelligent Transportation System components such as
information displays
2) The Metropolitan Area Network connects sites/nodes within geographic
proximity in a logical access ring topology using RCJ standard
singlemode optical fiber strands.
3) Access rings are numbered sequentially for administration purposes
and typically may contain up to 10 sites/nodes. Each site/node is
identified by site number and name, as approved by the RCJ.
4) New facilities shall be assigned to a new node on a new or existing
access ring, with optical fiber strands provided as needed for physical
ring connections to adjacent sites/nodes in the ring.
5) Each end of an access ring shall be connected to two different
backbone nodes to provide redundancy.
6) New access rings shall be assigned and connected to a specific node
on the backbone ring, as identified by the RCJ.
7) Optical fiber utilized in the system shall be singlemode conforming to
the ITU-T G.652 standard.
b. System Topologies
1) The MAN shall support Carrier Packet Transport as a carrier class
converged and aggregation platform for unified packet transport
architectures.
2) The MAN shall consist of a Packet-Optical Transport System (P-OTS)
built on standards-based MPLS-Transport Profile (MPLS-TP) for
Ethernet aggregation and transport.
3) The MAN shall provide dense hierarchical QoS and support for Layer 2
services and features, using MPLS-TP, MPLS or Layer 2 Ethernet
based technologies.
4) The MAN shall support transport-class network timing, support of
network-synchronized services and applications such as mobile
backhaul and migration of TDM services.
5) Dense wave division multiplexing (DWDM) supporting Gigabit Ethernet
and 10 Gigabit Ethernet packet-optical transport shall be provided
within the core backbone ring.
c. Network Components
1) Backbone Ring Nodes

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
(a) The backbone node consists of a rack mounted chassis to be

provided in Telecom Room equipment cabinet locations identified by
the RCJ through coordination with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
(b) The backbone node shall support 480 GB total switch capacity.
(c) The backbone node shall support 30 channels of 10 Gigabit
Ethernet in the backbone ring.
(d) The backbone node shall be a modular platform consisting of
transport fabric cards and modules.
(e) The backbone node shall be configured to support access ring
nodes comprising an access ring. Final configuration of the
backbone node cards and modules shall be coordinated with the
RCJ to meet the requirements of the network expansion.
(f) The backbone node shall be connected to the backbone ring
through a provider edge router and a DWDM multiservice transport
platform supporting reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexers
(ROADMs) for management of fiber wavelengths.
2) Access Ring Nodes
(a) The access ring node consists of a rack mounted chassis to be
provided in Telecom Room equipment cabinet locations identified by
the RCJ through coordination with the A/E and/or EPC Contractor.
Typically in new facilities, this shall be located in the main Telecom
Room or Server Room.
(b) The access node is a satellite shelf that provides remote port
expansion for the backbone node. The access node shall be
managed virtually as part of the backbone node.
(c) The access node is a fixed configuration platform supporting 44
SFP- based Gigabit Ethernet ports and four SFP+ 10 Gigabit
Ethernet uplink ports.
(d) In order to distribute Ethernet network service within a site, the
access node is connected to a 24 port Fiber Optic Ethernet Switch
(FOES) utilizing an SFP Gigabit Ethernet port. The FOES then
distributes Gigabit Ethernet over optical fiber SFP connections to
Power over Ethernet edge switches. Ethernet edge switches
provide Gigabit Ethernet utilizing Category 6 UTP copper cables.
d. Intelligent Transportation Systems
1) The Metropolitan Area Network shall be utilized to support network
connectivity to systems and devices used in Intelligent Transportation
Systems (ITS) where new development occurs. Within existing urban
areas, use of other existing communications networks shall be
investigated, including service provider leased lines and wireless
systems.
2) Coordination shall occur with project Civil designs that establish the
requirements for ITS systems. These design requirements include final
locations, quantities, and mounting conditions of devices and equipment
as well as device communications interface requirements.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
3) ITS systems require reliable and some redundant connections. Where

practical, redundant and diverse connections shall be available to
critical components of the ITS system to minimize outage downtimes.
Component bandwidth requirements for ITS systems are typically low
with the exception of CCTV video surveillance cameras, which may
require up to 5 Mbps of bandwidth each.
4) ITS systems are designed to facilitate future growth, expansion, and
capabilities. The MAN shall be provisioned to support future needs of
the ITS system as planned by the Civil design of the project.
5) ITS components requiring MAN connections may include the following:
(a) Traffic and transport data gathering
(1) Closed circuit video surveillance
(i) General monitoring of roads and highways
 Where recommended by traffic police, provide red
light intersection ANPR cameras.
 ANPR cameras shall be located on selected DMS
gantries for freeway data collection and enforcement.
 In urban areas, significant junctions shall be provided
with camera coverage down each arm of the junction
providing adequate coverage.
 On freeways where full surveillance is required, a
camera shall ultimately be provided every 1 to 1.5 km.
ANPR cameras shall be provided in order to measure
link speed and journey times.
 On Road Intersections, Hybrid Radar and Video
Vehicle Detection Cameras shall be installed, these
Cameras shall comply at a minimum with the
following: Video and radar sensors sealed in
waterproof and dust tight housing which meet IP65
standards, Operating Temperature of -40°C to 60°C ,
MPEG-4 streaming via Ethernet.
(ii) Bus locations
(iii) Car park occupancy
(2) Traffic counting sensors
(i) Where appropriate, additional sensors used for counting
traffic shall be implemented, in addition to ANPR cameras.
(3) Visibility Sensors
(i) Several visibility sensors shall be provided around the
network to detect fog and sandstorms to provide warnings
and reduce speed limits.
(b) Traffic control
(1) Access control to secure areas
(2) Traffic and pedestrian signaling

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
(a) Traffic and transport information

(1) Dynamic message signs (DMS)
(i) Typically located at interchanges, entrances, and exits to
provide traffic condition information.
(ii) DMS provide four lines of text, variable speed limits, and
pictographic warnings. In addition, the sign may provide
journey time, date, time, and temperature.
(2) Provision of data to satellite navigation systems
(3) Provision of information to broadcast media for traffic reporting
(4) Provision of bus arrival at bus stops
(b) Payment Systems
(1) Integrating ticketing systems for public transport
(2) Car park payment
(3) Toll collection
2) Traffic Management Center (TMC)
(a) The TMC is a facility that shall contain the central computer systems
running a suite of integrated ITS programs and sub-systems that
allow communication with field equipment, collection of data, and
control.
(b) The TMC shall contain a server room conforming to TIA/EIA 942
which shall be connected to a MAN access ring.
3. FTTH
a. Jubail Community FTTH System Deployment Description
1) Within Jubail Industrial City are two types of FTTH/GPON systems in
use.
(a) The RCJ FTTH/GPON network is owned and operated by the RCJ.
This RCJ system shall consists of a fiber distribution network
utilizing GPON wave division multiplexing to extend services to
residential homes, apartments, and villas within various districts.
This network is implemented primarily for distribution of IPTV
services. The design of the system shall meet the guidelines
described in the GEM.
(b) The TSP (Telecommunication Service Provider) FTTH/GPON is
provided by either STC or Mobily per STC/Mobily standards, not by
the RCJ. Coordinate with the TSP to plan infrastructure
components that may be shared between the RC and TSP
FTTH/GPON as required by each project. This may include
manholes, ductbanks, and FDT cabinets.
2) The RCJ FTTH system design shall be similar to the TSP FTTH design,
but incorporate specific RC requirements outlined in the GEM. The
GEM shall not provide design requirements for TSP FTTH/GPON
System. The following TSP standards may be used for reference only:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
(a) Mobily Design Guidelines for Access Network Development

(AND+) Phase III – Revision -05 (09.09.2013)
(b) STC FTTH Design Guidelines, Doc. Number GL 621211-02-03, 23
May, 2010
(c) STC Fiber to the Home 2005
Coordinate with the TSP’s (STC and/or Mobily) to request the most
recent standard revisions governing the TSP FTTH/GPON networks.
b. RCJ FTTH GPON System Description
1) The RCJ FTTH GPON system shall accept IPTV system signals which
are combined, multiplexed, converted to light signals & interfaced to a
single fiber by the Optical Line Terminal (OLT) placed within the
exchange. The signals are transported & distributed to the end users,
directly or through splitters, where the signals are converted through the
Optical Network Terminal (ONT) to electrical signals.
2) The system shall support optical access GPON with a minimum 2.5
Gbps downstream line rate, 1.2 Gbps upstream line rate, and a 20
kilometer reach on an IP platform.
3) The RCJ FTTH GPON system is distributed from central IPTV headend
buildings located within each district served. The central IPTV headend
building contains the IPTV headend equipment racks, Optical Line
Terminator (OLT) system equipment racks, and Optical Distribution
Frame (ODF) equipment racks. For detailed requirements for the RCJ
IPTV headend, refer to GEM Section 5.5.2.C.8 Distributed Television
System.
4) The ODF contains a Fiber Distribution Frame (FDF) consisting of
exchange termination equipment where fibers from the OLT are jointed
to feeder optical fiber cables for mass FTTH deployment.
5) The OLT and ODF serve as the final termination point of feeder optical
fiber cables. The feeder optical fiber cables are distributed directly into
the underground duct systems from inside the IPTV headend building.
6) The GPON system underground distribution is provided in parallel to a
similarly built out, but separate, GPON system provided by the TSP.
Within the underground distribution system, generally the same
manholes are shared between the RCJ GPON network and the TSP
GPON network. Underground conduits within ductbanks shall be
designated for use by the RCJ or the TSP.
7) Optical fiber feeder cables are routed from the OLT through the
underground distribution system to Fiber Distribution Terminals (FDT’s).
FDT’s are located throughout the district area, serving multiple blocks of
residential community area. FDT’s consist of pedestal style outdoor
enclosures that house Optical Distribution Frames (ODF’s). ODF’s are
racked in shelves on a frame within the FDT and provide passive optical
splitting. The FDT’s are typically located in pairs in the same vicinity,
with one designated for the RCJ GPON, and the other provided by the
TSP for the TSP GPON.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 130
8) From each FDT, distribution optical fiber cables are routed through
district blocks to Fiber Access Terminals (FAT’s). FAT’s are located in
pairs, one designated for the RCJ GPON, and the other the TSP
GPON.
9) FAT’s provide a splicing location for distribution optical fiber cables to
interface with drop fiber optic cables. Drop optical fiber optic cables
extend to customer premises for termination in Optical Network
Terminals (ONT’s). The ONT is a media converter that is installed inside
the home or buildings designed for delivering IPTV signals.
10) Splitter attenuation loss should be within the system standards. Each
splitter configuration is assigned a particular maximum split ratio loss,
including connectors, defined by the ITU G.671 standard.
11) Optical fiber utilized in the system shall be singlemode conforming to
the ITU-T G.652 standard.
c. RCJ FTTH GPON System Optical Line Terminator (OLT) Requirements
1) OLT’s shall standardize on line cards with a minimum of 16 PON ports
per card.
2) The OLT’s shall be central office chassis based and mounted in ETSI
standard equipment racks within the central IPTV headend building.
The equipment rack shall meet the recommendations of the OLT
system manufacturer.
3) Each equipment rack shall support two (2) OLT chassis’ and a system -
48V redundant DC power supply located at the top of the rack.
4) The equipment racks shall be arranged in one or more rack lines with
overhead cable tray installed above for optical fiber cable management.
5) The OLT performs aggregation to the IPTV network switch distribution.
The OLT has interface slots for GPON line termination cards and
network termination cards. Services are delivered via GPON interfaces
using a single fiber with two wave lengths (receive and transmit)
multiplexed together. A third wavelength can also be multiplexed for
downstream RF video over the same fiber; however this feature is not
currently used by the RCJ. The line termination cards support a
minimum of 4 ports each, permitting a minimum of 56 PON interfaces in
total. The GPON interfaces comply with Full Service Access Network
(FSAN) recommendations and International Telecommunications Union
Telecom (ITU-T) sector standards for optics, line rates, data transfer
protocol and management interface.
6) IPTV network traffic aggregation and uplink shall be provided by using
network termination cards within the OLT. The network termination card
shall support a 48 Gbps Ethernet switch fabric with integrated Gigabit
Ethernet (1 Gigabit Ethernet) uplink interfaces using small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) optics, as well as a single 10 Gigabit Ethernet uplink
interface using XFP pluggable optics. Two network termination cards
shall be provided for redundancy and load sharing, enabling 96 Gbps
switching capacity. Coordinate with the RCJ IT Department to determine
the IPTV system uplink interfaces required for network termination
cards.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
d. RCJ FTTH GPON System Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) Requirements

(ISP)
1) Inside plant ODF’s reside within the IPTV headend building and contain
FDF’s accepting optical fibers extending from the OLT’s.
2) The inside plant ODF equipment is mounted in an ETSI standard
equipment rack and can accommodate multiples of rack height 1U (44.4
mm) or 2U (88.8 mm). The ODF equipment rack shall have integral
large capacity vertical managers, full height on each side, for
organization of optical fiber cabling.
3) The ODF equipment rack is located at the end of the rack line of OLT
equipment racks.
4) The ODF serves as the interface/cross connect facility between optical
fibers extending from the OLT and the feeder optical fiber cables from
the outside plant distribution.
5) The ODF optical fiber interconnects and crossconnects shall utilize
LC/APC connectors.
6) A network of 200mm deep, 450mm wide ladder tray with 300mm rung
spacing shall be provided over system rack lines for routing OLT power
feeds and feeder optical fiber cable subducts.
7) Optical fiber cabling from the OLT’s to the indoor ODF shall be routed in
dedicated fiber wireways, minimum 50mm square, located within the
overhead ladder cable tray above the equipment rack lines.
8) Each feeder optical fiber cable shall be routed in a dedicated subduct
from the ODF to the IPTV headend building point of entrance for
distribution outside plant ducts through the underground distribution
system. Refer to GEM Section 5.5.2.E.1 Outside Plant Infrastructure for
detailed outside plant requirements.
e. RCJ FTTH GPON System Feeder Optical Fiber Cable Requirements
1) Optical fiber cabling for feeder cables shall consist of single mode,
loose tube available from 12F-288F.
2) The feeder optical fiber cable network commences from the exchange
(OLT, ODF/ FDF) and ends at the splitter point, at the outdoor FDT
Cabinet. The feeder portion of the network is provided over long
distances, with the objective of minimizing splice points and splitters in
the network.
3) The location and routing of feeder fiber routes should take into
consideration the overall "link budget" (attenuation) and the position of
easy access facilities like FDT's and FAT's that house splitters and drop
fibers.
4) The minimum feeder optical fiber cables size to each FDT shall be 24F.
5) Feeder optical cable size (round off to nearest cable size) = Ultimate
number of splitters / FDT sizes + Ultimate demand forecast within FDT
serving area to meet multi-tenant buildings + 20 % for maintenance &
unforeseen demand. The number of main feeder cables is then
determined by dividing the number of fibers calculated above by the

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
size of cable (24F, 36F, 48F, 72F, 96F, 144F or 288F) and the remainder
is rounded off to the nearest cable size to obtain total number of feeder
cables.
f. RCJ FTTH GPON System Outdoor Fiber Distribution Terminal (FDT)
Requirements
1) The outdoor FDT is placed strategically in the FTTH network to facilitate
service connections for fiber serving areas defined by the scope of the
project.
2) The FDT provides environmental and mechanical protection for cables,
splices, connectors and passive optical splitters.
3) The FDT provides the transition point and management for feeder and
distribution optical fiber cables using ODF splitters and point to point
(P2P) connections.
4) ODF Splitters
(a) The FDT typically accommodates ODF splitters with (1:32) splitting
ratio. However, each project may require various splitter ratios to
meet project demands such as 1:X where X=2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and
128. Higher split ratios however reduce the effective cabling
distances and reduce serving area sizes due to additional optical
split ratio loss.
(b) ODF splitter modules are provided with connectorized pigtail
outputs and one pigtail input. The splitter input is spliced to the
feeder cable in the splice shelf using fusion splicing. The splitter
outputs are spliced into the distribution cables in the splice shelves
using fusion splicing. LC/APC optical fiber interconnects shall be
provided for inputs and outputs to splitter units.
5) The FDT outdoor cabinet is sized for the total connections required to
connect FATs & ONTs in the fiber serving area plus the total number of
splitters required per cabinet based on future tenants forecast.
6) Fusion splicing cassettes for feeder and distribution cabling are
organized in a cabinet located in the bottom of the FDT. Color coded
shelves for splitters are racked and include:
(a) Red – Feeder Panel Splitters and Feeder Panel P2P connections
(b) Blue – Optical Splitters
(c) Gray – ODF/Splitters for distribution cabling
7) Fiber managers located on the sides of the FDT organize optical fiber
cabling. Each fiber bundle is labeled per system requirements.
8) Where required by the project, utilize colocation style FDT’s
(a) The colocation FDT contains three compartments; the center
compartment shall be for cable entrance from the manhole. The
two compartments on either side shall be designated for use by the
RCJ IPTV FTTH GPON and the TSP FTTH GPON.
(b) The colocation cabinet shall meet the requirements of the TSP. The
designer shall submit the FDT configuration only for the TSP

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
compartment for approval by the TSP; explaining the requirement of

ODF and splitters for 100% customer activation.
9) Criteria for locating outdoor FDT’s include:
(a) The cable distance from FDT to the last customer building shall be
within a radius of 500 m; the linear distance from FDT to customer
could be more; but should not exceed 600-700 m.
(b) Accessibility to the cabinet and installations in all times of the day,
especially after work hours for cabinets at subscriber’s premises.
(c) It should be away from pedestrians, traffic, traffic signals, and road
crossings.
(d) Locate away from customers’ walls.
(e) Shall not cause any inconveniences to the public.
(f) Shall be placed on solid grounds, not water and flood runways; or in
wadis.
g. RCJ FTTH GPON System Distribution Optical Fiber Cable Requirements
1) The distribution optical fiber cables connect FDT Splitters to FAT
closures.
2) The distribution optical cables are laid in P2P/Star topology from
FDT/Splitter location.
3) The cabling shall consist of single mode, loose tube available from 12F-
96F depending upon the grouping of villas and numbers of FAT’s.
4) The distribution cable shall be labeled as per RJC requirements.
h. RCJ FTTH GPON System Fiber Access Terminal (FAT) Requirements
1) Fiber Access Terminals (FAT’s) are located in manholes/handholes and
provide the interface between distribution and drop cables. Based upon
final FTTH distribution layouts, two FAT’s shall be provided in
designated manholes; one for the RCJ FTTH GPON, and one for the
TSP FTTH GPON.
2) The FAT shall contain fusion splice trays or preconnectorized
assemblies where individual fiber strands from distribution cables are
spliced or interconnected into drop cables. Distribution cables may
daisychain through FAT’s with unused loose tube fiber strands left coiled
and uncut, and routed continuous in a distribution cable to the next FAT.
3) The drop cables are 2F & 4F capacity. The FAT closures are capable to
accommodate 24 drop cables.
4) The drop closures (FATs) are recommended to be installed inside joint
boxes close to group of villas. These have 24 outlets for drop cables.
i. RCJ FTTH GPON System Drop Optical Fiber Cable Requirements
1) The drop optical fiber cable extends the “last mile” from FAT to the Fiber
Termination Box (FTB).

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
2) The minimum bending radius of the drop cable, as stipulated on the

manufacturers data sheet, shall not be exceeded.
3) The drop optical fiber cable shall be single mode, center or loose tube
containing 4 cores.
4) Drop cables shall be provided containing 4 cores to each unit, villa, or
building within the project scope. All fibers to be terminated and labeled
to indicate dark fibres.
5) The distribution cable shall be labeled as 04:96F(80) S1+S2:1-10+S17-
S18 and drop cables as 4F(3).
6) In multidwelling units, provide a minimum of 4 core fiber drop cables
from the main telecom room to the ONT location of each
Flat/shop/office etc. No splices are allowed between the Telecom Room
and ONT’s.
j. RCJ FTTH GPON System Fiber Termination Box Requirements
1) The Fiber Termination Box (FTB) is provided at the point of entrance for
each customer building to serve as the termination point between the
drop cable and customer premises cabling extending to the Home
Networking Cabinet.
2) The FTB provides the test point for customer connection without
entering the premises.
3) LC/APC connector interface shall be provided.
k. RCJ FTTH GPON System Optical Network Terminal Requirements
1) Customer premises equipment which converts the optical signal to
electronic signal.
2) The ONT consists of the following:
(a) Terminal Box – to terminate the drop fiber cable.
(b) Power conversion AC/DC. For IPTV GPON ONT’s, a local UPS is
not required.
(c) Converts the optical signals to electrical
3) The location of the Indoor ONT Distribution Box shall be within the
Home Network Cabinet, where all the internal conduits meet and
provide the structured cabling system in a star topology.
4) The farthest telecom outlet shall not exceed 90 m from the ONT.
l. RCJ FTTH GPON System Design Requirements

1) Fiber Optic cables, splitter cabinet & civil (ducts, joint boxes, etc.) shall
be proposed in the most economical way while meeting project scope
requirements.
2) Optical Link Budget Calculation
(a) Total allowed link budget from OLT to ONT is 28db. All FTTH
design losses from OLT to ONT should not exceed (not more
than) 28db.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
(b) The following Parameters should be taken into account while

calculation the dB budget loss of the network.
(1) Exchange
(i) ODF Connector - 0.2 dB
(2) OSP
(i) Splice Loss/splice - 0.1 dB
(ii) Cable Loss/ km - 0.35 dB
(3) FDT
(i) Splitter 1:32 - 17.5 dB
(ii) ODF Connector Loss - 0.2 dB
(4) Sub Premises
(i) Drop cable loss per km - 0.35 dB
(ii) Fiber Termination Box - 0.2 dB
(c) The design shall comply with ITU-T recommendation G.984
Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Network (G-PON). The maximum
logical distance from OLT to ONT shall not exceed 60km. The
physical distance shall be limited by the optics used and the
calculated link loss budget.
(d) The budget loss is calculated as follows: Losses = (Fiber cable +
Connectors + Joint + Splitter) Losses.
(e) FTTH System Documentation Requirements
(1) Route Map: The Route Map shows a geographic overview of
cables and conduit routes.
(2) Graphic Access for Feeder & Distribution Network: Graphic
Access shows a graphical overview of the cable/conduit route
including MH/MH distances. These distances depend on type
of cable deployed and the pulling tension of the cable as well
as splice and splitter locations. Distance between HH/HH
depends on the drop fiber distribution, pipe formation, pipe
assignment, cable joints for new cables/conduit systems. The
minimum information required and to be reflected in this type
of drawing is as follows:
(i) Cable size & type
(ii) HDPE duct/subduct assignment.
(iii) Manhole layout
(3) Detailed Conduit Access for Feeder & Distribution Network:
The Detailed Conduit drawing shall show in detail the
geographic location of the conduit system, manholes, hand
holes, FDT cabinet’s, FAT locations, distances from reference
points to center of MH cover and to various parts of the
conduit system. The minimum information required and to be
reflected in this type of drawing is as follows:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
(i) Location of new Manholes/Handholes, e.g. distance from

intersection
(ii) Any “Construction Notes” that may affect implementation
(iii) MH and duct designation
(iv) The distance and number of Ducts between MHs and/or
HHs
(v) FDT Cabinet numbers
(vi) Crossings Method, for road , pipe line (thrust boring or
excavation)
(vii) Labels and legends
(4) Cable Vault Plan: A Cable Vault Plan shall reflect
telecommunication facilities in cable vault room, tunnel vault
as well as location and position of the cables on cable
brackets/ladders and the cable entrance from manhole/tunnel
to cable vault room.
(5) Fiber Cable Schematic for Feeder & Distribution Networks: A
Schematic is to be provided showing the new optical fiber
cable, cable type, size, distances between jointing points and
termination points. The minimum information required and to
be reflected in this type of drawing is as follows:
(i) Tabled calculation of cable pulling tension available and
acceptable
(ii) Location of FDT’s, FAT’s & Terminations
(iii) Labels and legends
(6) Fiber Jointing Schematic for Feeder & Distribution Networks:
(i) A Schematic is to be provided, reflecting an overview of
all new optical fiber cables, fiber termination points,
joints, splitter locations and stumped fibers (dark fibers).
Distances between joints and termination points/MH
shall be noted. The minimum information required and to
be reflected in this type of drawing is as follows:
 Use of fibers (fiber assignment)
 Fiber termination points at ODF / OLT
 Numbering of FO Cabinets and Splitters
 Numbering of FO cables
 Distances between joints (Feeder cable)
 Distance between splitters (Distribution cable)
 Labels and legends
(7) Local IPTV Building: An exchange floor plan is to be provided
reflecting proposed locations of OLT and ODF locations along
with cable routing within the exchange building. Distances of

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
cable from Cable Vault to ODF / OLT locations should be

provided.
(8) Test Plan
(i) The test plan will describe the acceptance Testing that
will be carried out to ensure the deployment of FTTH in
Royal Commission Jubail has been implemented in
accordance with Guidelines.
(ii) Attenuation per unit length and splice, splitter loss is
measured with an OTDR to verify the integrity of fiber
and splices in the optical transmission path. A Laser
source and an optical power meter is used to test the
attenuation of the fibers from the OLT to the ONT
(customer premises), insuring that the transmission
system loss design requirements are within the
maximum permissible dB loss. These tests will be
recorded on power meter test sheets along with OTDR
graphic printouts as required.
(iii) Before performing any optical test, Instrument
Calibration Certificates of the test equipment to be used
has to be presented to the RCJ for approval. The
equipment serial numbers and calibration dates will be
recorded accordingly.
m. RCJ FTTH GPON System Outside Plant Design Parameters
1) Refer to GEM Section 5.5.2.E.1-Outside Plant Infrastructure, for detailed
requirements for providing FTTH outside plant infrastructure.
b. Data Centers
c. Data Center Design Overview
1) Data Centers shall be designed in accordance with the following
(a) TIA-942-A -Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data
Centers and ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0 “Information Technology –
Generic Cabling Systems For Data Centres”.
(b) BICSI 002-2011, Data Center Design and Implementation Best
Practices, and BICSI International Standards Supplemental
Information 001: Methodology for Selecting Data Center Design
Class Utilizing Performance Criteria
2) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall implement Best Practices
recommended by the Uptime Institute.
3) Tiering Structure - The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate with
the RCJ to determine the appropriate Tiering Structure required on a
project by project basis.
4) When designing a data center, it is essential that all systems be
coordinated as follows:
(a) Provide estimate of anticipated power, space, cooling and required
telecommunications equipment based upon full capacity and with
future needs considered.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
(b) Provide required space power, cooling, security, floor loading,

grounding, electrical protection and other requirements to design
team. These requirements shall also include requirements for
operations center, loading dock, storage room, staging areas, and
other support areas.
(c) Work with architect and engineers for the space planning. Revise
design as necessary to accommodate facility needs.
(d) Develop floor plan requirements with placement of major rooms.
This shall indicate entrance rooms, main distribution areas,
horizontal distribution areas, zone distribution areas, and equipment
distribution areas. Power, cooling and floor loading requirement for
equipment shall be provided to the engineering team as well as the
requirements for telecommunications raceways.
(e) Review the updated plan with the requirements for the
telecommunications pathways, electrical equipment and mechanical
equipment (at full capacity).
(f) Design the telecommunications cabling distribution system based
upon the equipment to be housed in the data center.
d. Telecommunications Spaces and Topologies
1) Major Spaces and Organization
(a) Provide authorized access and monitoring
(b) Coordinate floor loading requirements
(c) Coordinate service clearance requirements
(d) Verify airflow requirements
(e) Verify DC power requirements and circuit length restrictions
(f) Telecommunications rooms and other equipment rooms serving
spaces outside the data center shall not be housed within the data
center.
(g) Data Center may be comprised of:
(1) Data Center Support staff offices
(2) Data Center entrance room
(3) Data Center Electrical and Mechanical Rooms
(4) Data Center Operations Center
(5) Telecommunications Room(s) serving data center spaces
(6) Data Center Storage rooms and loading docks
(7) Data Center Computer Room
(h) Where not a dedicated building, other tenant spaces shall be non-
industrial, with use that is non-intrusive to the data center.
(i) Where on an upper floor, adequate shaft space shall be provided for
generator, security, telecommunications and electrical conduits in

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
addition to HVAC, grounding, antennas and other services as

required.
2) Relationships and Adjacencies
(a) Locate away from EMI sources. Sources of EMI/RFI shall be
located at a distance that reduces the interference to 3.0 volts/meter
throughout the frequency spectrum.
(b) No exterior windows
(c) Unrelated equipment shall not be installed in, pass through, or enter
the area. The Room shall not be located below plumbed areas
such as rest rooms, janitor closets, kitchens, laboratories, or
mechanical spaces.
(d) Telecommunications Design
(1) Building shall be equipped with multiple fiber optic entrance
rooms with services from different local access providers.
(2) Cabling may be distributed overhead or under floor.
3) Entrance Room Requirements
(a) Access Provider Coordination
(1) Coordinate to provide maximum circuit lengths in conformance
with access provider requirements.
(2) Entrance Rooms may be located inside or outside the
computer room.
(3) Where Entrance Rooms are located inside the computer room,
typically separate rooms are not required unless the access
provider leases the space.
(4) Entrance rooms shall have pathways specific for access
provider pathways.
(b) Telecommunications Design
(1) Equipment cabinets or racks shall be provided with minimum of
1m clearance in front of the rack. Where deeper equipment is
anticipated, a minimum clearance of 1.2m shall be provided.
Rear clearance shall be 0.6m. Coordinate final clearance
requirements with equipment provided.
(2) Spaces shall be configured with equipment racks having a
“cold” air aisle in the front of the cabinet and “hot” air aisle in
the back.
(i) Perforated floor tiles shall be utilized along the cold aisles
to improve circulation. No cable trays shall be placed
below the cold aisles.
(3) Placement of racks, cabinets and other equipment shall be
coordinated with the floor grid. Racks supported by the access
floor shall be attached to the slab through threaded rods or
otherwise secured.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 140
(4) Cabinets shall be placed at the same location on each floor tile
to allow standardization of floor tile cuts. Spaces shall be
utilized to ensure each cabinet begins at the edge of a floor tile.
(5) Rack/cabinets shall be 2.1m tall for access to equipment and
interconnection of devices.
(6) Racks shall be powder coated or other scratch-resistant finish.
(7) Power strips shall be provided for all cabinets with active
equipment. Power strip plugs shall have locking mechanisms
to prevent accidental disconnection.
(i) Label power strips with panel number and circuit.
(ii) Provide clearance on racks to accommodate power strips.
4) Distribution Areas
(a) Main Distribution
(1) MDA’s shall be centrally located to minimize cabling lengths.
(b) Horizontal Distribution
(1) HDA’s shall be centrally located to minimize backbone cabling
lengths.
(c) Zone Distribution
(1) Overhead, or under floor Zone Distribution Areas shall serve a
maximum of 288 twisted-pair or coaxial connections.
(2) Active equipment shall not be housed in the zone distribution
area.
(d) Equipment Distribution
(1) Equipment distribution does not include telecom rooms,
entrance rooms, main distribution areas, or horizontal
distribution areas. EDA’s house telecommunications and
headend equipment, typically in floor mounted equipment racks
or cabinets.
(2) Power shall be provided to accommodate equipment housed in
racks and cabinets.
(3) Cabling extending between devices within the EDA shall not
exceed 15m.
5) Cabling Topologies
(a) Entrance room (ER)
(1) Entrance Room houses the interface between the inter-building
cabling (access provider and customer owned) as well as the
structured cabling associated with the data center.
(2) Houses demarcation hardware and access provider equipment
(3) May be located outside the computer room if the data center is
in a building that includes spaces outside of the data center, or
if additional security is required.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(4) Multiple entrance rooms may be required for additional

redundancy or due to cabling lengths.
(5) Entrance Room may be adjacent to or combined with the main
distribution area.
(b) Main Distribution Area (MDA)
(1) MDA houses the main cross-connect (MC). This is the central
point of distribution for the data center structured cabling
system. This may also include the horizontal cross-connect
(HC) if the equipment areas are served directly from MDA.
This is typically housed in the computer room, unless it is a
multi-tenant data center, in which case it may be a separate
dedicated room.
(2) Every data center requires at least one MDA. This is the
central point for the data center cabling, housing computer
room core routers, LAN switches, SAN switches, and PBX.
(3) Access provider equipment may be located in this space due to
length restrictions.
(4) MDA’s may serve one or more horizontal distribution areas or
equipment distribution areas.
(c) Horizontal Distribution Area (HDA)
(1) HDA’s serve equipment areas when the HC is not located in
the MDA. HDA may include the HC.
(2) HDA is within the computer room; however it may be within a
dedicated room for security.
(3) HDA includes LAN switches, SAN switches, and
keyboard/video/mouse (KVM) switches for end equipment
located in the equipment distribution areas.
(4) Where data centers extend over multiple floors, each floor may
have its own HC.
(5) Typical data centers have multiple HDA; however, small data
centers may not require HDA as the entire computer room may
be able to be supported from the MDA.
(d) Zone Distribution Area (ZDA)
(1) ZDA is between the HDA and the EDA allowing interconnection
of the horizontal cabling for frequent reconfiguration and
flexibility.
(e) Equipment Distribution Area (EDA)
(1) EDA is space dedicated for end equipment, including computer
systems and telecommunications equipment. This equipment
does not serve ER, MDA, or HDAs.
6) Pathways
(a) Access Floors

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
(1) Cabling under the access floor shall be provided in ventilated

cable trays permitting airflow. Multiple layers of cable tray may
be required.
(2) Cable tray shall be grounded as required.
(3) Access floors shall use bolted stringer styles (1.2 m long) with
pedestals to improve stability.
(b) Overhead trays
(1) Cable trays may be installed overhead. Tray type may be:
(i) Basket
(ii) Center spine
(iii) Ladder
(2) A separate duct/tray system may be utilized for fiber.
(3) Maximum tray depth shall be 150 mm.
(4) Overhead tray placement shall be coordinated with other
services to prevent obstruction of lighting, sprinklers, and other
devices.
7) Infrastructure Identification
(a) Floor space shall be utilized to organize the identification of data
center components. Data centers shall be designed in a grid format
with every 600 mm x 600 mm floor tile designating a block of the
grid.
(b) Cabinets and racks shall be labeled in front and back with the grid
letter and number.
(c) Where data centers extend to multiple floors, the floors shall be
added as a prefix to the cabinet number:
(1) nx1y1:
(i) Where n = floor that houses data center
(ii) x1y1= one or two alphanumeric characters followed by to
alphanumeric characters designating the location on the
floor space grid where the right front corner of the rack or
cabinet is located
(2) Similarly for patch panel ports, label as x1y1-an, where:
(i) n=one to three characters designating the port on a patch
panel. Where patch panels are for fiber, alpha characters
shall be utilized starting with “A” excluding “I” and “O” with
numeric characters designating a fiber strand.
(3) Patch Panels, label as p1 to p2:
(i) p1 = near end rack or cabinet, patch panel sequence and
port number range
(ii) p2 = far end rack or cabinet, patch panel sequence and
port number range

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
(4) Path cord identifiers p1n/p2n:

(i) p1n = near end rack or cabinet, patch panel sequence,
and port designator assigned to that cable
(ii) p2n = far end rack, cabinet, patch panel sequence and
port designator assigned to that cable
8) Redundancy and Infrastructure Tiering
(a) Redundancy Overview – Reliability of system depends upon the
redundancy of the infrastructure components. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall coordinate with the RCJ to determine the
appropriate level of redundancy required on a project by project
basis.
(1) N+1 Redundancy
(i) This system provides one additional unit or pathway in
addition to the minimum provided as part of the original
system. This allows the failure of one leg or component of
the system to not disrupt operations.
(2) 2N Redundancy
(i) This system provides two complete (N) units or pathways
or systems. This allows the failure of an entire unit, path
or system to not disrupt operations.
(b) Tiering Structure - The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall coordinate
with the RCJ to determine the appropriate Tiering Structure required
on a project by project basis. RCJ facilities may use elements of
Tier II and/or Tier III structures in Data Center designs
(1) Tier II Data Center: Redundant Components
(i) Less likely to require disruptions from planned and
unplanned activities.
(ii) Equipped with raised floor, UPS, and generator. These
systems are built with capacity of need plus one (N+1) to
allow maintenance.
(iii) Critical power path and other infrastructure components
may require a shut down for maintenance.
(iv) This system has redundant components but only a single
path.
(2) Tier III Data Center: Concurrently Maintainable
(i) Allows for planned site activity without interruption.
a) Planned activities include: additions, removal, repair,
replacement, and preventative maintenance.
(ii) System must be able to simultaneously carry load of one
path while maintenance or other planned activities are
performed on the other.
(iii) This system has multiple power and cooling distribution
paths.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
(iv) This system requires personnel 24/7.

9) Temperature and Humidity Requirements
(a) Temperature: 18-27°c (64-81°f) dry bulb
(b) Maximum Relative Humidity: 60%
(c) Maximum dew point: 15°c (59°f)
(d) Maximum Rate of Temperature Change: 5°c (9°f) per hour
(e) Wireless Local Area Network
e. All WLAN hardware including Access Points shall, at minimum, support the
IEEE 802.11ac wireless standard and be backward compatible with IEEE
802.11a/b/g/n standards. Where possible, the design of the wireless local area
network shall support draft recommendations of future upcoming standards
under development by the IEEE. Coordinate with the RCJ for final approval to
implement recommendations. Technologies implemented shall be backward
compatible with existing RCJ installations.
f. WLAN Design Criteria
1) Access Point Ethernet Connections
(a) Provide two or more category 6A or higher rated cables as specified
in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, deployed as part of an overall structured
cabling system, to every 802.11ac access point. These
connections shall properly service link aggregation of two (2)
802.11ac radios supporting 1.3 Gbps data rates as well as future
2.6 Gbps and higher data rate implementations.
(b) Follow the recommendations of TIA TSB-162-A,
“Telecommunications Cabling Guidelines for Wireless Access
Points.
(c) Temperature rise resulting from Type 2 PoE used to power 802.11ac
access points shall be considered. The use of solid equipment
cords, which exhibit better thermal stability and lower insertion loss
than stranded conductor cords, is recommended for access point
connections for this same reason.
(d) Verify the system authentication server can support the inrush and
outrush of users at fixed times (such as a class start and stop bell).
Ensure that the server can accommodate the expected peak
number of authentications per second.
(e) Ensure sufficient addresses are available to support not only
laptops but also smartphones and other future Wi-Fi compatible
devices that may expect connectivity. Surplus space will be
necessary to support inrush and outrush of users in a transparent
fashion and in concert with the DHCP service lease times in order to
prevent address exhaustion.
(f) The DHCP server for the WLAN must also be able to accommodate
an appropriate inrush peak load of leases per second. Lease times
must be optimized to the length of sessions in the room so that the
address space can be turned over smoothly between classes or
meetings.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
2) Power Over Ethernet (PoE) Services

(a) Validate the availability of Power over Ethernet (PoE) Power
Sourcing Equipment (PSE) to support access point and WLAN
equipment.
(b) Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) consisting of powered network
switches (endspan) or power injectors (midspan) shall be properly
planned to support the quantities and power levels of Powered
Devices (PD’s) required in the wireless network.
(c) In new building projects, endspan powered network switch ports
shall be provided. In renovation and upgrade projects where
existing non-powered network switches are used, provide midspan
power injectors.
(d) Power over Ethernet (PoE) equipment shall conform to IEEE
802.3at Type 2 PoE Plus at minimum and be backward compatible
with IEEE 802.3af (IEEE 802.3at Type 1) Powered Devices.
Proprietary Power over Ethernet equipment may be utilized with
approval from the RCJ.
(e) Future PoE equipment shall conform to the forthcoming IEEE
802.3bt standard with Type 3 (≤ 60W at the PSE) and Type 4 (≤
100W at the PSE) utilizing all four pairs of approved Category
6/Class E and Category 6A/Class EA cabling. The cabling shall be
warranted to support IEEE 802.3bt per the structured cabling
system 25 year extended warranty requirements.
3) Wireless Infrastructure Design Criteria
(a) In order to provide seamless interoperability across facilities, all
access points must adhere to the IEEE 802.11ac wireless
specifications at minimum. The WLAN shall operate at 5 GHz as
well as continue to support 2.4 GHz devices.
(b) The WLAN shall support Very High Throughput (VHT) data
specification.
(c) The WLAN shall support 80 MHz wide channels with future
upgrades to support 160 MHz wide channels.
(d) The WLAN shall support 256 QAM.
(e) The WLAN shall provide standard beam forming to focus energy on
a specific client, improving reliability and thus throughput and
capacity.
(f) The WLAN system shall support a minimum of three (3) MIMO
streams with future growth of up to eight (8) MIMO streams and
Multiple User MIMO (MU-MIMO).
(g) Dynamic channel and power selection features shall be provided.
(h) Provide spectrum load balancing to ensure even allocation of clients
across available channels including dynamic client distribution
features to steer 5-GHz-capable clients to that band.
(i) Include airtime fairness for a heterogeneous client environment with
an unpredictable mix of legacy and new wireless adapters. Older

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
IEEE 802.11a/b/g clients that require more airtime to transmit

frames must not be allowed to limit newer high throughput clients.
(j) There must be adequate address space to accommodate all of the
expected devices, including a reserve capacity for leases that
straddle different meetings in the same room.
(k) To minimize unnecessary rate adaptation due to higher collision
activity, it is a requirement to reduce the number of supported client
device low rates.
(l) Wherever chatty protocols that produce small frames at frequent
intervals are not needed, they should be blocked or firewalled.
These protocols include IPv6 if it is not in production use, netbios-
ns, netbios-dgm, Bonjour, mDNS, UPnP, and SSDP.
(m) Multicast optimization shall be configured to make reliable, high-
quality multicast transmissions over WLAN possible. To ensure that
video data is transmitted reliably, multicast video data is transmitted
as unicast, which can be transmitted at much higher speeds and
has an acknowledgement mechanism to ensure reliability.
Transmission automatically switches back to multicast when the
client count increases high enough that the efficiency of unicast is
lost.
(n) Enable Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping to
ensure that the wired infrastructure sends video traffic to only those
access points that have subscribers.
(o) Multicast over WLAN, by provision of the IEEE 802.11 standard,
needs to be transmitted at the lowest supported rate so that all
clients can decode it. Provide Multicast Rate Optimization (MRO) to
track the transmit rates sustainable for each associated client to use
the highest possible common rate for multicast transmissions.
(p) Where voice or video clients are expected, enable Quality of
Service (QoS) both in the air as well as on the wire, end-to-end
between the access points and the media distribution infrastructure.
(q) Receive sensitivity tuning shall be used to fine tune the access
points to “ignore” clients that attempt to associate at a signal level
below what is determined to be the minimum acceptable for a client
in the intended coverage zone. This tuning helps to reduce network
degradation to outside interference and/or client associations that
may be attempted below the minimum acceptable signal level
based on the desired performance criteria.
(r) Use very low equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) on the
access point in a high-density deployment. Enable Transmit Power
Control (TPC) to lower client device power to match the APs.
4) WLAN Design Planning Methodology
(a) Unless specifically approved by the RCJ, the WLAN coverage
throughout facilities shall be ubiquitous.
(b) Provide a coverage based wireless design in facilities where the
goal is to provide good quality of service (in terms of RF signal

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
strength) in as much of the area as possible with a single or multiple

access points. Examples of coverage based deployments include
but are not limited to sites where there is a relatively large area with
few Wi-Fi devices/users such as:
(1) Warehouses
(2) Industrial Sites
(3) Mechanical and Electrical equipment rooms and buildings
(4) Clinics
(5) Hotels with single occupancy rooms
(6) Office Buildings
(7) Retail
(c) Identify and provide a capacity based high density deployment
where the goal is to provide good quality wireless service to a
concentrated set of concurrent users in a confined area. Generally,
this occurs when more than 25 concurrent users are expected within
the coverage area. Examples of capacity based deployments
include but are not limited to sites such as:
(1) Classrooms
(2) Lecture halls and auditoria
(3) Libraries
(4) Stadiums
(5) Offices
(6) Conference Centers
(d) Follow a design process described below that establishes a WLAN
capacity goal, determines the number of usable Wi-Fi channels,
chooses a concurrent device target number, and validates the
capacity goal is achieved.
(e) In coordination with the RCJ, establish a capacity planning goal
defining the application-layer throughput target.
(1) Estimate the quantity of devices (MAC addresses) by
considering the quantity of users and number of devices per
person in areas to be covered.
(2) Establish the minimum bandwidth required per device in
consultation with the RCJ. This is primarily driven by the mix
of data, voice, and video applications that will be used.
Request LAN traffic studies to precisely quantify this value.
Consider the actual duty cycle of each device type.
Incorporate diversity in that it is unlikely that maximum
throughput will be required simultaneously to each device,
unless required by certain applications such as interactive
learning systems. Include forecasted future capacity
requirements.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
(3) Differentiate between theoretical and practical access point

throughput by accounting for protocol and packet overhead,
distant clients, uneven distribution of clients on different bands
(2.4 GHz vs 5 GHz), control traffic, and co-channel/adjacent
channel interference.
(f) Determine the usable number of Wi-Fi channels. Establish an
approved channel plan in coordination with the RCJ.
(1) The WLAN design shall ensure that non-overlapping channels
within the 2.4 GHz band are used should it be necessary to
provide service within this frequency. Within the 5 GHz band
the design should not reuse any of the secondary frequencies
should channel bonding be used to increase channel
bandwidth from 20 MHz up to a maximum of 160 MHz. Only
channels approved within the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band by the
CITC (Communications and Information Technology
Commission) shall be used. The design shall take into
consideration channels that are subject to Dynamic Frequency
Selection (DFS) and Transmit Power Control (TPC) for
avoidance of interference with RADAR. If a C band (IEEE
defined as 4 to 8 GHz) RADAR source is operating in the area
the design shall take account of this as certain channels may
automatically be disabled.
(2) The WLAN should utilize the 5 GHz band for primary client
service where possible because there is greater channel
capacity in this band.
(3) Identify and discount any reserved channels that are required
for indoor or outdoor mesh backhaul.
(4) Channels may be reused within clusters serving large areas,
where the radios are separated from one another by free
space, walls, or other structures. Typically a minimum of two
cell isolation distance shall be required within large open
spaces.
(5) In high density applications such as very large auditoria,
channel reuse is driven by the number of devices to be served.
Each radio can serve a finite number of devices without either
oversubscribing the access points or reusing the allowed radio
channels. Channel reuse in combination with low gain
antennas, Transmit Power Control (TPC) and correct
positioning shall be considered in order to provide suitable
coverage and performance.
(6) In high density applications, use of 20 MHz channel widths
(HT20) shall be evaluated to accommodate a higher total
quantity of devices than is possible through use of fewer 40
MHz, 80 MHz or 160 MHz channel widths.
(7) Provide 40 MHz, 80 MHz or 160 MHz channel widths in 5 GHz
bands where the ability for individual stations to burst at the
maximum PHY rate is required.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
(g) Determine a concurrent user device limit for each access point
radio.
(1) Determine the practical limit for the number of client devices
that can transmit simultaneously on each radio while still
achieving the capacity goal.
(2) Follow system manufacturer recommendations. For high
density applications, typical rule of thumb approximations shall
not be used. Where large numbers of heterogeneous users
are to be covered with relatively few radios, adjust for the
expected mix of legacy and high-throughput devices. Per-
client limits are primarily determined by the mix of legacy IEEE
802.11a/b/g, 802.11n, and 802.11ac devices expected in the
high density application. The more legacy devices that are
present, the lower the limit will be.
(h) Determine the number of devices supported in the WLAN
application using the number of non-overlapping channels available
along with the number of concurrent devices planned. Validate that
the WLAN meets the capacity requirements for the application. In
challenging high density applications, follow an iterative process,
balancing between channel count, radio loading, and minimum per-
client throughput to best meet the requirements of the RCJ.
5) Access Point Coverage Strategy
(a) Wherever possible, access points shall be located overhead on
ceilings with cabling concealed in finished construction. Where
ceiling heights, ceiling construction, or aesthetic requirements do
not permit ceiling mounting, use of side wall mounting shall be
provided. Do not mix mounting strategies in the same room. When
planning adjacent WLANs, use the same strategy in all rooms.
(b) Access points with integrated antennae shall typically be provided.
Select mounting locations that have no obstructions between the
front of the integrated antenna access points and the intended
wireless clients. Mount antennas with built-in downtilt parallel to the
ceiling or floor so that the beam is exactly vertical.
(c) Use of external antennae shall be minimized and used to provide
coverage for special case applications and conditions. If external
antennas are being used, plan to mount access points as close to
the antennas as possible. If absolutely necessary, low-loss coaxial
cable shall connect the access point to the antenna when mounting
remotely.
(d) Access points in overhead applications shall be distributed evenly to
optimize system performance. Observe minimum physical
separation distances. Access points using nonoverlapping channels
shall be separated so the interference target is -85 dBm to ensure
that no channel bandwidth degradation occurs and all data rates are
available.
(e) Keep a minimum of 6” of clearance from the integrated antenna
access points and any location where people will be present to
observe Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) requirements.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 150
(f) Design the AP placement in high density areas such that each client
sees two to three access points. If one or two access points are
overloaded at any given time, the client can be load balanced to
another access point without any negative impact to the end user.
(g) Provide and position access points to permit power level settings to
one half at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz to mitigate co-channel and adjacent-
channel interference.
(h) Site Survey Requirements
(1) Predictive Surveys
(i) Use computer-based software applications to model the
facility and RF environment shall be performed.
(ii) Outline the required coverage areas using facility CAD
or BIM files. Define facility structures to aid in estimating
RF signal attenuation.
(iii) Establish thresholds for minimum signal strength and
application throughput that clients must achieve.
(iv) Predict the quantity, location, and type of access points
that should be installed.
(v) Provide channel and power settings that maximize
spectral capacity while minimizing co-channel and
adjacent-channel interference (CCI/ACI).
(2) Pre-deployment Site Survey
(i) A pre-deployment survey shall be performed prior to
WLAN network installation to determine the actual RF
signal propagation characteristics of the environment.
(ii) The preliminary Wi-Fi network design shall be verified by
using a predictive site survey and shall reduce the need
for network adjustments once WLAN equipment is
procured and installed.
(iii) Spectrum analysis shall be performed through a Calibrated
Spectrum Analysis equipment to detect possible interferences
that could cause WLAN performance issues. A copy of the
Calibration Certificate of the equipment shall to be issued to
RC Staff. Remediate sources of interference prior to
deployment.
(iv) Test transmitters’ proposed AP locations with data points taken
to establish the predicted wireless coverage for each location.
The transmitter shall simulate the AP positioning and determine
the actual coverage.
(i) For mobile devices to be tracked properly, a minimum of three
access points (with four or more preferred for better accuracy and
precision) shall be detecting and reporting the received signal
strength (RSSI) of any client station, asset tag, or rogue device
being tracked. It is preferred that this detected signal strength level
be -75dBm or better.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(j) WLAN Controllers shall manage the WLAN.

(1) The controller shall support all modes of access point
operation and will provide scaling up to the quantity of access
points and clients required by the RCJ.
(2) The controller shall offer redundancy offering sub−second
failover of thousands of access points to a standby controller.
(3) The controller shall offer service provider features such as
Wi−Fi Certified Passpoint (HS2.0) for secure public
connectivity and Proxy Mobile IPv6 (PMIPv6) to ensure
seamless mobility between Cellular and Wi−Fi.
(4) The controller shall regulate the power output of each AP to

adjust the coverage zone. Additionally they optimize the
number and placement of access points.
(5) The controller shall detect the status of access points to
determine if any have failed.
(6) The controller shall provide security by denying network
access to improperly configured devices
(7) The controller shall detect and locate the unauthorized access
points.
(8) The controller shall balance the load of network traffic among
the access points in the area.
6) Security
(a) The use of WPA2-CCMP/AES is required. Avoid selecting TKIP or
WEP, which would result in limiting client operation to legacy
(802.11a/b/g) data rates per Wi-Fi Alliance certification
requirements.
(b) Use one of the following network security options: WPA2 802.1X
(Enterprise) or WPA2 PSK (Personal).
(c) When enabling Layer 2 security, ensure WPA2-Enterprise or WPA2-
Personal key management and CCMP/AES encryption is selected.
Avoid selecting Auto (WPA or WPA2) or WPA for the key
management and TKIP for the encryption cipher, which could result
in clients using WPA (TKIP) instead of WPA2 (CCMP/AES) and
being limited to legacy (802.11a/b/g) data rates.
(d) Use Quality of Service (QoS) mechanisms through Wi-Fi Multimedia
(WMM) to prioritize latency and jitter-sensitive traffic such as voice
and video.
(e) Require users to provide authentication credentials before they are
allowed to use a wireless network. Provide authentication via
RADIUS (RFC 2865) which can be back-ended an LDAP enabled
directory.
7) Implementation Policies

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
(a) All departments that wish to deploy wireless networks must work
with and obtain certification for any wireless design from RCJ IT
Department.
(b) To facilitate IP address assignment via DHCP, the wireless network
card's address can be registered in the RCJ central DHCP
database.
(c) Access to the wired campus network from wireless APs must be
controlled via secure authentication where the authentication
credentials (preferably Royal Commission MyID) can be associated
with a unique individual. Departments will be accountable for
activity associated with any credentials that are not Royal
Commission MyID user ids and passwords.
(d) MAC (network card) address authentication can be employed by
pointing access points to a RADIUS server containing the allowed
MAC addresses, but shall be used in conjunction with WPA2-
CCMP/AES.
(e) Telephone and Intercom
g. Telephone and intercom systems provided in new and renovation projects shall be
IP based systems only. Refer to additional sections below for descriptions of
existing legacy RCJ telephone systems.
h. IP Telephone System
1) IP Telephone system service shall be provided for RCJ operated facilities only.
2) To support IP telephony, a multi-service network shall be provided on which
voice, video, and data can coexist over a single IP-based infrastructure.
3) The network shall support traffic prioritization mechanisms using Layer 2 (IEEE
802.1p/Q) and Layer 3-IP type of service (TOS), IP precedence, DiffServ Code
Point (DSCP), UDP/TCP Port and/or IP address.
4) The system shall provide voice, signaling, central processing and
communications resources including voice mail, ACD (automatic call
distribution), and systems management.
5) The network shall support open standards that promote interoperability with
VoIP products.
6) Plan for the provisioning of RCJ Metropolitan Network MAN connectivity to
support the IP Telephone system with sufficient bandwidth. Determine the
additional bandwidth and performance that will be required for new voice
services. The link must be provisioned with sufficient bandwidth to
simultaneously support the maximum number of desired voice calls and
business-critical data applications. Each active telephone call shall typically
require 100 Kbps of bandwidth for each uncompressed (G.711) and 40 Kbps
for each compressed (G.729) telephone conversation.
7) In addition the system shall have to ability to support digital trunks to PSTN and
connectivity for analog trunks and telephones (POTS). Provide failover
transfer for direct connection between an analog telephone and loop start trunk
in the event of a system or power failure.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
8) Provide a complete management application to control the operation and

management of the IP Telephone system using web based system
management tools.
9) Provide interface permitting building paging and public address capabilities.
10) DHCP service shall be configured for IP phones.
11) Coordinate with the RCJ to configure the dial plan and emergency call
services.
12) The IP telephone network shall have port security, DHCP snooping, DAI, and
other mechanisms to protect Layer 2 enabled.
13) Quality of Service
(a) Provide end to end Quality of Service (QoS) to ensure that voice quality
is protected in the presence of bursty data traffic.
(b) For toll-quality voice, provide packet loss of less than 1%.
(c) For toll-quality voice, ensure jitter of less than 50ms variation in delay of
sequentially transmitted packets.
(d) For toll-quality voice, provide latency less than 150ms end-to-end delay.
For the MAN links, provide a one-way delay of 80ms or less.
(e) To deliver toll-quality voice on an end-to-end basis, voice traffic must be
prioritized higher than bursty data traffic on every link along the data path
between IP telephones.
14) VLAN Implementation
(a) VLAN topologies shall be implemented to fully isolate voice and data
networks with no routing between them. Create end-to-end QoS policies
in a heterogeneous suited to a multi-vendor deployment of switches,
routers and end-hosts.
(b) VLANs shall also ensure that excessive broadcast and multicast packets
present on many data networks will not disrupt IP telephony equipment
or affect voice quality.
(c) Because the VLAN tag is not retained when the frame is forwarding over
WAN links, enable a Layer 3 prioritization method as well.
(d) Assign different subnet addresses to voice and data VLANs for
increased security between voice and data traffic and ensuring that all
call control and voice traffic gets the appropriate level of priority.
15) System Resiliency
(a) Provide redundant IP call manager appliances, voice gateways, core
network devices, and access network devices in a distributed, physically
separated fashion. Configure the IP telephone system such that no
single point of failure will result in a total system outage.
(b) To ensure resiliency in the event of a MAN failure, provide a migration
path with a legacy PBX systems, and allow staged VoIP deployments,
the IP Telephone system shall facilitate a variety of trunks for publicly
switched transmission network (PSTN) or analog connections. The local
PSTN also ensures that local phone service does not need to traverse

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
the MAN link and provides service to analog devices such as fax,
modem, and emergency services.
(c) UPS power shall eliminate the impact of power glitches and allows for a
graceful system shutdown in the event of an extended outage.
(d) IP Telephone equipment shall be configured with redundant power
supplies.
16) Telephone Units
(a) Develop an equipment list for each project indicating quantities,
locations, and types of handsets to be deployed.
(b) IP Phone must support pass-through to connected PC equipment with
switched 10/100/1000 Base-T with VLAN priority tagging (802.1p/Q).
(c) Support Quality of Service (QoS)
(d) Support programmable station keys and support basic call features such
as hold and speed dial.
(e) Support the IEEE 802.af or 802.at PoE standards.
(f) Built-in compression with G.711, G.729 codecs, and SIP v2 Protocol
(g) 128-bit AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
(h) IP Telephone Handsets
(1) Identify as part of project equipment lists the types, quantities, and
locations for IP telephone handsets.
(2) IP telephones shall have the following properties:
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100/1000 Ethernet.
(ii) Speakerphone
(iii) Message waiting indicator
(iv) Handsfree support
(v) Power over Ethernet, minimum IEEE 802.3af compliant
(vi) IEEE 802.1p/q compliant
(vii) DHCP compliant
(viii) Codecs: G.711a, G.711μ, G.729, G.729a, and G.729b
(3) Basic IP telephones
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100 Ethernet
(ii) Monochrome LED pixel-based display
(iii) Wall Mounted
 Wall mounted telephone mounting heights shall be
proportional to the height of the person of use.
 Provide wall phones in utility spaces
(4) Office

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100/1000 Ethernet.

(ii) 127 mm graphical, 320 x 240, backlit, 16-bit, color display
(iii) Dual-port, multi-line display, IP speakerphone with
programmable keys
(iv) 4 soft keys, 6 line keys for use as lines, speed dials or
programmable keys.
(v) Third party XML support
(vi) These phones also support new modes of collaboration, such
as: integrated high-definition voice, video, and conferencing;
instant messaging and presence; instant access to cloud
services; USB peripherals for extensibility; and Bluetooth.
(5) Conference Room Phones
(i) Integral switch supporting 10/100/1000 Ethernet
(ii) Conference phones shall be full duplex audio
(iii) Wired or wireless microphone kit
17) Voicemail Requirements:
(a) System shall provide voicemail for all extensions.
(b) Directory lookup by called party’s last name shall be available.
(c) System shall have the ability to clear out and initialize all mailboxes using
a bulk administration tool for summer time maintenance.
(d) Message Indication – the receipt of a message in a mailbox shall initiate
a message waiting light or a stutter dial tone to indicate a new message
condition.
(e) System must have both Global and per Mailbox settings.
(f) System must allow programmable mailbox features such as, but not
limited to:
(1) Size of mailbox
(2) Length of greeting
(3) Maximum recorded message length
(4) Message full warning indicator
(5) Internal and external greeting
(6) Reporting by mailbox
18) Call Accounting
(a) System shall include built in reporting capabilities.
(b) Call Record fields need to include, but are not limited to the following:
(1) Date
(2) Time
(3) Called Number

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
(4) Calling Number by Extension

19) Voice Gateways
(a) Voice gateways may be required on per project basis where it is a
requirement for buildings to access local TSP telephony services for
connection to the IP telephone system.
(b) Voice gateway shall convert TDM telephony traffic from the Publicly
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) into digital IP packets for transport
over IP network. It shall also convert digital IP packets into TDM
telephone traffic for transport across the PSTN.
(c) The Gateway shall bring application intelligence into the network and
enable efficient deployment of secure, reliable, and accelerated
Extensible Markup Language (XML) applications and Web services. This
shall enable the intelligent network to support service-oriented
architecture (SOA) implemented using web services technologies and to
accelerate, secure, and scale XML applications.
(d) Gateway shall permit auto-provisioning of web services from Universal
Description Discovery and Integration (UDDI) registry and application
servers, and provide transport and message-level security for XML -
based network traffic.
(e) Gateway shall enable a shared-service environment, reducing end-to-
end latency, and enabling business services to scale to meet capacity
imperatives while improving server utilization.
(f) Gateway shall permit XML messages of all sizes to be processed without
compromising security, interoperability, or system reliability.
i. Existing Telephone Systems: The following is a description of existing systems and
applies only for minor moves, additions, and changes required in renovation
projects, where telephone system upgrades to current technologies are not in the
scope of work.
1) Existing EPABX With Public Switched Network Description
(a) General
(1) In order to conserve manpower resources, to minimize call holding
time and usage, to provide for maximum signaling control on the
public switched network and to be consistent with the Kingdom
Standards, all EPABX applications shall be equipped for the
following:
(i) Outgoing to Public Switched Network
 One-way, 2-wire, direct outward dial (DOD), loop start
PABX to exchange trunks.
 The method of pulsing shall be DTMF as per ITU-T
Recommendations.
 Upon seizure from the PABX (polarity reversal), the public
exchange switch shall transmit 425 Hz continuous dial tone
at a nominal -13 dBm toward the PABX. The public
exchange dial tone shall be transmitted through the PABX
switch matrix to the PABX extension originating the call.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
The PABX extension shall then dial (DTMF transmitted to

the public exchange switch) the desired number.
(ii) Incoming from Public Exchange Switch
 All PABX applications shall be equipped for direct inward
dial (DID) directly to PABX extensions from the public
switched network using one-way trunk circuits consisting of
loop start line signaling and R2-MFC inter-register pulse
signaling.
(2) Numbering Scheme
(i) The numbering scheme used in the PABX must be coordinated
with the Royal Commission so that the numbering plan will
match the local public network switch.
(ii) The National Numbering Plan requires 10 digit numbers of
which the first 3 are the public exchange Switch NXX code.
The last 7 digits identify the particular number of the lines
associated with that code. A maximum of 4 digits shall be used
for PABX extensions.
(iii) The number of DlD trunks depends on the volume of inward
traffic to the PABX. Sufficient numbers of trunks must always
be available to provide non-blocking access into the PABX from
the public switched network. A call completion rate from the
public network service exchange to a PABX shall be 95% or
better. If subscriber equipment performance or capacity
limitations degrade the public network standard and adversely
affect other subscriber usage, the Royal Commission will take
any measures deemed necessary to protect the public network.
(iv) DID trunk circuits are comprised of two factors; line signaling
and line pulsing (inter-register).
 Line signaling shall be 2-wire loop start (a and b wire
battery reversal).
 Line pulsing shall be accomplished by means of ITU-T
based, Saudi Telephone modified, R2-MFC inter-register
signaling.
 Upon special request and following review and approval by
the engineering department, a separate PABX attendant 2-
way, 2-wire trunk group may be established using the
PABX main number, if the PABX application is large
enough to require full-time attendant(s) operation.
 In cases when small PABXs up to 120 extensions, are
considered and trunk R2-MFC interface is not yet available
from manufacturers, the system application should be
reconsidered for a large hybrid EKTS or for Special
Business Service. If all desired features cannot be
provided in the EKTS or Centrex mode, then a deviation
request may be submitted to the Royal Commission, as per
Section 8.13 D.3 below for consideration.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
(3) Deviation
(i) If any deviation is required from the standard DOD, DID R2-
MFC for any PABX applications, a deviation request must be
submitted to the Royal Commission for review and/or approval
(Royal Commission Telecom Engineering approval required).
(ii) The PABX shall have means to internally test any DOD or DID
trunk appearance.
(iii) The PABX customer shall perform tests to the customer/Royal
Commission interface point before any PABX trunk faults are
reported to the Royal Commission.
(b) PABX
(1) PABX trunk blocking, automatically or manually, shall be
accomplished by disconnecting either the trunk battery negative
polarity, positive polarity, or both, from the battery supply.
(c) Transmission Parameters
(1) The trunk interface for all EPABX's shall be analog/digital.
(2) The following technical criteria shall be required of any PABX
equipment operating within the Royal Commission switched
network:
(i) Signaling Frequencies
 The frequency tolerance shall be ± 4 Hz.
 Power level of each un-modulated signaling frequency
shall have a value of - 14.5 dBm ± 1 dB.
 Signaling frequency power level of any leak current
transmitted to the Royal Commission facilities must be at
least 50 dB below the nominal level of anyone frequency
when no multi-frequency combinations are being sent, and
at least 30 dB below the level of either one of the signaling
frequencies when a multi-frequency combination is being
sent.
 The inter-register receivers may be sensitive to the
transmission characteristics of the unloaded cable plant
with respect to frequency attenuation and balance return
loss. Provision shall be made for field adjustable
compensation options to accommodate mixed or single
gage, (0.4, 0.5, 0.65) non-loaded, 600 ohm outside plant
facilities with a range from 0 to 8 dB.
 The sensitivity range of the multi-frequency signaling
equipment shall be -5 dBm to - 35 dBm.
 The total power level of all frequencies due to harmonic
distortion and inter-modulation between 300 and 3400 Hz
shall be at least 37 dB below the power level of any one
frequency.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
 The time interval between the start of sending of each of

the 2 frequencies constituting a multi-frequency
combination shall not exceed 1 ms. The time interval
between the cessation of sending of each of the two
frequencies shall not exceed 1 ms.
 The operate and release times of the receive section of the
multi-frequency signaling shall be (To + Tr) = 70 ms.
 When multi-frequency combination has caused the receive
section of the multi-frequency signaling equipment to
operate, the latter shall not release if the signaling
frequencies are interrupted for less than 7 ms.
 The longest signal to be ignored by the receive section of
the multi-frequency signaling equipment shall be 8 ms.
 The acceptable difference in power level of the 2
frequencies of a multi-frequency pair shall be less than 5
dB for adjacent frequencies and less than 7 dB for non-
adjacent frequencies.
(d) The receiver bandwidth shall accept a variation in frequency of ± 10 Hz
relative to the nominal value for any signaling frequency.
(e) Traffic Parameters
(1) The PABX matrix and processor shall be designed, and the number
of trunk circuits from the public switched network calculated to
provide free access into the PABX, thereby protecting the public
switched network against congestion caused by unnecessary call
attempts.
(2) To ensure an acceptable grade of service for PABX users, the PABX
switch matrix, processor and trunks should be engineered for the
following busy hour parameters:
(i) 0.12 Erlangs per extension (combined originating and
terminating).
(ii) 0.24 Erlangs per PABX - exchange trunk.
(iii) Blocking factors should be 1:200 (0.005) for originating,
terminating and intra-PABX calls.
(iv) Local Call Average Holding Time: 100 s.
(v) Long Distance Call Average Holding Time: 120 s.
(vi) Dial Tone Delay to PABX Extension: No call attempts delayed
over 3 s.
(3) The processor capacity shall be engineered to accommodate non-
blocking during busy hours for switching, special feature processing,
maintenance diagnostics, traffic measuring and message recording.
(4) The switch matrix may be either time- or space-based; however, the
switch cross points must be solid-state.
(f) Signaling Tones and Announcements

Rev. 0 5.5 - 160
(1) The following signaling tones are Ministry of Communication and

Information Technology (MCIT) standard and in order to present the
minimum contrast to the user should be closely approximated:
(i) Dial Tone: 425 Hz, continuous.
(ii) Ringing Tone: 425 Hz, 1.2 s on, 4.65 s off.
(iii) Busy and Congestion Tone: 425Hz 0.5 s on, 0.5 s off.
(iv) Intrusion Tone: 425 Hz, 0.17 s on, 0.17 s off, repeated.
(v) Number Unavailable Tone: 425Hz, 0.2 s on, 0.2 s off, repeated.
(vi) Signaling from a PABX that affect the performance
measurements of the public network or cause confusion to the
public network administration shall not be accepted.
(g) Announcements
(1) No information signals or announcements are allowed from the
PABX before the answer signal except ringing tone.
(2) Announcements provided by the PABX shall convey only PABX
related messages (limited to PABX or business identification).
(h) Additional Requirements
(1) A negative 48V DC power plant shall be supplied with capacity to
provide DC power for the PABX and all peripheral equipment. If
critical peripheral equipment is AC powered such as the
maintenance teletype, and user determined critical message detail
recording equipment, a DC to AC inverter shall be provided. The DC
power plant shall be able to provide power at the required operating
voltage for a minimum of 48 hours.
(2) A rectifier capable of charging the batteries from a fully discharged
state to fully charge in an 8 hour period while maintaining normal
PABX load shall be provided. The rectifier shall be of an automatic
constant voltage and current limited type.
(3) Batteries shall be lead calcium or nickel cadmium type. During
normal operation, the batteries shall be floated across the load.
(4) Remote power alarms shall be provided for:
(i) AC power failure
(ii) Rectifier failure
(iii) Low voltage
(iv) High voltage
(i) PABX System Requirements
(1) The PABX system shall physically consist of free standing cabinet(s)
of modular construction or wall mount.
(2) The stored program control (SPC) operating features and
configurations shall be executed from the attendant console or the
maintenance console.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(3) The generic program must be non-volatile or be protected in the

event of AC power failure.
(4) The system alarm shall be provided with a remote major alarm to
indicate call processing failure or AC power failure.
(5) Generic programs and feature releases shall be easily updated as
released.
(6) The equipment cabinet should be arranged to permit all circuit board
replacement and provide maintenance access points, while
operating from the front. If rear access is required, the installation
shall provide for such access.
(7) The system shall be provided with complete sets of installation and
operations documentation.
(8) All specialized tools, circuit board extenders, backup program tapes
shall be provided for the PABX and DC power systems.
(9) Consumable and component spares shall be provided for a
minimum of 2 years’ service.
(j) Main Distribution Frame
(1) A main distribution frame, using the "quick-connect" termination
technique, shall be provided. All PABX system extension lines,
PABX to exchange trunks, consoles and peripheral equipment shall
be terminated on the MDF.
(2) All outside plant cable pairs shall be terminated on MDF blocks
equipped with protectors. The protection devices shall be 3-element,
fail safe ionizing discharge tubes.
(3) The terminal blocks shall normally be mounted on industry standard
steel framework.
(4) If there is inadequate equipment space, industry standard 1-sided,
wall mounted terminal block arrangements may be provided.
2) Modifications to Existing Tertiary Telephone Cabling for Residential Housing
(a) Refer to TSP standards for most up to date requirements.
(b) The tertiary network is defined as the portion of the telephone networks
from the telecommunications handhole, provided by others and located
at the Subscriber Property Line, to the telephone outlets in the
subscriber's residence. This includes but is not limited to ductwork,
cables, protectors, splitters, amplifiers and jacks. All defined equipment
and fittings must be provided and installed by the Contractor building the
individual house or apartment.
(c) The telecommunications handhole shall be equipped with two 32 mm
(ID) HDPE duct stubs for each individual residence or small apartment
building.
(d) The ducts shall be joined to the duct stubs and extended to the building,
maintaining a minimum of 600 mm of cover from final grade to top of
duct and having the lowest point of the duct run at the handhole
entrance.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
(e) At the building, the ducts shall be joined to factory preformed 90 degree
bends.
(f) The telephone cable shall be installed in a 50 mm duct and shall
terminate in separate flush mounted wall boxes.
(g) Wherever practical, handholes shall be placed at the property line
between adjacent residences and subscriber cables installed for each
building. Handholes shall serve a maximum of ten adjacent subscribers.
The only allowable exceptions to serving more than ten residences from
one handhole are as follows:
(1) A subscriber cable duct may be extended from a handhole to serve
the last residence on the street if no future duct extensions will be
required such as at the end of a cul-de-sac or where common
property lines abut a street at one point, again as at the end of a cul-
de-sac or along the inside radius of a sharp curve.
(2) Separate conduit runs shall be provided for telephone and TV
cables within the buildings.
3) Modifications to Existing Telephone Tertiary Network
(a) The Telephone Tertiary Network consists of provision and installation of
an outdoor telephone cable conforming to the requirements stipulated by
the Royal Commission from the telecommunications handhole to the
residence telephone protector access box.
(b) An indoor telephone cable conforming to the requirements stipulated by
the Royal Commission shall be extended from the protector to all
telephone outlets.
(c) Connection to the telephone distribution cable in the handhole will be
done by the Telephone Administration or Site Development Contractor,
as applicable.
(d) Wall outlets shall be installed at 300 mm AFFL, in a standard flush
mounted wall box for desk type telephones and at 1350 mm AFFL for
wall mounted telephones.
(e) The indoor cable may loop from outlet to outlet.
(f) The outdoor telephone cable shall be a paired, 0.9 or 0.65 mm conductor
non-armored polyethylene sheath filled cable containing a minimum of
two 4 pair for each single residence.
(g) The indoor telephone cable to standard telephone sets shall be a
minimum of one 3 pair 0.9 or 0.5 mm copper conductors individually
color coded with polyethylene conductor insulation and enclosed in a
polyvinyl chloride jacket.
(h) Both indoor and outdoor telephone cables shall be free from opens,
shorts, grounds and transpositions on all pairs.
4) Existing Telephone Line Protection
(a) All subscribers’ equipment shall be connected to the outside plant
entrance facilities via a 3 element, 350 V DC ionizing discharge tube,
inserted in every pair entering and/or leaving the building.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
(b) These protection devices shall be installed at the common point of entry
to the building and shall be connected to the building grounding system
via an isolated and independent ground lead.
(c) In the event that a building ground is not readily accessible at the
common point of entry, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
establish a ground point that conforms to Guideline Specifications.
(d) The line shall be capable of withstanding the following conditions without
damage to subscriber equipment:
TABLE 5.5.2.A: CONDITIONS TO WITHSTAND
Applied Voltage Period of Application
1000 V 20 microseconds
100 V 1 second
± 20% Normal working conditions
5) Existing Protector Outlet Box

(a) General
(1) The Residence Protector Outlet Box shall be flush mounted,
accessible from the outside and of sufficient size, for the telephone
service to:
(i) Contain two 3 element 350 V Fail-Safe Gas Discharge Tubes.
(ii) Terminate 50 mm duct from telecommunications handhole.
(iii) Terminate conduit runs for telephone outlets.
(iv) Terminate 25 mm conduit nipple from the CATV service box.
(v) Terminate a 25 mm conduit for the ground lead and for the
CATV service to:
 Contain an over voltage protection unit.
 Terminate a 50 mm duct from the telecomm handhole.
 Terminate conduit from internal CATV outlets.
 Terminate a 25 mm conduit nipple from the telephone
service box.
(b) Protector Outlet Box for Apartments

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
(1) The apartment protector outlet boxes shall be of sufficient size to

house the above items as required for each residence in the
building.
j. Intercom Systems
1) Intercom systems provide building audio or audio and video communication
between designated locations using a two-way connection between a
substation and masterstation.
2) The intercom systems shall utilize building IP network based communications
and be connected through the building telecommunications structured cabling
systems.
3) Intercom systems shall be provided within various RCJ facilities for the
following applications as directed by the RCJ on a per project basis.
(a) Schools
(1) Door/Gate Entry Access Control
(2) Emergency Communications
(b) Residential Facilities
(1) Door Entry/Gate Control
(2) Multi-tenant Entrance Communications
(c) Industrial Facilities
(d) Healthcare
(e) Commercial/Retail
(2) Security Transaction Window
(f) Transportation/Car Parks
(2) Security Transaction Window
4) Door/Gate Entry Access Control Requirements
(a) Door intercom stations shall be located at normally locked building visitor
entrances, after hour entrances, service door locations, gates and other
locations determined through the project planning process.
(b) Door intercom stations shall permit hands free communications with a
masterstation with activation of the call button with LED status indicator.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
(c) Door intercom stations shall be of stainless steel construction and rated
for interior or exterior environments. In new construction, doors stations
shall be recess mounted flush with finished construction.
(d) Concealed conduit pathway, minimum of 75 mm diameter shall be
provided to serve the door station backbox.
(e) Indicate mounting height of door stations to permit call button activation
at standard switch height and permit video camera view area to capture
face and torso of visitor.
(f) Locate door intercom stations adjacent to door entrance with clear
approach to unit. Stations serving vehicle entrances shall be bollard
mounted and permit operation through driver side vehicle windows. Avoid
locations where direct sunlight will interfere with system camera. Provide
shrouds around the devices where necessary at exterior locations to
mitigate environmental interference with system operation.
(g) The door station shall be IP addressable and powered by Power over
Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af, at, or bt). The station shall be connected to the
building LAN through structured cabling using one (1) minimum ANSI-
TIA Category 6/ ISO-IEC Class E cable Ethernet connection. Network
connections shall be provisioned with quality of service, VLAN
separation, and multicast support.
(h) The door substation shall support video surveillance through a fixed
ONVIF compatible integrated IP camera. Constant video streaming from
the door station shall be provided. Digital pan, tilt, and zoom camera
with wide angle lens shall be provided.
(i) The door substation shall permit mounting of an integrated card reader
connected to the building access control system (if available) to unlock
the door for valid credential holders. Access control system cabling shall
be provided into the substation for connection to the card reader.
(j) Form C relay outputs shall be available with a connection to the local
door hardware power supply to permit remote release unlock of the door
for authorized visitors.
(k) Door intercom stations shall be capable of communicating with all
building master station locations.
(l) Master stations shall be located within buildings at reception points,
service desks, security offices, maintenance management offices, or
other monitoring locations deemed required by the project planning
process.
(m) Master stations shall provide hands free communication with handset for
privacy to any substation.
(n) The master station shall be IP addressable and powered by Power over
Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af, at, or bt). The station shall be connected to the
building LAN through structured cabling using one (1) minimum ANSI-
TIA Category 6/ ISO-IEC Class E cable Ethernet connection. Network
connections shall be provisioned with quality of service, VLAN
separation, and multicast support. Network protocols accepted shall
include: IPv4, IPv6, TCP, UDP, SIP, HTTP, HTTPS, RTSP, RTP, RTCP,
IGMP, MLD, SMTP, DHCP, NTP, and DNS.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
(o) The master station shall have an integrated color LCD display to view
substation video surveillance.
(p) The master station shall have programmable Form C dry contact
multipurpose relays to enable remote release of access controlled doors
triggered by the operator.
(q) The master station shall be desk, wall, or rack mounted depending on
project requirements.
5) Security Transaction Window
(a) A window security intercom system shall be provided where determined
on a per project basis to permit secure and environmentally protected
public communications.
(b) The attendant shall utilize a gooseneck microphone and mono type
headset.
(c) Communication shall be voice activated requiring no additional
operations during conversation.
(d) The system may be placed in standby by the operator, muting the
attendant and playing public side audio at a reduced level.
(e) A detection sensor shall be used to signal the system when a customer is
present.
(f) An external speaker and acoustic tube or microphone shall be provided
to communicate with the public side. Lobby or waiting area paging
speakers shall be connected to the attendant’s station to permit queued
pages.
(g) Noise cancellation shall be used in the system to reduce background
noise.
6) Emergency Communications
(a) Emergency communications station locations shall be determined by the
project planning process after review of building and site plans. Propose
locations based upon project security risk assessments. Request
confirmation of locations from project stakeholder’s local protection
personnel.
(b) Typical emergency communications station locations include but are not
limited to:
(1) Elevators
(2) Car parks
(3) Pedestrian walkways
(4) Public building corridors
(5) Parks
(6) Universities
(c) Emergency communications stations shall permit hands free
communications with police or designated security personnel capable of

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
providing emergency assistance, with activation of the call button with

LED status indicator.
(d) Emergency communications stations shall be labeled with
“EMERGENCY” lettering in English and Arabic.
(e) Each station shall automatically place a call to preprogrammed number
when activated. In the event that the call is not completed, the station
shall rollover to a second and third preprogrammed number until
completion of the call.
(f) Emergency communications stations shall be of stainless steel
construction and rated for interior or exterior environments. In new
construction, stations shall be recess mounted flush with finished
construction. Stations may stanchion mounted where designated as
freestanding in the site.
(g) Concealed conduit pathway, minimum of 75 mm diameter shall be
provided to serve the emergency communications station backbox.
(h) Indicate mounting height of door stations to permit call button activation
at standard switch height and permit video camera view area to capture
face and torso of visitor.
(i) Locate door emergency call stations with clear approach to unit. Provide
shrouds around the devices where necessary at exterior locations to
mitigate environmental interference with system operation.
(j) The emergency communications station shall be IP addressable and
powered by Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af, at, or bt). The station
shall be connected to the building LAN through structured cabling using
one (1) minimum ANSI-TIA Category 6/ ISO-IEC Class E cable Ethernet
connection. Network connections shall be provisioned with quality of
service, VLAN separation, and multicast support. Where call stations are
located on sites not in direct vicinity of buildings, connection shall occur
through one of the following means:
(1) Underground single mode fiber from RCJ Metropolitan Network.
Final device connection will be supplied through a fiber to copper
media converter.
(2) Cellular Gateway
(3) The station may be powered through utility service drop, solar array
module/battery, or night charge/battery
(k) The emergency station shall support video surveillance through a fixed
ONVIF compatible integrated IP camera. Constant video streaming from
the station shall be provided. Digital pan, tilt, and zoom camera with
wide angle lens shall be provided.
(l) Form C relay outputs shall be available and used to a trigger beacon
strobe light integral to the unit housing. This feature shall be provided in
outdoor areas and car parks.
7) Harsh Environmental Conditions

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
(a) In industrial or otherwise harsh environments subject to dirt, dust, and

water infiltration, provide IP66 or IP67 rated components to suit location
requirements
(b) Components shall incorporate noise cancellation technologies.
(c) Housings shall be constructed of rugged antistatic plastic or aluminum
and stainless steel housings.
(d) Stations shall permit integration of push to talk microphones.
8) Multi-tenant Entrance Communications
(a) In multi-tenant residential developments, provide a visitor entrance
communications intercom system.
(b) The system shall permit visitors to announce their presence to individual
residences through a video entrance station.
(c) Entrance stations shall be located in the main vestibule or lobby of the
facility and provide the following functionality:
(1) Wide angle camera allows user to view up to 170° of the entry area
(2) Direct digit dialing, alphabetical scrolling, or jump scrolling by letter
to select tenant name
(3) Digital panel stores tenant names/number locations and unique
access codes to activate door release
(4) Built-in motion sensor to detect presence of a visitor (optional)
(5) PC software for loading resident information, access codes, and
welcome message
(6) Hands-free communication
9) Tenant intercom stations shall be provided within residences wall mounted near
entrance. Intercom stations shall provide the following functionality:
(a) Color LCD screen with picture memory for recording visitor images
(b) Hands-free or push-to-talk communication
(c) Door release and security guard / concierge call buttons
(d) Security inputs for alerting tenant and guard
(e) Structured Cabling
k. General
1) Structured cabling systems shall comply with the following standards:
(a) Structured Cabling Component Standards
(1) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications
Cabling and Components.
(2) ANSI/TIA-568-C.3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components
(b) Project Type Structured Cabling Standards
(1) Commercial Buildings - ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
(2) Residential Buildings - ANSI/TIA-570-C Residential

Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard, and ISO/IEC 15018
Edition 1.0: Information Technology – Generic Cabling for Homes
(3) Data Centers – ANSI/TIA-942-A Telecommunications Infrastructure
Standard for Data Centers, and ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0:
Information Technology – Generic Cabling Systems For Data
Centres
(4) Industrial Facilities - ANSI/TIA-1005-A Telecommunications
Infrastructure Standard for Industrial Premises, and ISO/IEC 24702
Edition 1.0: Information Technology – Generic Cabling – Industrial
Premises
(5) Educational Facilities - ANSI/BICSI 001-2009, Information Transport
Systems Design Standard for K-12 Educational Institutions
(6) Healthcare Facilities - ANSI/BICSI 004-2012, Information
Technology Systems Design and Implementation Best Practices for
Healthcare Institutions and Facilities
(c) System Level Standards
(1) Implementation of Structured Cabling Systems - ISO/IEC 14763-2
Edition 1.0: Implementation and Operation of Customer Premises
Cabling – Part 2: Planning and Installation
(2) Telecommunications Cabling and Terminations - ANSI/TIA-568-C.0:
Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises,
ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.2: Information Technology – Generic
Cabling For Customer Premises, and ISO/IEC 14763-2 Edition 1.0:
Implementation and Operation of Customer Premises Cabling – Part
2: Planning and Installation
(3) Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces - ANSI/TIA-569-C:
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
(4) Telecommunications Labeling Criteria - ANSI/TIA-606-B
Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure, and
ISO/IEC 18598: Automated Infrastructure Management (AIM)
Systems – Requirements, Data Exchange and Applications
(5) Telecommunications Grounding Requirements - ANSI/TIA-607-B
Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for
Customer Premises, and NECA/BICSI 607-2011 - Standard for
Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Planning and
Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings
(6) Building Automation Systems - ANSI/TIA-862-A: Building
Automation Systems Cabling
(7) Outside Plant Cabling Systems - ANSI/TIA-758-A Customer-owned
Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
2) Structured cabling for LAN’s within buildings shall be based on a star topology
unless otherwise stated.
3) The structured cable plant shall be installed by a manufacturer certified
contractor using approved components such that the manufacturer provides an

Rev. 0 5.5 - 170
extended applications assurance warranty for a period of 10 years as a

minimum. The structured cabling system performance shall be warrantied to
exceed all relevant global cabling system standards, including Category 6 and
Category 6A as well as ISO/IEC 11801 Class E and Class Ea.
4) Single mode optical fiber shall be provided in the intrabuilding backbone and
conform to the ITU-T G.652 standard.
5) Unless otherwise directed by the RCJ, provide spare fibers and conductor pairs
in cables; positions in patch panels, cross-connects and terminal strips and
space in conduit, pathways, cable trays and wireway to accommodate 20%
future increase in active workstations. Cable pathway fill percentages shall
observe requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, ANSI/TIA-569-C, and ISO/IEC
14763-2 ed1.0.
6) In order to minimize costs over the long term, it is highly desirable to develop a
comprehensive building network design that takes into account the needs of all
of the building occupants. Once that design has been developed, it can be
implemented in phases as funding permits.
7) Building networks that adhere to structured wiring specifications typically have
one central wiring closet called a main distribution frame (MDF) and one or
more distributed wiring closets called intermediate distribution frames (IDFs).
8) Each IDF shall be star wired back to the MDF via fiber optic cabling. Fiber
cabling supports longer distances than twisted pair copper wiring and it is
immune to electrical interference and grounding problems. It also has the
potential for supporting high data transmission capacities (gigabits per second).
Twelve strands of fiber cabling shall be run from MDF to each IDF to provide
for future growth and redundancy.
9) The LAN components of an IDF minimally consist of one or more rack mounted
switches (either modular chassis or stackable, shared and/or switched) with
each hub port connecting to a port on a rack mounted patch panel via a
stranded wire Category 6A UTP patch cable. Each port on the patch panel is
connected to an RJ-45 wall plate in an office through a solid conductor
horizontal Category 6A UTP cable running through the building infrastructure.
The networked device is connected to the wall plate via a stranded wire
Category 6A UTP station cable.
10) The total cable length for CAT 6A UTP wiring is 100 m (90 m for horizontal
cabling and 10 m for both station and patch cables combined). As indicated
above, fixed horizontal cables must use solid copper Category 6A wire,
whereas, patch cables must be stranded copper Category 6A wire. When
designing and installing Category 6A wiring, it is important to stay away from
sources of electrical interference, e.g., 300 mm from light ballasts and 1.2 m
from electrical devices such as high-voltage transformers, electric motors,
microwave ovens and Xerox machines.
11) Cable trays shall be installed above ceilings to provide clearly defined paths for
horizontal Category 6A wiring, and can keep cables from sources of electrical
interference. They also protect cables from damage by other personnel
working above ceilings.
12) Rack mounted patch panels shall provide the direct termination points for
Category 6A wiring in the IDF. Although Category 6A cabling can be
terminated in 110-type punch down blocks, it is not recommended unless that

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
type of termination block will be installed for both telephone and data services.
Under no circumstances shall 66-type punch down blocks be utilized since they
can adversely affect data signals. One shall also not plan to allow two signals
(either LAN-LAN or LAN-VOICE) within the same four pair of a Category 6A
cable.
13) Cable installations must comply with appropriate building codes. All
penetrations through rated fire walls, ceilings and floors must be fire sealed.
Cabling with required fire rated shall always be utilized, but it is required when
installed in air plenums or traversing floors of the building. SASO and IEC
60754 and 60332 requirements shall be followed.
14) Before attaching networking equipment to the cable infrastructure, each
terminated cable shall be tested with Category 6A certification equipment (level
III or IIIe scanner/tester respectively). Each cabling link shall pass all Category
6A standards and be submitted to the system manufacturer to obtain the
required minimum 10 year structured cabling system warranty.
l. Structured Cabling Components
1) Work Area
(a) Work area is considered telecommunications outlet/connector (including
multi-user outlet assembly, consolidation point, and transition point), work
area cable (patch cord), and work area equipment.
(b) Work area outlet shall house a minimum of two cables per outlet box
location.
(c) A minimum of two outlet box locations shall be designed per space.
(d) Telecommunications outlets shall be located directly adjacent to an
electrical receptacle and shall typically be mounted at the same height.
2) Horizontal Distribution Systems
(a) Horizontal pathways include the raceways utilized for routing
telecommunications cabling such as j-hooks, conduit, and cable trays.
(b) Horizontal Pathway Systems
(1) Raceways shall be designed to accommodate the maximum amount
of work areas. Where pathways include additional cabling
requirements, capacity shall be increased accordingly.
(2) Access to pathways shall be maintained.
(3) Pathways shall be designed for a 40% fill capacity maximum
including space allocated for future, with each work area outlet
allowing for at least three cables.
(4) Cellular floors may be utilized in spaces where:
(i) Increased flexibility is required (large office layouts)
(ii) Large capacity is required
(iii) Increased security is necessary
(iv) Electrical interference is an issue

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
(5) Conduit pathways shall have bend radii six times the internal
diameter of the conduit for conduit smaller than 50 mm. For conduit
with an internal diameter larger than 50 mm, the bend radius must
be 10 times the diameter.
(6) Conduit runs shall be designed to have no more than two bends.
(i) Where more than two 90 degree bends in a conduit run are
necessary, provide pull boxes between sections with two
bends or less.
(ii) Where a bend between 100 and 180 degrees is required,
provide a pull box at each bend.
(iii) Where conduit runs exceed 30 m, provide a pull box.
(7) Conduit ends shall be equipped with insulated bushings to prevent
cable damage during installation or use.
(8) Access Floors
(i) Raised floors may be utilized in data centers and
telecommunications equipment rooms.
(ii) Cabling in raised floors shall be fire rated to permit usages of
space as air handling plenum.
(iii) Standard height for access floors shall be 150mm or higher,
with 50mm between the top of tray and the bottom of the
underside of the stringer allocated for accessibility.
(iv) Floors shall be designed with aluminum locking pedestals to
support and interlock with lateral bracing.
(9) Ceiling Systems
(i) Maintain 75 mm clear vertical space above conduit and cables.
(ii) Maintain 300 mm clear vertical space above cable trays.
(iii) Cable tray support span shall not be greater than the length of
a section of tray.
(iv) Cable trays shall be utilized to support cabling in areas of
cabling that converge and route to the Telecommunications
Room.
 Cable trays shall be supported by either trapeze supports,
cantilever brackets, individual rod suspensions brackets.
(v) Cable trays accessories shall be provided by manufacturer.
(10) Typical telecommunications outlet backboxes shall be large capacity
to facilitate cable terminations and bends.
(c) Horizontal Cabling Systems
(1) Horizontal cables shall consist of:
(i) 4 pair 100 ohm balanced Category 6/6A or higher cabling
(terminated utilizing either T568A or T568B wiring standards)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
(ii) Two or more strands of 50/125micron multimode fiber optic

cable (terminated utilizing Duplex LC connectors)
(2) Service loops at the TR shall be 3m; service loops at the work area
outlet location shall be 1m.
3) Backbone Distribution Systems
(a) Backbone systems shall be comprised of:
(1) Cable pathways
(2) Equipment Rooms
(3) Telecommunications Rooms (typically containing HC)
(4) Telecommunications enclosures (typically containing HC)
(5) Entrance Facility
(6) Transmission media (cables)
(7) Miscellaneous support facilities
(b) Backbone Building Pathways
(1) Distribution shall be in a star topology with no more than two levels
of cross-connects.
(2) Telecommunications Rooms shall be stacked in multilevel facilities.
(3) Sleeves shall extend a minimum of 25 mm above the floor.
(4) Sleeves shall be provided (103mm) to allow four sleeves or
conduits, plus one additional spare for every 4000 m2.
(5) All penetrations shall be firestopped as required.
(6) Coordinate all penetrations with structural team.
(c) Backbone Building Cabling
(1) Backbone cabling shall typically consist of :
(i) Single-mode fiber optic cable
(ii) 100ohm balanced twisted pair cabling
(2) Fiber optic cable may be utilized for:
(i) Interbuilding backbone cabling
(ii) Intrabuilding backbone cabling
(iii) Horizontal cabling
(iv) Patch cords and equipment cables
(3) Tight buffered fiber optic cables
(i) 900micron plastic coating surrounding fiber
(ii) Utilized for:
 Intrabuilding backbone cabling
 Horizontal distribution cabling

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
 Patch cords and equipment cables

(4) Loose buffered fiber optics
(i) Outside plant cabling
(ii) Select inside plant cabling
(5) Hardware/equipment mounting may be:
(i) Wall mounted:
 When rack mounting of equipment is not a possibility
 Equipment requires wall mounting
(ii) Rack mounted (in 480 mm racks or cabinets) in:
 Telecommunications Rooms
 Equipment Rooms
 Computer Rooms
(iii) Provide splicing, termination and patch panels as required for
cabling being utilized.
4) Campus Cabling
(a) Indoor backbone campus fiber optic cabling shall have minimum bend
radius of 10 times the cables outside diameter installed, and 15 times the
outside diameter during installation.
(b) OSP backbone fiber optic cabling shall have minimum bend radius of 10
times the cables outside diameter installed, and 20 times the outside
diameter during installation.
(c) Install fiber optic cabling in inner duct to allow for sectionalization for
future cable pulls.
(d) Splicing
(1) Fusion
(e) Terminating
(1) Pigtail splicing with duplex LC connectors
(2) Pre-connectorized cables with duplex LC connectors
5) Telecommunications Rooms (TR) and Enclosures (TE)
(a) TR’s may house:
(1) HC (horizontal crossconnect)
(2) IC (intermediate crossconnect)
(3) MC (main crossconnect)
(4) EF (entrance facility)
(5) Passive components
(6) Active components served by backbone cabling
(b) TE’s may house:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
(1) HC
(2) IC
(3) MC
(c) Clearances:
(1) Provide 1 m (minimum) in front and rear of each equipment rack or
cabinet.
(2) Reserve minimum of 1m clear working area around cross connects
for accessibility.
6) Equipment Rooms
(a) Equipment Rooms serve a building, campus or tenant, while TR’s serve
portions of a building.
(b) ER’s may house:
(1) EF (entrance facility)
(2) TR
(3) Cross-connect facilities
(4) Active components served by backbone cabling
(5) Building facilities
(c) TR size:
(1) Where usable floor space being served is less than 500 m2:
(2) Interior TR dimensions shall be 3.0 m x 2.4 m.
(d) Where usable floor space being served is greater than 500 m² and less
than or equal to 800 m²:
(e) Where usable floor space being served is greater than 800m² and less
than or equal to 1000m²:
(f) Clearances:
(1) Provide a minimum of 1 m in front and rear of each equipment rack
or cabinet.
(2) Reserve minimum of 1m clear working area around cross connects
for accessibility.
7) Telecommunications Entrance Facilities and Termination
(a) Separate entrance facilities may be required for:
(1) Access Provider
(2) Campus distribution
(3) CATV network
(4) FTTH system

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
(b) Designer shall work to coordinate right of way easements and permits as
applicable to the project.
(c) In some cases full route diversity may be required. This requires a
completely (physically) separate route for cabling to provide redundancy
in the case that emergency backup is required. This is typical for:
(1) Hospitals
(2) Airports
(3) Police/Fire/Emergency Services
(4) Military
(5) Radio and TV stations
(6) Computer centers
(7) Distributed Television System
m. Distributed television systems implemented by the RCJ include various system
types such as IPTV, Hybrid Fiber Coaxial (HFC) and Satellite Master Antenna
(SMATV).
n. The IPTV system, utilizing FTTH GPON networks for distribution, shall be provided
for new projects for commercial or residential buildings. The RCJ has established a
central IPTV Headend Building located within the Buffer Zone. Local IPTV Buildings
are provided throughout Jubail to serve all areas of the city. Each Local IPTV
Building is connected to the IPTV Headend Building utilizing single mode fiber in the
underground distribution system.
o. HFC type systems shall be provided for projects as directed by the RCJ. HFC type
systems are currently in use in existing RCJ facilities, and shall only be maintained
or expanded in renovation type projects. These projects shall be designed to
conform to ANSI/TIA-568-C.4: Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components
standard. New projects shall not provide HFC cable television based systems
without prior approval of the RCJ.
p. SMATV systems shall be used in residential projects for distribution of satellite IF
(Intermediate Frequency) signals to complement the IPTV service or where IPTV
systems are not available. An example of this a group of satellite dishes for an
apartment building being shared through a multi-switch to every apartment
(alongside IPTV / HFC). Additionally, a more complex system could use an optical
LNB to distribute the signals from a satellite dish farm to all the buildings within a
given area (such as in RIC where there is no IPTV or CATV system).
q. IPTV System Description
1) The RCJ provides complimentary television service to Jubail districts utilizing
IPTV signal distribution across dedicated GPON FTTH networks. New
buildings and developments requiring television service shall be provided with
IPTV system service as described here.
2) The RCJ IPTV signal originates within the central IPTV headend building
located in the Buffer Zone. The IPTV system equipment is provided in
equipment racks and is interfaced directly with GPON Optical Line Terminals
(OLT’s) or other IP access networks for transmission across the FTTH network.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
3) The location of Local IPTV buildings within districts shall be practically planned
in coordination with community planning to minimize optical fiber distribution
lengths throughout the district served. The GPON FTTH system supports
optical fiber distribution of up to a maximum logical distance between OLT and
ONT of 60km, physical distance is dependent on the optics currently available
and split ratios employed.
4) At customer premises, optical fiber GPON FTTH service extends to the Optical
Network Terminator (ONT) and interfaces with the building network structured
cabling system. IPTV network addressable set top boxes are provided at each
designated television location in the building and connected to the network
structured cabling system.
5) The existing IPTV headend equipment is located in ETSI standard four post
equipment rack, suitable to support system servers.
(a) Feeds into the existing IPTV Headend Building include satellite television
dishes for reception of cable/satellite TV networks as well as
programming transmitted to the headend over single mode optical fiber.
(b) Existing satellite reception shall occur through a modular Integrated
Receiver Decoder (IRD) that accepts DVB-S/S2 sources, provides
descrambling, and outputs IP signals.
(c) The IP streams are then directed to a content processor which shall
perform the following tasks:
(1) Rate shaping of real-time, broadcast-quality MPEG-4/AVC and
MPEG-2 SD and HD streams.
(2) Grooming, de-jittering, and seamless localized ad insertion
(3) Switched Digital Video, VOD Playlist Advertising, IPTV, and Bulk
Encryption
(d) Existing digital feeds are brought to the central IPTV Headend Building
on singlemode fiber and shall be converted to broadband signals,
demodulated, and IP encoded for distribution through the IPTV headend
content processor.
6) Redundant network switches shall provide connectivity from the FTTH OLT’s in
Local IPTV buildings in each district with the central IPTV Headend Building.
r. Existing IPTV System Components Description
1) Fiber Optic Receiver/ Demodulator/Encoder
(a) The Fiber Optic Receiver accepts digital television signals over
singlemode optical fiber with SC/APC connection from designated RCJ
sources.
(b) The fiber optic receiver module is integrated with a rack mounted
broadband distribution amplifier. System outputs include RF Output and
Test Ports.
(c) The fiber optic receiver shall be connected to a demodulator to extract
designated channels for local insertion into the IPTV system.
(d) The demodulators shall be frequency agile with broadcast quality.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
(e) The demodulated signal shall be extended to IP encoders and connected

into the content processor.
(f) The IP encoder can maximally encode four (4) channels video and audio
and multiplex corresponding 4 SPTS into MPTS output. It shall comply
with MPEG-2 standard and has high encoding quality and efficiency.
2) Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD)
(a) The modular Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD) is based on a flexible
platform hosting different modules allowing for a configuration to meet
the requirements of the RCJ. The platform supports signal reception,
descrambling, and Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI) outputs through
modules containing multiple inputs such as QAM, ASI, DVB-S/S2. The
received services are descrambled using DVB (common interface) or
AES with virtual smartcards, as required.
(b) The system contains an intuitive web-based user control, Dual redundant
hot-swap power supply, and monitoring of system power and fans.
(c) A switch module in the IRD is used to enable MPEG traffic distribution
within the chassis and provides configuration and management of the
chassis.
(d) Input modules in the IRD analyze incoming transport streams and
extracts selected MPEG services from the DVB-S/S2 physical input
interface. The system shall permit the ability to mix input types freely
within a chassis enables multiple MPEG transport streams originating
from a variety of sources to be received and processed in parallel.
Received signals shall be demodulated, de-multiplexed and distributed to
other modules inside the chassis via the backplane.
(e) ASI output modules with independent ASI outputs shall be provided.
3) ASI to Gigabit Ethernet Bridge
(a) The ASI to Gigabit Ethernet Bridge provides ASI to Gigabit Ethernet
bridging for video services. It shall bridge traffic from ASI-output IRDs,
Encoders, video routers, and other video sources to a common Gigabit
Ethernet IP backbone.
(b) The ASI to Gigabit Ethernet Bridge contains twenty-four ASI inputs,
system Ethernet control ports, and an IP payload Gigabit output port.
4) Content Processor
(a) The content processor provides the RCJ IPTV system with optimal rate
shaping, re-multiplexing, and ad insertion capability at the IPTV head end
location.
(b) The content processor provides a software application for rate shaping of
real-time, broadcast-quality MPEG-4/AVC and MPEG-2 SD and HD
streams and handles up to 2Gbps of aggregate video stream throughput.
(c) The content processor possesses additional applications, such as
grooming, dejittering, and seamless localized ad insertion, and has the
performance needed to support mission-critical initiatives like Switched
Digital Video, VOD Playlist Advertising, IPTV, and Bulk Encryption.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
(d) The system has carrier-class reliability and high availability needed for
high stream counts with redundant and hot-swappable power supplies,
hot swappable fan trays, with 1:1 and N:1 redundancy, and field-
replaceable input/output cards and processing modules.
5) IPTV and FTTH OLT Network Connections
(a) Gigabit Ethernet connections shall be provided from the central IPTV
Headend Building to each Local IPTV Building network termination card
on the FTTH OLT’s through implementation of network switches.
(b) Network switches shall contain autosensing 10/100/1000 ports (IEEE
802.3 Type 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.3u Type 100BASE-TX, IEEE 802.3ab
Type 1000BASE-T). The network switches shall also contain Layer 4
prioritization to enable prioritization based on TCP/UDP port numbers,
Traffic prioritization (IEEE 802.1p), and managed Layer 2 feature set.
Optical uplinks shall be required.
(c) Size the quantity of network switch ports based upon quantity of OLT
and IPTV system connections required, with a minimum of 20% spare.
48 port network switches shall be provided.
(d) Provide structured cabling systems to support network connections
conforming to ANSI/TIA 568-C and ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2.2 for TIA
Category 6A/ISO Class Ea/6a. In addition, cabling within the IPTV
headend building shall conform to ISO/IEC 24764 Edition 1.0
“Information Technology – Generic Cabling Systems For Data Centres”.
(e) Optical fiber utilized in the system shall be single mode conforming to the
ITU-T G.652 D standard.
6) IPTV Set Top Boxes
(a) IPTV Set Top Boxes (STB’s) are used to accept IPTV streams provided
from the RCJ Local IPTV Buildings in each district. These streams are
transported across the system FTTH GPON network to the building
where it interfaces with the building structured cabling system through an
ONT. Provide IPTV STB’s located adjacent to user television displays,
with video and audio connections from the STB to the display. IPTV
STB’s may also be integrated into audiovisual systems as a media
source in installations where CATV programming is required.
(b) The STB supports all necessary technologies for deployment of the IPTV
services including:
(1) High definition decoding and output
(2) MPEG2 and MPEG4 video formats
(3) AAC audio formats
(4) Hardware supported descrambling of media signals
(c) Ensure building infrastructure to support IPTV Set Top Boxes (STB’s) is
provided locally at each device including an IP network outlet and
building power.
(d) Typically in villas and apartments, IPTV STB’s do not require fixed
mounting. Where required, ensure provisions for mounting the IPTV
STB are provided as needed including brackets, shelves, blocking, and

Rev. 0 5.5 - 180
cable management. Mounting conditions shall accommodate device

passive ventilation requirements through proper device orientation and
clear space required by device manufacturer. Mounting conditions may
include:
(1) Cabinet entertainments centers
(2) Equipment rack mounting
(3) Wall or post shelf mounting adjacent to the television display
(e) Where projects require the television display to be included in the scope
of work, provide audiovisual cable patch cord connections from the IPTV
STB to the display.
s. CATV Tertiary System
1) CATV Tertiary Network
(a) The tertiary network is defined as the portion of the CATV networks from
the telecommunications handhole, provided by others and located at the
Subscriber Property Line, to the telephone and CATV outlets in the
subscriber's residence. This includes but is not limited to raceways,
cables, protectors, splitters, amplifiers and jacks. All defined equipment
and fittings must be provided and installed by the Contractor building the
individual house or apartment.
(b) The CATV Tertiary Network consists of provision and installation of a 75
ohm coaxial cable, suitable for use with CATV frequencies up to 1000
MHz. from the telecommunications handhole to the individual CATV
outlets in the residence.
(c) The CATV cable shall be placed in the duct from the handhole to a wall
mounted apparatus cabinet dimensioned to contain over-voltage
protection, splitters and where applicable amplifier or other equipment
required for system operation. From this point the cable will be extended
to all CATV outlets. No splicing of cable is permitted inside the duct.
(d) The CATV outlets shall be flush mounted jacks with covers that
automatically provide a 75 ohm termination on the cable when a plug is
not inserted into the jack. Splitters or tap-off shall be used at each
branching point in the cable. Any output of a splitter not used at a
branch point shall be terminated in a 75 ohm resistor. Locate CATV
outlets directly adjacent to electrical outlets with a matching faceplate
construction and color.
(e) The intent of all distribution design is to provide a test signal level of 0
dBmV, flat from 52 to 1000 MHz at each subscriber outlet. As a practical
approach to this objective, the signal level provided by the distribution
network at the subscribers connection point will be set between + 18 and
+ 22 dBmV. From this input level, the tertiary network design shall
provide for signals within the range - 3 to + 20 dBmV at the subscribers
outlet. The CATV distribution system is designed for 31 TV channels and
the worst-case receive signal condition (i.e., following 35 trunk amplifiers,
1 bridging amplifier and 2 line extenders) shall be:
(1) Signal to Hum: 41.49 dB.
(2) Signal to Noise: 44.73 dB.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(3) Signal to Cross-Modulation: 51.45 dB.

(4) Signal to 2nd Order Intermode: 59.55 dB.
(f) Each apartment shall be provided with a separate coaxial cable feed
from the main distribution box, located for convenient access in the entry
to the building.
(g) The CATV cable shall terminate first on a lightning protection block
before entering the building distribution system.
(h) Trunk, Distribution and Line Extender Amplifiers
(1) Broadband push-pull amplifier is used for amplification of the signal
in the trunk and spur feeds. Devices shall power powered through a
local power supply and shall be located in the equipment rack.
(2) Trunk and line extender amplifier shall have the main features as
shown in Table 5.5.2.C.
TABLE 5.5.2.C: MAIN FEATURES OF TRUNK AND LINE EXTENDER
AMPLIFIERS
Trunk
Line Extender Amplifier
Amplifier
Nominal Impedance 75  75 
Frequency Response ± 0.25 dB ± 0.5 dB
Minimum input level 10 dBmV 10 dBmV
Minimum output level 25 dBmV 38 dBmV
Minimum full gain 27dB (forward amplifier)

without equalizers
25 dB
26 dB (reverse modules)
Noise figure 8 dB 7 dB
Test Jack at output - 30 dB - 30 dB
Return loss at input
and output at 40 MHz
20 dB 20 dB
(i) Distribution Amplifier

(1) Distribution amplifier is utilized to raise the output level of the
headend signal for insertion of the lower pilot frequency.
(2) Distribution amplifiers main features
(i) Nominal impedance input and output 75 ohm.
(ii) Frequency range 47 to 870 MHz.
(iii) Input level 78 dBµV and output level 92 dBµV.
(iv) Gain 12 to 14 dB.
(v) Frequency response ± 0.4 dB.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
(vi) Isolation of test points, input and outputs - 20 dB.

(vii) Pilot insertion level adjustable over ± 1 dB.
(viii) Maximum admissible spurious emissions 4 x 10–9 W.
(j) Directional Coupler
(1) Directional coupler shall be two-way coupler with cast-aluminum
enclosure, 75 Ohm, and shall be used for connection of cables with
a maximum outer connector diameter of 12.7 mm.
(2) It shall have the features presented in Table 5.5.2.D.
TABLE 5.5.2.D: SPECIFICATION OF 8, 12 AND 16 dB DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
8 dB 12 dB 16 dB
5 - 50 MHz 1.9 (2.4) 1.3 (1.6) 1.1 (2.2)
Through loss 50 - 600 MHz 2.0 (3.2) 1.4 (2.5) 1.2 (2.5)
dB
Nominal
600 - 862 MHz 2.6 (3.6) 1.4 (2.8) 1.4 (2.8)
(Maximum)
862 - 1000 MHz 3.4 (4.1) 1.8 (3.5) 1.8 (2.5)
5 - 50 MHz 8.6 12.2 16.9
Tap loss 50 - 600 MHz 8.8 12.1 16.8
dB
(± 1dB) 600 - 862 MHz 8.2 11.7 16.2
862 - 1000 MHz 8.3 11.7 15.8
5 - 50 MHz ≥ 28 ≥ 28 ≥ 25
Tap-to-output 50 - 600 MHz ≥ 21 ≥ 23 ≥ 24
dB
isolation 600 - 862 MHz ≥ 19 ≥ 19 ≥ 19
862 - 1000 MHz ≥ 18 ≥ 18 ≥ 18
Return loss dB ≥ 15
Power passing between all ports dB Max 12 A, 60 V (AC/DC)
(k) Line Splitter

(1) Line splitter shall have cast-aluminum enclosure with a maximum
outer connector diameter of 12.7mm.
(2) It shall have the features presented in Table 5.5.2.E.
TABLE 5.5.2.E: 2-WAY AND 3-WAY LINE SPLITTER
2-way 3-way
5 - 50 MHz 3.7 (4.3) 3.7/7.1 (4.4/8.0)
50 - 600
Insertion loss MHz 3.9 (5.2) 4.0/7.4 (5.4/8.7)
dB
Nominal 600 - 862
(Maximum) MHz 3.9 (5.4) 4.0/7.6 (5.7/9.0)
862 - 1000
MHz 4.2 (5.7) 4.1/8.5 (6.0/9.2)
Output Isolation 5 - 50 MHz dB ≥ 23 ≥ 23

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
50 - 600
MHz ≥ 23 ≥ 20
600 - 862
MHz ≥ 22 ≥ 20
862 - 1000
MHz ≥ 18 ≥ 18
Return loss dB > 16
Power passing between all ports dB Max 12 A, 60 V (AC/DC)
4. Master Clock System

a. The master clock system shall provide synchronized time throughout the facility.
Time source shall be provided through a network connection communicating via
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) and Network Time Protocol (NTP) RFC-1305
to an internet based stratum-1 network time server. This shall be the Royal
Commission NTP server if the facility is connected via the Metropolitan Area
Network (MAN) or an internet based time server otherwise. If no network or internet
source is available time can be sourced via the GPS (Global Positioning System)
time signal.
b. Master Clock System Types
1) Wired Clock Systems
(a) Clock system shall allow for combining data and electrical power signals
over the same cable.
(b) Clocks shall correct themselves upon receipt of digital signal.
2) Wireless Clock Systems
(a) Clocks shall self-synchronize upon receipt of wireless signal.
(b) Diagnostic function shall permit monitoring of last received wireless
signal.
(c) Web interface shall permit monitoring of system status.
3) Wireless Talkback Clock Systems
(a) Masterclock with wireless talkback technology transceiver
(b) Clocks shall self-synchronize upon receipt of wireless signal.
(c) Diagnostic function shall permit monitoring of last received wireless
signal.
(d) System shall not require physical servers or additional hardware or
software to function.
(e) Talkback functionality permits communicating vital information such as
battery life, status updates, clock status, and signal strength to the
master clock. Any changes in this information shall be automatically
reported to the facility’s manager via email.
4) IP Clock Systems
(a) IP clocks shall utilize PoE to IEEE 802.3af/at or bt.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
(b) System shall allow for monitoring of clocks through software, including:
(1) Uploading and downloading configuration capabilities
(2) Sending countdown functions to digital clocks
(3) Displaying clocks not receiving signal
(c) Power interruption to clocks shall not cause system failure.
c. Clocks Types
1) Analog Clocks
(a) Clocks shall have round or square 12/24 hour face with shatter-proof
case.
2) Digital Clocks
(a) Clocks display high-efficiency LED numeric values with shatter-proof
case.
d. Locations, Mounting, and Sizes
1) Provide minimum of one clock per occupied space.
2) Approximate mounting height shall be 2.4 m above finished floor. Final
location and mounting height shall be coordinated with other equipment and
furnishings prior to installation.
3) Typical clocks shall be 300 mm in diameter (round clocks) or 230 mm on a side
(square clocks).
4) Large group spaces shall require larger clocks – 410 mm in diameter (round
clocks) or 300 mm on a side (square clocks).
5) Double sided clocks shall be provided in corridors.
e. Accessories
1) GPS
(a) GPS shall be capable of receiving synchronization signal from satellites.
2) Wireless Transmitter
(a) Capable of wirelessly transmitting data for synchronization of clock time.
3) Wireless Repeater
(a) Capable of wirelessly transmitting and receiving data for synchronization
of clock time.
4) Network Repeater
(a) Capable of receiving time signal through TCP/IP from masterclock.
5) Environmental Protection
(a) In gymnasiums and other potentially high impact spaces, provide
wireguards on clocks.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
f. Cabling for wired aspects of systems shall meet system manufacturer requirements
for types of communication protocols and cabling distances used.
g. Public Address and General Alarm
h. General
1) The public address system for offices shall be designed for transmission of
general announcements, emergency alarms and music.
2) Public Address systems for Mosques shall be designed for voice only.
3) Public Address and General Alarm (PAGA) for Industrial Areas shall include
Amplifiers, Speakers and Loudspeakers to broadcast general and
emergency announcements and Industrial Intercom Stations to provide
important plant communication functions in operational or emergency events
(according to IEC 60849 standard).
i. Public address system shall consist of the following but not limited to:
1) Network Audio Adapter
(a) The network audio codec shall be IP-addressable and convert analog
audio (mic or line level) to standard IP packets for transport over an IP-
based network including local area, wide area and the Internet. The
device shall be capable of simultaneous transport of audio, serial RS-232
data and contact closures. The device shall have variable sample rate
and audio bandwidth with a minimum latency/delay of 20 ms.
(b) The network interface shall be 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, Auto-
Negotiation and utilize the network protocols TCP/IP, UDP, HTTP and
RTP. The audio input shall be balanced, transformer-isolated, MIC/LINE
switchable with adjustable volume control.
(c) The audio output shall be balanced, transformer-isolated, (0 dBV, 600
ohms), with plug-in screw connector. Specifications shall include
frequency response of 50 to 14k Hz and distortion of under 0.3% (1k Hz,
sampling frequency 32 kHz).
(d) The unit shall be capable of Unicast transmission to up to 4 simultaneous
units/locations over LAN/WAN/Internet, and Multicast transmission to up
to 64 simultaneous units/locations over LAN/WAN.
(e) The device shall include software for configuration, operation and
management with password protected access. The device shall include a
built-in web server for control and monitoring from any network-based
PC with password protected access.
2) Main Amplifiers
(a) The amplifiers shall have the following main features:
(1) Frequency response 60 Hz to 20 kHz ± 2 dB or better
(2) Maximum distortion 100 Hz to 16 kHz - 0.25%
(3) Signal to noise ratio 45 dB or better
(b) Balanced 70/100 V outputs shall be available at a screw terminal strip.
(c) The equipment shall have protection circuits to protect the amplifiers
from damage under all normal and abnormal operating conditions.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
3) Control Pre-Amplifiers
(a) Control Pre-amplifiers shall be supplied by the Contractor to accept such
inputs as may be required under the terms of the Contract. All inputs
shall be preferably of 600 Ohm balanced or 50M Ohm single ended
configuration.
(b) There shall be at least one spare input in addition to the inputs required
by the Contract Drawings.
(c) Control Pre-amplifiers shall be equipped with mixable inputs, convertible
for various sources with supplementary modules and adapter kits.
Remote controllable priority switching for each input and separate
controls for treble and bass shall be provided.
(d) The output from the pre-amplifier shall be at a level compatible with the
input requirements of the main power amplifier.
(e) All inputs to the pre-amplifier shall be shielded and grounded cables.
4) Low Powered Amplifier (for Mosques Only)
(a) The amplifier provided shall consist of the pre-amplifier, power amplifier,
zone selector and a mixer in a single assembly.
(b) The input signal shall be balanced.
(c) The amplifier shall be equipped with tone control facilities to tailor the
audio response to suit the input signals and the required performance
detailed in this Specification.
5) Tone Signal Generator
(a) This unit shall generate various signals e.g. fire alarm, air raid warning,
air raid imminent and all clear etc. according to requirements of the Civil
Defense Bureau.
(b) External warnings may be initiated from Civil Defense Bureau
installations through dedicated links.
(c) Automatic release through systems such as fire alarm and burglar
detection and manual release must be possible.
6) Loudspeakers
(a) Performance of loudspeakers shall be not less than that specified in IEC
60581-7.
(b) Wall Speakers
(1) These speakers shall be provided with a resonating board and an
aluminum grille for universal application for flush or surface mounted
enclosures.
(2) The speaker shall be a high performance type and shall be provided
with an autotransformer with taps for 1/4, 1/2 or 1/1 of output
capacity.
(3) The unit shall incorporate a volume control. Frequency response
shall be ± 2 dB from 60 Hz to 16 kHz.
(c) Ceiling Speakers

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
(1) These speakers, including their accessories, shall be designed for

recess installation in various suspended ceiling types.
(2) The grille shall be aluminum. The speaker itself shall be the same
type as wall mounted loudspeakers.
(d) Column Speakers
(1) These speakers shall be for interior, or in weatherproof design, for
exterior installation. The enclosure shall be of aluminum and shall
be for wall or pole mounting, with suitable accessories.
(2) A transformer with taps for 1/4, 1/2 or 1/1 capacity shall be built in.
Frequency response shall be at least ± 2 dB from 150 Hz to 15 kHz.
(e) Horn Speakers
(1) These speakers shall be for exterior installation in weatherproof
design. The enclosure shall be of impact resistant plastic with swivel
brackets.
(2) The built in autotransformer shall have taps for 1/8, 1/4, 1/2 and 1/1
of output capacity. The frequency response shall be within ±2 dB
from 200 Hz to 10 kHz.
7) Microphones
(a) Microphones shall be selected for the special usage. They shall have a
super re-inform characteristic, and shall be equipped with an adjustment
device for 5 step tone characteristic, and a presence switch.
(b) The frequency response shall be between 30 Hz and 20 kHz and the
feedback damping shall be approximately 20 dB at 130 ohm.
(c) Connection cables and supports shall be provided to suit the special
usage.
(d) All microphones shall be provided with desk mount or floor mount as
suitable for application.
8) Passive Combiner
(a) The passive combiner shall consist of a resistive network to combine the
outputs from the microphones and enable the connection of all three
microphones to a single pre-amplifier channel.
9) Headsets
(a) The headsets shall be of robust design and incorporate lightweight
components and level control.
(b) The frequency response shall be 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
10) Industrial Intercom Station
(a) Handset channel.
(b) Hands-free microphone channel.
(c) Output channel for hadling an external amplified Loudspeaker.
(d) Capacity to activate an emergency call.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
5. Audio/Visual Systems
a. System Type Descriptions
1) Auditorium
(a) The auditorium shape and acoustical treatments shall meet project
requirements and be designed by an acoustician or acoustical
consultant.
(1) Provide room calculations for the following:
(i) Reverberation Time
(ii) Noise Criteria (NC)
(iii) Potential Acoustic Gain (PAG)/Needed Acoustic Gain (NAG)
(b) The room shall typically have pendant mounted projectors and motorized
projection screens. The projector can be floor mounted if a projector
room is provided. The projectors shall be native WUXGA resolution,
have a minimum 6000 ANSI lumens, and be a 3-chip LCD.
(c) Each projector shall have the capability to display independent images.
(d) Power, network, and twisted pair audiovisual connections shall be
provided to the projector locations.
(e) Motorized tab tensioned front projection screens with low voltage control
interfaces and wall switches shall be provided. The screens shall be
ceiling recessed.
(f) The screens shall have a 16:10 aspect ratios and be sized to maximize
viewing distances as required.
(g) The screens shall be supplied with black drop and the viewable surface
bottom edges shall be approximately 4’ above finished floor (AFF).
(h) The screen surface is matte white to facilitate general presentations.
(i) A lectern (not mobile) shall be provided for the classroom and connected
into a floor box input/output plate beneath the lectern.
(j) The lectern shall have a goose neck microphone with shock mount.
(k) Laptop video/audio, power, network, and microphone patch cables shall
be stored in a cable cubby in the lectern surface.
(l) A power receptacle with USB charging shall be located in the lectern.
(m) The lectern shall have equipment rack rails and contain the following
major components:
(1) Blu-ray player
(2) Permanent PC with wired mouse and keyboard
(3) Media presentation matrix switcher with amplifier and control
processor
(4) Twisted pair extenders
(n) A ceiling document camera shall be provided over the instruction table.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
(o) Signal distribution shall utilize HDBaseT technology or other enhanced

proprietary technology.
(p) A scaling twisted pair receiver shall be mounted with the projectors to
receive the video and control signals. The video signal sent from various
sources shall be scaled to match the native resolutions of the projectors.
(q) Wall mounted front speakers in the room will operate to provide program
audio.
(r) BYOD (Bring Your Own device) collaboration shall be. Up to four (4)
student tablet devices shall be capable of presenting simultaneous on
the projection screen using Campus WiFi.
(s) Lighting and shade control for the rooms shall be integrated into the AV
control system using serial RS-232/485 or network connection interfaces.
(t) Integrated videoconferencing capabilities shall be supported in the
systems at the discretion of the RCJ.
(u) A system input for a camera shall be provided in the rear of the room.
(v) A wall mounted touch panel/button controller will be used to operate the
system. This panel shall permit control of the following:
(1) Intro screen
(2) System on/off
(3) Source selection
(4) Video mute
(5) Video freeze
(6) Blu- Ray device control
(7) Ceiling document camera controls
(8) Program volume
(9) Audio mute
(10) Help
2) Classrooms
(a) The Classroom audiovisual shall facilitate classroom lecture,
presentation, and collaboration.
(b) The room shall have one (1) ultra or extreme short-throw projector. The
projector shall be native WXGA resolution, have a minimum 3000 ANSI
lumens, capable of displaying 95”, and be a 3-chip LCD.
(c) Power, network, and twisted pair, audiovisual connections (HDMI) shall
be provided to the projector location.
(d) A smart interactive board with integrated sound and wall/floor outlets
shall be provided. The screen shall support multiple simultaneous
touches.
(e) The screen shall have a 16:10 or 16:9 aspect ratio and be sized to
maximize viewing distances as required.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 190
(f) The screen surface shall be matte white to facilitate general

presentations.
(g) One (1) HDMI/VGA with 3.5mm stereo audio twisted pair transmitter
plate shall be available as inputs for the system from a designated
presentation location at the front teaching wall. This shall provide a
connection for Instructor laptops. The twisted pair transmitter shall utilize
HDBaseT technology or other enhanced proprietary technology.
(h) A scaling twisted pair receiver shall be mounted with the projector to
receive the video and control signals. The video signal sent from various
sources shall be scaled to match the native resolution of the projector.
(i) BYOD (Bring Your Own device) collaboration shall be supported. Up to
four (4) student tablet devices shall be capable of presenting
simultaneous on the projection screen using building Wi-Fi.
(j) The classroom shall also contain a media presentation switcher with
integrated amplifier, twisted pair extender, and control processor.
(k) Lighting and shade control for the rooms shall be integrated into the AV
control system.
(l) Integrated videoconferencing capabilities shall be supported in the
systems, however the system shall also support PC based
Webconferencing.
(m) A wall mounted touch panel/button controller may be used to operate the
system. This panel shall permit control of the following:
(1) Intro screen
(2) System on/off
(3) Source selection
(4) Video mute
(5) Video freeze
(6) Blu- Ray device control
(7) Program volume
(8) Audio mute
(9) Help
3) Conference Room
(a) The room shall have one (1) large 2,032 mm nominal flat panel display
wall mounted with a swing arm mount and recessed back box.
(b) The room shall have a table based room collaboration system consisting
of four (4) HDMI connections and two (2) VGA/Stereo connections.
“Show me” selector cables in a cable cubby shall provide source control.
The cables shall be located in retractors mounted under the table.
(c) A presentation switcher shall be secured under the table. An HDMI
output from the switcher shall be connected to a twisted pair transmitter
located in the floor box. A twisted pair receiver, audio de-embedder, and
mini amplifier shall be located behind the flat panel display.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(d) The collaboration system shall control the flat panel display using an RS-
232 based control processor and button panel controller.
(e) Two (2) mono 70V ceiling speakers shall be located in the room to
provide program audio.
(f) Lighting and shade control for the rooms shall be integrated into the AV
control system.
(g) Integrated videoconferencing capabilities shall be supported at the
discretion of the RCJ.
4) TMC Video Wall
(a) The Traffic Management Center (TMC) shall contain a large and flexible
video wall. The video wall is typically used to provide a real time display
from ITS system servers of road networks, sensor data, and video
surveillance.
(b) The size of the video wall shall be coordinated with the ITS system
design requirements and be proportional to number of operators required
within the control room.
(c) The video wall shall consist of an array of flat panel displays or small
form factor video cubes supported from an engineered framing system.
The displays shall have zero or narrow mullions designed for video wall
applications. The Video Wall should have a maximum Bezel Size of 1.0
mm in order to guarantee the correct operation for the Integrated
Security System which requires detailed visualization of Maps, Road
Routes, etc.
(d) The panel framing system and mounts shall provide rear access or
scissor supports permitting removable or maintenance of single panel in
the array. The framing systems shall accommodate cable management
for power and video distribution.
(e) The video wall shall be provisioned with a hardware based video
processor to collect video source inputs from numerous ITS servers
including video surveillance network video recorders and storage area
networks. Coordinate the quantities of inputs required with the ITS
system design.
(f) Any system input can operate as a Native High Resolution Channel,
Scaled PIP, Scaled Background, or Key Channel – on any display in the
system. The video processor shall provide blending, windowing, mixing
and scaling along with key frame effects. Operators shall control the
video wall from PC workstations.
b. System Components
1) Projection Screens
(a) Types shall include: front projection and rear projection
(b) Gain: Indication of screen's luminance or brightness, measured
perpendicular to screen center and relative to magnesium carbonate
block, which serves as standard for 1.0 gain. Higher numbers indicate
greater brightness.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
(c) Viewing Angle: Horizontal angle from perpendicular center of screen at

which gain or brightness decreases by 50%.
(d) Format: Proportion of projection screen viewing area expressed as a
ratio of width/height.
(1) HDTV Format:
1.78:1. (2) 16:10 Wide:
1.60:1.
(e) Types shall include:
(1) Manual
(i) Screen Operation: Manually operated, retractable projection
screen mounted on ball bearing rigid steel spring roller with
controlled screen return mechanism.
 Form screen bottom into pocket holding tubular metal slat
with attached steel pull bail
 Protect slat ends with heavy-duty end caps
 Pull cord
(ii) Adjustable roller mounting brackets to allow centering or
offsetting the screen within the case.
(iii) Screen Mounting Type: Ceiling Recessed
(iv) Screen Viewing Surface:
 Permanently attached to roller
 Front projection, flame retardant, mildew resistant,
fiberglass fabric, black backed typically with standard black
borders, easily cleaned with mild soap and water solution
(2) Motorized
(i) Screen Operation: Electrically operated, retractable, with rigid
metal roller
 Motor: Housed inside metal roller and including automatic
thermal overload protection, integral gears, capacitor and
electric brake to prevent coasting
 Type: 3-wire with ground with quick connect male plug-in
connector, permanently lubricated, quick reversal type
designed for mounting inside roller
 Include preset, adjustable limit switches to automatically
stop viewing surface in UP or DOWN position
(ii) Electric Controls: Wall-mounted switch
 Switch: 3 position type with cover plate for UP, DOWN and
STOP functions
 Junction Box: attached to screen case

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
(3) Portable
(i) Free-standing, manufactured, collapsible, portable, projection
screen with pneumatic spring system allowing screen to be
raised and lowered with minimal effort
(4) Table Top
(i) Compact, free-standing, manufactured, collapsible, portable,
projection screen suitable for tabletop presentations
(5) Tripod
(i) Free-standing, manufactured, collapsible, portable, tripod type
projection screen
(ii) Aluminum housing case for screen on shall be on spring roller.
Attach case to tripod support. Provide with built-in lock to
secure screen fabric during transport and use to prevent
shifting.
(iii) Tripod support: Extruded aluminum legs with toe release
mechanism. Legs mounted on self-locking extension support
tube with high and low case adjustment.
2) Flat Panel Displays
(a) Displays shall be professional grade displays capable of operating 24
hrs/day, 7 days a week.
(b) Tamper resistant control locks shall prevent unauthorized adjustments at
standalone locations or non-monitored public locations.
(c) Display shall allow for both vertical and horizontal mounting.
(d) Display shall be of high durability in exposure to moisture, smoke, and
well as dust and temperature changes.
(e) Display shall allow a variety of input terminal cards as well as multiple
inputs.
(f) Viewing angle shall be a wide angle to allow screen to retain color when
viewed at a wide angle.
(g) Displays shall permit RS-232 control.
(h) Screen shall be equipped with rear speakers.
(i) Screen may offer touchscreen capabilities.
(j) Types:
(1) LED
(2) LCD
(3) Monitor
(4) 3D
3) Audiovisual Control Systems
(a) Audiovisual control systems shall be IP network based.
(b) Audiovisual control systems shall have the following capabilities:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
(1) Control panel integration

(2) RS-232c control ports
(3) IR control ports
(4) Relay control ports
D. Safety and Security Systems
(a) Access Control System
b. The access control system consists of a controller and associated hardware. This
provides for the physical connection to readers, locking hardware, door status
switches, and request to exit devices. Access Control Door Types and Locations
1) Typically access control doors permit free egress at all times.
2) Monitored only – Doors are equipped with door status switches reporting to the
centralized control system.
(a) Passive infrared detectors or request to exits shunt the alarm triggered
by activation of door status switch.
3) Electrified Doors – Doors may be programmed to allow access during
scheduled building hours. Otherwise access may be granted through:
(a) Authorized Access – Authorized credentials shunt the alarm triggered by
activation of door position switch from exterior. Interior passive infrared
detectors, or request to exits shunt alarm triggered by activation of door
status switch from interior.
(1) Access control system keeps log of authorized entry.
c. User Credentials and Access Readers may include:
1) Proximity card
2) SMART card
3) Outdoor card reader.
4) Wireless card reader.
5) Key fob
6) Biometrics
7) Keypad
d. Access Control System Panels
1) Panels shall have sufficient capacity for input and outputs to provide for the
card readers, electric strikes, door monitors and other devices as required.
2) Control system shall have features to reduce false alarms.
3) Controllers shall interface between the central station and remote sensors and
controls.
4) Panels shall include main Controller Cards and have capacity to expand the
doors quantity to be monitored through Expansion Cards.
e. Cabling and Pathways
1) Cabling shall be plenum rated where exposed in environmental air plenums.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
2) Cabling shall include low-voltage control cabling, control-circuit conductors,

and identification products.
3) Wiring within Enclosures:
(a) Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and
without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.
(b) Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
(c) Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
(d) Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of
enclosure.
(e) Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any
enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks.
(f) Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams.
(g) Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs,
pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
(h) Cabling shall not be spliced.
4) Pathways
(a) Cabling shall be supported in conduit to headend location. Where
conduit is not provided, cabling shall be supported using open top cable
supports or cable tray as required.
(b) Outlet boxes, connection panels, cameras, card readers and other
devices shall be weatherproof gasketed type, IP52 or IP65 in the
following instances:
(1) On surface of exterior face of building, including areas where not
under canopies, cast boxes with threaded hubs must be used and
under canopies steel boxes with gasket connections to devices
(2) In any areas where specifically noted "WP" or required by the local
regulation
(3) Within air conditioning enclosures
(4) In underground splice boxes
(5) On building roof
(6) Within vivarium locations
(7) In unconditioned spaces subject to exterior ambient conditions such
as loading docks and parking garages
(c) Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and
location
(1) Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel
conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated.
(2) PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings
listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints,
nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by
manufacturer.
(3) EMT: Use compression, steel fittings.
(4) Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit.
(5) Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with
concrete or earth.
(6) Automatic Number Plate Recognition (ANPR)
f. System Description
1) ANPR is a technical method of using closed circuit video surveillance cameras
coupled with processors to determine vehicle license plate numbers. ANPR
shall be used to automatically read and recognize vehicle registration number
plates, which can then be cross-checked against a linked database.
2) The ANPR system will have the following capabilities:
(a) Locate and to isolate the number plate in the image
(b) Correct the brightness and the contrast of the number plate
(c) Separate each character of the number plate
(d) Recognize each character of the number plate through optical character
recognition
3) The ANPR capture unit contains the camera, housing, mounts, and infrared
focusing detectors. The ANPR process unit contains the computer, image
frame grabber, and recognition engine. The process unit can control one or
more capture units simultaneously.
4) Fixed ANPR cameras shall be situated in designated traffic and entrance areas
and be mounted in weatherized enclosures.
5) The ANPR camera shall be served by a local weatherized terminal box
providing easy access to all hardware interfaces and power supplies.
6) The terminal box shall interface through approved wired or wireless
connections to the RCJ network to communicate with database system
software.
7) The database system software shall be the central repository to all number
plate data along with tools to support data analysis, queries, and reporting for
investigative purposes. It shall provide administrative and data analysis
functions for both mobile and fixed deployments of ANPR.
8) Each ANPR system shall be capable of performing at traffic volumes of 1,000
vehicles per hour at a minimum.
g. System Selection and Fixed Locations
1) A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall confirm the locations where ANPR Systems
are to be provided with the RCJ. The location and application of the ANPR
system shall determine the components and configurations required for the
system. Examples locations where ANPR systems may be required by RCJ
include:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
(a) Car Parks

(1) The ANPR system shall provide automated parking facility
management and security for airports, hospitals, universities,
arenas, stadiums, and other locations as designated.
(2) The system shall record parking ticket number, day, and time which
are linked in a management application.
(3) The system shall permit correct amounts to be charged for lost
tickets.
(4) Ticket interchange shall be blocked where vehicle number plates do
not match with the entrance tickets.
(5) The system shall provide visitor history reports and identify unusual
parking behaviors.
(6) Tabulation of occupancy levels shall be a feature of the system.
(b) Access Control
(1) ANPR shall be used in conjunction with driver personal access
control credentials to permit vehicle access at designated gated
entrances.
(c) Public Safety
(1) Where designated by the RCJ, the ANPR system shall provide
continuous surveillance of high-traffic areas to enables rapid,
efficient, and appropriate deployment of public safety resources.
h. Cameras
1) Cameras types shall be selected based upon application requirements and
include:
(a) Compact ANPR Camera
(1) Compact cameras shall be used in temporary or fixed applications
where visual aesthetics is a project goal, or project budgets require
a cost effective option.
(2) The controller shall be integral to the camera unit with a single point
connecting cable.
(b) Fixed Single Lane ANPR Camera
(1) Single lane cameras shall be used in single lane applications or in
dense areas such as busy intersections where small sized systems
are required.
(2) The camera shall provide a minimum of 1.5m of horizontal traffic
lane coverage.
(c) Fixed Wide Lane ANPR Camera
(1) Wide lane cameras shall be used to capture multiple license plates
in the same field of view across the minimum width of a highway
lane.
(2) The camera shall be used where interfacing with external devices
such as radar, weigh-in-motion, or ticketing systems is required.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
(d) Fixed High Resolution ANPR Camera

(1) High Resolution cameras shall be used to capture multiple license
plates in the same field of view across a minimum width of 2.8m of
horizontal traffic lane coverage.
(2) The camera shall contain high-power IR pulsed illuminator LEDs to
permit high resolution imaging.
(3) Real time video triggering upon number plate presence shall provide
optimum plate detection. A vehicle presence detector input may also
be provided for capturing vehicle overview images when no license
plate is present.
(4) The camera shall be integrated with third party devices including
Weigh-in motion, radar, lane controllers for tolling, and loop
detectors for parking as required by the application.
2) The camera units shall be fully integrated and rugged incorporating the fixed
ANPR camera, illuminator and processor within a single sealed enclosure.
3) Dual lens cameras shall be provided with channels for integrating infrared and
color images. Infrared capability shall capture the plate number regardless of
sun glare, headlights, darkness, or weather conditions.
4) The system optical character recognition (OCR) engine shall be specific to the
region. The system shall operate under conditions of skewed and off-axis plate
reads, various plate sizes, syntax rules, and designs.
5) The system shall vary the flash, shutter and gain settings of the camera to
capture multiple plate images, ensuring the highest quality photo regardless of
light or weather conditions. The image determined to produce the highest
quality read shall be used for processing.
6) Camera lenses shall be selected based on required depth and field of view.
7) Camera enclosures shall be weatherproof sealed to IP67 Standards
minimum and the Operation Temperature range shall be -20 to 75 °C.
8) The system shall support TCP / IP Ethernet with socket and FTP protocols,
Wireless LAN connectivity, relay output, RS232, or true IP connectivity over
GPRS / GSM.
9) The cameras shall be web-enabled IP-addressable devices.
i. Software and Databases
1) Database
(a) Database system software includes administration utilities permitting for
customization of screens, setup of users, and specification of databases
for comparison purposes.
(b) The software shall permit data mining, allowing users to locate and map
hits based on a wide range of criteria including partial plates, street
address, GPS coordinates, and time and date.
(c) Remote camera health notifications shall be provided via email.
(d) Car Park Monitoring Software
(1) The software shall be web based and track items such as:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
(i) Mean stay times

(ii) Total vehicle in/out
(iii) Current occupancy levels
(2) The software shall offer graphing functionality to provide visual
depiction of key trends.
(3) The software shall also identify unusual behaviors, such as repeat
visitors or long stay visitors.
(4) The software shall create hotlists to flag vehicles known for
suspicious activity and alert management when such vehicles are
present.
2) User Portals
(a) User software shall have a web enabled interface permitting remote
mobile users to perform queries and receive hit alerts from local servers
using laptops or PDA’s. The system shall permit efficient allocation of
enforcement resources for fixed camera deployments.
(b) The application software shall be intuitive and configured to permit
individual selection of device(s) and hotlist(s) of interest.
(c) The software shall display reads including license plate number, time &
date, device and location (GPS coordinate).
(d) The software shall be username and password protected requiring pre-
set VPN or firewall recognition.
(e) Intrusion Detection Systems
j. General
1) This Subsection applies to the intrusion detection systems inside residential,
commercial, institutional and industrial facilities.
2) Purpose
(a) The primary purpose of the intrusion detection system is to notify public
safety personnel and/or facility occupants upon system alarm, providing
the location and type of secure perimeter breach.
(b) The secondary purpose is to initiate security functions which are building
functions intended to increase the protection of the individuals and
physical property.
3) The intrusion detection system shall be provided in accordance with the
physical security requirements of the facility.
(a) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall collaborate with the RCJ to
determine the following project intrusion detection system requirements
prior to the 10% design submission.
(1) Project site security perimeters
(2) Building security perimeter
(3) Layered security perimeters within buildings
(i) Public Areas

Rev. 0 5.5 - 10
(ii) Employee Areas

(iii) High Value Asset Areas
(4) Intrusion Detection Zones
(5) Alarm Types and Zones
(6) Building Hours of Operation
(7) System Arming/Disarming Positions
(8) System Monitoring Positions
(9) System Reporting Locations and Means
(10) Building Systems Interface Requirements
(i) Fire Alarm System
(ii) CCTV Video Surveillance System
(iii) Access Control System
(iv) Lighting Control System
(v) Building Automation Systems
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare documentation to
summarize the recommended approach for the intrusion detection
system designed for the facility. This documentation shall be submitted
to the RCJ for review and approval and shall include the following:
(1) Floor plans illustrating the locations for all required intrusion
detection system equipment
(2) Description summarizing the detection methods selected for the
various spaces throughout the facility
(3) System operational description
k. System Description and Requirements
1) The intrusion detection systems shall consist of modular architecture,
microprocessor-based controls, intrusion sensors and detection devices, and
communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and control functions.
2) The intrusion detection system shall be a component of an integrated security
management system that performs additional related functions such as access
control, security video surveillance, and emergency communications.
3) System components shall be continuously monitored for normal, alarm, and
trouble conditions.
4) Alarm signals shall display at a master control unit and actuate audible and
visual alarm devices.
5) Trouble signals shall indicate system problems such as battery failure, open or
shorted transmission line conductors, or control-unit failure.
6) A master control unit shall directly monitor intrusion detection devices and
connecting wiring in a multiplexed distributed control system or as part of a
network.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 11
7) The system shall interface with computer software with the capability to fully
program the panel by connecting to the panel through a standard phone line
connection, Ethernet network connection, or network connection across the
Internet.
8) The system areas and zones shall be programmable and can be assigned to
time schedules. The system shall store, log, display, and transmit specific
custom designations for system areas, zones, and user names.
9) The system shall support user interaction by way of a keypad, web browser,
system software, key switch, or radio frequency wireless control.
10) System operators shall have the ability to acknowledge alarms, arm/disarm
zones, and conduct system tests.
11) Alarm or supervisory signals from certain intrusion detection devices shall
permit the intrusion detection system to control the following functions in
related systems:
(a) The system shall interface with computer software capable of locking
down all access controlled doors.
(b) The system shall interface with computer software capable of monitoring
and logging all events.
(c) The system shall interface with computer software capable of exporting
reports.
(d) Switch selected lights.
(e) Shift elevator control to a different mode.
(f) Open a signal path between certain intercommunication stations.
(g) Switch signal to selected monitor from CCTV camera in vicinity of sensor
signaling an alarm.
l. Detector Operation and Selection
1) The most common detector sensor devices which are generally used include
motion sensors, photoelectric beams, and glassbreak detectors.
2) Specialty detectors such as shock detectors may be considered for special
applications in appropriate facilities.
3) Motion Sensors
(a) Motion detectors determine if someone is moving in protected rooms or
areas. Ceiling or wall-mounted devices detect movement within the
protected area and analyze the motion to determine if an actual intrusion
occurred.
(b) If the sensor detects motion when the system is armed, an alarm
message is sent to the central monitoring station. While the system is
disarmed, it monitors the motion throughout the day, but does not send
alarm messages. It can, however, send messages if someone tampers
with the detector.
(c) Motion detectors may utilize various technologies to detect motion
including passive infrared (PIR) technology, microwave motion
technology, and dual motion technology.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 12
(1) Passive Infrared Technology

(i) The PIR detector can be made up of one or more elements that
are precisely arranged and aimed so that the sensor can judge
the size and speed of travel related to a moving object within its
view pattern.
(ii) This can help to minimize false activations from rodents or
other small animals, yet trigger accurately when a person walks
within its viewing pattern.
(iii) When the detector senses motion in the protected area, its
relay output changes the state of a zone input on the system.
The control panel responds to this change according to its
program.
(iv) PIR detectors contain optical mirror or lens configured to create
a viewing pattern.
(v) There are three major types of PIR sensor visual patterns
including:
 Wall-mounted long-range curtain or barrier pattern
 Wall-mounted wide angle, volumetric
 Ceiling-mounted 360 degrees wide angle, volumetric
(2) Microwave Motion Technology
(i) The sensor uses the Doppler Effect to sense a change in the
frequency of a low-power microwave signal. As an object
moves toward the sensor, the reflected frequency increases. As
an object moves away from the sensor, the reflected frequency
decreases.
(ii) By comparing these characteristics with the frequency being
transmitted, the detector can accurately sense an object as it
moves through the protected area.
(iii) When the detector senses motion in the protected area, its
relay output changes the state of a zone input on the system.
The control panel responds to this change according to its
program.
(iv) K-Band microwave technology shall allow a precise pattern
wave less likely to activate when objects outside of the
protected room move, such as in the case with store-front
display windows or multi-tenant office complexes.
(3) Dual Technology Motion
(i) Dual technology motion detectors use both PIR and Microwave
technologies to determine if there is motion within a protected
area prior to alarming.
(ii) The major advantage of using dual technology motion
detectors is the built-in validation of motion within the protected
area. Both sensors detect motion, but sense it in different ways.
This helps to minimize false activations caused by

Rev. 0 5.5 - 13
environmental changes, small animals and other unexpected

conditions.
(iii) In some cases, the detectors can conserve power by allowing
the PIR to remain active while allowing the microwave sensor
to sleep. If the PIR senses motion, the microwave sensor
activates and verifies the motion. If there is no motion sensed,
the detector does not change the state of its alarm output.
(iv) When the detector senses motion from the PIR and microwave
sensors in the protected area, its relay output changes the
state of a zone input on the system. The control panel
responds to these changes according to its program.
(d) PIR detectors shall be used only in stable environments with no open
windows and minimal air flow.
(e) Dual technology motion detectors shall be used in harsh environments
such as drafty areas in front of windows, warehouse and storage
environments or in multi-tenant facilities.
(f) Motion detectors may be wall or ceiling mounting. Observe product
guidelines for permissible mounting heights.
(g) Motion detectors located in public areas or otherwise potentially subject
to intentional tampering shall have cover and base tamper supervision
and anti-mask supervision to avoid blockage of view.
(h) Motion detectors shall be connected to the intrusion detection system
using independent zone inputs or be installed as part of an addressable
system.
(i) The pattern diagrams of each motion detector shall be verified to ensure
coverage of area to be protected. Detectors shall have pattern shaping
capabilities to provide coverage in zones as required.
(j) Motion detectors to be installed in areas where animals or pests may be
present shall have animal immunity features.
(k) Motion detectors shall have LED status indicators to permit visual
confirmation of operation.
(l) Motion detectors shall be discrete and low profile where space aesthetics
is a project goal.
(m) The motion detectors used shall resist false alarms.
(n) Where approved by the RCJ, wireless motion detectors may be used for
specific deployments.
(1) Wireless connections shall be fully supervised.
(2) Batteries shall have a minimum 5 year life.
(o) Outdoor rated motion detectors shall be used in the case of secured
outdoor areas, infrastructure sites, building sites, and industrial yards.
4) Photoelectric Beams

Rev. 0 5.5 - 14
(a) Photoelectric beams detectors shall be used in indoor or outdoor

applications to provide a line of sight detection barrier between a
transmitting and receiving unit.
(b) It shall detect an interruption of a pulsed, infrared, light beam that links
transmitter and receiver.
(c) Photoelectric beam detectors may be used for outdoor applications such
as fence lines, parking areas, outdoor stock areas, buildings, driveways,
and roadways.
(d) Photoelectric beam detectors may be used for indoor applications such
stock isle protection and shipping and receiving doors.
(e) The detector shall have adjustable optics and obscuration timing to
calibrate to environmental issues.
(f) The detector shall require two mounting locations that are within an open
line of sight.
(g) The receiving unit shall be mounted closest to the control to minimize
cabling of tamper and alarm outputs.
5) Glassbreak Detectors
(a) Glassbreak detectors shall be used to detect unique airborne acoustic
energy spectrum and high-frequency vibrations caused by breaking
glass associated with unlawful intrusion through windows.
(b) The detector shall sense the characteristics and patterns associated with
a wide variety of common glass types such as plate, tempered,
laminated, coated, wired, double pane, sealed and insulated.
(c) The detector shall be designed to suppress very loud noises associated
with a window break occurring in close proximity to the sensor.
(d) The detector shall permit remote testing using handheld simulator/test
equipment.
6) Shock Detectors
(a) Shock detectors shall detect tampering and movement and be used to
protect high value assets such as safes, vault doors, computer
equipment, electronics, tools, building materials, and pieces of art.
m. Intrusion Detection Control Panel
1) Control panels shall be designed to meet the unique requirements of each
building and occupancy. Control panels shall be located in secured
environmentally conditioned areas within proximity of facility access control and
security video surveillance equipment panels.
2) The control panel shall contain the following features:
(a) Hardwired zones
(b) Support for wireless zones
(c) Power limited bell circuit
(d) Dialer
(e) Accommodation for user codes, authority levels, and keypad macros

Rev. 0 5.5 - 15
(f) Scheduling
(g) Event logging
(h) Pager support
(i) Printer support
(j) Multiplexing loop interface
(k) Programmable auxiliary relays
(l) Partitioning for independent control of areas
3) Zoning:
(a) The building area may be divided into zones as required to allow for
accurate and rapid determination of the intrusion location and the type of
detectors being activated.
4) Control panels shall have spare zone capacity.
5) The control panels shall be a multi-processor based networked system
designed specifically for intrusion detection. The control panels shall include all
required hardware, software, and site specific system programming to provide
a complete and operational system.
6) The control panel shall be diagnostic type and shall be designed such that
interactions between any applications can be configured and modified using
software provided by a single supplier.
n. Keypads
1) Keypads shall be provided for system user interfaces. They shall be located at
designated building access points in coordination with the Royal Commission.
2) The keypads shall have LCD or graphic displays with menu driven prompts for
clear operation without the use of complicated command strings.
3) The keypads shall display current system status and alarm locations.
4) Authorized building users shall be able to arm and disarm the intrusion
detection system through the keypad interface.
o. Intrusion Detection Sounders
1) The intrusion detection system shall be designed with sufficient notification
devices to provide ample notification for the building occupants as required by
the RCJ. Notification shall include both audible and visual devices.
2) Audible
(a) Audible devices consisting of horns, bells and/or speakers shall be
located throughout each facility to provide audible notification of the
intrusion condition. Audible devices shall be specified with multiple tap
settings to facilitate adjustment of the sound intensity to adapt to the final
installed conditions.
(b) The type of audible device shall be determined from the requirements of
the facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop a
recommendation for the type of audible device and submit to the RCJ for
review and approval.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 16
(c) Audible devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof

enclosure.
3) Visual
(a) Strobes shall be located throughout each facility to provide visual
notification. Strobes shall be specified with multiple candela ratings to
facilitate adjustment of the light intensity to adapt to the final installed
conditions.
(b) Visual devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof
enclosure.
4) Audible/Visual Combination Devices
(a) The use of combination audible/visual devices is permitted and is the
preferred approach.
p. Power Source(s)
1) Power to the control panel must be fed from a reliable source of supply which
will not be disconnected for maintenance on other electrical systems. The
circuit breaker shall be labeled "Intrusion Detection - Do Not Switch Off" and
shall be capable of being locked.
2) Standby power shall be available to the system in case of failure of the main
power source. Integral backup provision with nickel cadmium batteries shall be
located in the control panel. The backup batteries shall be sufficient to operate
the system for a minimum of 24 hours.
3) Where the building is furnished with a backup power source (generator, battery,
or UPS) the system shall be supplied from the life safety emergency power
branch in addition to the integral batteries.
4) Power supplies shall initially be sized with 20% spare capacity to
accommodate future system modifications.
q. Wiring Requirements
1) General
(a) The wiring network for the intrusion detection system must be designed
in accordance with the applicable codes and must address the criticality
of the facility. The extent of redundancy and survivability must be
determined to properly specify the appropriate wiring system.
2) Installation
(a) The intrusion detection cabling shall be installed in a dedicated raceway
system.
(b) Minimum conduit sizes shall be 20 mm.
(c) All wiring shall enter panels from the bottom to prevent moisture from
entering the panel through the conduit.
(d) All wires shall be numbered and labeled.
(e) Provide separate circuits for audible and visual devices.
(f) Vehicle Barriers
r. Bollards

Rev. 0 5.5 - 17
1) Provide bollards for protection of pedestrian areas and buildings as required by

the project.
2) Bollards shall provide protection of areas from accidental or intentional acts.
s. Active Barriers
1) Retractable Vehicle Barriers
(a) Retractable vehicle barriers shall be provided at secured entrances and
checkpoints as required by the project.
(b) The system shall operate in either a normally open or closed state.
2) Active Cable Barriers
(a) Active cable barriers shall be provided at critical check point locations as
required by the project.
3) Drop Arm Crash Beams
(a) Drop arm crash beams shall be provided at critical check point locations
as required by the project.
(b) Video Surveillance Systems
t. Description of System
1) Video surveillance systems shall permit real time and recorded video
monitoring of building and site areas as required by the project.
2) The video surveillance systems shall consist of surveillance camera, wired or
wireless connectivity; network based video transport and switching, network
video recorders, and monitoring software and stations.
3) Design of the surveillance system shall be based on Open Network Video
Interface (ONVIF) profile S in order to assure cross vendor compatibility.
u. Camera Selection and Location
1) Interior, Controlled Environment: System components installed in temperature-
controlled interior environments are rated for continuous operation in ambient
temperatures of 0 to 50° C dry bulb and 20 to 90% relative humidity,
noncondensing. Use IP10 rated enclosures.
2) Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-
temperature-controlled interior environments are rated for continuous operation
in ambient temperatures of -17 to 60° C dry bulb and 20 to 95% relative
humidity, noncondensing. Use IP52 rated enclosures.
3) Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to
weather are rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of minus
34 to plus 75° C dry bulb and 20 to 95% relative humidity, condensing. Rate
for continuous operation as specified in IEC 60529.
4) Security Environment: Camera housing for use in high-risk areas where
surveillance equipment may be subject to physical violence, the housing
shall be IK10 Rating.
5) Cameras shall be selected to allow high definition video recording.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 18
6) Dynamic range of the camera shall be selected based on the expected lighting
conditions at the site. Cameras with more than 100dB synamic range shall be
used when facing exterior doors.
7) Panoramic view cameras are to be selected in order to minimize the number of
cameras.
8) Cameras with built-in SFP ports shall be used in order to minimize the need of
media converters, or industrial switches at the edge. However, for those
applications where Outdoor IP Cameras shall be installed at locations with
more than 90 meters from the nearest Telecom Room, the connections shall be
done through Ethernet Media Converters with PoE and Fiber Optic Cables.
9) System shall be designed with no exposed cabling near the cameras. All power
and communication cables shall be secured.
10) Perimeter Fence Cameras in Wide Industrial Areas: In those Wide Industrial
Areas where an important quantity of Industrial Plants and Buildings are
located , Multi-sensor Thermal Cameras with Continuous Zoom Lens shall be
installed along the Perimeter Fence. These Cameras shall comply at a
minimum with the following: Simultaneous analog video outputs (Thermal and
Visible Light), easy integration into IP Networks, Continuous Thermal Zoom
available, P/T with continuous 360° pan, Combined Technology of Infrared and
CCD imagery in real time, Multiple lens combinations for tailor-made range
performance, IP65.
v. Network and Video Transport Requirements
1) Surveillance systems shall be served with IP network connectivity
2) The IP network shall be configured as a dedicated network or subnet.
3) Network ports or power injectors shall be capable of supplying Power over
Ethernet compliant with IEEE 802.3af.
4) IP networks shall be fault tolerant utilizing redundant uplinks, and redundant
power supplies.
w. Network Video Recording Requirements
1) IP Network based network video recorder (NVR) storage appliances or
Network attached storage solution shall be used to record video.
2) Whenever the sites are connected to the RC Metro Network, all recording shall
be done centrally in the RCJ datacenters. Edge storage is only allowed upon
approval from RC.
3) All network recording applicances shall be ONVIF Profile G compliant.
4) For edge storage, storage appliances shall be secured, both physically and
environmentally.
5) Configure devices with storage capacity to meet requirements for number of
cameras to served, recording rates, and archival time periods needed. Provide
spare capacity to meet 5-7 year anticipated future growth of the system.
x. Video Analytics
1) NVR systems shall permit various software based video analytic features.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 19
y. Monitoring Workstation Requirements

1) Monitoring workstations shall be PC based and be connected to the video
surveillance IP network
2) Supplemental flat panel monitors shall provide viewing capability for
additional cameras.
z. Cabling and Pathway Requirements
1) IP network connected devices shall have cabling requirements that meet the
building telecommunications structured network cabling plant requirements.
aa. Power Source Requirements
1) Incorporate sufficient Power over Ethernet sources to serve devices. Power
supplies shall be redundant.
2) Security Screening
bb. Security screening requirements shall be based upon project risk assessments and
may include the components as required on a per project basis:
1) Divest and Composure Tables
2) Walk Through Metal Detectors
3) Baggage X-ray Machines
4) Explosives Detection and Trace Systems
5) Officer Station
6) High Speed Operational Communications
7) Video Surveillance Coverage
8) Under Vehicle Surveillance
9) Vehicle Recognition
(a) Weight Sensors
(b) Traffic/Flow Control
(c) Explosives Detection
(d) Trunk X-Ray
(e) Undercarriage Scanning
(f) Personnel Credential Access Control
(g) Barricades
E. Utilities
(a) Outside Plant Infrastructure
b. The principles and criteria specified in this Section are applicable to the
telecommunications outside plant/buildings provided between the local exchange
and the subscriber's plot boundary, and also applicable to any section of outside
plant/buildings within this area that is determined as the RCJ Contractor
responsibility.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 210
c. Existing RCJ installations have relied upon use of Polyethylene Corrugated (PEC)
110 mm corrugated duct with 5 x 33 mm sub/ducts between handholes or manholes
for optical fiber cable distribution. Current and future projects shall make use of
HDPE duct materials and microduct configurations that provide enhanced densities
and compatibility with air blown fiber installation techniques. PEC ducts shall only
be provided where existing PEC installations are altered or backwards compatibility
is otherwise required. In these cases, final configuration of ducts shall match
existing.
d. In the existing Manholes which belong to third parties (such as STC or Aramco) and
where are installed main Trunk Lines/Backbone Cables connecting Feeders, a
Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Wall is required around the Telecommunication
Manhole and this structure shall be according to Section No 02350.
e. RCJ FTTH GPON and Metropolitan Networks OSP Infrastructure
1) OSP Ductbank Requirements Spanning from the FAT to the FTB.
(a) The OSP ductbank shall be shared between RCJ networks and TSP
networks. OSP design shall conform to the requirements of the TSP.
color coding shall be used to identify the duct use.
(b) The maximum distance between the FAT and FTB shall typically not
exceed 160 m. In special cases where distances are permitted to be
exceeded, additional One Cover Handholes shall be provided for ease of
pulling cabling.
(c) The minimum trench size shall typically be 150 mm wide and 500 mm
deep, but this shall be adjusted as required to facilitate final quantity of
ducts within a segment.
(d) The trench shall be backfilled by concrete up to asphalt level and asphalt
shall be reinstated with milling and paving as per RCJ requirements.
(e) The ductbank shall typically consist of twenty- five (25) x 20 mm HDPE
ducts situated in a5-wide by 5-deep arrangement. Each duct shall have
20 mm outside diameter/16.2 mm inside diameter and nominal wall
thickness of 1.9 mm.
(f) Ducts extend in pairs to a customer location where one shall be used for
RCJ FTTH networks and the second duct shall be used for TSP services
or spare. A maximum of twelve (12) buildings shall be connected from
one handhole including vacant lots, and can go up to fifteen (15)
buildings in special cases only.
(g) HDPE duct material shall conform to the following construction
classifications: PE-100, PN-16, and SDR-11.
(h) Spacers shall be installed with the duct at every 1.5 m to keep the duct
straight and in position.
(i) Pairs of 20 mm HDPE ducts exit the trench to extend to customer
locations. These shall be routed in an offset trench with minimum size of
90 mm wide and 400 mm deep situated in a 2-wide by 1-deep
arrangement.
(j) U-guard shall be installed on customer wall to protect the poke out pipe.
The length of the U-guard shall be of 1.5 m from the finished surface.
There shall be no gap between U-guard and FTB. The duct should

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
enter/flushed with FTB. The clamps shall be securely placed with

Aluminum screws.
2) OSP Ductbank Requirements Spanning from the FDT to the FAT.
(a) The OSP ductbank shall be shared between RCJ networks and TSP
networks. OSP design shall conform to the requirements of the TSP.
color coding shall be used to identify the duct use.
(b) The distance between the MH to MH or MH to HH shall be within 250 m
to 350 m. The minimum distance requirement shall be 25 m.
(c) The minimum trench size shall typically be 200 mm wide and 650 mm
deep, but this shall be adjusted as required to facilitate final quantity of
ducts within a segment.
(d) The trench shall be backfilled by concrete up to asphalt level and asphalt
shall be reinstated with milling and paving as per RCJ requirements.
(e) The ductbank shall typically consist of twelve (12) HDPE ducts in a 3-
wide by 4-deep arrangement. Each duct shall have 32 mm outside
diameter28.2 mm inside diameter and wall thickness of1.9 mm.
(f) Four (4) of the twelve (12) ducts are to be orange color and are
dedicated for use by the TSP. Likewise four (4) ducts are to be blue in
color and dedicated for use by the RCJ. In addition, four (4) ducts are
black in color and designated for common use applications. Each set of
color coded ducts are arranged adjacently in a 1-wide by 4-high
configuration.
(g) To facilitate efficient use of trenches, this trench is also used for routing
ducts for FTTH drop cabling from each FAT to the FTB at customer
premises. These ducts consist of twenty- five (25) x 20 mm HDPE ducts
grouped in pairs and situated in a 3-wide by 4-deep arrangement. The
ducts are positioned directly above the twelve (12) 50 mm HDPE ducts
within the trench. Each pair of ducts extends to a customer location
where one shall be used for RCJ FTTH networks and the second duct
shall be used for TSP services or spare. Each duct shall have 20 mm
outside diameter/16.2 mm inside diameter and nominal wall thickness of
1.9 mm.
(h) HDPE duct material shall conform to PE-100, PN-16, and SDR-11
construction.
(i) Spacers will be installed with the duct at every 1.5m to keep the duct
straight and in position.
3) Manholes and Handholes
(a) Mini Manhole – Type 1
(1) The precast manhole shall have a single round cover and be
provided at network locations encountering widths of roads 30 m
and more.
(2) This manhole shall also be installed at junctions where a third
ductbank will join the manhole or where determined to be required
by the network layout.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
(3) The distance between manholes shall be minimum 50 m and

maximum 300 m with +/- 50 m.
(4) Outer dimension requirements: 1,550(L) x 1,550(W) x 1,990(H) mm
(5) Inner Dimension requirements: 1,200(L) x 1,200(W) x 1,200(H) mm
(6) Circular duct penetration openings shall be provided on two
opposite walls for main duct entrance terminations. In addition, a
rectangular opening shall be provided for poke-out termination to
accommodate a minimum of thirty (30) 20 mm ducts on two
opposite walls.
(7) The cover of the hand-hole shall be rated with a minimum 350 kN
design loading.
(b) Two Cover Handhole
(1) A two cover precast handhole shall be provided at network locations
encountering widths of roads less than 30 m.
(2) A two cover handhole shall be used either at the end of the trench or
in a straight duct for breaking the length.
(3) Outer dimension: 1,550(L) x 1,000(W) x 950(H) mm
(4) Inner Dimension: 1,250(L) x 800(W) x 800(H) mm
(5) Circular duct penetration openings shall be provided on two
opposite walls for main duct entrance terminations. In addition, a
rectangular opening shall be provided for poke-out termination to
accommodate a minimum of thirty (30) 20 mm ducts on two
opposite walls.
design loading.
(c) Manhole – Type A
(1) Type-A manholes shall be provided front of FDTs. The maximum
distance from FDT to manhole shall be 5 m.
(2) The distribution cable shall be extended directly into the FDT
cabinet. Only joint closure shall be installed for the feeder cable to
extending to the RCJ ODF equipment at the local exchange.
(d) Manhole Covers
(1) Manhole covers shall be cast iron construction from a TSP approved
manufacturer where shared manholes are required.
design loading.
(3) The manhole cover shall have lock with unique head.
(4) Where required by the RC for telecom manholes, a clearly visible
inscription shall be provided on each cover. In addition, the
manufacturer name and load rating shall be clearly marked on the
cover.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
(e) Manhole Cable Service Loops

(1) Manhole Type-A and Mini Manhole
(i) Cable service loop lengths shall be provided within each
manhole.
 Distribution cable without splice - 5 m
 Distribution cable with splice closure - 8 m, with 4 m for
each side
 Drop cable from customer building - 4 m
(2) Two Cover Hand-Holes
(i) Cable service loop lengths shall be provided within each
manhole.
 Distribution cable with splice closure - 5 m, with 2.5 m for
each side
 Drop cable from customer building - 2.5 m
4) FDT Pedestals
(a) The pedestal of FDT shall be pre-cast and approved by the TSP where
shared colocation cabinets are to be provided.
(b) Protection posts (bollards) shall be installed around the FDT per RCJ
drawing details.
5) Microducts
(a) HDPE microducts are utilized in ductbank trenches by the RCJ to
provide enhanced cabling densities and compatibility with air blown fiber
installation techniques.
(b) Where large numbers of optical fiber cables are required within a
ductbank for backhauling of communities and districts, microducts shall
be implemented in main ductbanks to enhance duct capacity. A
minimum of two ducts within the trench shall consist of microducts with
additional added as required to meet ductbank forecasted capacity
requirements.
(c) Microducts may be implemented in two (2) configurations:
(1) Where service is to be provided through existing ductbank systems,
the microducts shall be provided through existing ducts.
(i) Four (4) microducts with 14 mm outside diameter/11.5 mm
inside diameter shall be installed in an existing duct of 50 mm
outside diameter/40.8 mm inside diameter.
(ii) The four microducts shall be provided either individually or
bundled with a skin jacket and installed by blowing or pulling
techniques.
(iii) To enhance the capacity to existing ducts which are already
occupied by cabling; provide a microduct with microcable
installation. Manufacturers’ recommended procedures and
practices shall be followed.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
(2) Where new ductbanks are provided, mini/micro ducts shall be

installed directly in the trench among other ducts.
(i) Four miniducts with 16 mm outside diameter/12 mm inside
diameter bundled with a hard jacket can be installed directly in
the trench and encased in concrete among and in lieu of other
main ducts of 50 mm outside diameter/40.8 mm inside
diameter.
(d) The microduct orientation with adjoined duct segments must be
consistent throughout trenches and entering/exiting
manholes/handholes. This is critical to prevent difficult physical
transitions while joining microducts.
f. Blown Fiber Design
1) Blowing Fiber is a method where the fiber is guided through microducts using
a flow of air that evenly distributes the installation force along the entire
length of the fiber. Blown fiber installations shall be provided for extending
singlemode optical fiber through ductbank systems for implementation of
RCJ FTTH GPON and metropolitan networks.
2) The blown fiber system is an enterprise network system comprised of
interconnecting microducts and distribution hardware to provide reusable
pathways for reusable microcables, bundled fiber optic cabling containing
singlemode fiber strands.
3) Microcable Requirements
(a) Microcables shall be installed in the same color of microduct throughout
the span.
(b) The fibers used for blown fiber cables shall be a single mode, coated
with two layers of acrylic that gives excellent protection to the fibers and
also arrange fibers in bundles for easy identification.
(c) The cable construction has outer diameter of 1.0 to 5.5 mm depending
on the number of fibers and can easily be deployed in empty microducts.
4) Microduct Requirements
(a) Microducts consist of small diameter low friction HDPE tubes providing
the dedicated pathway for the optical fiber microcables.
(b) Microducts may be provided into existing ducts, concrete encased, or
inside buildings (internal). Select the appropriate rating for the
microducts based on the environment in which they are installed.
(c) Provide microduct tubes sizes and quantities to facilitate the quantity and
strand count of the microcables that are to be provided, including
anticipated future growth. Microducts are available in a variety of sizes
and combinations including but not limited to, 5/3.5 mm, 7/5.5 mm, 10/8
mm, and 12/10 mm (outside/inside) diameters, loose, or with protective
layer system.
(d) Microducts may consist of bundled tubes in typical sizes of 1, 2, 4, 7, 12,
19, 24 or more tubes.
5) Microduct Accessories

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
(a) Microducts shall be connected together sealed from water or gas

ingress, reduced from one tube size to another, or sealed with end caps.
(b) Compact Node Closure: A closure used in manholes where blown fiber
cables are spliced (to traditional or blown fiber cables). It is supplied with
splice trays and sufficient components for installing cabling and enabling
the breakout of fibers to customer drop cables.
(c) Branching Unit (Tube Distribution Center): Used for management and
distribution of fibers to the customers. The unit provides in-line and
diversion connections with the use of "Y" and "T" tube joints.
(d) Entry Kit: Installed at the customer premises for termination of incoming
tube microducts and optical fibers at the Fiber Termination Box (FTB).
(e) Power Distribution, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
g. System Description
1) Uninterruptible Power Supplies shall be provided where sensitive
telecommunications systems shall not experience sudden power failures or
anomalies.
h. UPS Selection and Locations
1) The UPS shall be sized to support equipment required plus spare capacity as
needed by the project.
2) UPS units shall be mounted on equipment racks or floor mounted.
3) Provide battery run time as required by the project to permit orderly shutdown,
or ride through outages of a given duration.
i. Management
1) UPS units shall be SNMP compatible with network connections for
management.
j. PDU Requirements
1) Determine requirements for UPS power outlets including:
(a) Quantity
(b) Amperage
(c) Voltage
(d) Device types
k. References
1) Refer to Electrical GEM Subsection 5.5.1.E Backup Power Systems
2) Earthing and Bonding
l. The grounding shall include all cable and installation hardware required. All
equipment shall be connected to earth ground via internal building wiring according
to ANSI/TIA-607-B, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
m. Standards.
1) This includes:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
(a) Coaxial cable shields

(b) Equipment racks and cabinets
(c) Cable ducts and trays
(d) Conduits
n. Earthing materials shall be as follows:
1) Ground Rods
(a) Ground rods shall be solid, of bounded copper or copper-clad steel, not
less than 16 mm in diameter and 3 m long, driven full length into the
earth.
(b) The copper-clad steel ground rod shall be manufactured by a fusion weld
process resulting in an electrolytic copper sheath homogeneously
welded to and inner steel core. The thickness of the copper sheath shall
be approximately 10% of the overall rod diameter. Copper electroplated
steel is not acceptable.
(c) The rod shall be of sufficient strength to be driven through the soil found
at site location. The upper end shall either be equipped with or capable
of accepting a clamp that will also be capable of accepting a 16 mm2
ground wire.
(d) The clamp shall furnish an electrical connection between the ground wire
and the ground rod so that the electrical resistance is not more than 100
mΩ.
2) Ground Wire
(a) The ground wire shall consist of a 16 mm 2 solid, annealed copper wire,
covered with a PVC outer sheath for corrosion protection. The minimum
thickness for the sheath to be 0.76 mm.
3) Grounding System Accessories
(a) Ground system accessories shall include without limitation:
(1) A connector for connecting the ground wire to the ground bus so
that the electrical resistance across the connection will be less than
100 mΩ.
(2) Connectors for connecting the ground conductor of each splice to
the ground bus so that the electrical resistance across the connector
is less than 100 mΩ.
(b) Ground Bus
(1) The ground bus shall consist of a tinned copper ribbon of 16 mm2
cross-sectional area. This bus shall appear in each bay equally
spaced between the cable racks. It shall begin 300 mm above the
floor and shall be mounted vertically to a height of 100 mm above
the cable rack.
(2) Each vertical bus shall be electrically connected to the other vertical
buses.
(3) Fastening shall be by drive-in anchors of 10 mm diameter, 25 mm
long at a distance of 300 mm apart for both vertical and horizontal

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
runs, with a drive-in at each termination and each change of

direction. The vertical runs shall have a lapped projection of 15 mm
every 200 mm.
o. Building Telecommunications Grounding Systems
1) Each building shall be equipped with a grounding system.
2) A standard insulated copper lead of 16 mm 2 - 7 strands shall be run from the
ground point of the protection blocks and body of the terminal boxes to ground,
connected by exothermic weld or equivalent means to the ground system.
3) The CATV and telephone boxes shall be joined by a 25 mm conduit nipple to
allow the CATV protector ground to be connected to the telephone ground lead.
The run shall be as direct as possible and contain no kinks or sharp bends. A
separate lead shall be run for each box installed within a building that contains
protector blocks, joining to the ground underground.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
SUBSECTION 5.5.3 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
5.5.3. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
A. General:
(a) Introduction
b. This Subsection includes automation systems (and less complex systems) that
require separate focus, and provides the basis for design and technical criteria for
the following to meet the engineering requirements of the Royal Commission Jubail
(RCJ) and other designated areas.
1) The Integrated Building Automation Systems for commercial buildings,
schools, universities, hospitals etc.
2) Instrumentation, Automation, and Process Control Systems (PCS) for other
industrial and/or treatment facilities to include sea water cooling, potable
water, sanitary waste treatment, industrial waste treatment, Fuel Pipeline etc.
3) SCADA systems
4) RTU and SCADA system for Automatic Irrigation system
5) Fire Alarm, Gas Detection and Fire Supersession Control System.
6) Scope
c. The scope of these guidelines provide:
1) The basis to be followed by all parties making calculations and/or preparing
drawings and specifications of Integrated Automation Systems within
Industrial Cities including the engineering design phase of Contracts where
Engineering, Procurement and Construction are combined (EPC Contracts).
2) The framework within which work will be performed by all A/E and/or EPC
Contractors to ensure uniformity throughout the infrastructure of the Project
and compatibility within the RCJ Boundary.
3) Mandatory, minimally acceptable requirements for the RCJ new and retrofit
projects.
4) The basis, on which the Integrated Automation Systems and Instrumentation
and Control Systems and services shall be programmed, designed and
installed.
d. This Subsection indicates the minimum level of quality required by the RCJ to:
1) Define the role of the Authorized Representatives and the responsibilities of
the A/E and/or EPC Contractors,
2) Provide a reference basis for Saudi Arabian and International Codes and
standards, and for the Guideline Specifications and Guideline Details issued
by the Royal Commission.
3) Ensure flexibility and adaptability to accommodate future developments and
expansion.
e. This Subsection does not provide information normally found in available textbooks,
handbooks, codes and standards, nor does it attempt to duplicate design criteria
within the expertise of the A/E and/or EPC Contractors.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
f. Design decisions are to be developed for specific applications as the design

progresses. Project conditions may dictate the need for design that exceeds these
minimum requirements.
g. If a conflict is found between the Guiding Engineering Manual (GEM), the Guiding
Procurement and Construction Specification (GPCS), and the Typical Construction
Details or Drawings (TCDD), the conflict shall be brought to the attention of the
Royal Commission. The Royal Commission shall provide resolution or direction on
how to proceed.
h. In the event there is a conflict between the GEM and the requirements of the RCJ
and End Users, the conflict shall be brought to the attention of the RCJ. The Royal
Commission shall provide resolution or direction on how to proceed.
i. The design of RCJ Control system requires full coordination and integration with
other disciplines such as, but not limited to telecom, electrical , mechanical , piping,
plumbing , environmental , loss and prevention design.
j. Exclusions
k. While there are a number of similarities, the following standards/guidelines are not in
the scope of this document:
1) Engineering standards and/or procedures associated with Saudi Aramco.
The applicable standard can be located under Saudi Aramco desktop
standards.
2) Telecommunication technology and/or topology is outside the scope of this
Section. The applicable design guide can be found in Subsection 5.5.2
Telecommunications; in keeping with control system architectures and Plant
Automation Network (PAN).
3) Where works interface with Saudi Electrical Company (SEC), the
equipment/materials and installation shall comply with SEC standards latest
revision, and shall be reviewed and approved by the SEC.
4) Where works interface with Saudi Telecommunication Company (STC), the
equipment/materials and installation shall comply with STC standards latest
revision, and shall be reviewed and approved by the STC.
5) References – Units of Measurement
l. Where applicable, the design, construction, commissioning and operation and
maintenance of Instrumentation and Control systems shall satisfy and comply with
the requirements and standards of the organizations and publications listed in this
Subsection.
m. References:
1) All work shall conform to the applicable industry codes, standards and
associations. Refer to Subsections 5.5.1.A.7 Codes and 5.5.1.A.8
Standards for a listing of the codes and standards.
n. Units of Measurement
1) All new facilities shall be designed for operation in SI units. Refer to NIST
Special Publication 811 2008 Edition “Guide for the Use of the International
System of Units (SI). Section 2.3 SI Units and Conversions of this document
also has reference.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 220
2) Exception: Upgrades or modifications to existing facilities may retain existing

operating units unless otherwise specified in project documentation.
3) The International System of Units (abbreviated SI) is the modern form of the
metric system. It comprises a coherent system of units of measurement built
around seven base units, 22 named and an indeterminate number of
unnamed coherent derived units, and a set of prefixes that act as decimal-
based multipliers. The standards, published in 1960 as the result of an
initiative started in 1948, are based on the meter–kilogram–second (MKS)
system, rather than the centimeter–gram–second (CGS) system, which, in
turn, had several variants. The SI has been declared to be an evolving
system; thus prefixes and units are created and unit definitions are modified
through international agreement as the technology of measurement
progresses, and as the precision of measurements improve.
4) Standard conditions for process flow and gas custody metering is defined in
Aramco Standards.
5) Standard conditions for bulk flow measurement and transfer of Sea Water
Cooling is detailed further in this Section.
TABLE 5.5.3.A: STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR SEA WATER COOLING
TRANSFER METERING
SI Unit
Pressure 101.325 kPa (abs)
Temperature 15.00°C
2. Definitions
a. For a list of general definitions, refer to Section 2.2 Definitions and Abbreviations.
b. The following is a list of definitions for acronyms, abbreviations, words, and terms as
they are used in this document. For definitions not listed, the latest issue of the
“Comprehensive Dictionary of Measurement and Control”, International Society of
Automation (ISA), shall apply.
1) “Address” An identifying name, label, or number for a data terminal, source,
or storage location calculation.
2) “Analog data” Data represented by scalar values.
3) “Annunciator” A unit containing one or more indicator lamps, alphanumeric
displays, or other equivalent means in which each indication provides status
information about a circuit, condition, or location.
4) “Application Software” The software written specifically to perform functional
requirements for an individual plant when standard software packages
cannot be configured to meet the requirements. Application software works
with the standard operating software to control and monitor plant process
and maintenance status through accessing the SCADA/PCS/BAS real-time
and historical database data.
5) “BACnet” A communications protocol for building automation and control
networks. It is an ASHRAE, ANSI, and ISO standard protocol. BACnet allows
communication of building automation and control systems for applications
such as heating, ventilating and air-conditioning control, lighting

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
control, access control, and fire detection systems and their associated
equipment. BACnet is addressed in ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 135 - 2012,
and became ISO 16484-5 in 2003 - is a communications protocol for
building automation and control networks and provides mechanisms for
computerized building automation devices to exchange information,
regardless of the particular building service they perform.
6) “Binary digit” A character used to represent one of the two digits in the binary
number system and the basic unit of information in a two-state device. The
two states of a binary digit are usually represented by “0” and “1”. Synonym:
bit.
7) “Call Up Time” The time between when the operator initially enters a display
request and when all objects, lines, values (good or invalid), trends and
other parts of the display have been fully presented to the operator.
8) “Computerized Data Acquisition and Control System (CDACS)” refers to an
industrial computer based control system that monitors and controls a
process. Synonymous to PCS.
9) “Command” Commands are sent by operators or by applications.
Commands can be binary or analog (set-point). Commands require reliable,
secure, and timely delivery. Command data shall be delivered to its target as
quickly as possible, typically in the order of seconds or sub-seconds. If a
command cannot be delivered or acted upon, the SCADA system shall
report this to the operator.
10) “Communication channel” A facility that permits signaling between two
terminals i.e. a path between master station and an RTU, PLC or a
subsystem.
11) “Communications Subsystem” The hardware and software that performs the
transmitting and receiving of digital information.
12) “Configurable” - The capability to select and connect standard hardware
modules to create a system, or the capability to change functionality or sizing
of software functions by changing parameters without having to modify or
regenerate software.
13) “Console” A collection of one or more workstations and associated
equipment such as printers and communications devices used by an
individual to interact with the SCADA and perform other functions.
14) “Cycle” The scanning of inputs, execution of algorithms and transmission of
output values to devices.
15) “Cyclic Polling (data request)” The process by which a data acquisition
system selectively requests data from one or more of its RTUs. An RTU may
be requested to respond with all, or a selected portion of, the data available.
16) “Dead Band” The range through which an input signal may be varied without
initiating an action or observable change in output signal.
17) “Dead Pair” - Within a cable, an extension of a pair that has been used, or a
pair that is not terminated at either end.
18) “Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)” The interference in signal transmission
or reception resulting from the radiation of undesirable frequency interfering
electrical or magnetic and electrical fields.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
19) “Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)” Is software that allows the integration
of operations and resources and manages them through one program. This
approach to management is called Integration. Most large companies in the
world use ERP to manage various aspects of their businesses. These are
product planning, parts planning, parts procurement and inventory
management, interacting with suppliers, providing customer service, and
tracking orders. It can also include applications to manage finance and
human resources.
20) “Faceplate” - A graphic element that mimics the front panel of an analog
controller instrument, hardwired push-button or switch.
21) “Fail-Over” Occurs automatically without user intervention, transparent to the
user.
22) Failsafe – a concept in process control that in the event of a specific type of
failure, the failsafe devices will automatically response in a way to safety
position, cause no harm, or at least a minimum of harm, to other devices,
environment or to personnel.
23) Foundation Fieldbus H1 (FF) - Fieldbus is a fully digital, serial, two-way,
multidrop, communication system running at 31.25 Kbits/s which will be
used to connect intelligent field equipment such as sensors, actuators and
controllers. It serves as a Local Area Network (LAN) for the instrumentation
used within process plants and facilities with built-in capability to monitor and
distribute control applications across the network.
24) “Handhole” A small jointing chamber of the joint box category but restricted
to footway use only.
25) HART Communication protocol - Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
is an early implementation of Fieldbus, a digital industrial automation
protocol. Its most notable advantage is that the digital HART signal was
embedded in 4-20 mA analog instrumentation loop. The HART Protocol is
one of the most popular industrial protocols today, most of the smart
instrument will support the HART Communications.
26) “Local Area Network (LAN)” A LAN is a network used for bit serial
communication of information between interconnected, independent devices
and is completely under user jurisdiction and limited to being within a user’s
premises.
27) “Logs” Files or printouts of information in chronological order.
28) “Management Information System (MIS)” Provides information which is
needed to manage organizations efficiently and effectively. Management
Information Systems involve three primary resources: people, technology,
and information or decision making. Management information systems are
distinct from other information systems in that they are used to analyze
operational activities in the organization.
29) “Manhole” A jointing chamber, accessed via a restricted opening in the top.
30) “Master Station” Server or servers and software responsible for
communicating with the field equipment (RTUs, PLCs, etc.), and then to the
HMI software running on workstations in the control room, or elsewhere.
Master station may include multiple servers, distributed software
applications, and disaster recovery sites. The Master Station includes all

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
networks switch and connectivity devices required to communicate with

RTUs and remote sites.
31) “Multimode Fiber (MMF)” A fiber that allows more than one optical mode to
propagate. Used for shorter distances; usually a larger diameter fiber of
plastic or other low-cost material.
32) “Nuisance Alarm” An alarm caused by mechanical failure, malfunction,
improper installation, or lack of proper maintenance, or an alarm activated by
a cause that cannot be determined.
33) “Operating System” Software that runs on computers and manages the
computer hardware and provides common services for execution of
application software.
34) “Process Control System (PCS)” Refers to an industrial computer based
control system that monitors and controls a process. Synonymous to
CDACS.
35) “Protocol” A strict procedure required to initiate and maintain communication
with the RTU or a PLC. Open Industry Standard communication protocol is
defined as a protocol that has a published specification and available for all
suppliers to read and implement and will not lock the customer into a
particular vendor or group. The Protocol may be extended, or offered in
subset form and supported by publication of reference information.
36) “Redundant Configuration” A system and/or subsystem that provides for a
standby module with automatic switchover from the primary unit to the
standby module, in the event of a failure, without loss of a system function.
Both active and standby modules utilize diagnostics to assist in identifying
and locating failures and to permit modules to be removed for repair and/or
replacement.
37) “Registered Jack (RJ)” Registered jack wiring configurations developed by
Bell System for the connection of customer premises equipment to the public
network. Registered jacks serve telephone and data applications. The most
common types are RJ45 and RJ11.
38) “Report-by-Exception” The reporting of data (e.g., from RTU to master
station) only when the data either changes state (e.g., for a status or digital
input point) or exceeds a predefined dead-band (e.g., for an analog input
point).
39) “Scan” The process by which a data acquisition system interrogates remote
terminals or points for data.
40) “Security Code” A group of data bits calculated by a transmitting terminal
from the information within its message by use of a prearranged algorithm,
appended to the transmitted message, and tested by the receiving terminal
to determine the validity of the received message.
41) “Self-Diagnostic” The capability of an electronic device to monitor its own
status and indicate faults that occur within the device.
42) “Single Mode Fiber (SMF)” A fiber that supports the propagation of only one
mode. Used for maximum distances; usually a small, precise diameter (8 to
9 microns) fiber of monolithic quartz.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
43) “Spare Pair” A cable pair which has been terminated at one end, but is not in
service.
44) “Standby Systems” Include alternate power systems for such applications
where interruption of normal power would cause discomfort to personnel or
damage to product.
45) “Supervisory Control” A telemetry based process control command initiated
from a Master Central Station either manually by operator or automatically
by an application to initiate an action and/or change analog set point in a
remotely located Control Stations over a bidirectional communications link
using specific communication protocol. Such command is dependent of
having quality process related alarm/event data and follows timely
bidirectional confirmation and acknowledgment executing sequences
between the master and the station known as select/check before Operate
(CBO).
46) “Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)” Refers to an industrial
computer telemetry based control system that monitors and controls
remotely connected processes.
47) “Tag” A collection of attributes that specify either a control loop or a process
variable, or a measured input, or a calculated value, or some combination of
these, and all associated control and output algorithms. Each tag is unique.
48) “Tag ID” The unique alphanumeric code assigned to inputs, outputs,
equipment items, and control blocks. The tag ID might include the plant area
identifier.
49) “Twisted Pair Cable (TP)” A type of communication transmission cable in
which two individually insulated wires are twisted around each other to
reduce induction (thus interference) from one wire to other. The pair may be
surrounded by a shield, insulating jacket, to form Shielded Twisted Pair
(STP) cable, otherwise it is Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP).
50) Abbreviations
c. For a list of general abbreviations refer to Subsection 2.2 Definitions and
Abbreviations.
d. The following abbreviations apply to this Subsection:
2) AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction
3) Aramco Saudi Aramco (Saudi Arabian Oil Company); responsible for
KSA oil and gas reserves, exploration and production.
4) ANN: Artificial Neural Networks
6) BACnet: Building Automation & Control Networks
9) CAT: Category
10) CMS: Condition Monitoring System

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
11) COTS: Commercial-Off-The-Shelf

12) DC: Direct Current
13) DCS: Distributed Control System
14) DDC: Direct Digital Control
15) DNP: Distributed Network Protocol
16) EIA: Electronic Industries Association
17) EMC: Electromagnetic Compatibility
18) EMCS: Energy Management and Control System
19) EMI: Electromagnetic Interference
21) ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning
22) ESD Emergency Shutdown System
23) FAT: Factory Acceptance Test
24) FF: Foundation Fieldbus
25) FO: Fiber Optic
26) FTP: File Transfer Protocol
27) GUI: Graphic User Interface
28) HART: Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
29) HMI: Human Machine Interface
31) HZ: Hertz
32) IAMS: Instrument Asset Management System
33) ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association
35) IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
36) IFC: Issued for Construction
37) IMS: Information Management System
38) ISO: The International Organization for Standardization
39) IT: Information Technology
40) JIC Jubail Industrial City
41) KSA Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
42) KW: Kilo-watts
44) LAN: Local Area Network
45) LCD: Liquid Crystal Diode

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6

47) LV: Low Voltage
48) MAC: Media Access Control (Common use is MAC Address)
49) Mbps: Megabits Per Second
50) MC: Media Converter
51) MCB: Miniature Circuit Breaker
52) MCC: Motor Control Center
53) MIS: Management Information System
54) MMF: Multi Mode Fiber
55) MOV Motor Operated Valve
56) MTS: Manual Transfer Switch
57) MTU: Master Terminal Unit
58) NEC: National Electrical Code
60) OEM: Original Equipment Manufacturer
61) OPC: OLE for Process Control
62) PAS: Process Automation System
63) PC: Personal Computer
64) PCS: Process Control System
65) PF: Power Factor
66) PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
67) PoE: Power Over Ethernet
68) PTP(P2P): Point To Point
69) RBE: Report by Exception
71) RIC: Ras Al-Khair Industrial City
72) RTU: Remote Terminal Unit
73) SAES: Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards
74) SASO: Saudi Arabian Standards Organization or Saudi Standards,
Metrology and Quality Organization
76) SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
78) SDMS SEC Distribution Materials Specification
79) SEC: Saudi Electricity Company

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
80) SI: International System of Units

81) SMF: Single Mode Fiber
82) SMSS: Saudi Electricity Company Material Standard Specification
83) SNMP Single Network Management Protocol
84) SQL: Database Product of Microsoft Corporation
85) STP: Shielded Twisted Pair
86) STC: Saudi Telecom Company
87) SWTP: Sanitary Waste Water Treatment Plant
88) TE: Treated Effluent
89) TIE: Treated Industrial Effluent
90) TSE: Treated Sanitary Effluent
91) TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
92) TP: Twisted Pair
93) UL: Underwriters Laboratories
95) UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair
96) VMS: Vibration Monitoring System
97) VN: Virtual Network Interface
e. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.A.4 Abbreviations for a list of additional electrical
abbreviations.
f. Codes And Standards
g. Refer to Chapter 3 Codes and Performance Standards for a list of applicable Codes.
h. Codes for electrical equipment and material and their installation shall conform to the
current requirements of the following authorities:
1) Saudi Building Code Chapter 401 Electrical Requirements
3) Saudi Building Code Chapter 501 Mechanical Requirements.
4) Saudi Building Code Chapter 210 Architecture Requirements
5) International Fire Code
7) Saudi Building Code Chapter 801 Fire Protection Requirements
i. Standards
For all work shall conform to the applicable industry Codes, Standards and
Associations. The latest revision of the referred codes and standards shall be used
wherever applicable. These standards are listed alphabetically and do not indicate
the priority for application with regards to design of the electrical systems. In case of

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
conflict, the A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall propose equipment conforming to one
group of Codes and Standards.
1) AISI American Iron and Steel Institute/Steel Product Manual
2) ANSI American National Standards Institute
3) ANSI/ISA American National Standards Institute/The International
Society of Automation
4) API American Petroleum Institute
5) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers
6) ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
7) BSI British Standards Institution
8) EIA Electronic Industries Alliance
9) EPRI Electric Power Research Institute
10) FCI Fluid Control Institute
11) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
12) IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
14) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
15) ISA The International Society of Automation
16) ISO International Organization for Standardization
17) MIL-STD Military Standard
18) NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
20) RCEC Royal Commission Electrical Code
21) RCER Royal Commission Environmental Regulations
22) SAEP Saudi Aramco Engineering Procedures
23) SAES Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards
24) SAMSS Saudi Aramco Material System Specifications
26) SBC Saudi Building Code
27) SDMS Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Materials Specification
30) STES Saudi Electricity Company Transmission Engineering
Standard
31) SEI Software Engineering Institute

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
32) UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

j. Specific Standards which are referenced in this Section of the guidelines include the
following:
1) IEEE 802.3, Ethernet
2) IEEE 802.11, Wireless LANs
3) Saudi Telecom Company (STC) Engineering Standards and Specifications,
latest edition
4) AG 181 – Fieldbus Foundation, System Engineering Guidelines
5) AG 140 – Fieldbus Foundation, Wiring and Installation Application Guidelines
6) Environmental Conditions
k. The following environmental conditions shall be applied to all components of the
control systems as required.
1) Air-Conditioned Building – General Purpose areas
(a) Equipment located in air-conditioned interior building areas, are subject
to ambient temperatures varying from 10°C to 35°C with ambient relative
humidity levels between 20% and 80%.
2) Unclassified Light Industrial Locations
(a) Field equipment located in unconditioned interior process areas, which
are not classified as corrosive or hazardous locations, are subject to
ambient temperatures varying from 0°C to 40°C with relative humidity
levels of 100%.
(b) There may be incidental quantities of corrosive gas and dust. Therefore,
the equipment shall be designed with materials for use in corrosive
areas.
(c) In exterior areas, ambient temperatures vary from 0°C to +55°C with
strong direct radiation from the sun. The relative humidity in these areas
may range from 85% to 100% with condensation occurring. All areas
may have trace quantities of corrosive gas with windblown dust, sand,
and rain.
(d) Due to the close proximity to the sea, there is a high level of salt in the air
which is detrimental to unfinished metals and copper wiring and
electronics.
(e) Controllers, panels, etc., shall be located in environmentally protected
enclosures or buildings wherever possible – see the following guidelines
below.
(1) Outdoor Sheltered - Maximum 55°C, Minimum 0°C, refer to
Paragraphs (i), (ii) and (iii) below.
(2) Outdoor Unsheltered - Maximum 65°C , Minimum 0°C, refer to
Paragraphs (ii) and (iii) below.
(i) "Sheltered" refers to permanent, ventilated enclosures or
buildings, or permanently fixed sunshades with a top and three
sides.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 230
(ii) For instruments which dissipate internal heat and are installed
in custom engineered enclosures (e.g., enclosures not included
in the original manufacturer's temperature certification), an
additional 15°C shall be added to the above maximum
temperatures. An example, for "indoor air conditioned"
installation, the equipment must perform at 35 + 15 = 50°C.
Similarly, for the "outdoor unsheltered" case, the equipment
shall be designed for a maximum operating temperature of 65
+ 15 = 80°C.
(iii) For the outdoor installations only, the designer can take credit
for forced or passive cooling to eliminate or reduce the 15°C
heat rise. For example, if vortex coolers are used, the heat
removal capacity of the coolers may be subtracted from the
generated heat. No more than 15°C reduction in temperature
will be given as credit. The designer shall substantiate his
claim by providing the support data and calculations.
(iv) All equipment specified for outdoor installation shall be
compliant with the following contaminant levels:
 Dust Concentration - Usual airborne dust concentration is
1 mg/m³. During sandstorms, dust concentrations may
reach 500 mg/m³. Particle sizes are as follows:
o 95% of all particles are less than 20 micrometers
o 50% of all particles are less than 1.5 micrometers
 Elements present in dust include compounds of calcium,
silicon, magnesium, aluminum, potassium, chlorides and
sodium. When wetted (high humidity conditions) these
compounds function as electrolytes and can result in
severe corrosion.
 Other pollutants present in the atmosphere under the most
extreme conditions are:
o H2S 20 ppm (vol/vol)
o Hydrocarbon 150 ppm (vol/vol)
o SO2 10 ppm (vol/vol)
o CO 100 ppm (vol/vol)
o NOx 5 ppm (vol/vol)
o O3 1 ppm (vol/vol)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
 Equipment which is not enclosed or hermetically sealed,

but is situated outdoors offshore or outdoors near-shore
shall be protected against corrosion and operational
failure due to wind-borne sea water spray and the
accumulation of wetted salt (sodium chloride).
 Near-shore is defined as within one kilometer from the
shoreline of the Arabian Gulf, or within three kilometers
from the shoreline of the Red Sea.
3) Classified Field Locations
(a) The equipment located in classified areas shall be designed to meet the
classification of the area in accordance with the IEC 60079 series
standards and SBC Chapter 401.
4) Corrosive Locations
(a) The equipment located in areas that are subject to corrosive fumes or
spills shall be selected and erected in accordance with the requirements
of IEC 60364-5-51 and SBC Chapter 51. Corrosive area locations for
PLCs, panels, etc., shall be avoided wherever possible. Equipment
required to be installed in corrosive locations shall be specifically
designed to withstand the conditions.
5) Noise Levels
(a) The noise levels for all equipment shall be less than or equal to:
(1) 55 dBA for equipment installed in continuously manned areas.
(2) 60 dBA for equipment installed in other areas.
6) Equipment Enclosures
(a) All equipment enclosures shall meet the following Ingress Protection
rating as defined by IEC 60529. The object of these standards is to give:
(1) Definitions for degrees of protection provided by enclosures of
electrical equipment as regards:
(i) Protection of persons against access to hazardous parts inside
the enclosure;
(ii) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against
ingress of solid foreign objects;
(iii) Protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against
harmful effects due to the ingress of water.
(2) Measures to protect both the enclosure and the equipment inside
the enclosure against external influences or conditions such as:
(i) Mechanical impacts
(ii) Corrosion
(iii) Corrosive solvents (for example, cutting liquids)
(iv) Fungus
(v) Vermin

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
(vi) Solar radiation

(vii) Icing
(viii) Moisture (for example, produced by condensation)
(ix) Explosive atmospheres
(x) And the protection against contact with hazardous moving
parts external to the enclosure
(b) All enclosures located outside which are not sheltered or made from
stainless steel shall have a white finish to lower the internal temperature.
(c) All enclosures with a lens or transparent display cover subject to direct
sunlight shall be glass or as a minimum UV resistant.
7) Sunshields
(a) All field instruments with local LCD or LED displays shall be equipped
with sunshields to allow viewing of the displays and to shield the
instrument enclosures from the heating effects of direct sunlight. In
addition, instrument displays shall be north facing where possible to
prevent direct sun exposure.
l. System Reliability
1) All Field Instruments, Instrument Control Panels, Controllers, Network and
Communication equipment, Servers and Workstations shall be provided with
backup power during power failure transitions with an Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS). The UPS shall provide a reliable source of uninterruptible power
with no break in AC output power during a complete or partial interruption of
incoming line power. The UPS shall include audio/visual alarms. The rating
shall be adequate to provide uninterrupted conditioned power under fully
loaded conditions for at least 30 mins. UPS status shall be monitored by the
control system.
2) Communication links between all controllers and facilities shall be continuously
monitored and safe operating modes assumed whenever a communication
failure has occurred. Normal operation modes will only resume when
communications have been restored, depending on the process, safety issues,
etc. Restart procedures following a communication or power failure shall be
defined for each facility or process during preliminary design.
B. Control System Architectures
(a) General
b. A Control System is actually an integration of several sub-systems into a functional
single platform. A Control System will ideally provide the highest level of safety for
the Community, RCJ personnel and operations staff and must incorporate the
principles of environmental safeguards, the protection of the process equipment,
economy of operation in all regards, with high reliability and expansibility.
c. The Control System Architecture shall maximize single window concept, and the
Operation Centre HMI Workstations such as PCS /SCADA/BMS shall integrate with
all sub-systems and provide a single platform to control and monitor all facilities in
the plant.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
2. Scope
a. This Subsection describes the design elements and technical criteria for establishing
an appropriate Control System Architecture for each of the following systems:
1) Building Automation System (BAS) is the more recent terminology adopted by
the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE) and shall be used in lieu of Building Management Systems (BMS).
BAS is a distributed control system - the computer networking of electronic
devices designed to monitor and control designed to monitor and control or
interface with otherwise standalone systems – typically security (access
control, CCTV, PA), fire and flood safety, fire pumps, fire suppression, lighting
(especially emergency lighting, Energy Efficiency Control system), generators,
HVAC and humidity control, ventilation systems and mechanical packages
such as potable water pumps, lift stations, chiller package etc. in a building.
2) Process Control Systems (PCS) are typically used in industries such as water,
oil, gas, pipeline, chemicals plant. . PCS is the current general term that
encompasses several types of control systems used in industrial production,
including distributed control systems (DCS), Emergency Shutdown System
(ESD) and other third party control systems such as package programmable
logic controllers (PLC), machine conditioning monitor system, pipe leak
detection system, custody metering system, fire and gas alarm system,
analyzer etc., often found in the industrial sectors and critical infrastructures.
3) Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) describes a system
operating with telemetry communications to provide for monitoring and control
of remote processes and equipment. SCADA systems distinguish themselves
from other PCS systems by being processes that can include multiple sites,
and large distances.
(a) SCADA provides the means for the Operators to monitor and control
remote facilities from a central location utilizing various different forms of
data communications. The SCADA system will be either a
Master/Remote Terminal Unit MTU/RTU based system of standard (not
custom) manufacture or a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) based
system incorporating PLCs communicating with a central personal
computer (PC) based Human Machine Interface (HMI) software package
of standard (not custom) manufacture.
4) Fire and Gas detection and suppression control systems are critical life safety /
protection equipment in building or process plant. The purpose of a Fire and
Gas Alarm and Suppression Control System is to detect a fire and gas release
and automatically initiate audible and visual alarms in the building or plant and
prompt panel operator for actions and alert personnel in the vicinity of the
hazard area. Fire protection system may be able to be automatically or
manually activated by mechanical or control systems and provide protective
actions to mitigate the accident circumstance. All fire detection and fire
suppression devices shall be networked to a central Fire Workstation to display
alarms, troubleshooting, confirm fire and activate fire suppression devices.
3. Building Automation System (BAS) Architecture

a. Refer to Section 5.4.3 HVAC, specifically:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
1) Subsection 5.4.3. A.16 for additional requirements associated with HVAC

Software.
2) Subsection 5.4.3. B.13 for additional requirements associated with Building
Automation (Management) System.
3) Subsection 5.4.3.D.1.c for additional requirements and design details
associated with Direct Digital Control (DDC) System Controls.
b. The following is a brief description of BAS fundamentals:
1) Building automation is the goal that a Building Management System or a (more
recent terminology) Building Automation System (BAS) attempts to achieve.
BAS core functionality keeps building climate within a specified range, lights
rooms based on an occupancy schedule (in the absence of overt switches to
the contrary), monitors performance and device failures in all systems,
provides malfunction alarms (via typically email and/or text notifications) to
building engineering/maintenance staff and contractors. BAS reduce building
energy and maintenance costs compared to a non-controlled building.
2) A building controlled by a BAS is often referred to as an intelligent building,
"smart building", or (if a residence) a "smart home". Commercial and industrial
buildings have historically relied on robust proven protocols like BACnet.
3) BACnet is a network communications protocol for building automation and
control systems that has been adopted worldwide as ISO 16484-5:2003.
4) Almost all multi-story green buildings are designed to accommodate a BAS for
the energy, air and water conservation characteristics. Electrical device
demand response is a typical function of a BAS, as is the more sophisticated
ventilation and humidity monitoring required of "tight" insulated buildings. Most
green buildings also use as many low-power DC devices as possible, typically
integrated with power over Ethernet wiring, so by definition always accessible
to a BAS through the Ethernet connectivity.
5) The building automation server shall be able to support various communication
protocols to be integrated with other standalone systems through networks for
control and monitoring purposes, such as Fire & Gas Detection System status,
Fire Suppression Control status, Elevator and Intercom status, UPS status,
Access Control status, CCTV camera, mechanical packages (pump station
PLC, RTU) etc.
6) The building automation server shall collect data and interface with DDC
controllers, other standalone control system through facilities local area data
network provided by telecom.
7) Process Control System (PCS) Architecture
c. The PCS concept for future projects is to provide the RCJ with a powerful and
integrated control system platform that bundles together the operating, configuration,
documentation, and connectivity tools, to give a truly intuitive and windows
compliant control environment.
d. The term “Process Control System” is synonymous to Process Automation System
(PAS) and any one of these terms take the same meaning. It describes a computer
based control system that provides a means to monitor and control automatic
processes from a central control room.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
e. A PCS is typically an integration of various computerized servers and controllers,

smart instrumentation and software applications for data acquisition and control
purposes. Control systems could include any combination of the following basic
components:
1) Distributed Control System (DCS)
2) Programmed Logic Controllers (PLC)
3) Alarm Management System (ALMS)
4) Data Acquisition and Historization System (DAHS)
5) Emergency Shutdown System (ESD)
6) FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus System (FF)
7) Condition Monitoring System (CMS)
8) Packaged – Vendor Control Panels (VCP)
9) Instrument Asset Monitoring System (IAMS)
10) Plant Automation Network (PAN)
11) Plant Information Network (PIN)
12) Gas Leak Detection system
13) Demilitarized Zone and Cyber security
14) Web Terminal and Remote Access Control
f. The Wet Utilities shall be operated and maintained by Marafiq with the exception of
the irrigation system which will be under the control of the Royal Commission.
g. Wet utilities shall be provided with a PCS or SCADA system and a dedicated control
room to monitor and manage the infrastructure controlled by DCS’s, PLC’s, RTU’s
etc. or any combination of these controllers. The wet utilities are as follows:
1) Potable Water System
2) Sea Water Cooling System
3) Industrial Waste Water System
4) Sanitary Waste Water System
5) Irrigation Water System
h. (SCADA) systems associated with light industrial and Wet Utilities is described in
more detail under item Paragraph 5.5.3.B.4.
i. PCS shall use standard Industrial Ethernet communication protocols between
servers or workstations on the network. PCS shall incorporate redundant servers
with client workstations to provide a Graphical User Interface GUI and operator
functionality for complete monitoring and control purposes. Graphics, schedules, set
points, trends and alarms specified as per sequences of operation shall be objects.
j. Availability and Reliability - The PCS architecture including the control system
network design shall provide a 99.50% hardware and software availability and
reliability.
k. PCS shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of distributed controllers
and operator interface terminals.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
l. The PCS shall include redundant controller and redundant power supply, be
designed with no single point of failure and shall include the communication modules
and communication links to the distributed controllers and remote I/O equipment.
m. The entire PCS, including hardware and software, must be specified as
manufacturer’s standard project line. System components and subassemblies must
have proven installed base with successful track record.
n. PCS VENDOR shall be responsible for the supply of all aspects of the PCS
including design, engineering, fabrication, procurement, configuration, programming,
integration, inspection, testing, site support and documentation.
o. PCS VENDOR shall have total system responsibility for the Integration, performance
and functionality of all hardware, firmware and software items being furnished for the
PCS.
p. PCS VENDOR shall be responsible for the integrity of the overall control system
design, including the co-ordination of communications interfaces.
q. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA
r. SCADA systems are provided for various utilities within the RCJ. The various
SCADA systems can be described as follows:
1) Wet utilities – including Potable Water Systems, Sea Water Cooling Systems,
Industrial Waste Water Systems, Sanitary Waste Water Systems and Irrigation
Water Systems.
2) Environmental SCADA is provided to a control room with various stations
located inside RIC - operated and managed by RCJ. Data is transferred by the
fiber optic cable network from stations to the SCADA.
3) Gas SCADA - Operational responsibility for the gas supply network is currently
uncertain, although this may come under the control of Saudi Aramco.
4) The Traffic SCADA is to be provided with the traffic signals and cameras
operated from a control room and managed by RCJ. Data is transferred by the
fiber optic cable network from stations to the SCADA.
5) Electrical SCADA - The electrical infrastructure systems will be operated by
SEC and incorporate a SCADA system connected through a control room. Data
is transferred by the fiber optic cable network from the substations to the
SCADA.
s. SCADA systems associated with Environmental, Gas, and Electrical Utilities, and
other heavy industrial facilities are not in the scope of this document.
t. SCADA is provided to a control room with various stations located inside RIC -
operated and managed by RCJ. Although wireless applications are available, data
is usually transferred by the fiber optic cable network from remote stations to the
central SCADA head-end. The SCADA system can support any type of
telecommunication technologies. However, the selection of the telecommunication
technology and/or topology is outside the scope of this document.
u. The following design requirements shall be complied with to provide highly efficient
and reliable SCADA system performance for each application using the provided
technology.
1) General - A detailed Performance Analysis shall be conducted for each
application (Project) to specify the optimum architecture to meet the

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
performance requirement expected. The analysis shall be based on the

expected data scan frequency and spare capacity, and shall address SCADA
server(s) loading, bandwidth capacity and utilization of each telecommunication
channel.
2) Design Architecture - The SCADA Host station software shall be based on fully
redundant Client/Server architecture. Processing load shall be balanced and
distributed among the system components to achieve the scalability and
highest performance levels.
3) SCADA networks shall be physically and logically isolated from all other non
SCADA network traffic. Voice, CCTV and non-process control traffic shall not
share the SCADA network hardware.
4) The SCADA server(s) shall be dedicated to perform the real time data
acquisition and telecommunication processing functionalities and shall not be
shared and/or used to perform any non-SCADA related data processing
functions.
5) For application requiring redundant RTU communication modules, the design
shall provide dedicated communication path from each communication module
to the telecommunication network.
6) For application where FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus (FF) based RTU is specified,
refer to SAES-J-904 for the specific design requirements.
7) Availability and Reliability - The SCADA System architecture including the
telemetry network design shall provide a 99.50% hardware and software
availability and reliability.
8) The SCADA Host Station including the SCADA LAN shall be designed with no
single point of failure. For application where redundant RTU/PLC is required,
the no single point of failure requirement shall include the communication
modules and communication links to the RTU/PLC.
9) Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System
v. The Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression Control System concept for future
projects is to provide the RCJ complete status indication and controls for fire and
gas detection and protection systems, to form a powerful and integrated control
system platform that bundles together the monitoring, operating, diagnostic,
networking, configuration, documentation, and connectivity tools, to give a truly
intuitive and windows compliant control environment.
w. The Fire and Gas Alarm System and Fire Suppression System typical include any
combination of the following basic components:
1) Microprocessor based intelligent Fire Alarm Panel (FACP) with all necessary
accessories, such as loop isolator, backup batteries.
2) Addressable Fire Alarm Devices, such as smoke detectors, heater detectors,
manual pull stations.
3) Duct Smoke Detectors
4) Fire Alarm Audio and Visual Alarm Devices, such as bell, horn, beacon,
strobes.
5) Gas Detection Devices, such as H2, CO2, Cl2 etc.
6) Gas Detection Control Panels

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
7) Smoke Control System

8) Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA)
9) Automatic Sprinkler System and control devices
10) Clean Agent System and Control Panels
11) Electric Fire Water Pump Control Panels
12) Fire Water Jockey Pump Control Panels
13) Diesel Fire Water pump Control Panels
14) Emergency Diesel Generator Control Panel
15) Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System centralize supervisory
Server
16) Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System supervisory workstation
17) Fire and Gas Alarm and Fire Suppression System network components
18) Integration / Interface with other systems such as HVAC, Elevator, Door
Access Control, CCTV, Public Address system etc.
x. System Availability and Reliability
1) The F&G system shall be subjected to careful component level subsystem and
system testing, The availability of the F&G system shall then be part of the
guarantee of the system.
2) The system availability is usually expressed in terms of two factors:
Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF).
Mean Time to Repair (MTTR).
The system availability shall be guaranteed at 99.99%.
(Assuming average MTTR = Four hours).
y. The Fire and Gas Alarm System and Fire Suppression System shall provide fully
autonomous control in the covered area, loss of network connection with fire
supervisory server / operator workstation shall not jeopardize the local control and
monitoring functionalities.
z. All Fire Alarm panels ( FACP), Fire Protection Control Panels and Fire Water Pumps
Control Panels shall be part of the fire network to the central location for supervisory
monitoring and controls.
aa. From fire supervisory server workstations, the panel operator shall be able to
monitor, program, diagnose, maintenance and inhibit the individual integrant fire
devices. Value engineering can be taken as per project discretion to determine the
feasibility of combining fire Server / workstation with BAS server / workstations in the
buildings.
C. Control Strategies
(a) General
b. The objective of this Subsection is to present the concepts and principles underlying
the design of the Plant Instrumentation and Control System.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
c. A PCS is actually an integration of several sub-systems into a functional single

system. This system must provide the highest level of safety for the Community,
RCJ personnel and must incorporate the principles of environmental safeguards, the
protection of the process equipment, economy of operation in all regards, and high
reliability. This Subsection addresses each of these requirements and their
influence on design choices.
d. Principals of Automation
e. Safety in Control
1) The controlled equipment and the control system itself must include “fail-safe”
operation such that upon loss of power or control signal, the equipment will go
to the pre-determined “safe” state.
2) All equipment interlocks which are classified as “life safety” interlocks must be
“hard wired” or “mechanically interlocked” and shall not rely on data
communications or wireless transmission for their operation.
f. A typical Control System hierarchy consist of four (4) levels:
1) Level 1 – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
(a) This level includes all field-mounted instruments and equipment that
directly or indirectly have some effect on the process. This will include
temperature, pressure, flow and level transmitters, control valves, on-off
valves, Motor Operated Valves (MOVs), fans, heaters, pumps, blowers,
etc.
(b) This information is transferred to Level 2 and the control commands
generated at higher levels are carried out. Equipment at this level will
include local manual controls.
2) Level 2 – Controllers
(a) This is the level at which the main body of most of the control system
and the control program, resides. This level represents the gateway
between Level 1 and Level 3. All information, alerts and commands to
and from Level 1 and Level 3 must pass through this level in order for
them to be executed or used.
(b) Level 2 consists of distributed Controllers (DCS Controllers, PLCs, RTU’s
etc.) and/or a number of Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
packaged controllers.
(c) The Controller is the communication hub by which all information is
collected from the control system. The control program that resides in
these controllers is responsible for the automatic operation of the
facilities equipment and ancillary systems.
(d) The Level 2 Controllers in local areas shall be fully autonomous, with the
exception of operator-entered set points, no operator intervention is
required for the facility to operate automatically. Therefore, if there
happens to be an interruption in communication between Level 2 and
Level 3, normal system operation shall not be affected.
(e) Equipment supervision and alarm generation are tasks that are
performed at this level and reported to Level 3.
3) Level 3 – Supervisory Control and Graphical User Interface

Rev. 0 5.5 - 240
(a) This level provides the Human-Machine Interface (HMI) and Information
Management System (IMS). The system would typically consist of
Application Object Servers (AOS) suitably located in equipment or server
rooms. Operator Workstations connect through industrial Ethernet
networks with the Server to provide a graphical representation of the
various field devices.
(b) The HMI features of the system shall enable the operators to alter
equipment set points, start/stop equipment and monitor system
operations. The IMS features of the system shall provide the user with
real-time and historical trending of important process information and
provide user initiated report generation. The system shall generate
alarms and prioritize these based upon overall importance. A Level 1
alarm is considered critical to overall process integrity and is of the
highest importance and shall initiate an alarm dialer during after hour’s
operation. Level 2 alarms, although important, are of lower priority
relative to Level 1 alarms.
(c) The complete HMI system shall operate as one integrated system based
on a single window concept. The Workstations shall provide operator
access to the system for monitoring and control purposes and reporting
programs. Where applicable Historian software shall provide the
collection and archiving of facility historical data for retrieval from the
historian clients for trending analysis and reporting at each operator
workstation or the view-only desktop clients in managers and supervisors
office.
(d) Historical Servers shall function as the primary means of archiving data
within a SQL database. All trends, reports and supporting data shall be
provided in electronic format for special studies and long term strategic
planning. Detailed trend data shall be kept for all important analog
process measurements.
4) Level 4 – MIS/ERP Central Monitoring
(a) The MIS/ERP for the wet systems is located in the Marafiq Enterprise
Facility with the exception of the irrigation system which will be under the
direct control of the Royal Commission.
(b) The PCS/SCADA systems supporting the wet systems infrastructure will
control and record activities within their remits. The MIS/ERP system
provided by others will collect data from the PCS/SCADA collate and
make available for others to interrogate and use.
(c) The system critical alarms must be monitored and annunciate abnormal
events and detrimental conditions for the systems to make the operator/s
aware of the situation and will need to be coordinated.
(d) Access is by an approved secure login. The HMIs required to access the
system will be a normal PC with the appropriate access.
(e) Cyber security technology shall be strictly studied between Level 3 local
area (LAN) PCS /SCADA and level 4 Business wide LAN (WAN)
MIS/EPR system to protect the control system from hackers, intruders,
and malicious code.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(f) The protocol, which has to be used inside the local area network
including the communication between the individual systems, shall
comply with the TCP/IP protocol stack.
(g) Advanced Control Systems
g. Advanced or Intelligent Control Systems offer an enhancement to the conventional
loop-based and operator-governed controls which will be fundamental to the Plant’s
operation. Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs) which are a proven component of
existing treatment facilities will be elemental in the PCS.
h. The targets of these Intelligent Systems will be improved output water quality and
production, and cost savings through optimization of process chemicals and
consumed and produced energy.
i. The ANNs require a significant amount of historical operating data, spanning a
period typically from 18 months to 3 years or more in order to “learn” and
“understand” the process. As a result, provision for the ANN requirements will be
made, and following the startup of the Plant the data gathering and learning process
can begin, with the intent of integrating the ANNs into the Plant operation, possibly in
year two or year three.
j. Equipment Operating Modes
k. Typical local selector switch modes are designated as follows:
1) HOA – Hand, Off, and Auto.
2) LOR – Local, Off, and Remote.
3) Duty / Standby
4) Note that additional selector switch designations are used for certain pieces of
equipment, refer to the associated P&ID for details.
l. Local Mode - In LOCAL mode the equipment is capable of operation from the local
start/stop, on/off, or close/stop/open hand switches associated with the equipment.
This mode is applicable to most actuated equipment including valves, gates and
motors.
m. Off Mode - In OFF mode the equipment will not respond to any operator commands.
This mode is applicable to most actuated equipment including valves, gates and
motors.
n. Remote Mode - In REMOTE mode, the equipment is capable of operation from a
location other than at the local station. This is either another hand switch (i.e. Motor
Control Center (MCC) door mounted) or, if all field switches are in remote then by
Central HMI or SCADA.
o. Remote Manual - In the Remote Manual mode the operator may operate the
equipment from the HMI in the control room or an operator interface panel in the
field.
p. Remote Auto - In the AUTOMATIC mode the equipment is either automatically
controlled by programmed logic within the PCS when the selector switch is in the
AUTOMATIC or REMOTE position.
q. The Duty/Standby arrangement allows a set of devices - typically pumps or variable
speed drives - to be operated with an element of sequence of operating duty pumps
and remaining standby pumps as backup. During normal operation, the duty
devices are running capable of matching the plant demand, should the running

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
device fail or the process demand is higher than the total duty pumps capacity, the
remaining devices are requested to run to fulfill the process demand requirements.
2. Consoles, Workstations and Control Networks
a. General
1) Consoles, including panel and HMI mounting structures shall be equipped with
tabletop work surfaces.
2) Where required, telecommunication equipment (i.e., telephones, plant paging
system, CCTV, PA system) and emergency shutdown pushbuttons shall be
incorporated in separate bay within the same console furniture.
3) Each workstation shall have access to a printer networked within the PCS
network.
4) Printers shall be free standing, or tables shall be provided. Printers that utilize
fanfold paper shall be equipped with pedestal (noise absorption enclosures)
with paper stackers.
5) PCS servers and workstations operating systems shall be configured to
capture all necessary systems related events to detect performance and
availability related information.
(a) System alarms and failures
(b) CPU utilization
(c) Memory utilization
(d) IO rates (i.e., physical and buffer) and device utilization
(e) File store utilization (e.g., disks, partitions, segments)
(f) Applications
(g) Databases (i.e., utilization, record locks, indexing, contention)
(h) Network utilization (i.e., transaction rates, error and retry rates)
(i) Response time for PCS and application transaction
b. Operator Consoles
1) Each station in the operator console shall have access to a networked
printer(s) for alarm logging, reporting and graphical printing.
2) Consoles that are manned on a continuous basis shall have access to a
networked graphics printer for making hard copies of active displays.
3) Each Operator Console shall be equipped with a minimum of two workstations.
4) Operator Workstations shall be equipped with annunciators / buzzers, operator
keyboard and activate in the event of alarms to gain the operator’s attention.
c. Engineering Workstation
1) Engineering consoles shall consist of a minimum of one workstation.
2) Each engineering workstation shall have access to a networked printer.
3) Each engineering workstation shall be capable of performing all operator
workstation's functions.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
d. HMI Control and Monitoring System Functions will include:

1) Dynamic Authority Handling and Multiple system Access protection levels.
2) HMI views and operator dialogs
3) Dynamic process equipment coloring
4) Analogue Measurement
5) Events /Alarms processing
6) Logging, Printing, and Plotting
7) Historical information system
8) Data Archiving, outputting and Retrieval
9) Data quality attributes
10) Manual data entry and updating
11) Values calculation
12) Real-time and historical process values trending
13) Automatic generation of predefined Daily, Weekly and Monthly water flow and
energy consumption reports
14) Process Equipment Operation Count and maintenance Statistics
15) Redundancy – Fault Tolerance
e. The following equipment shall be supplied in redundant or fault-tolerant configuration
unless otherwise specified in the project specific Functional Specification Document:
1) All Process Controllers
2) All Power supply modules
3) All DCS Control Network Communications Equipment
4) All communications equipment required for communications between
controllers and I/O modules
5) All Input and Output modules used for critical regulatory control
6) All Foundation Fieldbus Host interface modules
7) All Foundation Fieldbus power supply and conditioning modules
8) All data storage devices (e.g., hard-drives) used to store system configuration
information or control strategy configuration information
9) All auxiliary systems communications interface modules, including
communications paths, where either the communications channel is used to
send commands from the PCS to the auxiliary system or data from the auxiliary
system is used within a regulatory control strategy within the PCS.
Commentary Note: Regulatory control refers to control which is implemented
at the PCS layer. This can be either analog (e.g., 4-20 mA to control valves) or
Foundation Fieldbus or discrete (e.g., 24 VDC to Motor starters). Critical
regulatory control refers to control of equipment which does not have an
installed spare or backup or where failure of the equipment would result in a
significant loss of production or an unsafe operating condition. Inputs and

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
Outputs used for regulatory control in critical applications shall be supplied

with redundant I/O modules.
f. A minimum of two electrically and electronically independent operator workstations
shall be provided for each operator's console.
g. Centralized Enterprise, MIS/ERP System
h. Various systems in RIC are required for the secure operation of the infrastructure
and the companies which will be located in the city. The infrastructure systems will
each have their own independent SCADA systems to operate, monitor and control
the equipment for which they are responsible. These systems are being designed,
installed and commissioned by others.
i. The collection of operational information is required to enable RC to monitor the
operations but also to provide a corporate level system to enable access to the
various systems. This system is independent of the operational SCADA systems but
will collect information from these systems and can be described as a Management
Information System (MIS) or Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP). The proposed
system collects information that can assist with hydro modelling, billing, planning,
operation performance, plant running status and measuring the operation
performance etc. The information can also, with additional work, be used to develop
early warning of breakdown.
j. The information is secure and can be accessed from the Royal Commission building
and from anywhere with interconnection available. The Management information
system provides the monitoring of the following facilities:
1) Wet Utilities
2) Existing SCADA system of Jubail RC
3) Environmental system
4) Gas system
5) Traffic and Transportation system
6) Electrical supply
7) Security
k. Wet utilities are provided with access to the MIS/ERP system/s. The server/s is
installed inside the corporate enterprise control room located in the potable water
premises. The wet utilities shall be operated and maintained by Marafiq with the
exception of the of the irrigation system which will be under the control of the
Royal Commission.
l. The other systems e.g. traffic, security, SEC etc can also be provided with access to
the MIS/ERP system after agreed procedures for secure access and limitations to
what information is accessible to which parties. It might even be the case that to
ensure security of data that there are several MIS/ERP systems supporting the
different activities.
m. The wet utilities shall be provided with a SCADA system and a dedicated control
room to monitor and manage the infrastructure controlled by PLC’S and RTU’S etc.
The wet utilities are as follows:
1) Potable water system - The potable water system consists of a RO Plant,
storage tanks and pumping stations. There are bulk storage tanks as well as
distribution storage and pumping station. The storage tanks and pump stations

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
shall be provided with PLC’S installed at the plant for the automation to monitor
and control all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S are hooked
up to the SCADA system located inside the local control room at the potable
water facility. Data is transferred by a dedicated fiber optic cable network from
PLC to the SCADA. Uplink with Marafiq for level 4 remote monitoring in the
MIS/EPR system shall be established, for Potable Treatment Plant, data is
transferred by the fibre optic cable network from potable water facility local
control room SCADA system to the Marafiq MIS/EPR centralized SCADA
system inside the corporate enterprise control room located in the potable
water premises. For distribution storage and pump station,local SCADA data is
transferred by means of fibre optic or radio communication to the Marafiq
centralized SCADA system.
2) Sea water cooling system - The SWC system consists of a large intake pump
station and a piped network to distribute the sea water to the industrial plots.
There shall be PLC’S installed at the plant for the automation to monitor and
control all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S are hooked up to
the SCADA system located inside the control room at the sea water facility.
Data is transferred by a dedicated fibre optic cable network from PLC to the
SCADA,
3) Industrial waste water system - The industrial waste water system consists of
pumping stations, pressurized mains and an Industrial Waste Water Treatment
Plant (IWTP). Each pumping station shall be provided with the PLC located
inside the room to monitor and control of all the activities at the pumping station
automatically. The PLC is hooked up by the field instruments to monitor at the
PLC. There shall be PLC’S installed at the treatment plant for the automation to
monitor and control of all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S
are hooked up to the local SCADA system located inside the control room at
the waste water treatment plant facility. Data is transferred by the fibre optic
cable network from PLC to the SCADA. Uplink from IWTP plant SCADA system
with Marafiq for level 4 remote monitoring in the MIS/EPR system shall be
established, Data is transferred by the fibre optic cable network from IWTP
facility local control room SCADA system to the Marafiq MIS/EPR centralized
SCADA system inside the corporate enterprise control room.
4) Sanitary waste water system - The sanitary waste water system consists of
pumping stations, pressurized mains and a Sewage Treatment Plant (STP).
Each pumping station shall be provided with the PLC located inside the room
to monitor and control of all the activities at the pumping station automatically.
The PLC is hooked up by the field instruments to monitor at the PLC. There
shall be PLC’S installed at the treatment plant for the automation to monitor
and control of all the activities at the plant. These PLC’S and RTU’S are
hooked up to the local SCADA system located inside the control room at the
waste water treatment plant facility. Data is transferred by the fibre optic cable
network from PLC to the SCADA. Uplink from SWTP plant SCADA system with
Marafiq for level 4 remote monitoring in the MIS/EPR system shall be
established, Data is transferred via the fibre optic cable network from SWTP
facility local control room SCADA system to the Marafiq MIS/EPR centralized
SCADA system inside the corporate enterprise control room.
Commentary Note: The Industry / Sanitary waste water collection system have
many lift stations geography widely distributed within the Jubail Industry city,
there shall be RTU installed at each lift station for monitoring the lift station

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
level, pump / odor control status. These RTUs shall hook up with Marafiq
central SCADA system by means of radio communication network. However if
these lift stations are located within the building compound, the RTU shall be
hook up to the compound BAS system for status monitoring
5) Irrigation water system - The irrigation transmission pumping system will be
operated and maintained by Marafiq and will consist of bulk storage tanks
containing Treated Sanitary Effluent (TSE), and transmission pumping station.
There shall be Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) and Remote Terminal
Unit (RTU) installed at the transmission pump station for automation,
monitoring and controlling of all the pumping activities and the transmission
mains. A link will be provided from the distribution storage tanks to monitor the
level in these tanks and adjust the transmission supply accordingly. These
PLC’S and RTU’S will be connected to Marafiq’s SCADA system located inside
the control room at the SWTP/IWTP Treatment facility.
The irrigation distribution network will be operated and maintained by the RC,
or an RC appointed third party, and will consist of distribution storage tanks
containing Treated Sanitary Effluent (TSE), distribution pumping stations, Valve
Chambers, pressurized mains and irrigation controllers . There shall be
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) installed at the pump station and
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) at valve chamber for automation, monitoring and
controlling of all the activities of the irrigation network. These PLC’S and RTU’S
are connected to the local SCADA system located inside the control room at
the Irrigation pump station facility. Data is transferred by the fibre optic cable
network and radio communication from PLC / RTU to the SCADA system.
Uplink from irrigation distribution / boost pump station with RC L&I Centralized
Control Center SCADA shall be established, Data is transferred by the fibre
optic cable network and radio communication network from pump station local
SCADA / valve chamber RTU system to the RC L&I centralized SCADA
system.
Irrigation controller shall be used to control the solenoid valve for scheduled
irrigation activities, and shall be control and monitored directly from RC L&I
central SCADA system. Data is transferred from irrigation controller to RC L&I
central SCADA system by means of radio communication network.
The irrigation system control facility shall consolidate data associated with the
irrigation system. A separate central MIS/ERP system will be provided by
others and will collect data from the SCADA from various infrastructure
systems and collate data and make available for the RC (and others) to
interrogate and use.
A telecommunication network from the central facility will link the primary and
secondary irrigation system monitoring and controls data to the separate facility
by others.
The RTU shall be able to store and forward Data. To act as a repeater for
other RTUs in case of obstacles or more covering distances required. The
communication protocol should make the communication system between the
FIU- RTU and the RTU-RTU in Contention Transmission of events upon
change of status by the RTUs to the FIU and central control room without
interrogation of the FIU. And Transmission of the events upon change of status

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
by the Slave RTUs to the Master RTUs without interrogation of the Master
RTU.
Instrumentation and RTU/FIU components of the Irrigation Water System have
been detailed further in the GPCS and TCDDs.
3. Segregation - Risk Levels – Safety Integrity levels
a. Process Control Systems shall be segregated into risk areas to increase system and
process availability. Risk Areas shall be defined in three levels. Separate
segregation requirements apply to each risk level.
1) Level 1 Risk Area Segregation
(a) Level 1 (L1) segregation provides the greatest degree of segregation. L1
segregation is used to segregate plant operations based on a 50%
production loss rule.
(b) Where a plant is designed with parallel processing trains, control
systems equipment shall be segregated such that a total loss of process
control equipment contained within a single L1 risk areas shall not result
in the loss of more than 50% of the total plant processing capability.
(c) Equipment located in separate L1 Risk Areas require separate:
(1) UPS Power Circuits
(2) Power Supplies, Power Distribution circuits or panels
(3) Operator workstations and alarm panels
(4) Process controllers (DCS), Safety Instrumented Systems (ESD),
Compressor or Turbine Control Systems and associated I/O
subsystems for each.
(5) Process Control Network equipment and cabling
(6) System and marshalling cabinets
(7) Auxiliary systems interfaces.
(d) A double failure of any redundant component in one L1 Risk Area shall
not affect the operations of equipment in any other L1 Risk Area.
(e) Where a single operator console is used to monitor two or more L1 risk
areas, each risk area must have a dedicated Operator Workstation.
Requirements for Operator Workstation redundancy (i.e., the backup
operator workstation) can be a met using a workstation dedicated to
another risk area as long as that workstation has full monitoring and
control capabilities of both risk areas.
(f) Where a single operator console is used to monitor two or more L1 risk
areas, control network communications equipment and cables shall be
segregated between risk areas. Communications cables may terminate
on a common network switch associated with the console provided the
switch is supplied in redundant configuration and both are dedicated for
the operator console.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8

(a) Level 2 (L2) segregation is used to segregate parallel processing units
within a Level 1 risk area. Level 2 (L2) segregation is also used to
segregate major process equipment installed within Utilities plant areas.
(b) Process Control Equipment shall be segregated into separate Level 2
(L2) risk areas as follows:
(1) Parallel processing trains or parallel processing units within a Level
1 risk area shall be segregated into separate L2 risk areas.
(2) Redundant or parallel processing equipment located within utilities
plant areas shall be segregated into separate L2 risk areas such
that a complete failure in any single L2 risk area will only result in a
loss of no more than 50% throughput of the utilities area.
Commentary Note: In most instances, it is impractical to segregate
equipment located in the Utilities plant area into separate L1 risk
areas. Equipment such as boilers, air compressors, nitrogen
systems, hot-oil systems, etc., feed a common header which is
used plant-wide and therefore feeds two separate L1 risk areas. For
this reason, Level 2 segregation is applied for utilities equipment
using a similar 50% production loss rule as is applied for Level 1.
(c) Equipment located in separate Level 2 (L2) Risk Areas require separate:
(1) Process Controllers and associated IO modules, IO communications
equipment and communications cabling.
(2) Marshalling Cabinets.
(d) Where two or more operator consoles are used to control equipment
within a single L1 risk area, equipment operated by each console shall
be segregated into separate L2 risk areas.
(e) Parallel processing trains within an L1 risk area which have been
segregated into separate Level 2 risk areas require separate Emergency
Shutdown Systems for each L2 risk area.
(f) An exception is allowed for segregation of I/O communications cables
when I/O modules are located remote from the controllers and fiber optic
(g) cables are used for communications. In this case, controllers in two
separate L2 risk areas may share the same fiber optic cable provided
that:
(1) Dedicated fiber strands are used for each controller.
(2) No Fiber optic converters are shared between controllers.
(3) Communications between the controller and I/O is redundant and
the redundant cables are installed in separate routes.
(a) Level 3 segregation is used to segregate parallel process equipment or
equipment installed in redundant configuration in order to increase
process availability. Level 3 segregation requires segregation of
equipment at the IO card level.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
(b) Level 3 (L3) Risk Area Segregation shall be applied for parallel process
equipment or any equipment installed in redundant configuration.
(c) Any equipment which serves the same purpose but is provided in
redundant configuration to increase a process
Commentary Note: Redundant or parallel processing equipment are
equipment such as: Booster Pumps, Blowers, Compressors,
filters/separators, etc. which is installed in redundant configuration.
(d) Equipment located in separate L3 risk areas shall not share the same IO
card. Field cables for equipment located in separate L3 risk areas may
be terminated in a common marshalling cabinet and use a common
(redundant) external field power supply if required.
(e) Spare and Expansion Capabilities
b. Each system shall be supplied with 5% spare IO points. The spare I/O shall be
licensed, installed, and wired to termination points. Spare IO shall be provided in
approximately the same ratio as that of the installed types and shall be distributed
between risk areas in the approximate ratio as the required IO.
c. Where both redundant and simplex IO models are used for a signal type, the
requirement for spare IO shall apply for both types.
d. Each system shall be installed with 10% spare slots in IO chassis or baseplates to
accommodate addition of IO modules without requiring additional chassis or
baseplates to be added to the system. Power supplies for IO modules shall be sized
to accommodate the additional 10% expansion requirement.
e. Each Foundation Fieldbus installation shall have a 20% spare capacity for
Foundation Fieldbus communication modules and power conditioners
f. Each system shall be capable of expanding the number of controllers by 20% from
that installed in the base system.
Commentary Note: Requirements for expansion capacity and spare IO do not apply
to expansion projects where control and I/O are being added to an existing system.
For expansion projects, the requirements for spare IO and expansion capability may
differ. If none are specified then the requirements above shall apply.
g. The average CPU Loading of any controller during normal operating conditions shall
not exceed 65% overall or 75% of the manufacturers recommended maximum
loading specification, whichever is lower. The spare capacity is required to
accommodate peak loads during upset conditions and to provide additional capacity
required for configuration of spare IO points and associated control algorithms and
to enable the utilization of the spare IO slots.
h. Servers and/or Engineering Workstations shall be configured with additional spare
capacity of 40% minimum for hard-drive space, memory, and CPU. CPU and
memory spare requirements shall be verified on the running system during steady-
state conditions with all applicable software running on the system.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 250
D. Instrumentation – Basic Design Criteria

(a) General
b. The following Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards (SAES) have been referenced
in preparation of this Subsection and certain basic information is repeated here for
ease of reference.
1) SAES-J-003 Instrumentation - Basic Design Criteria
2) SAES-J-005 Instrumentation Drawings and Forms
3) SAES-J-801 Control Buildings
4) SAES-J-902 Electrical Systems for Instrumentation
5) SAES-J-904 Foundation Fieldbus (FF) Systems
c. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for instrumentation
selection, and installation.
d. The design requirements for each type of instrument are covered by the individual
standards and specifications.
e. Instrumentation shall be designed consistent with the design pressure and
temperature of the proposed service. All wetted parts shall be 304 stainless steel as
a minimum. Higher corrosion resistant materials may be substituted on an
application specific basis as required.
f. Temperature and/or pressure compensation for flow or level shall be provided as
required to maintain measurement accuracy.
g. Transmitters shall have less than 0.25% shift in output with a 50 DEGC change in
ambient temperature. The accuracy shall be ±0.25% of the calibrated range or
better. Repeatability shall be ±0.1% or better.
h. Flow transmitters shall produce signals which are linear or square root with respect
to flow within ±1% of full scale flow when operating between 25% and 100% of full
scale flow.
i. Pressure transmitters shall produce a signal which is linear with respect to the
measured pressure within ±0.25% of the measured span.
j. Level transmitters shall produce a signal which is linear with respect to the
measured level within ±1% of the measured span based on a specific gravity of
1.00.
k. RTDs shall have resistance characteristic which is linear with respect to temperature
within ±0.5% of the top range value.
l. Electronic signal converters shall have an accuracy of ±0.25% of span. Electronic
signal converters for movable core transformer systems shall have an accuracy of +
0.5% of span.
m. Process measurement instrumentation shall not contain mercury.
n. The design and selection of instrumentation shall include consideration of the
following:
6) Application suitability
7) Reliability and availability

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
8) Quality
9) Accuracy
10) Repeatability
11) Life cycle cost
12) Previous acceptance as a stock item and compatibility with existing equipment
(i.e., savings on spares)
13) Compatibility with the environment (climatic and electrical classification)
Commentary Note: The priority of the above aspects will depend on the
application and equipment under consideration. Other pertinent factors and
design issues that are not listed above shall also be considered.
o. Instrument Mounting Locations
1) Field instruments shall be mounted as close as possible to the process
connection to minimize the length of instrument impulse lines. Where
practically possible, the length of the impulse line shall not exceed 6 m.
2) Instruments shall not protrude into or obstruct access ways so as to inhibit area
personnel egress.
3) All instrumentation and associated control equipment shall be readily
accessible from grade, platform, fixed walkway, fixed stairway or a fixed ladder.
Local indicating instruments shall be visible from where related equipment is
operated or primary instruments are tested or calibrated.
4) Instruments mounted outside a handrail shall be located to allow maintenance
from the walking/working surface without reaching through or leaning over the
handrail.
5) Instruments shall be located to allow performance of routine services with
unobstructed access.
Commentary Note: Clearances shall be provided for the removal of covers
and cases and the opening of doors and enclosures. Access for appropriate
lifting equipment shall be provided when necessary for control valves or other
large in-line instruments.
6) Pressure and D/P instruments in liquid or condensable vapor service shall be
self-venting (i.e., mounted below the process connections) with all impulse
lines sloping downward approximately 1:12 minimum toward the instrument.
7) Pressure and D/P instruments in gas service shall be self-draining (i.e.,
mounted above the process connections) with all lines sloping downward
approximately 1:12 minimum toward the process connection.
p. Instrument Process Connections
8) A line class root or isolation valve shall be provided at each process
connection. This valve shall be specified and provided by the piping discipline.
9) All process connected instruments shall be equipped with block and bleed
mechanism to allow isolation, drainage and maintenance.
10) Pressure and differential pressure transmitters shall be equipped with manifold
assemblies.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
11) Instrument process connections shall conform to the requirements specified in

the relevant instrumentation specifications and standard drawings.
q. Instrument Support
12) Direct-reading instruments such as gauges shall be supported by piping, panel
board or equipment.
13) Except for close-coupled instrument, all field instruments shall be mounted on
instrument supports designed for that purpose.
Commentary Note: Attention shall be paid to process instruments that are
close -coupled (installed directly on the piping). Effects of instrument size and
weight as well as heat or vibration in piping systems shall be carefully
evaluated.
3) When pipe stand is used as an instrument support, it shall be made of a
prefabricated, 50 mm, schedule 40 pipe. The pipe stand shall be hot-dipped
galvanized. The top of the pipe shall be plugged or sealed to prevent water
entry.
4) Pipe stands shall be securely anchored. For typical details, refer to Standard
Detail Drawings # TCDD-407961, Field Instruments Mounting Hardware.
r. Instrumentation Tagging
1) All instruments shall have engraved phenolic/ Bakelite-laminated nameplates
showing instrument tag numbers. The nameplates shall be installed with
stainless steel screws. Using glue to install nameplates is not acceptable.
2) Panel mounted instruments shall be provided with two nameplates, one on
the front and one on the back; rack mounted instruments shall have front
mounted nameplates only.
3) For RTD and thermocouple heads, stainless steel nameplates that are
chained to the head may be used.
4) All field junction boxes, other instrumentation enclosures and process
automation cabinets shall be equipped with nameplates.
s. Instrument Piping and Tubing
1) Instrument Piping
(a) When piping is used for process connection, the piping specification and
installation shall follow the relevant piping standards. From the root valve
to the instrument, the instrument piping specification, material of
construction, pressure rating, fittings, and valves shall meet or exceed
applicable piping specifications for the process service.
2) Instrument Tubing
(a) When tubing is used for process connection, the process sensing tubing
(impulse line), fittings, and instrument valves shall be compatible with the
process medium. The tubing and fittings shall be made of the same
material. As a minimum, the tubing shall be Type 316 seamless,
annealed stainless steel per ASTM A269, 6 mm OD, hardness Rockwell
B80 maximum.
(b) As a minimum, pneumatic signal (10 - 100 kPa signals) tubing shall be
Type 316 seamless, annealed stainless steel per ASTM A269, 6 mm

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
OD, hardness Rockwell B80 maximum. The minimum design pressure

shall be 2 MPa.
(c) Tube fittings shall be, as a minimum, 316 stainless steel and shall be
compression type.
3) Instrument Piping and Tubing Support
(a) Instrument process piping and tubing shall be supported as necessary to
maintain structural integrity.
(b) All instrument piping and tubing between the instrument and process
equipment or pipeline shall be properly supported to prevent strain on the
instrument, equipment, and piping connections. The supports shall be
designed so that the effect of any equipment vibration is eliminated.
(c) Tubing shall not be routed along or supported from handrails.
(d) Tubing supports shall be spaced not more than 1.2 meters apart.
(e) In locations where mechanical damage is likely, tubing may be installed
in dedicated structural channel, angle, or in trays.
(f) Tubes and tube bundles and their support channels and trays shall not
be supported from process or utility piping.
(g) Tubing channels or trays shall not be supported by bolting to transmitter
brackets or control valves.
(h) Tubing shall be installed in a manner that allows for calibration of
instruments and easy removal of adjacent instruments, equipment, and
tubing.
(i) Online Continuous Measurement or Analog Type Instrumentation
t. All continuous measurement electronic field instruments, and control valve
positioners, shall be smart.
1) Signal Ranges and Communications Protocols - Acceptable field
transmission signals are Foundation™ fieldbus, or 4-20 mA with
superimposed HART.
2) Vendor proprietary digital protocols are acceptable for plant expansions
when matching existing instrumentation. In the context of this standard, field
transmission signals are defined as signals from field devices to a control
system, or signals from a control system to field devices.
3) HART communication protocol shall not be used for plant control.
4) Foundation™ fieldbus based instrumentation and control systems shall meet
the requirements detailed further in Paragraph 5.5.3.G.7.
5) Wireless process instrumentation shall not be used.
u. Continuous measurement systems and/or instrumentation includes but is not be
limited to - Flow, Level, Pressure, Temperature, Analytical, Environmental, and
Miscellaneous equipment.
1) Flow – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
2) Level – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
3) Pressure – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
4) Temperature – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment

5) Analytical – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
6) Environmental – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
7) Miscellaneous – Field Mounted Instruments and Equipment
v. Specific performance criteria and detailed specifications for each type of instrument
are provided in the standard specifications.
w. Power Monitoring
1) Power monitoring is provided under electrical package requirements under
Subsection 5.5.1.G item 9; however the interface with the control system
shall be based on standard protocols such as Modbus, Profibus, Ethernet
etc.
2) Power monitoring instrumentation shall be included to provide to support the
following minimum monitoring functions:
(a) kW
(b) kVAr
(c) V for all phases P-P and L-P
(d) I for all phases
(e) PF
(f) Circuit breaker and switch status indication for: facility main and feeder
breakers and disconnect switches, generator breakers, Auto Transfer
Switches, and electrically operated low voltage breakers.
x. Offline continuous measurement electronic field instruments shall be provided for
specific analytic sampling systems.
2. Online Discrete Type Instrumentation

a. Fail Safe Design Requirements - Unless otherwise specified in other standards, all
discrete instrumentation such as switches, solenoids, relays, etc., shall be designed
so that they are energized during normal operation and shall de-energize to initiate a
shutdown, an alarm or any other control action
b. On-line Discrete digital switching type measurement systems and/or instrumentation
includes but is not be limited to - Flow, Level, Pressure, Temperature, Analytical,
Environmental, and Miscellaneous equipment.
c. On-line Final Control Elements
d. Control Valves Actuators
1) Notwithstanding the requirements set forth in this Subsection – coordinate
with the following mechanical and civil requirements.
(a) Subsection 5.4.3.B. 6-8 Mechanical Piping Systems
(b) Subsection 5.7.1.B. Potable Water
(c) Subsection 5.7.2. Sanitary Sewer System
(d) Subsection 5.7.3 Recycled Water System ( Irrigation)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
(e) Subsection 5.7.4 Recycled Industrial Water System

(f) Subsection 5.7.5 Sea Water Cooling
2) Valve size shall be such that equal percentage valves shall be approximately
75% to 85% open and linear valves shall be approximately 50% open when
operating at normal flow and pressure drop condition.
3) Valve capacity rating (Cv) shall be calculated at maximum and normal flow
rates at their respective pressure drop to be assured that overall operating
range is satisfied. The manufacturers published "Cv’s" shall be used to
determine valve size. Valve sizing calculations shall be based on equations
and data by the manufacturer supplying control valves for the project or ISA
S75-01 "Flow Equations for Sizing Control Valves".
4) Noise-level within 1 M of any noise producing control valve shall not exceed
85 dBA. Control valve sizing shall take into account any noise attenuating
devices, such as special trim and diffusers, which may be considered to
reduce the noise level within specified limits.
5) Valves, in general, shall be globe type. Where low pressure drop or high
recovery is required, butterfly or characterized ball valves may be considered.
Special body types such as angle, "Y" etc., shall be considered when the
process fluid may be erosive, viscous or carrying suspended solids. Flushing
connections shall be provided for slurry service. Flangeless, insert type
valves may be considered for utility service or where material is other than
carbon steel.
6) Where a hand wheel is required, the shaft-mounted declutchable type shall be
furnished. "Fishtail" disc shall be considered on all high torque requirements.
Bronze "oilite" bushings shall be used for outboard bearings. Inboard
bushings shall be manufacturing standard. Roller or needle bearings shall not
be used.
7) Minimum body size for flanged valves shall be 25 mm with reduced ports, as
required. Steel valves shall have at least 150 lb. body and flanges shall have
face to face dimensions in accordance with ANSI B16.10. Valve body
connections shall normally conform to ANSI B31.1. Body material shall
normally be cast or forged carbon steel for non-corrosive process
applications. Chromemoly steel shall be considered for service where
temperature exceeds 343 C.
8) Packing Glands shall be equipped with flanged bolted-type gland stuffing
boxes. Packing shall be Teflon for liquid and gas service up to an inlet
pressure of 1000 psig, and a temperature not to exceed 177 C. Grafoil shall
be used for steam service with temperatures above 177 C. Packing gland
followers shall be the same as body material.
9) Control valve plugs shall normally be cage guided. Unbalanced type shall
preferably be used for tight shut off. Where balanced valves are used, the
valve shall be installed in horizontal lines only with stem vertical.
10) Characteristic and shape of the inner valve shall be determined by each
system characteristic. In general, equal percentage characteristic shall be
used. Linear characteristic may be used for flow control and level.
11) Plug and seat rings shall be stainless steel up to 100 psi drop and up to the
temperature rating of the body. Other conditions may require special trim

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
consideration and shall be in accordance with good engineering practice.

When severe corrosion is expected, or pressure drop exceeds 100 psi, full-
bore satellite or hardened stainless steel shall be furnished.
12) Special alloys, balanced plugs, soft seats, etc., shall be considered where
warranted by the application. Valves on oxygen service shall be degreased.
When tight shut off is required, soft seat trim or lapped seats shall be used,
provided temperature limits are not exceeded; soft seat trims shall be of fire
safe design.
13) Guide bushings shall normally be hardened stainless steel and preferably
shall be a minimum of 125 Brinnel harder than the trim. Control valve leakage
shall conform to ANSI B106.4 Quality Control Standard for Control Valve Seat
Leakage.
14) Control valves are used for block valves, where leakage is not permitted when
tripped, or for safety requirements, shall be specified for tight shut-off. Tight
shut-off leakage for valves with metal seats shall be Class V; 0.0005 ml/min.
per 25 mm of port diameter per psi pressure drop.
15) Self-contained control valves used pressure or temperature control of air,
water, oil, steam or process fluids in utility piping systems shall be limited to a
maximum regulated pressure of 150 psig and maximum valve size of 50 mm.
16) Self-actuated pressure reducing stations on process fluids shall conform to
the line specification in which the valve is installed. Threaded bodies may be
used if permitted by the piping specification.
17) Self-actuated temperature regulators on steam or water service shall be of the
vapor pressure type with copper bulb and copper capillary with stainless steel
armor and stainless steel thermowell.
18) Accessories such as limit switches, air sets, and solenoid valves shall be
rigidly mounted and bracketed to the valve. Valve position limit switches shall
be of the snap acting type with IP65 weatherproof housing suitable for the
area electrical classification. Switches shall be furnished with DPDT contacts.
19) Control valve data sheets shall be provided for all control valves.
e. Valve Actuators
1) A filter-regulator air set shall be provided for air-operated actuators. Air sets
shall consist of a combination air filter, pressure regulator, and integral relief
valve. Connections shall be 6 mm or more if required for speed of response
of the device being supplied. An output gauge shall be supplied at the outlet of
each air set. Tubing shall be sufficiently large so as not to unduly restrict air
flow or dynamic response. Bug screens shall be installed on all open port or
piping connectors. Where air sets are required for control valves they shall be
directly mounted on the valve positioner.
2) Actuator position shall be clearly indicated.
3) Actuators shall fail-safe upon trip or loss of power and/or loss of power to the
controller, transmitter, and other associated logic elements. Upon restoration
of power, the actuator shall become available for operation without changing
its position.
4) The full stroke time shall not impede or limit the performance or safe
operation of the associated equipment.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
5) Positioners or booster relays shall be force balance type with pneumatic

output. Positioners shall be SMART, HART compatible, and shall accept 4-20
mA directly. Separate I/P converters are not allowed.
6) Valve actuators shall be preferably diaphragm type. Piston operators may be
used in severe pressure drop services or on rotary valves.
7) Electrical motor-operated valves shall have a torque limit switch which shall
be used as a back-up switch to stop the motor when the valve is at full limit
travel. Electrical motor operator suppliers’ recommendations shall be used for
stopping the motor. The stopping requirements will differ depending on the
type of valve. Motors and starters shall be in accordance with area electrical
classification and the specified voltage levels. Enclosures shall be weather
proof.
8) Motor actuators are commonly used; however their use as modulating final
control elements is limited due to design limitations.
9) Three-way direct acting solenoid valves shall be used to actuate control
valves when interlocked with fail safe or shutdown circuits. The coil shall be
molded design with weatherproof housing furnished to meet area electrical
code classifications. Outdoor installations shall be weatherproof. Solenoid
vents shall have bug screens. Solenoids with top mounted vents shall be
piped so that moisture does not enter the valve. Universal (reversible ports)
are preferred and shall be selected where air pressure is to be blocked at the
vent port. Pilot operated solenoid valves shall not be used.
10) Custody Metering
f. This Subsection is intended to define the minimum requirements governing the
design of custody transfer metering stations used for the measurement of Seawater
Cooling Liquid.
g. Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards SAES-Y-100; 101; 103 and 501 shall be
referenced for Custody Metering of Hydrocarbon Gases or Liquids and is not in the
scope of this document.
h. Custody Transfer Measurement is a specialized form of measurement that provides
quantity and quality information used for the physical and fiscal documentation of a
change in ownership and/or responsibility of commodities. The following
measurements are custody transfer measurements:
1) Measurement of Seawater Cooling Liquid (deliveries or receipts) between
RCJ and its customers.
i. A Meter Station shall be defined as a facility that is primarily dedicated to the
measurement of the quantity and quality of seawater cooling liquid. The facility may
include, but not be limited to pipelines, piping, regulators, valves, strainers/filters,
flow straightening and conditioning equipment, samplers, measurement elements,
Remote Terminal Units (RTU), pumps, communications (data and SA telephone),
metering shelter, UPS, area fencing, area paving, area lighting, and associated
instrumentation, alarms, computers with software programs, peripheral equipment
and associated control functions.
j. A Metering System shall be defined as a complete assembly of equipment that is
designed to measure the quantity and quality of seawater cooling liquid. The
metering system includes, but is not limited to, the meter skid (meters, filters,

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
analyzers, flow conditioning sections, valves), samplers, and control system (flow
computers, metering supervisory computers, etc.).
k. Units of Measurement – the metric (SI) system of units shall be used per Table
5.5.3.B:
TABLE 5.5.3.B: PROFESSIONAL UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
ITEM METRIC (SI)
Volume Cubic Meters, Liters, (m3, L)
Temperature Degrees Celsius (°C)
Pressure Kilopascals Gauge, (Kpa (ga))
l. Reference Conditions – Due to the nature and volumes of Seawater Cooling Liquids,
no corrections will be necessary due to liquid pressure or temperature changes as
the impact will be negligible.
m. A typical Seawater Cooling Liquid custody transfer metering station will include the
following measurements:
1) Flow
2) Pressure
3) Temperature
4) Chlorine Residual CL2
5) Dissolved Oxygen
n. The performance specifications for these measuring instruments are detailed in the
standard specifications.
E. Instrumentation and Control System Cabinets
• General
b. The objective of Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for instrumentation and
control system cabinet construction, selection, and installation.
c. Outdoor Environmentally Controlled – IP65
1) Typically all outdoor enclosures shall be made of stainless steel materials.
2) In outdoor plant areas, the panel/cabinet shall be IEC 60529, Type IP65.
3) In outdoor plant and other industrial areas located in severe corrosive
environments, enclosures shall be IEC 60529 Type IP66, manufactured of
316L stainless steel. Galvanized and/or painted or coated carbon steel sheet
metal enclosures are not permitted.
4) Door hardware (hinges, latches, handles, bolts and nuts) shall be made of
316 stainless steel.
5) The enclosure size and dimensions shall be appropriate for the application
with a minimum of 20% spare capacity for growth. The enclosure shall include
a full-length front door to provide access to all components mounted inside.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
6) Notwithstanding item 3 above - the enclosure shall be sized to ensure

maximum temperature inside the enclosure due to internal heat dissipation
pulse heat rise due to solar radiation will not exceed 55°C for sheltered
cabinets and 65°C for unsheltered cabinets. All electronic components to be
mounted inside the enclosure shall have 75°C temperature rating minimum.
7) The enclosures may be surface mounted or rack mounted depending on the
specific design.
8) The enclosures shall have locking doors. Each enclosure shall be supplied
with at least two (2) keys.
9) Enclosure shall be fitted with sufficient number of conduit entries at the
bottom.
10) Terminal strips shall be provided in the enclosures to terminate instrument
cables from field signals and for power distribution.
11) Each item of equipment and accessory inside the cabinet shall be correctly
tagged, if possible, immediately below the corresponding equipment or
accessory. All nameplates on the exterior surface of the cabinet shall be
attached with stainless steel screws. Internally mounted nameplates may be
attached with two-component epoxy adhesive. Nameplates shall be made
from laminated plastic, white-black-white (information engraved into the black
core with white surface, dull finish).
12) Each cabinet design shall be appropriately laid out with sufficient workspace
to allow for installed equipment field wiring termination and access for future
maintenance and installation.
13) The panel/cabinet and all components within the panel shall be suitable for
the electrical area classification where the panel will be installed.
d. Indoor – General Purpose IP10 and IP52
1) All cabinet equipment and wiring shall be designed for continuous operation at
50°C, and relative humidity 80% maximum (non-condensing) and 20%
minimum.
Commentary Note: The temperature of 50°C allows for a 35°C room ambient
plus a 15°C rise within the cabinet.
2) The cabinets shall be rigid and self-supporting. By default, all cabinets shall
be free standing, floor mounted type.
3) Indoor cabinets shall be made of metal. When multiple cabinets are provided,
they shall be identical in construction and external appearance.
4) The cabinet shall be IP52 as a minimum prior to fitting of louvers or fans as
per IEC60529.
5) Cabinets requiring heat dissipation shall be convection-ventilated.
6) Convection-ventilated cabinets shall be provided with readily accessible,
removable filter screens inserted behind slotted louver inlets. Depending on
the location of the heat generating components, louvers and filters may be
installed at the top of the cabinet or within cabinet doors. Louvers installed on
the sides or back of the cabinet are not acceptable.
7) Fans may be used within Cabinets to assist in heat removal and cabinet
ventilation. If the fans are required to dissipate heat when the HVAC is

Rev. 0 5.5 - 260
running, redundant fans shall be provided. If the fan(s) are only required to
dissipate heat when the HVAC is not running, a single fan is adequate. In
both cases, fan failure or over-temperature detection and alarm are required
in the PCS.
e. Packaged – Vendor or OEM supplied with environmental rating to suit the intended
application
F. Electrical Systems for Instrumentation
(a) General
b. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for electrical systems
for instrumentation and control systems.
c. Electrical distribution panels and motor control centers associated with control
building services and the control system UPS shall be located in the electrical
equipment room.
d. The electrical equipment room shall be sized to permit top, front, side and back
access for operation and maintenance of installed equipment.
e. Where required a separate mechanical equipment room containing air handling
equipment, particle filters and chemical filters, shall be included and shall be fire
separated from all other rooms.
f. Electrical Wiring
g. Electrical and wiring up to but excluding vendors' standard cabinets shall be
designed in accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical.
h. Notwithstanding the requirements of Section 5.5.1 the following requirements shall
be observed.
1) Analog Signals
(a) Use TPSH cable for all low level analog signals such as 4-20 mA, 1-5 V
DC, 0-10 V DC, pulse type circuits 24 V DC and under, and other signals
of a similar nature.
(b) Use RTD cable for connections between RTD’s and transmitters.
2) Digital Communications Signals
(a) Use TPSH cable for all low level input (24 V and below) and output
signals to the plant control system.
(b) Use Stranded Copper wire for power to instruments, for 120 VAC signals
other than those mentioned above and as otherwise indicated on the
drawings. Use stranded wire and cable to supply power to instruments.
3) Cable Installation
(a) Install instrumentation cables in conduit systems or in cable trays. Use a
maximum of 36” length of liquid tight flexible conduit to connect the field
sensors to the rigid conduit. Refer to Section 5.5.1 for conduit or cable
tray requirements.
(b) Where non-armoured instrumentation cables are installed in cable trays,
provide barriers in the tray to separate instrumentation cables from
power cables.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(c) At each end of the run leave sufficient cable length for termination.
(d) Do not make splices in any of the instrumentation cable runs. Where
splices are required, obtain approval from the RC prior to installing the
cable. Do not splice cables to gas detection heads.
(e) Where splices are necessary in instrumentation cables other than coaxial
cables, perform such splices on terminal blocks in terminal boxes. Keep
splices in instrumentation cable to a minimum and separated physically
from power circuits. Cable shields shall be terminated on insulated
terminals and carried through to the extent of the cable.
(f) Where splices are made to coaxial cables, use standard coaxial cable
connectors.
(g) Ground cable shields at one end only. Unless otherwise specified,
ground the shields at the marshaling / local control panels.
(h) Protect all conductors against moisture during and after installation.
(i) Terminate armoured cables with approved only connector.
(j) Power Supply
i. Two separate, independent, electric circuits shall be supplied to power redundant
modules. If a simplex UPS is provided, one of the feed to system redundant power
modules shall be supplied from a raw 230 V power feed.
j. Power Supply circuits shall be clearly labeled. Branch circuits or power cords to
redundant modules shall be clearly labeled identifying the circuit that they are
connected to.
k. Redundant internal power supply modules shall be provided for the following:
14) Process controllers
15) Input and output modules
16) Communication modules
l. Redundant power supply modules shall be provided for critical field instruments.
m. Power Distribution within PCS Cabinets
n. Power supplies which feed multiple chassis' or baseplates shall have their outputs
wired to a power distribution panel within the cabinet.
Commentary Note: The term "power distribution panel" in the above requirement
and subsequent requirements of this Subsection refers to a collection of din-rail
mounted circuit breakers and/or fused terminal blocks, terminal blocks and wiring
used to distribute power to multiple loads from a single source.
c. Branch circuits from power supplies shall be individually fused or protected by a
circuit breaker.
b. Terminal blocks in the power distribution panel shall be segregated by voltage level.
c. Power distribution terminal block wiring shall not be daisy-chained using wires or
crimp connectors. Jumper bars or preformed jumper combs designed for the specific
terminal blocks being used are acceptable methods of distributing power supply
wiring.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
d. Wiring, terminal blocks, wire tagging and terminal block coding within the power
distribution panel shall be as per the requirements defined elsewhere in this
document.
2. Power Supply and Distribution to PCS Consoles and Workstations
a. PCS workstations shall be fed from UPS power sources. This requirement applies to
the processor, monitor, and other peripheral devices associated with the workstation.
b. For redundant workstations within an operator console, it is acceptable to supply
power to the workstations using either of the configurations described below:
1) Each workstation shall be fed from a single UPS power circuit; provided that
each workstation is fed from a separate UPS power source.
2) Each workstation shall be fed from two separate power circuits utilizing a
power switching device to maintain continuous power on loss of a single
circuit. One of these circuits shall be fed from UPS power source and the
other may be fed from utility power.
c. Workstations which are not supplied in a redundant configuration shall be powered
as described above in b.2.
d. Commercially available multiple outlet power strips (i.e., Tripp-Lite model UL 24CB-
15 or similar) may be used to distribute power to multiple components of a
workstation (i.e., processor, monitor, and associated peripheral devices) provided
that each power strip feeds equipment associated with a single workstation. The
power strip must have an integral circuit breaker and switch and must carry a FM or
CE marking.
3. Utility Power
a. One, duplex-type convenience outlet, rated at 230 VAC, 13 amp shall be provided
within each cabinet for utility power. Convenience outlets shall be wired to a
separate terminal strip which in turn is sourced from a non-UPS AC distribution
panel.
b. Two, duplex-type convenience outlets, rated at 230 VAC, 13 amp shall be provided
within each console for utility power. Convenience outlets shall be wired to a
separate terminal strip which in turn is sourced from a non-UPS AC distribution
panel. The outlets shall be placed on opposite sides of the console to enhance
availability.
c. Grounding
d. Grounding design shall be per the provisions of Subsection 5.5.1.J.
e. Notwithstanding the requirements of Subsection 5.5.1.J, PCS workstations,
computers, I/O cabinets and auxiliary equipment shall be grounded in accordance
with PCS vendor's recommendations.
f. PLC based Emergency Shutdown Systems (ESD) shall be grounded in accordance
with electrical Subsection and the ESD Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
manufacturer's recommendations.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
G. Process Automation Network (PAN)

(a) General
b. Notwithstanding the requirements as set out in Section 5.5.2 Telecommunications -
The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for process
automation network design selection, and installation.
c. Process Automation Network Design
d. The PAN shall be based on IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD (Ethernet) standard or Vendor
proprietary control network standard The backbone shall be based on Layer 3 multi-
protocol switches utilizing 1 Gigabits per second (Gbps) backplane throughput as
minimum. Nodes, such as servers/ workstations, shall be connected to 10/100 Mbps
ports.
e. Physical and Logical Separation
f. The network design shall provide physical and logical separation between PAN and
all other corporate or utility networks through demilitarized zone and firewall.
g. Logical separation, at minimum, is mandatory for network connections above
firewall.
h. Physical separation is mandatory for subsystems such as CCTV, telephone network
connections below firewall.
i. Physical separation utilizing dedicated fiber strands of an existing fiber optics cable
is permitted and shall include a service level agreement defining area of
responsibility for support and maintenance, including agreed response time.
j. A minimum bandwidth of 5 Megabits/s requirements shall always be made available
for any given WAN connection.
k. PAN equipment shall be deployed with the latest stable vendor supported operating
systems.
l. Network traffic through the firewall shall be limited to server-to-server connections
and through selected source/destination IP addresses and TCP/UDP ports and
services.
m. Engineering and Maintenance Network (E&MN)
n. The E&MN shall be connected to the PAN.
o. The E&MN network shall be used to integrate auxiliary systems on a single network
such as Emergency shutdown systems, compressor control systems, vibration
monitoring systems, etc., for the purpose of centralizing the engineering and
maintenance activities for the plant.
p. Wireless Communications
q. Full Duplex wireless radio communications shall be provided for all new RTUs
associated with the Irrigation Control System.
r. Wireless systems will not be utilized for building automation and process automation
projects.
s. The Irrigation Central Control shall communicate in real time 2-way communication
with the field Remote Terminal Units (RTU) on site via radio communication through
a Field Interface Unit (FIU). The RTU shall have the capability to communicate on a
bi-directional real time basis with systems above it (RTU-To-Central), parallel to it

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
(RTU-To-RTU) and below it (RTU-To-Slave RTU). This shall include full control and
monitoring capabilities.
2. HART
a. The HART Communications Protocol (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
Protocol) is an early implementation of Fieldbus, a digital industrial automation
protocol.
b. It’s most notable advantage is that it can communicate over legacy 4-20 mA analog
instrumentation wiring, sharing the pair of wires used by the older system. Due to the
huge installed base of 4-20 mA systems throughout the world, the HART Protocol is
one of the most popular industrial protocols today. HART protocol has made a good
transition protocol for users who were comfortable using the legacy 4- 20 mA
signals, but wanted to implement a "smart" protocol.
c. There are two main operational modes of HART instruments: analog/digital mode,
and multidrop mode.
d. In point-to-point mode (analog/digital) the digital signals are overlaid on the 4-20 mA
loop current. Both the 4-20 mA current and the digital signal are valid output values
from the instrument. The polling address of the instrument is set to "0". Only one
instrument can be put on each instrument cable signal pair. One signal, generally
specified by the user, is specified to be the 4-20 mA signal. Other signals are sent
digitally on top of the 4-20 mA signal. For example, pressure can be sent as 4-
20 mA, representing a range of pressures, and temperature can be sent digitally
over the same wires. In point-to-point mode, the digital part of the HART protocol
can be seen as a kind of digital current loop interface.
e. In multidrop mode (digital) only the digital signals are used. The analog loop current
is fixed at 4 mA. In multidrop mode it is possible to have more than one instruments
on one signal cable. HART revisions 3 through 5 allowed polling addresses of the
instruments to be in the range 1-15. HART 6 and later allowed address up to 63.
Each instrument needs to have a unique address.
f. All transmitters shall be high performance type microprocessor based Foundation
Fieldbus or ‘SMART’ type with HART protocol unless stated otherwise.
g. The PCS System shall support communication to HART devices by using Universal
and Common practice command sets using HART I/O module as the interface.
h. The system shall be capable of receiving, displaying and storing diagnostic data and
device alerts from HART devices by using HART I/O module interface. In case the
selected I/O modules are not HART compliance, a multiplexer shall be provided to
obtain the HART information.
i. The PCS system shall be capable of displaying configuration data resident in HART
devices on the IAMS workstations.
j. FOUNDATION Fieldbus is an all-digital, serial, two-way communications system that
serves as the base-level network in a plant or factory automation environment. It is
an open architecture, developed and administered by the Fieldbus Foundation.
k. It is targeted for applications using basic and advanced regulatory control, and for
much of the discrete control associated with those functions.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
l. Two related implementations of foundation fieldbus have been introduced to meet

different needs within the process automation environment. These two
implementations use different physical media and communication speeds.
1) FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 - Operates at 31.25 kbit/s and is generally used
to connect to field devices and host systems. It provides communication and
power over standard stranded twisted-pair wiring in both conventional and
intrinsic safety applications. H1 is currently the most common
implementation.
2) HSE (High-speed Ethernet) - Operates at 100/1000 Mbit/s and generally
connects input/output subsystems, host systems, linking devices and
gateways. It doesn't currently provide power over the cable, although work is
under way to address this using the IEEE802.3af Power on Ethernet (PoE)
standard.
m. FOUNDATION Fieldbus was originally intended as a replacement for the 4-20 mA
standard.
n. FOUNDATION Fieldbus was developed over a period of many years by the
International Society of Automation, or ISA, as SP50.
o. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard on field bus, including
FOUNDATION Fieldbus, is IEC 61158. Type 1 is FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1, while
Type 5 is FOUNDATION Fieldbus HSE.
p. A typical fieldbus segment consists of the following components.
1) H1 card - fieldbus interface card (It is common practice to have redundant
H1 cards, but ultimately this is application specific)
2) PS - Bulk power (Vdc) to Fieldbus Power Supply
3) FPS - Fieldbus Power Supply and Signal Conditioner (Integrated power
supplies and conditioners have become the standard nowadays)
4) T - Terminators (Exactly 2 terminators are used per fieldbus segment. One at
the FPS and one at the furthest point of a segment at the device coupler)
5) LD - Linking Device, alternatively used with HSE networks to terminate 4-8
H1 segments acting as a gateway to an HSE backbone network.
6) And fieldbus devices, (e.g. transmitters, transducers, etc.)
q. The criteria for designing Foundation Fieldbus systems is detailed further in Saudi
Aramco Engineering Specification SAES-J-904.
r. Profibus
s. There are two variations of PROFIBUS in use today; the most commonly used
PROFIBUS DP, and the lesser used, application specific, PROFIBUS PA:
1) PROFIBUS DP (Decentralized Peripherals) is used to operate sensors and
actuators via a centralized controller in production (factory) automation
applications. The many standard diagnostic options, in particular, are focused
on here. Most common application of Profibus DP is in Motor Control Centers
2) PROFIBUS PA (Process Automation) is used to monitor measuring equipment
via a process control system in process automation applications. This variant
is designed for use in explosion/hazardous areas (Ex-zone 0 and 1). The
Physical Layer (i.e. the cable) conforms to IEC 61158-2, which allows

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
power to be delivered over the bus to field instruments, while limiting current
flows so that explosive conditions are not created, even if a malfunction
occurs. The number of devices attached to a PA segment is limited by this
feature. PA has a data transmission rate of 31.25 kbit/s. However, PA uses the
same protocol as DP, and can be linked to a DP network using a coupler
device. The much faster DP acts as a backbone network for transmitting
process signals to the controller. This means that DP and PA can work tightly
together, especially in hybrid applications where process and factory
automation networks operate side by side.
3. BACNET
a. The BACnet protocol defines a number of services that are used to communicate
between building devices. The protocol services include Who-Is, I-Am, Who-Has, I-
Have, which are used for Device and Object discovery. Services such as Read-
Property and Write-Property are used for data sharing. The BACnet protocol defines
a number of Objects that are acted upon by the services. The objects include Analog
Input, Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Multi-
State Input, Multi-State Output, Calendar, Event-Enrollment, File, Notification- Class,
Group, Loop, Program, Schedule, Command, and Device.
b. The BACnet protocol defines a number of data link / physical layers, including
ARCNET, Ethernet, BACnet/IP, Point-To-Point over RS-232, Master-Slave/Token-
Passing over RS-485, and LonTalk.
c. Control Network Cabling
d. Process Control Network cabling installed indoors shall be placed in ladder, trough
or solid bottom cable trays.
e. Redundant network cables installed indoors shall not be installed in the same cable
tray.
f. Installation of Fiber Optic process control network cabling shall be in accordance
with Section 5.5.2 Telecommunications and shall observe the following additional
criteria:
1) Composite cable of power and fiber optic shall not be used.
2) Aerial fiber optic cables shall not be used.
3) Multiple fiber optic cables between two locations shall be diversely routed to
provide additional reliability and survivability.
4) There shall not be more than one fiber hub between a destination location
and its originating node.
5) Fiber cables shall be sized with at least 50% additional strands above the
initial strand requirements. The following minimum strand count shall also be
applied:
(a) 24 strand count for cable run to a building or a facility that is not a node
or hub.
(b) 12 strand count for cable run to small or temporary locations.
6) Fiber strand count in all fiber cable shall be an even number.
7) Spare fiber strands shall be spliced and terminated at the Fiber Distribution
Panel (FDP), and marked as spares.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
H. Control System Access and Security

(a) General
b. The objective of Subsection is to detail the requirements for access control and
security of control systems.
c. The ISA99/IEC 62443 standard is the worldwide standard for security of Industrial
Control systems and should be referenced during design.
d. Operators of facilities may want to begin sharing information between business and
automation systems. However, because automation and control systems equipment
connects directly to a process, loss of control and interruption in the flow of
information are not the only consequences of a security breach. The potential loss of
life, environmental damage, regulatory violation, and compromise to operational
safety are far more serious consequences. External threats are not the only
concern; knowledgeable insiders with malicious intent or even an innocent
unintended act can pose a serious security risk. Personnel from outside the control
systems area increasingly perform security testing on the systems, exacerbating the
number and consequence of these effects. Combining all these factors, it is easy to
see that the potential of someone gaining unauthorized or damaging access to an
industrial process is not trivial.
e. Foundational Requirements:
f. There are several basic or foundational requirements that have been identified for
industrial automation security. These are:
1) Access Control (AC) – Control access to selected devices, information or both
to protect against unauthorized interrogation of the device or information.
2) Use Control (UC) – Control use of selected devices, information or both to
protect against unauthorized operation of the device or use of information.
3) Timely Response to Event (TRE) – Respond to security violations by notifying
the proper authority, reporting needed forensic evidence of the violation, and
automatically taking timely corrective action in mission critical or safety critical
situations.
4) Resource Availability (RA) - Ensure the availability of all network resources to
protect against denial of service attacks.
5) Defense in Depth:
g. It is typically not possible to achieve the security objectives through the use of a
single countermeasure or technique. A superior approach is to use the concept of
defense in depth, which involves applying multiple countermeasures in a layered or
stepwise manner. For example, intrusion detection systems can be used to signal
the penetration of a firewall.
h. Physical Security - The network hardware used to provide security from offsite
intrusion and the SCADA servers used to provide internal security shall be located in
a lockable room dedicated to SCADA system. The telephone utility termination point
shall be located outside of the lockable room dedicated to SCADA system. Any
servers installed in the lockable room not associated with the SCADA system shall
be located in a separate rack with their own routers and shall utilize separate
telephone lines from the SCADA system.
i. IP address generation and translation - Automatic IP addressing software in the
router such as (DHCP) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, DNS (Domain Name

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
System) services BIND (Berkeley Internet Name Domain) shall be turned off and
routing of unknown networks shall be turned off in the routers at the SCADA zone
and process zone. The NAT (Network Address Translators) shall also be disabled in
the routers at the SCADA zone and process zone. This will result in additional effort
when adding or removing devices to the network but it will also reduce the possible
security leaks in the router software and will prevent casual users from gaining
access to the system thought PCs and cell phones.
j. Communications with remote monitoring station along shall be sent with encrypted
conduits equivalent to IPsec tunnels and the master station shall be set to block all
traffic not using the data polling port in the PLC network and not addressed to
SCADA servers.
k. Sites are located outside of the physical security zone of the plant and cannot be
made spoof proof. Data from these sites shall be used only for monitoring and shall
not be used for control.
l. Software Updates: The simplest and most secure way to make updates to the
SCADA software and PLC software is to do so manually on a regular basis. The
updates shall be checked with the software writer for authenticity and only then
implemented on the SCADA servers and PLCs at the site.
m. Countermeasures:
n. There are several countermeasures that can be used to address external threats to
the control system network. These include hardware and software built into the
control system network and include:
1) IP access controls list.
2) Intrusion detection.
3) Data conduits that use Cryptographic algorithm, Cryptographic keys,
encryption, and digital signature of IP packets with IPsec tunnels.
4) Resource isolation or segregation with security zones and conduits within the
network through routers and IP access controls list.
5) Logging commands and passwords to provide Authentication, Authorization,
and Accountability.
o. Countermeasures can also be employed on the workstations and servers and
include:
1) Virus scanning software that scans the host for malicious software.
2) Virus scanning software that will scan the system for unusual activity and log
it.
3) Physical security of the workstations with password protection that times out
and locks inactive workstations from unauthorized visitors.
4) Individual passwords to authenticate the user.
5) Restrict user access by enforcing variable access privileges.
6) Security Zones:
p. A security zone is a logical grouping of physical, informational, and application
assets sharing common security requirements. This concept applies to the electronic
environment where some systems are included in the security zone and all others
are outside the zone. There can also be zones within zones, or subzones, that

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
provide layered security, giving defense in depth and addressing multiple levels of
security requirements. Defense in depth can also be accomplished by assigning
different properties to security zones.
q. A security zone has a border, which is the boundary between included and excluded
elements. The concept of a zone also implies the need to access the assets in a
zone from both within and without. This defines the communication and access
required to allow information and people to move within and between the security
zones. Zones may be considered to be trusted or untrusted. Security zones can be
defined in either a physical sense such as each pump station or in a logical manner
such as the following:
1) PLCs, ACPs, and Remote IO in a control system zone.
2) Host workstations and servers in a SCADA zone.
3) Historical data base in an Enterprise zone.
r. Email servers and other types of typical business software shall not be included
inside any of the above zones to prevent Phishing attacks.
s. Conduits:
t. Information must flow into, out of, and within a security zone. To cover the security
aspects of communication and to provide a construct to encompass the unique
requirements of communications, this standard is defining a special type of security
zone: a communications conduit.
u. A conduit is a particular type of security zone that groups communications that can
be logically organized into a grouping of information flows within and also external to
a zone. It can be a single service (i.e., a single Ethernet network) or can be made up
of multiple data carriers (multiple network cables and direct physical accesses). As
with zones, it can be made of both physical such as connecting pump stations to
remote monitoring sites and logical constructs as connection between the PLCs and
SCADA servers.
v. Trusted conduits crossing zone boundaries must use an end-to-end secure process.
Due to slow speed of response that is required, several seconds of lag can be
tolerated without notice, and the static nature of the network, simple router based
IPsec tunnels with a key coded into the router, provide an easy way to build conduits
across the a wide area network such as the public telephone networks.
w. The use of IPsec tunnels and IP access control list are mature technologies that
shall see little degradation over time. The protection provided through passwords
and virus scanning software will require constant maintenance.
x. Local and Remote Access
y. Local Access
1) Local access in the form of operator workstations and consoles shall reside
on the PAN and shall be below the plant firewall.
z. Remote Access
1) Remote access through the plant firewall, for control purposes, is not
permitted.
2) Remote engineering by RCJ personnel through the firewall is permitted. The
following conditions shall apply:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 270
(a) The Engineering station must be in a room with controlled physical

access.
(b) Remote access nodes shall be placed on the corporate network for
server to server communication.
(c) A Virtual Private Network shall be used for vendor remote
troubleshooting for communication between remote access nodes.
(d) Data Protection and Retention
aa. A redundant fixed media storage device shall be provided for the storage of all
system and control configuration, graphics, report forms, programs, etc.
Automatic/manual copying between redundant media shall be a user selectable
parameter. For security, data shall be retained using RAID or equivalent
technology, and be capable of permanent archive via CD or DVD.
bb. File manipulation on or between any drive in the system shall not be constrained by
physical device location.
cc. Store data to Disk, Tape etc. and retention shall be as approved by the RCJ.
dd. Retention and archival of data shall be developed in accordance with the RCJ
Corporate Data Protection and Retention policy. As a minimum, the following
requirement shall be considered:
1) The retention period shall be set for 3 months as a minimum.
2) Minimum storage capacity for shall be 1 Terra Byte.
• System Integration
1. General
a. The objective of Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for system integration.
b. Interfaces between the PCS and associated subsystems or auxiliary systems shall
use standard hardware and software devices, which are compliant with industry
standard protocol; or proprietary protocol, which is offered as a standard product by
both the control system vendor and the subsystem vendor.
c. Redundant communication interfaces shall be supplied for:
1) Emergency Shutdown Systems.
2) Subsystems where loss of communication will result in the significant
degradation of control functions.
3) Where redundant communications are specified, no single component failure
shall result in the loss of communication to any subsystem.
d. Time Synchronization
1) Time clocks for all stations which are part of the PCS shall be synchronized to
100 milliseconds or better.
2) Time synchronization using GPS and networked time server which supports
Simple Networked Time Protocol (SNTP) is the preferred method for
synchronization of all servers connected to the PCS.
3) Synchronization shall be performed at a minimum of once every 24 hours.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
e. Interface to ESD Systems

1) Emergency Shutdown Systems, interfaces, bypasses, shutdown and reset
functions shall be independent and segregated from the main PCS.
2) The interface to ESD systems shall meet the following:
(a) Communications between PCS and ESD systems for real-time process
data and operator commands shall be via dedicated, redundant
communications paths. The PCS shall NOT communicate real-time
process data or operator commands to more than one ESD system over
the same communications path.
(b) "First out" ESD event status, if available, shall be passed via the
communications link from the ESD logic solver to the PCS.
(c) DCS, PLC and SCADA (MTU, RTU)
f. The requirements for Distributed Control Systems (DCS) is provided for in Saudi
Arabia Materials Standard Specifications (SAMSS) 23-SAMSS-010.
g. The requirements for SCADA Systems is provided for in 23-SAMSS-020.
h. The requirements for RTU Systems is provided for in 23-SAMSS-030.
i. The requirements for PLC Systems is provided for in 34-SAMSS-830.
j. Notwithstanding SAMSS documents listed above, additional detailed requirements
for DCS, PLC and SCADA can be referenced in GPCS Division 40.
k. Historian
l. All PCS configuration parameters, including tag data, workstation configurations and
controller module configurations shall be stored on redundant on-line media.
m. On-line historical data shall be stored for access via history trends, displayed
listings, and printed listings.
n. The collection rates, longevity, and scope for historical data are to be specified on a
per project basis. The minimum allowable collection rates and longevity are listed in
the following table:
TABLE 5.5.3.C: MINIMUM ALLOWABLE COLLECTION RATES AND LONGEVITY
Point type Sampling Rate Retention Time
Temperature 10 sec 4 days
Analytical 10 sec 4 days
Level 10 sec 4 days
Flow 4 sec 4 days
Pressure 4 sec 4 days
Discrete 4 sec 1 day

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
o. Circular files on a FIFO basis shall be implemented such that the latest records are
retained when buffer or list overflow occurs.
p. Instrumentation Asset Management Systems (IAMS)
q. This Subsection deals with the requirements governing the design of IAMS.
r. The Instrument Asset Management System (IAMS) shall automatically and
continuously monitor the status, events and operating conditions of the field-
connected devices to provide an efficient condition-based maintenance solution
without interfering with the plant control system
s. Smart field devices Foundation Fieldbus and HART shall be connected to the IAMS
system through the PCS.
t. The IAMS system shall be installed, commissioned and put into operation before the
pre-commissioning for the field instruments starts.
u. The IAMS database shall be fully populated with the latest device data for every
fieldbus and/or HART device on the project.
v. The criteria for IAMS are detailed further in Saudi Aramco Engineering Specification
SAES-J-905.
w. Condition Monitoring Systems (CMS)
x. This Subsection deals with the requirements governing the design of protective and
condition monitoring equipment for rotating machinery.
y. The CMS shall be a single platform software package, capable of integrating various
condition monitoring technology modules for rotating machinery and fixed asset
condition management. It shall be capable of being configured as either a
centralized or distributed database network installation with adequate provision for
worst-case real time data transfer requirements.
z. The CMS shall be connected to the plant automation network to allow import and
export of data including but not limited to, digital process control servers,
computerized maintenance management systems (CMMS), plant historians, plant
document management systems and automated reliability based maintenance
programs.
aa. CMS are independent of electric motor and generator stator temperature monitoring
equipment.
bb. A typical CMS will be equipped to monitor various bearing temperature and vibration
sensors to provide the following diagnostic information from each of the machine
sets. The specific requirements will be determined by the mechanical engineer.
4) Motor Free-End Thrust Bearing: Three axis of housing vibration velocity
(Radial X+Y and Axial Thrust position) two temperature and one oil level
measurement.
5) Motor Winding Temperatures: 2 per phase - Phase A, Phase B, & Phase C.
6) Motor Casing Temperature
7) Motor Drive-End Bearing: one temperature and one oil level.
8) Pump pedestal: Two axis of housing vibration velocity (Radial X+Y).
9) Pump Drive-End Bearing: Three axis of housing vibration velocity (Radial X+Y
and Axial Thrust position) and one temperature.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
10) Motor Shaft: One proximity probe, or Hall Effect speed sensor (key-phasor).
11) Motor Shaft: reverse rotation detection.
12) Motor Shaft: Tacho RPM measurement.
13) Seal Water Pressure and Flow.
cc. The criteria for Protective and Condition Monitoring Equipment for Rotating
Machinery is detailed further in Saudi Aramco Engineering Specification SAES-J-
604.
dd. Emergency Shutdown and Isolation Systems (ESD)
ee. ESD systems are not normally required for building automation and /or water and
wastewater facilities. However depending on the configuration and the power
requirements for very high volume pumping stations as with seawater cooling pump
stations, it may be necessary to incorporate an ESD system into the design.
ff. ESD systems shall be designed in accordance with Saudi Aramco Material Systems
Specification 34-SAMSS-623 Programmable Controller Based ESD Systems;
gg. ESD systems shall be configured using redundant architecture, i.e., Dual Modular
Redundant (DMR), 1-out-of-2D (1oo2D) or Triple Modular Redundant (TMR), 2-out-
of-3 (2oo3) voting architecture.
2. Control System Overall Integration
a. For Wet Utility Treatment Plant such as Potable Water RO plant, IWTP treatment,
SWTP treatment and Sea Water Cooling Pump Station, the PCS is the single
window platform for control and monitoring of the process plant operations. The
overall integration shall include following minimum requirements
 The PCS shall include distributed field controllers, I/O modules, system and
marshalling cabinets, communication modules for interface with other third
party control systems, plant automation networks, Data Servers, Operator
Workstations, Engineering Workstation, Printers for process operation and
control
 The PCS shall also include subsystems such as Instrument Asset
Management System (IAMS), Alarm Management System (AMS), Data
historian, Cyber security server, time synchronization server, fire wall, web
terminal, demilitarized Zone etc. as per individual project requirements.
 If ESD system is required, The ESD system shall be fully integrated with
PCS.
 CMS integration with PCS shall be connected through both hardwire and
software. For machine protection trip signals such as vibration, bearing
temperature etc. shall be hardwired to PCS/ESD for interlock. Other alarms,
diagnostics data shall be serial link to PCS through industrial standard
protocol such as Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU etc.
 There will be no BAS system for these plant. The HAVC DDC control panels
in each plant building shall provide common alarm signals to be hardwired
to PCS for alarm.
 FACP from each plant building shall form the dedicated fire alarm ring
network and provide fire alarm workstation to monitor the plant fire alarm
status in control room. FACP in each plant building shall also provide

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
Common Alarm and Common Fault signals to be hardwired to PCS to alarm

the process operators. In case no centralized fire alarm workstation is
available, FACP shall be serial link with PCS through industrial standard
protocol such as Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU etc.
b. For Wet Utility distribution piping network, such as Potable Water Distribution Pump
Stations, Valve Chambers, Sea Water Cooling Valve Chambers, lift Stations etc.
the SCADA is the single window platform for control and monitoring of the process
plant operations. The overall integration shall include following minimum
requirements:
 The local SCADA will be located in Pump Station Control Room include
communication gateways, networks, data collection severs, Operator
control.
 The local SCADA system shall uplink with MARAFIQ Data Control Center
by means of FO cable and radio connection for remote monitoring purpose.
 PLC to be used for pump station local control and monitoring, including
controllers, I/O modules, system and marshalling cabinets, communication
modules for interface with other third party control systems, networks and
gateways for uplink with SCADA system.
 RTU will be used for pump station associated distribution pipeline such as
Valve Chamber Instruments control and monitoring. Instruments such as
MOVs, Flow Meters, Pressure Transmitters, Analyzers etc. inside valve
chamber will be connected to local RTU which is located inside an
instrumentation shelter. All RTUs shall be uplinked to the associated pump
station PLC/ SCADA control network through FO cable, and/OR Radio
Communication for directly uplink with MARAFIQ Data Center for remote
monitoring by MARAFIQ Central SCADA system shall be also provided.
 RTU shall be used for control and monitoring the Sanitary Water Lift Station
and odor control unit. the RTU shall be linked with MARAFIQ Data Control
Center through Radio Communication network.
 There will be no centralized BAS system for distribution pump station plant,
the HAVC DDC control panels in each plant building shall provide common
alarm signals to be hardwired to PLC for alarm in SCADA system.
 FACP from each distribution pump plant building shall form the dedicated
fire alarm ring network and provide fire alarm workstation to monitor the
plant fire alarm status in control room. FACP in each plant building shall also
provide Common Alarm and Common Fault signals to be hardwired to PLC
to alarm the SCADA process operators. In case no centralized fire alarm
workstation is available, FACP shall be in serial communication link with
PLC through industrial standard protocol such as Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus
RTU etc.
c. For Wet Utility Irrigation distribution piping network, such as Irrigation Water
Distribution Pump Stations, Valve Chambers etc. the SCADA is the single window
platform for control and monitoring of the process plant operations. The overall
integration shall include following minimum requirements
 The SCADA will be located in irrigation Pump Station Control Room include
communication gateways, networks, data collection severs, Operator

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5

control.
 The SCADA system shall be uplinked with Landscape and Irrigation O&M
Data Control Center by means of FO cable and radio connection for remote
monitoring purpose.
 PLC to be used for irrigation pump station local control and monitoring,
including controllers, I/O modules, system and marshalling cabinets,
communication modules for interface with other third party control systems,
networks and gateways for uplink with SCADA system.
 RTU will be used for irrigation pump station associated distribution pipeline
such as Valve Chamber Instruments control and monitoring. Instruments
such as MOVs, Flow Meters, Pressure Transmitters, Analyzers etc. inside
valve chamber will be connected to local RTU which is located inside an
instrumentation shelter. All RTUs shall be uplinked to associated pump
station PLC/ SCADA control network through FO cable and Radio
Communication for monitoring by pump station SCADA system.
 There will be no centralize BAS system for irrigation distribution pump
station plant. the HAVC DDC control panels in each plant building shall
provide common alarm signals to be hardwired to PLC for alarm in SCADA
system.
 FACP from each irrigation distribution pump station building shall form the
dedicated fire alarm ring network and provide fire alarm workstation to
monitor the plant fire alarm status in control room. FACP in each plant
building shall also provide Common Alarm and Common Fault signals to be
hardwired to PLC to alarm the SCADA process operators. In case no
centralized fire alarm workstation is available, FACP shall be in serial
communication with PLC through industrial standard protocol such as
Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU etc.
 RTU shall be used for Irrigation Controller, the RTU shall be linked with
Landscape and Irrigation O&M Data Control Center by means of radio
commination.
d. For Buildings, such as government buildings, schools, colleges, university, hospitals,
commercial center, residential compound etc. the Integrated BAS is the single
window platform for control and monitoring of the entire camp / compound facilities.
The overall integration shall include following minimum requirements
 The centralized BAS shall be provided for entire building / camp /
compound, include communication gateways, networks, data collection
severs, Operator Workstations, Engineering Workstation, Printers for
monitoring the entire camp / compound facilities.
 The BAS shall provide a distributed control system in lieu of Building
Management Systems (BMS) - the computer networking of electronic
devices designed to monitor and control all HAVC status through BACnet
protocol. The BAS shall also provide interface and support all other
communication protocol with other widely standalone systems – typically
security (access control, CCTV, PA), fire and flood safety, fire pumps, fire
suppression, lighting (especially emergency lighting, Energy Efficiency
Control system), generators, and mechanical packages such as potable

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
water boost pumps, lift stations, chiller package etc. within a building / Camp
/ Compound.
 PLC with local monitoring and control functions to be used for potable water
boost pump, chilled water pump stations, Chlorination Package, including
controllers, I/O modules, system and marshalling cabinets, communication
modules for interface with other third party control systems, networks and
gateways for uplink with central BAS system. the PLC shall be linked with
BAS through Voice / data network in the camp / compound provided by
telecom.
 When Sanitary Lift Station are located within the Camps / Compound, RTU
will be used for control and monitoring the Sanitary Water Lift Station and
odor control unit. the RTU shall be linked with BAS through Voice / data
network in the camp / compound provided by telecom.
 All electrical power distributions status such as substation, MCC, switchgear,
main distribution Board, transformer status can be monitored and controlled
from BAS
 All Special Gas System within the building shall be monitored by BAS,
including Air Compressor, Vacuum Compressor, Gas handling Unit, Gas
Detector, Cylinder Pressure Control etc.
 FACP from each building shall form the dedicated fire alarm ring network
and provide fire alarm workstation to monitor the camp / compound fire
alarm status in central control room. FACP shall also be integrated with BAS
for monitoring and recording from BAS system.
J. Control System Software
1. General
a. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for control system
software.
b. It is the intent to have the Contractor furnish the latest generation, standard, field
proven, fully debugged and supported PCS software package application with a
minimum of additions or changes.
c. Customized or specially written software shall only be furnished if standard software
cannot meet all of the functional requirements required. Any custom applications
software required shall be fully integrated into the basic software and shall not
require unique command structures. No attempt has been made to list all software or
list all characteristics of software required by the Instrumentation Supplier – this shall
be specified for each specific project.
d. The software package shall provide a system capable of controlling system level
activities, and a higher level process control language allowing the operator to
monitor and control the process through an interactive human interface. The
software environment shall support a multi-programming atmosphere allowing
concurrent execution of more than one program in a background/foreground mode
or multi-tasking mode.
e. Throughout the execution of all software modules, the operator shall be presented
with all of the command or operation choices available at that point in the program
using sufficient verbiage or symbols to make the choices self-explanatory and
unambiguous.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
2. Standards
a. Standards are changing from time to time and it is the responsibility of the Engineer
to get the latest preferred standards from the RCJ at the time of design.
b. Licensing
c. All software provided shall be installed and used within the terms of the software
manufacturer's license agreement. All software purchased by the Instrumentation
Supplier shall be registered to the Instrumentation Supplier during the construction
phase of this project. During that time, the Instrumentation Supplier shall be
responsible for providing and incorporating minor software package updates and
patches issued by the software manufacturer. For example, if version 3.1 of a
program is purchased, and version 3.2 and 3.3 were released prior to project
completion, the Instrumentation Supplier shall be responsible for incorporating these
later versions into the final project. The Instrumentation Supplier would not be
responsible for incorporating major software revisions such as the release of a
version 4.0 or 4.1.
d. Prior to substantial completion of this project, the Instrumentation Supplier shall re-
register all provided software packages to the RCJ and provide the RCJ with written
confirmation of having done so. At project completion, all software shall be
registered to the RCJ and shall include full development a runtime applications
e. A complete list of supported systems and software shall be obtained from the RCJ at
time of design.
• Control Buildings and/or Control Rooms
1. General
a. The objective of this Subsection is to provide the basic criteria for design of central
control centers.
1) Local Control Buildings - In close proximity to the process facility for which it is
designed, a Local Control Building is characterized by its relatively small size.
Local Control Buildings are specifically designed to control a single process
unit or plant. Field instrumentation will be connected directly to the control
building process interface room. The building will be used to provide only the
console areas, offices and facilities necessary to support the operation of the
plant or process unit.
2) Central Control Buildings - Central Control Buildings are used to control
several interconnected process modules or plants. They provide a single
focus for plant or multi-plant wide operation and shall be used in conjunction
with Process Interface Buildings and Local Control Buildings located at each
process module or plant. The building shall be located to minimize the risk of
external damage from fires, explosions, or toxic releases per SAES-B-014
and shall provide essential administrative facilities necessary to support the
continuous operation of the plant(s).
3) Process Interface Room (Rack Room) - The Process Interface Room is
typically a section of the Local Control Building, or Central Control Building
(such as in small facilities), used as the termination and internal distribution
point for instrumentation wiring. For Local Control Buildings, this will include
field instrument wiring terminated in marshaling cabinets for inbound
distribution to distributed control system interface modules. For Central
Control Buildings incoming wiring will mainly feature electronic or fiber optic

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
highways associated with the Process Control System (PCS) and ancillary
control systems.
4) Structural design of these buildings shall follow Chapter 5.2
5) Control Room requirements
b. Local and Central Control Buildings shall be designed to provide administrative and
process control facilities to support safe operations and to provide a suitable
environment for the operation and maintenance of the process unit or plant PCS.
c. Internal Layout - It is not intended to mandate control building layouts. Floor plans
shall be developed on a case by case basis to support local operating practice and
facilitate the installation and maintenance of the plant control system.
d. Access
1) The main entrance to the control building, which shall face away from the
process plant or face the plant considered to have the least risk of fire or
explosion, shall be provided with an air lock to sustain building pressurization.
Locks are not required for emergency exits and service entrances. Certain
emergency exit doors may be restricted from being opened from outside, but
personnel shall be able to open them from inside.
2) The floor plan shall be designed to minimize casual personnel traffic through
the control room. Offices and equipment rooms shall be connected by internal
corridors. For Central Control Buildings, the main entrance shall open onto a
lobby or corridor from which the control room, offices and other facilities are
accessed. For a Local Control Building, the main entrance may open directly
through an air lock to the control room area.
3) The computer room (when specified), engineering room and process interface
room (rack room) shall have their main access through the control room.
4) Emergency exits shall provide easy exit routes from each room and from the
control building in accordance with building program.
5) Double doors shall be installed to provide outside access to the control room,
equipment rooms and rack rooms as required. If the control room is elevated
above grade then loading platforms with stairways shall be provided to
facilitate equipment handling during installation and maintenance. Equipment
access doors shall be kept locked during normal operation and shall meet the
blast resistance requirements of the structural walls of the building.
b. General Requirements
1) The control room shall be designed so that only activities associated with
plant control are performed there.
2) The control room shall be engineered to accommodate future planned
expansion.
3) Spacing between operator workstations and walls and between workstations
must be at least 1.22 m wide to provide adequate access for routine
maintenance.
4) The control room and equipment installed therein shall be designed for lowest
practical background noise level. Maximum allowable noise levels shall be
40 dBA. Equipment that cannot meet this criterion shall be installed in
auxiliary equipment rooms or shall be located in an acoustic cabinet.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
2. Server (Rack) Room requirements

a. A computer room shall be provided if there are special computers or servers which
require either a specially controlled environment or a locked secure area.
b. If specified, computer rooms shall incorporate the following features:
1) A computer ID card reader or combination lock shall be fitted to the computer
room door to prevent unauthorized access.
2) Environmental conditioning shall be provided in accordance with the
equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
3) The temperature, relative humidity and environmental corrosion rate shall be
monitored and alarmed in the control room.
c. All field wiring with the exception of control system communication links shall be
terminated inside marshaling cabinets.
d. All incoming cables must be sealed in accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical.
e. Power, instrument analog and digital signal cables shall be segregated and run in
accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical.
f. Workstations for machinery condition diagnostic systems and auxiliary
instrumentation systems that do not need to be routinely monitored shall be installed
in the server or rack room unless stated otherwise.
g. Engineering Room requirements
h. Engineering workstations shall be installed in the engineering room.
i. Secure fire resistant storage cabinets shall be provided for storage of computer
software and documentation. This is not for storing back up system software,
manuals and documentation which shall be stored in a secure off-site location.
j. The room shall provide space for desks and filing cabinets.
k. Electrical – Power, Wiring, Lighting, Grounding requirements
l. Electrical – Power, Wiring, and Grounding requirements shall be in accordance with
Subsection 5.5.3 F and SBC 401 and IEC standards.
m. Deep parabolic reflector fluorescent tubes shall be used in combination with
compact fluorescent or LED spots to provide variable illumination, without glare or
shadow, at operator workstations and task lighting for work surfaces. Lighting details
shall be in accordance with Subsection 5.5.1.M.
n. Critical instrument and control systems shall be connected to a UPS system. These
systems include:
1) Gas Detection System
2) Fixed Fire Suppression System
3) Emergency Shutdown System
4) Process Control System
5) Emergency Lighting
6) All local and field instrumentation devices
7) Other auxiliary protection, monitoring or control systems.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 280
o. The UPS system shall be configured and installed in accordance with Subsection
5.5.1.E.2.d.
p. Wiring
1) Under floor power distribution cable systems shall be installed in accordance
with SBC 401 and IEC 60364.
2) Data highways shall be terminated directly to PCS interface equipment.
3) Cables and conduits entering blast resistant control buildings shall be sealed
in accordance with Section 5.5.1 Electrical. Multi conductor instrument cables
shall be sealed around the outer jacket at the building entry point. Cable end
seals shall be applied as required by the SBC 401 and IEC standards.
4) Signal and power cables installed in air conditioning plenums shall conform to
SCB 401 and IEC standards.
5) UPS and Battery Room requirements
q. Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.E.2.d Uninterruptible Power Supply for additional
information and details associated with UPS.
r. Batteries shall be located in separate battery rooms and installed in accordance with
electrical requirements.
s. Battery rooms shall be ventilated in accordance with HVAC mechanical Section.
t. Safety equipment shall be installed in accordance with Subsection 5.5.1.E.2.d.
u. Refer NFPA 111 for additional requirements.
v. Environmental requirements
w. – Refer to Subsection 5.5.1.6 Environmental Conditions.
• Fire Alarm and Gas Detection Systems and Fire Suppression Control System
1. Fire Alarm System
a. General
1) This Subsection applies to the fire alarm and detection systems inside
residential, commercial, institutional and industrial facilities.
2) Purpose
(a) The primary purpose of a fire alarm and detection system is to notify the
appropriate personnel and to initiate the appropriate response by these
notified personnel.
(b) The secondary purpose is to initiate fire safety functions which are
building functions intended to increase the level of safety for the building
occupants or to control the spread of the harmful effects of fire.
3) An approved fire alarm and detection system shall be installed for all
facilities in accordance with the latest accepted edition of the SBC.
(a) The system and all associated components shall be designed to address
the code requirements for the building and occupancy type assigned to
the facility.
(b) The SBC identifies the minimum requirements for fire alarm and
detection systems. There may be situations which warrant protection

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
above these minimum requirements. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor

shall assess the criticality of each facility and submit any recommended
system enhancements to the Royal Commission for review and approval.
(1) For fire alarm and detection provisions in excess of the code
requirements to protect special hazards or critical equipment,
features and component selection shall be coordinated and shall
include consideration for the following:
(i) Evaluation of operating characteristics of each detection device
as it applies to the specific application
(ii) Ambient conditions such as temperature, humidity, and
corrosion where the devices are to be installed and operate
(iii) Fuel sources present
(iv) Ignition sources present
(v) Value of the contents of the facility
(c) The fire alarm and detection system shall be dedicated for that purpose
and shall not be combined with other building systems such as building
automation, energy management, or security.
(d) There are requirements for interconnection between the fire alarm and
detection system with other building systems for control functions
associated with response to a fire alarm condition. The A/E and/or EPC
Contractor shall coordinate all required interconnections with the
manufacturers of the other systems to ensure that the fire alarm system
remains independent but has the required interface to facilitate the
desired control functions.
4) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall prepare documentation to summarize
the recommended approach for the fire alarm and detection system
designed for the facility. This documentation shall be submitted to the Royal
Commission for review and approval and shall include the following:
(a) Floor plans illustrating the locations for all required fire alarm system
equipment.
(b) The Fire Alarm System Input/Output Matrix. Refer to Table 5.5.2.G for
sample.
(c) List of fire alarm system enhancements which are recommended above
the minimum code requirements in response to specific occupancies or
facility characteristics. Include a description of the rationale for these
recommendations.
(d) Analysis of Fail-Safe Operation. Refer to Subsection 5.5.2.D.3.c.2.
(e) Description summarizing the detection methods selected for the various
spaces throughout the facility.
(f) List of recommendations for the class and survivability characteristics for
the fire alarm and detection system wiring infrastructure.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
b. System Description and Requirements

1) The fire alarm and detection system shall be a microprocessor based,
addressable system comprised of the following components:
(a) Fire alarm control panel(s)
(b) Auxiliary fire alarm control cabinet(s) required for accommodation of the
system control devices, power supplies, etc.
(c) Graphic Annunciator(s). Alphanumeric or custom graphic type as
determined to be appropriate for the facility
(d) Communication devices for transmission of alarms to central and/or
remote locations
(e) Initiation devices; manual and automatic
(f) Notification devices; audible, visual and/or combination
(g) Monitoring and control modules
(h) Cabling infrastructure
2) Fire alarm and detection system shall be specified with the following
minimum characteristics and features:
(a) Electrically supervised against short, ground and open wiring faults in
any of the circuits associated with the fire alarm and detection system.
(b) Capable of expansion at any time with no limitations as to the number of
automatic or manual initiation devices.
(c) Capable of supporting multiple automatic detection devices on the same
circuits.
(d) Capable to ensure that manual initiation (fire condition) overrides a
trouble signal (fault condition).
3) Equipment locations for the fire alarm and detection system shall be
coordinated with the facility design. The following list provides guidance for
locating various fire alarm equipment:
(a) Main fire alarm control panel(s):
(1) For small buildings, the fire alarm control panel can be located in a
public space and function as the main control panel and the
annunciation panel.
(2) For larger buildings, the main fire alarm control panels shall be
located in rooms accessible by authorized personnel. These rooms
could be the Main Electrical Room or some other room dedicated for
electrical or communications equipment.
(3) For buildings where a Fire Command Center is required, the main
fire alarm control panel(s) shall be located in the Fire Command
Center.
(b) Auxiliary fire alarm control cabinets:
(1) These cabinets shall be located in electrical or similar utility type
rooms which will limit the access to authorized personnel.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
(2) The location of these cabinets shall be coordinated with the design
of the building.
(c) Annunciator panel(s):
(1) Annunciator panel(s) shall be located at the building entrance point
where the fire response team would enter the building.
(2) Additional locations for annunciator panel(s) would be at a
designated 24 hour monitored station or other operation center.
(d) Voice communications cabinet(s):
(1) Cabinets housing the equipment associated with the voice
communications system for the fire alarm and detection system
shall be located at the building entrance point where the fire
response team would enter the building.
(2) For buildings where a Fire Command Center is required, the voice
communications cabinet(s) shall be located in the Fire Command
Center.
(e) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall identify the proposed locations for
all of the fire alarm and detection system equipment on the preliminary
floor plans to solicit review and approval by the Royal Commission.
c. System Operation
1) The operation of any automatic or manual initiation device shall trigger
various alarm and control functions. These functions shall be in accordance
with the applicable codes and shall be summarized as part of the
construction documents. Table 5.5.2.F has been developed to provide a
sample Fire Alarm System Input/Output Matrix which identifies the operation
of the fire alarm and detection system. This matrix will be unique for each
facility and shall be developed and submitted to the RCJ for review and
approval.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
TABLE 5.5.2.F: FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INPUT/OUTPUT MATRIX (SAMPLE)

Annunciation Notification Required Control
Fire Alarm System Shall Interrupt Control Circuit

Notify the Elevator System of Fire in Respective
Activate Strobes and Announce Location of the
Immediately Notify Staff at 24 hour Monitoring

Supervisory Alert (Including Visual Signal and
Open Smoke Ventilation Windows and Doors

Transmit Condition to the Central Monitoring
Transmit all Point Status Information to the
Signal Access Control System to Required

Trouble Alert (Including Visual Signal and
General Alarm Output Notification to the
Release Smoke / Fire Door Hold Opens

Fire Alarm Alert of Location and Type in
Fire Alarm Shall Activate Atrium Smoke

Send Elevator to Alternate Recall Floor
Send Elevator to Primary Recall Floor
OUTPUT
Lobby, Hoistway, or Machine Room

Display / Print Changes of Status
Building Management System
Close Smoke / Fire Dampers
Building Security System

INPUT DEVICE
Alarm on Speakers
to Shut Down Unit

Audible Alarm)
Audible Alarm)
Exhaust Fans
Locations
Initiation
Station
Doors
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R
1 Manual Pullstations - All Locations         
2 All Area Smoke and Heat Detectors         
3 Door Release Smoke Detectors         
4 Duct Smoke Detectors and Smoke Dampers      
5 Duct Smoke Detectors and Any Air Handling Unit       
6 Atrium Area Smoke & Fire Camera Detectors          

F.A. Panel Mounted Manual Test Atrium Smoke Exhaust
7 Fan Switch  
Elevator Lobby Recall Smoke Detector Activated -
8 Primary Floor           
Elevator Lobby Recall Smoke Detector Activated - All But
9 Primary Floor           
10 Sprinkler Control Valve - Tamper - All Locations    
11 Sprinkler Waterflow - All Locations         
12 Atrium Area Sprinkler Waterflow           
13 Fire Pump Waterflow - All Locations      
14 Fire Alarm AC Power Failure   
15 Fire Alarm System Low Battery   
16 Trouble on Communications Link   
17 Trouble on Signal Line Circuit   
18 Trouble on Notification Appliance Circuits   
19 Trouble on Fireman's Communication Circuits   
2) Analysis of Fail-Safe Operation

(a) An analysis shall be performed for the fire alarm and detection system as
well as other interconnected systems including but not limited to building
management system, security system, access control system, lighting
control systems, smoke control systems, audio/visual systems, etc. This
analysis shall evaluate the operation of each system to establish the
operation status and condition for each in the event of fire alarm
activation. The results of the analysis and the A/E and/or EPC
Contractor’s recommendations shall be submitted to the Royal
(b) Relays selection and operation for the interconnected systems shall be
coordinated with the emergency power supply so that undesirable
operations will not occur upon power transfer. For example, in a power
failure, it may be acceptable if doors held open by magnetic devices are

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
released, but it would be totally unacceptable if a deluge system was

actuated.
d. Detector Operation Principle
1) The three most common detector devices which are generally used include
smoke detectors, heat detectors and flame detectors.
2) In addition to these three common detection devices, there are several other
specialty detection means that may be considered for application in
appropriate facilities. These specialty detection means include optical beam
detection, very early smoke detection apparatus (VESDA), and video smoke
and flame detection.
3) Smoke Detectors
(a) Smoke detectors detect the visible or invisible smoke particles from
combustion. The two main types of detectors are Ionization Detectors
and Photoelectric Detectors.
(1) Ionization Detectors
(i) Ionization detectors contain a small radioactive source that is
used to charge the air inside a small chamber. The charged air
allows a small current to cross through the chamber and
complete an electrical circuit.
(ii) When smoke enters the chamber, it shields the radiation, which
stops the current and triggers an alarm.
(iii) These detectors respond quickly to very small smoke particles
(even those invisible to the naked eye) from flaming or very hot
fires, but may respond very slowly to the dense smoke
associated with smoldering or low-temperature fires.
(2) Photoelectric Detectors
(i) Photoelectric smoke detectors contain a light source and light
sensor which are arranged so that the rays from the light
source do not hit the light sensor. When smoke particles enter
the light path, some of the light is scattered and redirected onto
the sensor, causing the detector to activate an alarm.
(ii) These detectors react quickly to visible smoke particles from
smoldering fires, but are less sensitive to the smaller particles
associated with flaming or very hot fires.
4) Heat Detectors
(a) The most common heat detectors either react to a broad temperature
change or a predetermined fixed temperature.
(b) Heat detectors use a set of temperature-sensitive resistors called
thermistors that decrease in resistance as the temperature raises. One
thermistor is sealed and protected from the surrounding temperature
while the other is exposed. A sharp increase in temperature reduces the
resistance in the exposed thermistor, which allows a large current to
activate the detector's alarm.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
5) Flame Detectors
(a) Flame detectors are line-of-sight devices that look for specific types of
light (infrared, visible, ultraviolet) emitted by flames during combustion.
When the detector recognizes this light from a fire, it sends a signal to
activate an alarm.
(b) The optical sensors used in flame detectors works at specific spectral
ranges (usually narrow band) to record the incoming radiation at the
selected wavelengths. 30% to 40% of the energy radiated from a fire is
electromagnetic radiation that can be read at various spectral ranges
(such as UV, IR). The signals are then analyzed using a predetermined
technique for flickering frequency, threshold energy signal comparison,
mathematical correlation between several signals, correlation to
memorized spectral analysis, etc.
(c) Flame detectors are available in a number of sensor types. The most
common sensor types include UV detectors, IR detectors, UV/IR
detectors.
(d) UV only flame detectors (ultraviolet spectral band detection) work with
wavelengths shorter than 300 nm (solar blind spectral band). They detect
flames at high speed (3 to 4 milliseconds) due to the UV high-energy
radiation emitted by fires and explosions at the instant of their ignition.
These devices are quite accurate, although they are subject to
interference (false alarms) from random UV sources such as lightning,
arc welding, radiation, and solar radiation.
(e) IR only detectors work within the infrared spectral band. The mass of hot
gases emits a specific spectral pattern in the infrared spectral region.
They are subject to interference (false alarms) by any other “hot” surface
in the area.
(f) UV and IR spectral band detectors compare the threshold signal in two
spectral ranges and their ratio to each other to confirm the reliability of
the fire signal. This style minimizes false alarms.
6) Specialty Detection Means
(a) Optical Beam Detection
(1) Optical beam detection utilizes a projected beam of light to monitor
for obscuration due to the presence of smoke.
(2) Types of beam detection include the following:
(i) End-to-End type consists of a separate light transmitter and
receiver. The transmitter and receiver are located on either
end of the protected area. They include open-area smoke
imaging detection in which ultraviolet (UV) and infrared (IR)
wavelengths of light are used to detect smoke. The
comparative differences between the UV and IR wavelengths
help to identify real smoke by comparing reflections and seeing
the difference in the profile.
(ii) Reflective type incorporates the transmitter and receiver in the
same enclosure. The light path is created by reflecting light off
of a specially designed reflector mounted at the opposite end of
the protected area.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
(b) Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA)

(1) VESDA consists of a central detection unit which draws air through
a network of purpose built aspirating pipes to detect smoke. The air
is passed through a laser sampling chamber that detects the
presence of smoke particles suspended in air by detecting the light
scattered by them in the chamber.
(2) The VESDA system is an aspirating detection system that detects at
the incipient stage as opposed to the smoke, flame or intense heat
stages.
(3) Continuous air sampling associated with the VESDA approach can
detect smoke before it is visible to the human eye and provides the
earliest possible warning of an impending fire hazard.
(c) Video Smoke and Flame Detection
(1) Video smoke and flame detection utilizes video image detection
(VID) technology to detect flame and smoke. This approach consists
of video-based analytical algorithms that allow integration between
analog cameras and advanced servers to create a complete flame
and smoke detection system.
(2) Video-based analytical algorithms include:
(i) Flaming fires – looks for specific fire pattern consisting of a
bright core of the flame and flickering corona.
(ii) Smoke plumes – identifies the anomalies that are caused by
smoke and analyzes the progression over a period of time to
identify a growing smoke plume.
(iii) Ambient smoke – monitors the light diffusion from light sources
and bright objects in the video images to detect the pattern
consistent with the slow accumulation of smoke.
(3) This approach utilizes a network video recorders and management
software to support multiple detection cameras to:
(i) Record video streams
(ii) Monitor live videos
(iii) Maintain an event log for all alarm conditions
(iv) Dispatch alarms and videos to remote locations
(4) This detection means provides coverage for large areas such as
atriums. The system provides enhancements over conventional
flame and smoke detection, such as:
(i) Quick detection times
(ii) Ability to conduct immediate and remote verification
(iii) Avoids cost associated with regular inspection and
maintenance of conventional devices which may be difficult to
access
(iv) Ease of installation and configuration

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
(v) Provides convenience for system integrators

e. Detector Selection
1) The type of fire alarm detector must be selected to best suit the
characteristics of the facility. Each of the detector types have unique
capabilities that must be considered when selecting the appropriate device
for a specific application. It is common to utilize several different types of
detectors throughout a facility to provide the most effective means of
protection. The following paragraphs provide a brief overview of the various
detector types along with information regarding appropriate applications.
The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall assess the specific applications and
provide recommendations regarding detector type selections to the Royal
2) Smoke Detectors
(a) Smoke detectors are usually more sensitive than heat detectors and
usually detect the fire sooner during early flame stages and will meet the
needs of most areas containing primarily wood, paper, fabric, and plastic
materials. During combustion, these materials produce a mixture of
smoke types with detectable levels of both large and small smoke
particles.
(b) Application
(1) Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be used in places where
smoldering fires may be expected.
(2) Ionization type smoke detectors shall be used where flaming fires
would be expected.
(3) If both types of fires are possible, both features are available in a
single detector.
(c) Smoke detectors are suitable for:
(1) Residential occupancies, computer rooms and other locations
having high values
(2) Indoor areas with low ceilings such as offices, closets, and
restrooms
(3) Relatively clean areas with minimal amounts of dust and dirt
(d) Smoke detectors are not suitable for:
(1) Open air applications as the detectors require ceilings to direct the
smoke from the plume by convection
(2) Areas where ceiling heights exceed 10.5 m
(3) Rooms where cooking will take place, such as, kitchens, or similar
areas where steam and condensation are present
(4) Areas where exhaust fumes are present such as, car parks, etc.
3) Heat Detectors
(a) Heat detectors are normally used in dirty environments or where dense
smoke is produced. Heat detectors may be less sensitive, but are more
appropriate than a smoke detector in these environments.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
(b) Heat detectors are ideal for areas where flammable gases and liquids
are handled or any area where a fire will quickly cause a large change in
the surrounding temperature.
(c) Heat detectors are also suitable for:
(1) Dirty, dusty or smoky environments
(2) Manufacturing areas where large quantities of vapors, gases, or
fumes may be present
(3) Areas where particles of combustion are normally present, such as
in kitchens, furnace rooms, utility rooms, and garages or where
ovens, burners or vehicle exhaust gases are present
(d) Fixed temperature detectors are suitable for the areas like boiler/plant
room, kitchen and furnace/kiln rooms.
(e) Rate of rise of temperature detectors are suitable for areas such as car
parks, loading bays etc.
4) Flame Detectors
(a) Flame detectors either ultraviolet or infrared offer the fastest response to
a freely burning fire and are well suited for protecting areas involving
flammable liquid fires.
(b) Flame detectors are best for protecting:
(1) Areas with high ceilings and open-spaces, such as warehouses and
auditoriums
(2) Outdoor or semi-enclosed areas, where winds or draughts can
prevent smoke from reaching a heat or smoke detector
(3) Areas where rapidly developing flaming fires can occur, such as
petrochemical production, fuel storage areas, paint shops, and
solvent areas
(c) Flame detectors are quite expensive and may be subject to false alarms
from radiation such as welding, reflected sunlight, electric sparks and
halogen lamps.
(d) Flame detectors performance is affected by thick smokes, vapors,
grease, and oil deposits on the detector windows resulting in blockage of
the line of sight.
5) Optical Beam Detection
(a) Optical beam detectors are used where the application of standard spot
type smoke detectors would be uneconomical or restricted due to the
height of the protected area. Where high ceilings are present, beam
smoke detectors may be more responsive to slow or smoldering fires
than a point smoke detector because they are monitoring the entire
smoke field intersecting the beam.
(b) Optical beam smoke detectors are line-of-sight devices and are subject
to interference from any object or person which may enter the beam
path. This limitation makes them impractical for occupied spaces with
normal ceiling heights.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 290
(c) Several typical applications include:

(1) High ceiling areas such as atriums, lobbies, gymnasiums, sports
arenas, museums and religious sanctuaries
(2) Warehouses
(3) Manufacturing areas in factories
(d) Features to include for beam detection include:
(1) Automatic gain control to compensate for the buildup of dust, dirt
and other debris that may lower the detection threshold for the
detector
(2) Motorized detector which automatically aligns itself to compensate
to changes over time due to building movement or other situations
(3) Remote test stations to facilitate the periodic electronic testing of the
detector
6) Very Early Smoke Detection Apparatus (VESDA)
(a) VESDA systems incorporate more than one level of alarm which is
configurable and allows very early warning of an event. The detection
and alarm sensitivities can be programmed to levels ranging from more
sensitive to less sensitive than conventional detectors. The detectors
work best in non-volatile environments.
(b) VESDA systems are suitable for environments where highly sensitive
rapid smoke detection capability is required. Typical applications include:
(1) Cleanrooms
(2) Areas containing goods easily damaged by fire
(3) Telecommunications and Electronic Rooms
(c) VESDA systems are also suitable for spaces with challenging physical
characteristics or aesthetic concerns including:
(1) Large spaces with high ceilings such as atriums, lobbies,
gymnasiums
(2) Mechanical equipment spaces where ductwork, piping and other
infrastructure make the installation of spot detectors challenging or
ineffective
(d) VESDA systems can be used in dusty or dirty environments as long as
appropriate design, installation and maintenance procedures are
followed.
7) Video Image Detection (VID)
(a) VID is ideally suited for environments where spot or other types of
detection would not be efficient including large open or high-volume
areas such as atria, shopping malls, religious assembly spaces, hotels,
office buildings, airports and warehouses.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(b) VID provide monitoring personnel with information regarding the location
and extent of the fire which ultimately provides guidance for the
activation of the appropriate emergency response.
(c) The application of VID must consider the environmental conditions such
as lighting, background, foreground and contaminants present in the
protected areas.
f. Detector Location
1) Detectors shall be located and installed in accordance with the applicable SBC,
NFPA Codes and Standards.
2) Detector spacing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s and the listing
agency’s spacing criteria. The nominal spacing of detectors was developed
using a smooth ceiling at a predetermined height. Detector spacing shall be
adjusted for other than the standard conditions as identified in the NFPA Codes
and Standards.
3) Consideration may also be given to architectural symmetry, provided that this
does not downgrade detector function to an unacceptable level.
4) To be most effective, both smoke and heat detectors must be located on or
near the ceiling of the space to be protected because that is where smoke or
hot gases initially collect.
5) Smoke and heat detectors shall not be located near operable windows, air
supply vents, or other ventilation sources that would interfere with the natural
air currents. The detectors shall not be located in dead air spaces nor near any
obstruction that would prevent smoke or heat from reaching the detector.
6) All detectors shall be located to avoid localized sources of “false” alarms.
7) Heat detectors, though slower to respond to a fire than smoke detectors, are
not as prone to false alarms. They are thus often installed in storage rooms and
service rooms that are normally unoccupied.
8) In case of heating and ventilation system, where smoke detectors are used to
initiate signals to shut down fans or to close dampers, they shall be installed in
the return air ducts of heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems, to
prevent the circulation of smoke-contaminated air.
g. Fire Alarm Control Panel
1) Control panels shall be designed to meet the unique requirements of each
building and occupancy.
2) Zoning:
(a) The building area may be divided into zones by floors or as required to
allow for accurate and rapid determination of the fire location and the
type of systems being activated.
(b) Zone configuration shall consider fire zones, means of egress and areas
of risk. Maximum area per zone shall not exceed 2000 m².
(c) The length of any zone shall not exceed 91 m in any direction.
(d) Buildings of 300 m² or less may be considered as a single zone.
3) Control panels shall have spare zone capacity. Panels shall have a minimum of
two zones, even though the building may be a single alarm zone.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
4) The control panels shall be a multi-processor based networked system

designed specifically for fire and smoke control. The control panels shall
include all required hardware, software, and site-specific system programming
to provide a complete and operational system.
5) The control panel shall be diagnostic type and shall be designed such that
interactions between any applications can be configured and modified using
software provided by a single supplier.
6) When the panel is used with addressable detectors, the panel shall be capable
of providing a signal which shall indicate Fire/Fault zone along with the detector
which has operated by means of a digital Liquid Crystal Diode (LCD) display.
h. Fire Alarm Annunciators
1) The requirement for fire alarm annunciation panel depends upon the size and
complexity of the system.
(a) In small buildings, with a single fire department response point, a graphic
annunciator panel is unnecessary. The Main Fire Alarm Control Panel
can be strategically located to function as the annunciator at the fire
department response point.
(b) For moderate sized buildings, a remote fire alarm annunciator panel shall
be provided and shall consist of an alphanumeric screen which has the
capability to identify the alarm condition by type and location.
(c) For large and complicated facilities, a custom, graphic fire alarm
annunciator shall be provided to assist the facilities personnel and the
fire department responders to quickly determine the cause and location
of the fire alarm condition. The graphic annunciator panel shall be
provided with the following features:
(1) The panel shall show all floor plans of the building and light the floor
plan (or part of the plan if so zoned) when that area is in alarm.
(2) The annunciator panel shall be graphic type and shall have an
audible alarm and provide visual indication of the zone of the
building in which the alarm initiating detector is located.
(3) The annunciator panel shall be of modular construction, flush
mounted with the required number of LEDs for use on 24 V DC.
Each LED shall indicate one building zone.
(4) The annunciator panel shall have a visible and an audible trouble
indicator with silencing switch. The annunciator LEDs shall be
electronically supervised. Removal of LED or LED failure shall
sound the system trouble signal. LEDs shall be bright enough to be
visible in direct sunlight if the annunciator is so located.
(5) Graphic annunciator panel shall have capability to bypass audible
fire and trouble alarms. These alarms shall be bypassed if
Annunciator Panel is located next to Main Fire Alarm Control Panel.
i. Notification Appliances
1) The fire alarm and detection system shall be designed with sufficient
notification devices to provide ample notification for the building occupants.
Notification shall include both audible and visual devices spaced in accordance
with all applicable codes.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
2) Audible
(a) Audible devices such as horns, bells and/or speakers, shall be located
throughout each facility as required by code to provide audible
notification of the fire alarm condition. Audible devices shall be specified
with multiple tap settings to facilitate adjustment of the sound intensity to
adapt to the final installed conditions.
(b) The type of audible device shall be determined from the requirements of
the facility. The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall develop a
recommendation for the type of audible device and submit to the RCJ for
(c) Audible devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof
enclosure.
3) Visual
(a) Strobes shall be located throughout each facility as required by code to
provide visual notification of the fire alarm condition. Strobes shall be
specified with multiple candela ratings to facilitate adjustment of the light
intensity to adapt to the final installed conditions.
(b) Flashing beacons shall be utilized in place of strobes where insufficient
coverage is available from a strobe.
(c) Flashing beacons may also be used to supplement the fire alarm strobes
where deemed necessary due to the final application.
(d) Visual devices located outdoors shall be specified with a weather-proof
enclosure.
4) Audible/Visual Combination Devices
(a) The use of combination audible/visual devices is permitted and is the
preferred approach.
j. Signal Modules
1) These devices are addressable and allow interface with the various types of
non-addressable initiating devices such as flow switches, tamper switches,
industrial grade flame detectors, etc.
k. Control Modules
1) These devices are addressable and facilitate integration of control functions
between the fire alarm system and other building systems. Several examples
include; air handling unit shutdown, release of door hold open devices, opening
of automatic doors and gates, and initiation of fire suppression systems.
l. Power Source(s)
1) Power to the control panel must be fed from a reliable source of supply which
will not be disconnected for maintenance on other electrical systems. The
circuit breaker shall be labeled "Fire Alarm - Do Not Switch Off" and shall be
capable of being locked.
2) Standby power shall be available to the system in case of failure of the main
power source. Integral backup provision with nickel cadmium batteries shall be
located in the control panel. The backup batteries shall be sufficient to operate
the fire alarm system for a minimum of 24 hours.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
3) Where the building is furnished with a backup power source such as generator,
battery, or UPS the fire alarm and detection system shall be supplied from the
life safety emergency power branch in addition to the integral batteries.
4) Power supplies for the fire alarm and detection system shall initially be sized
with 20% spare capacity to accommodate future system modifications.
m. Wiring Requirements
1) General
(a) The wiring network for the fire alarm and detection system must be
designed in accordance with the applicable codes and must address the
criticality of the facility. The extent of redundancy and survivability must
be determined to properly specify the appropriate wiring system. The
paragraphs below provide an overview of the characteristics for the
wiring systems commonly used for fire alarm systems.
(b) The A/E and/or EPC Contractor shall complete an assessment of the
facility and develop the class and survivability recommendations for the
fire alarm system wiring including but not limited to the following:
(1) Initiating device circuits (IDC)
(2) Signaling line circuits (SLC)
(3) Notification appliance circuits (NAC)
(c) These recommendations shall be submitted to the Royal Commission for
2) Circuit and Pathway Characteristics
(a) Class
(1) Class A: Includes a redundant path and its operational capability
will continue past a single open. Any conditions that affect the
intended operation of the path will be annunciated.
(2) Class B: Pathway does not include a redundant path and its
operational capability stops at a single open. Any conditions that
affect the intended operation of the path will be annunciated.
(3) Class C: Includes one or more pathways where end-to-end
communications verifies operation integrity. The integrity of
individual paths is not monitored, and loss of end-to-end
communications is annunciated.
(4) Class D: Includes pathways that have a fail-safe operation that
performs the intended function when the connection is lost. The
pathways do not have supervision of their integrity. An example for
Class D is the wiring that provides power to the door holders.
Interruption of the power results in the door closing.
(5) Class E: Includes pathways that do not require monitoring for
integrity or electrical supervision.
(6) Class X: Includes a redundant path and its operational capability
will continue past a single open or short circuit. Any conditions that
affect the intended operation of the path will be annunciated.
(b) Levels of Survivability:

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
(1) Level 0: Pathways have no required level of survivability.

(2) Level 1: Include those pathways installed in buildings which are
fully protected by automatic fire protection systems. Any
interconnecting conductors, cables or other physical pathways are
installed in metal raceways.
(3) Level 2: This level consists of one or more of the following:
(i) 2-hour, fire-rated circuit integrity (CI) cable
(ii) 2-hour, fire-rated cable systems [electrical circuit protective
system(s)]
(iii) 2-hour, fire-rated enclosure or protected area
(iv) 2-hour performance alternatives approved by the authority
having jurisdiction
(4) Level 3: This is identical to Level 2 except the pathways are
installed in buildings which are fully protected by automatic fire
protection systems.
3) Installation
(a) The fire alarm and detection cabling shall be installed in a dedicated
raceway system. Under no circumstances shall cables other than fire
alarm cables be installed in fire alarm raceways.
(b) Minimum size of wire shall be 1.5 mm² stranded copper.
(c) Minimum conduit sizes shall be 20 mm.
(d) All wiring shall enter panels from the bottom to prevent moisture from
entering the panel through the conduit.
(e) All wires shall be numbered and labeled.
(f) Provide separate circuits for audible and visual devices.
n. Fire Alarm System Overall Integration
1) Fire Alarm Network within the Camp / Compound
(a) The primary manned response center for the fire alarm shall be central
control room within the camp / compound. Centralized reporting of the
Fire Alarm shall be via fire alarm network and shall be available at the
Central Control room where a dedicated Fire Alarm Workstation with
Large Screen HMI / Mimic Panel shall be provided.
(b) The secondary manned response center for the fire alarm shall be
available at guard house. Repeat mimic panels are used to supervise the
entire camps/ compound and shall be installed in all guard houses.
(c) The Fire Alarm network shall be a networked system compliant with
NFPA 72, style 7, (Class A) supervised communications network
requirements. It shall be made up of nodes which consist of interfaces to
intelligent Local Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP) located in all buildings
within the camp / compound.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
(d) Data transfer between locations shall use Highways conforming to NFPA
72, Style 7 wired, (Class A) communications with full network
communications supervision and reporting
(e) All individual fire alarm will be generated from FACP and shall be
graphically displayed at the centralized Fire Alarm Workstation.
(f) The FACP shall also be integrated with BAS. Common Fire Alarm and
Common Fault Alarm shall be available at BAS for alarm and reporting.
2) Confirmed fire alarm in each building shall give following actions:
(a) A visual alarm (red LED) on the FACP display panel in the building
(b) A general audible alarm in the building
(c) An audible and visual alarm at Fire Alarm Workstation in central control
room and Mimic panel at guard house
(d) General audible and visual alarm in BAS
(e) Auto telephone dial with associated Fire Station
(f) Interface with HVAC control panel to auto shutdown HAVC and
ventilation system. FACP will provide shutdown signal to respective
HVAC DDC control panel, but the shutdown logic shall be via DDC
control panel relay logic to directly stop the HVAC package, and shall not
use the DDC software logic. FACP common shutdown signal will be
monitored by BAS, and shall have alarm lamp on HVAC DDC Controller
panel.
(g) Auto shutdown Fire Dampers
(h) Interface with elevator to lock the elevator to safety location. (option)
(i) Interface and monitoring auto sprinkler system - Each sprinkler system
shall at minimum provide following signals to FACP
- Tamper Switch for each Zone Area
- Flow Switch for each Zone Area
- Sprinkler Pressure SW
(j) Interface and monitoring clean Agent system. Each clean agent system
shall at minimum provide following signals to FACP:
- Clean Agent Common Alarm
- Clean Agent Common Fault
- Clean Agent Confirmed Discharge Alarm
K. Documentation
1. General
a. The objective of Subsection is to provide the basic requirements for documentation
associated with Instrumentation and Control systems.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
2. Required Instrumentation Documents

b. Following is a complete list of instrumentation documents which are to be prepared,
as required, in the design stage of any plant. This list shall be used for the
preparation of the “J” section in the drawing control.
1) Process Flow Diagram (PFD) - Only one circle symbol shall be used for each
control loop, regardless of how many items of equipment eventually are
required for the complete control loop. The identification letters shall be
selected in accordance with Standard Detail Drawing 406000-
001/002/003/004/005.
2) Piping and Instrument Diagram (P&ID) - shall be prepared in accordance with
Standard Detail Drawing 406000-001/002/003/004/005 to cover symbols and
abbreviations. All instruments and accessory items as well as interconnecting
pneumatic and electrical lines shall be shown in accordance with Standard
Detail Drawing 406000-001/002/003/004/005.
3) Control System Design Specifications / Guideless
List of RCJ design guidelines / specifications for instrumentation and control
system design requirements, installation requirements, standards, quality
insurance, assembly stage area, testing procedure, shipment, storage, site
support, start up and commissioning, guarantee etc.
4) Instrument installation Schedules - used as the primary instrument index and
material control sheet. Each instrument shall be listed and all instruments
having the same numerical loop identifier shall be grouped together.
5) I/O List
(a) I/O List is a document containing a list of instrumentation which serves
as an input or output of a control system. Therefore, only the tag number
that physically has a cable which connects to the control system appears
on I/O List.
(b) When there is more than one control system in a plant (e.g. PCS and
BAS, FGS, CMS), the I/O list shall clearly indicate which instrument is
assigned to which control system or may separate them into different
sections of the document.
(c) In I/O lists, the following information should be stated as a minimum but
not limited to:
(1) Tag number

(2) Service description
(3) P&ID Number
(4) Type of Instrument
(5) Location
(6) I/O Type
(7) Control System
(8) Signal level
(9) Power Supply Requirement

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8
(10) Calibration Range

(11) Alarm set points
6) Instrument Specification Sheets (ISS) or Data Sheets - Each instrument item

is to be detailed on a suitable ISS.
Commentary Note: Packaged unit instruments shall also be specified on
standard ISSs.
7) Instrument Calculation Sheets and Details. - These are designed to be used
as work sheets for the calculations of Pitot tube meters, orifice plates, venture
meters, control valves and relief valves. They also serve as a record of the
conditions on which the calculation was based.
Commentary Note: Calculation sheet(s) generated from workstation or vendor
software packages are acceptable.
8) Control System Architecture Drawing
(a) Control system architecture depicts the architecture of the plant control
systems and the interfaces amongst the systems required for overall
operation of process plant.
(b) The required Control System is determined by the level of functionality,
complexity and safety of a plant. This may comprise of process
control system, safety instrumented system, building automation system,
fire alarm system, fire suppression system, SACDA control system.
(c) Control system architecture drawings shall also show supervisory level
equipment such as operator workstation, engineering workstation, large
screen display, Instrument asset management server, historian server,
cyber security server, control panel type, interface with other third party
systems, fire and gas system and also network equipment.
(d) Control system architecture shall clearly define the locations, i.e. main
locations, remote I/O locations, indoor/outdoor location, control
room/building limit.
(e) The major control, Ethernet and communication cables are to be shown
and specified.
(f) The control system architecture is conceptual in nature and is used for
specifying the requirements of the control system to the PCS/SCADA
Supplier. This drawing is provided as supporting documentation for the
process control system requisition.
9) Layout Drawings.
(a) Control room layout drawings shall show in plan view the location of
consoles, panels, control racks, computer racks and peripherals, logic
racks, termination racks and boxes.
(b) Remote building (Process Interface Buildings, Analyzer House, etc.)
layout drawings shall show the position of each item of major equipment.
(c) Layout of Control Room Console, Panel, Cabinets, and/or Local Panel -
Normally these drawings serve only as a guide for the vendor. Therefore,

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
neither construction details nor exact dimensions are required on these

drawings. Only the overall dimensions, location of instrument items,
shape, graphic layout and general layout are required.
Commentary Note: In instances where the Local Panel is to be field
fabricated, and the instruments to be field mounted, complete lay-out and
construction details are required.
(d) Front of Control Room Console, Panel and/or Local Panel - Besides the
basic information as specified in (c), the layout of the panelboard front
shall also indicate the cut-out dimensions and mounting details for all
instrument items.
(e) Back of Control Room Console, Panel and/or Local Panel - In addition to
the basic information as specified in (c), the layout of the panelboard
back shall indicate:
(1) Exact location where signal cabling, data highway cabling, and
electrical power wiring enters the console or panelboard. Instrument
air supply and pneumatic tubing must also be shown as applicable
to each installation.
(2) Panel illumination.
(3) Location and designation number of terminal strips or electrical
junction boxes.
(4) Main air supply header, if required.
(5) Schematic layout of pneumatic tubing runs, when applicable.
(f) Front and Back of Cabinet/Rack Layout - As a minimum shall show
dimensions, equipment location, wiring raceway, cable entries and
terminal strips.
(g) The Vendor's final drawings shall be used for record purposes. Drawings
which are likely to be changed later, as front of console or panelboard,
back of console or panelboard and terminal layout drawings, shall
comply with RCJ’s drafting requirements for engineering drawings.
10) Cable Block Diagram
A cable block diagram typically shows all the control equipment and panels
and the interconnection between them. Cable number and the number of
cores or pairs of cores are usually all that is needed to be shown.
11) Cable Schedule
The cable schedule is developed from the cable block diagram, and will show
cable length, core size, construction and type of power/signal as well as the
cable number and number of cores/pairs. It will also show if the cable is to be
provided by the installer, or whether the cable is supplied by an equipment
vendor as well.
12) Instrument Interconnection Wiring Diagrams
(a) Instrument Interconnection Wiring Diagrams shall be prepared for each
of the following enclosures:
(1) Field junction box's and field control panels.
(2) Marshalling cabinets.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 10
(3) All instrument console/panels, cabinet/racks, junction boxes, located

in substations, equipment rooms, server rooms, control rooms, etc.
(b) The purpose of this drawing is to show the individual wiring between
devices (e.g., terminal blocks, indicating lights, switches, I/O modules),
and to identify cable numbers, wire tagging, terminal identification, fuse
sizes, etc. All spare termination points are to be shown on this drawing.
13) Instrument Loop Drawing
(a) Instrument Loop diagram is a detailed drawing showing a connection
from one point to a control system. It is an important engineering
deliverable to be used for checking of a correct installation and
connection when testing during pre-commissioning, commissioning and
also for trouble shooting during operation.
(b) Instrument Loop Drawing shall include connection between:
(1) Field instrument to control system (or vice versa)
(2) Signal from Local Control Panel to control system (or vice versa)
(3) Signal from MCC to control system (or vice versa)
(4) Signal form one control system to another system
(5) FF Segment allocation to Control System
(c) Loop diagram shows instrument (in a symbol) and its terminal numbers
which are to be connected, instrument cable number, junction
box number, terminal number assigned for the specified instrument,
multi-pair cable and pair number , marshaling cabinet number, terminal
number in marshaling cabinet, control system details (rack, slot, I/O
channel). It also clearly indicates location of each equipment by means
of a border line as a limit.
(d) Loop Diagram usually shows a single control loop which means it could
only contains just one input (sensor to control system), just one output
(control system to final element) or combination of both
(e) The following is a list of data required along with its source/reference:
(1) Instrument Terminal number. Most instrument could be assumed to
use (+) and (-). Terminals. Instrument which needs special
arrangement such as smoke detector or instrument which in series
loop, requires manufacturer connection detail to make the cable is
properly connected.
(2) Junction box terminal number, this information could be obtained
from JB wiring connection
(3) Marshaling terminal number, this information could be obtained
from marshaling wiring connection.
(4) I/O point detail information. Obtain this information from I/O
assignment which is produced by system integrator or control
system vendor.
14) Control System Sequence of Operation, Control Narrative, C&E or Logic
Narrative

Rev. 0 5.5 - 11
The control narrative, sequence of operation, C&E or Logic Narrative are

critical components of design deliverables as they interpret the design
intension of control and interlock functional requirements, and provide all
information for the system integration supplier to configure the control system.
15) List of Nameplates for Instruments - List of Nameplates for Instruments -
Separate drawings shall be prepared to cover nameplates required for
instruments as follows:
(a) Control room panel mounted instruments
(b) Rack mounted instruments
(c) Local panel mounted instruments
(d) Local mounted instruments
(e) Annunciator
16) Instruments mounted in Control Room Console, Panel, Rack or Local Panel -
Panel mounted instruments shall be provided with two nameplates, one on
the front and one on the back; rack mounted instruments shall have front
mounted nameplates only. The front nameplate shall show service description
and tag (mark) number including plant and instrument number. In case of
multipoint instruments, this information shall be shown for each point.
17) Instrument Piping Details.
18) Instrument Mounting Details.
19) Field calibration sketches and reports.
c. The following is a list of Instrumentation documents that are to be prepared by the
system integration Supplier, in the design / procurement / Construction stage of any
plant.
1) Specification Compliance Comparison Sheet.
2) Non- Compliance Registration.
3) Scope of work
4) Bill of Quantities
Panel Equipment Schedule (Bill of Quantities) - This schedule shall be
prepared to inform the panel vendor about the types, sources, installation,
etc., of the instruments and other miscellaneous equipment that is shown on
the different panel drawings.
5) Product Catalogues, selection details
6) Product operation and installation manuals
7) Product Certificate
8) PCS Functional Design Specification
9) SCADA system Functional Specification
10) BAS system Functional Specification
11) IAMS Functional Design Specification
12) Control Panel layout Drawing

Rev. 0 5.5 - 12
13) Control Panel Wiring Diagram

14) Control Panel Termination Drawing
15) System Architecture Drawing
16) Overall System Network Schematic
17) I/O Allocation Details
18) Factory Acceptance Test Procedure
19) Serial Link Database ( Mapping Table)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 13
SUBSECTION 5.5.4 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE
5.5.4 GUIDELINES BY BUILDING TYPE

A. General
• Introduction
b. The Design Guidelines below are intended to be general in nature. The purpose of
these guidelines is to provide the A/E and/or EPC contractors with the requirements
of the RCJ for specific building types. These guidelines are not intended to provide
design knowledge but rather to indicate additional information, provisions and
submissions for each building type.
c. The Building Types are separated into the following categories:
1) Public/Government
2) Commercial
3) Residential
4) Industrial
5) Specialty Applications
d. Each of these categories is broken down further into sub-categories for specific
building types. If the A/E and/or EPC contractor retained to design a building whose
type is not contained in this section, then they must request specific design
guidelines from RCJ prior to commencing the work.
e. The A/E and/or EPC contractors shall submit, in each of the design phase
submissions, how they have addressed each of the provisions for their respective
building type.
f. Refer to Subsection 5.3.5 Guidelines by Building Types for additional information
regarding the occupancy requirements.
g. Definitions and Abbreviations:
h. For a list of general definitions refer to Section 2.2 Definitions and Abbreviations.
B. Public/Government
(a) Athletic Venues
b. Design Considerations
1) Goals and purpose of the facility
(a) Goals
(1) Define the goals of the facility. These may include but are not limited
to the following:
(i) To support the playing and viewing of a sport with all the
necessary infrastructure to support the athletes as well as the
spectators.
(1) The type of Athletic Venues may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Baseball
(ii) Soccer/Football

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(iii) Basketball
(iv) Swimming
(v) Gymnastics
(vi) Hockey
(vii) Rugby
(viii) Cricket
(ix) Track and Field
(x) Tennis
(xi) Golf
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(1) Provisions of power to scoreboards
(2) Provision of power to video boards
(3) Provision of power to illuminated signs
(4) Provision of power to out buildings for maintenance and
concessions
(5) Provision of normal power service and equipment with appropriate
redundancy for the hosted events
(6) Provision of backup power source appropriate for the venue
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of appropriate and adequate lighting to satisfy the
illumination levels required for the event type in accordance with
governing sports authority
(2) Provision of emergency lighting with instant strike operation to
facilitate egress during a power outage
(3) Provision of security lighting for exterior facilities
(4) Provision of appropriate lighting controls to facilitate manual,
automatic and/or programmed control
(a) Communications
(1) Provisions for video and scoreboards
(2) Provisions for video distribution system infrastructure
(3) Provisions for structured cabling system
(4) Provisions for wireless (WIFI)
(5) Provisions for public address system
(6) Provisions for distributed antennae system
(7) Provisions for digital signage system

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
(8) Provisions for Network and telephony systems

(b) Safety and Security
(1) Consider layered Access Control approach
(2) Security Command Center
(3) Security gates and turnstiles
(4) CCTV surveillance cameras and systems
(5) Intrusion detection zones
(6) Emergency radio communications
4) Instrumentation and Controls
(a) Irrigation controls
(b) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the assembly occupancy of the facility
(c) Control for fire suppression system
(d) DDC Controller for HAVC / Lighting / Energy Efficiency Control
(e) BAS system
c. Submittals
1) Building Description Summary
(a) Special technical requirements or features
(b) Description of features
(c) Description of security measures
d. References
1) Consult the appropriate sport governing body and adhere to all applicable
regulations, sanctions and design specifications. These include but are not
(a) IOC – International Olympic Committee
(b) ITF – International Tennis Federation
(c) FINA – Federation Internationale de Natation
(d) NCAA – National Collegiate Athletic Association
(e) IAAF – International Association of Athletics Federations
(f) FIFA – Federation Internationale de Football Association
(g) FIBA – Federation Internationale de Basketball
(h) IFAF – International Federation of American Football
(i) NABBP – National Association of Base Ball Players
(j) IIHF – International Ice Hockey Federation

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3
2. Aviation
a. Design Considerations
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Provide a safe and secure place for flight
(ii) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities
and function for the facility
(iii) Comply with all requirements of the General Authority of Civil
Aviation of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
(1) The type of Aviation building may include but is not limited to the
following:
(i) Airports
(ii) Heliports/helipads
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundancy for the facility. Consider multiple service feeders and
redundant electrical components
(2) Provision of backup power source to supply the crucial electrical
loads throughout the facility
(3) Provision of power to out buildings for maintenance
(4) Provision of power for monitors throughout the facility
(5) Provision of power to pedestrian movement equipment
(6) Provision of power to illuminated signage
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of lighting systems (fixtures and controls) for public
spaces which maximizes the use of available daylighting to
minimize the energy associated with artificial lighting.
(2) Provision of night/security lighting throughout the facility to ensure
safe passage and security.
(3) Provision of exterior lighting to facilitate movement of aircraft and
support equipment.
(a) Communications
(1) Radio and satellite monitoring equipment
(2) Accessible outlets for personal electronic devices

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
(3) Provisions for structured cabling system

(4) Provisions for wireless (WIFI)
(5) Provisions for public address and General Alarm system
(6) Provisions for distributed antennae system
(7) Provisions for digital signage system
(8) Provisions for network and telephony systems
(1) Restrict access from unauthorized persons or vehicles to runways
or private areas from both the interior and exterior.
(2) Create controlled access points for entry into terminals for security
checks.
(3) Provide security command centers
(4) Design CCTV surveillance systems
(5) Provide parking control systems
(6) Provide emergency communications systems
(7) Layered access control approach
(8) Security command center
(9) Security gates and turnstiles
(10) CCTV surveillance cameras and systems.
(12) Emergency radio communications
(13) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice
communications to address the code requirements for the facility
(a) Irrigation Controls
(b) Provision of instrumentation and controls associated with bulk fuel off
loading and storage.
b. Submittals
c. References/Standards
1) Federal Aviation Administration
2) UK Civil Aviation Authority

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5
3. Community Center
1) Goals of the facility
(a) Define the goals of the facility. These may include but are not limited to
the following:
(1) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and
function for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundant electrical components where the facility may be utilized
as an emergency shelter during natural disaster
(3) Provision of power for fitness equipment
(4) Provision of power for electrically operated folding partitions to
subdivide spaces for smaller gatherings or activities
(5) Provision of power for displays and kiosks associated with
advertising of events
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of appropriate lighting and controls for areas for religious
use
(2) Provision of lighting for displays and kiosks associated with
advertising of events
(3) Provision of zoned lighting and associated controls to adapt to
various space configurations
(a) Communications
(1) Audio-visual and sound systems shall be adequate for the expected
uses including consideration of speakers, projection screens,
projectors, and flat panel monitors.
(2) Wired and wireless data systems shall be considered where
appropriate.
(3) Distributed antenna systems shall be considered for mobile phone
and emergency responder services.
(4) Voice over IP telephone systems
(5) Digital signage systems
(6) Public address system

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
(1) Perimeter access control systems

(2) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones
(3) Site CCTV video surveillance
(4) Public area CCTV video surveillance
(6) Security information desk
(8) Emergency communications systems
(9) Parking control systems
communications to address the code requirements for the assembly
occupancies within the facility
(a) Irrigation controls
(b) Provision of instrumentation and controls associated with automatic
water level maintenance, chemical dosing and cleaning of swimming
pools
5) Related Functions/Facilities
(a) For facilities devoted exclusively for religious gathering, refer to
Subsection 5.5.4.B.6 – Mosques. Spaces for religious usage within a
multi-use Community Center shall likewise be designed in accordance
with that Section.
(b) Athletic Functions
(1) Swimming Pools are to be designed according to Subsection
5.5.4.B.1.
(2) Outdoor athletic facilities are to be designed according to
Subsection 5.5.4.B.1.
(c) Libraries
(1) Library areas within Community Centers shall conform to
Subsection 5.5.4.B.5 – Libraries.
b. Submittals
(d) Hospital
c. Design Considerations

Rev. 0 5.5 - 310
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Create a safe and healthy environment for the care of patients.
and function for the facility.
(1) The type of Hospital facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) General
a) Nursing Units
b) Diagnostic and Treatment Facilities
c) Freestanding Emergency Departments
d) Critical Access Hospitals
e) Rehabilitation Hospitals and Other Facilities
f) Children’s Hospitals
g) Laboratories
h) Clinics
i) Pharmacy
(ii) Outpatient Facilities
a) Primary Care Facilities
b) Freestanding Outpatient Diagnostic and Treatment
Facilities
c) Freestanding Birth Centers
d) Freestanding Urgent Care Facilities
e) Freestanding Cancer Treatment Facilities
f) Outpatient Surgical Facilities
g) Office-Based Procedure and Operating Rooms
h) Endoscopy Facilities
i) Renal Dialysis Centers
j) Outpatient Psychiatric Centers
k) Outpatient Rehabilitation Therapy Facilities
l) Mobile, Transportable, and Relocatable Units
m) Dental Facilities
2) Electrical
(a) Power

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1

redundant electrical components.
loads throughout the facility. Segregation of the emergency power
distribution into multiple branches.
(3) Provision of power for medical equipment.
(4) Selection of electrical components to maximize reliability.
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of energy efficient lighting which will comfort for the
healing environment.
(2) Provision of controls and dimming to enhance patient comfort during
various procedures.
(3) Provision of ample lighting in procedure and operating rooms to
support the needs of healthcare professionals.
(4) Selection of lighting fixtures in specialty areas to avoid interference
due to electrical noise which may be caused by ballasts.
(a) Communications
(1) Nurse call systems
(2) Patient monitoring systems
(3) Imaging network systems and storage
(4) Telemedicine, videoconferencing, and teleconferencing
(5) Patient television and media systems
appropriate.
and facility services

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2

communications to address the code requirements for the facility.
Interface fire alarm with other communications and alarm systems
4) Instrumentation and Control
(a) Potable Water System
(b) Sanitary Water Lift Station
(c) Irrigation System
(d) Wet Chemical Control System
(e) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements for the facility. Interface fire alarm with
other communications and alarm systems
(f) Fire Suppression Control System
(g) Medical Gas Storage
(h) BAS System
d. Submittals
e. References
1) Facility Guidelines Institute Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health
Care Facilities
2) Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPPA)
3) Libraries
f. Design Considerations
1) Goals and Purpose
the following:
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundancy for the facility

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3

(3) Provision of power for technology equipment and computers
(4) Provision of power for electrically operated book retrieval system
(5) Consideration for provision of controls with motion sensors to power
down equipment and computers when facility is not occupied.
(b) Lighting
(1) Provide appropriate lighting levels and fixture positions in the
lighting design for stacks, reference areas, reading areas, meeting
rooms, and computer banks.
(2) Provision of controls and dimming to facilitate adjustments to
lighting levels to accommodate various space uses
(3) Provision of controls for spaces with ample daylighting to reduce
artificial light when the available natural light is sufficient
(4) Provision of motion sensors to automatically de-energize artificial
lighting when the space is not occupied
(a) Communications
projectors, and flat panel monitors. Uses may include web-
meetings, teaching, and distance learning.
(2) Public-access computer space
(3) Audio books, and video resources
(4) Special consideration shall be given to the data requirements of
technology and computers including individually owned electronic
devices.
(5) Consider space for literacy training, computer technology training,
and distance learning.
appropriate.
(1) Resource check-out stations including RFID or magnetic detection
gates

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4

(b) Irrigation System
(c) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the facility.
(d) BAS System
g. Submittals
(d) Mosque
h. Design Considerations
1) Goals of the Facility
(a) Provide a safe and spiritual place to practice Islam.
(b) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and function
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for audio visual equipment
(4) There shall be no point or “spear” rising above the crescent. The
Hilal shall act as a lightning terminal removing the need for
additional lightning rods.
(b) Lighting
(1) Lighting levels shall be sufficient for reading at near floor level. The
use of chandeliers or special lighting is not needed

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5

lighting levels for the various activities
(a) Communications
(1) The sound system shall be simple in design, installation, operation,
and maintenance.
(2) Clocks shall be provided to show worshippers the proper times for
prayers.
appropriate.
(1) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones as
appropriate
(2) Site CCTV video surveillance where appropriate
(3) Intrusion detection zones for after-hours monitoring
(c) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements for the facility.
(d) BAS System
i. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
4. Museum
1) Goals of the Museum
(a) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and function
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for special space conditioning equipment
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of appropriate lighting for exhibit spaces. Goals of lighting
design are to enhance the viewing experience. Lighting
considerations include: the amount of illumination; the fixture and
lamp selection; the positioning of fixtures and direction of lighting.
(2) Ambient artificial light can seriously affect paintings and artifacts and
likewise warrants professional consideration for selection of source
and controls.
(3) Lighting and illumination can create accents that draw attention to
areas or exhibits and thereby prompt movement.
lighting levels to accommodate various space uses.
(a) Communications
(1) Technology considerations include but are not limited to visual
computer animations, flat screen presentations, video feeds, and
computer-controlled technical effects, and motion-sensor activated
exhibits.
(2) Sound and acoustic considerations include such things as audio
feeds for the above and acoustical separation from neighboring
exhibits that may be adversely impacted.
(3) For the hearing impaired, portable audio devices can enable access
to exhibit audio feeds or live presentations. Various technologies
exist for text renditions of auditory tracts.
appropriate.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7

(1) Exhibit security is typically a high priority in museums due to the
value of objects and the irreplaceability of historic treasures.
Security typically revolves around theft prevention and the
prevention of vandalism. Electronic detection devices, camera
systems, motion sensors, physical barriers and observation by
security personnel are among the ways this can be done.
Restricted access, alarmed exits with delayed egress hardware are
among the possibilities.
(2) Many of the same elements are required for storage security as
exhibit security, but the physical barriers and locking arrangements
are necessarily more elaborate.
(3) Consideration shall be given to Radio Frequency Identification
(RFID) asset management of museum collections.
(4) Display case glass break detectors, laser intrusion sensors,
thermal sensors, and shock/motion sensors shall be considered for
high value museum artifacts and collections.
(6) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones.
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the facility
(e) BAS System
b. Submittal Requirements

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8

(b) Describe the general systems to be employed for fire safety for
collections and storage, over-and-above code requirements.
(c) Describe entrance security.
(d) Ports/Docks
c. Design Considerations
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundancy for the facility.
loads throughout the facility.
(3) Provision of power for dock services and equipment.
(4) Electrical components shall be chosen with environmental durability
and water resistance as primary concerns.
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of safety lighting.
(2) Lighting fixtures shall be chosen with environmental durability and
water resistance as primary concerns.
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(5) Public address and General Alarm system
(6) Systems shall be chosen with environmental durability and water
resistance as primary concerns.
(7) Radio systems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9
(1) Security gate checkpoints

(5) Site CCTV video surveillance and Multi-sensor Thermal Cameras
with Continuous Zoom Lens
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements assembly occupancies in the facility.
(e) BAS System
d. Submittals
(d) Schools
e. Design Considerations
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) To create a secure and nurturing environment for the civic,
emotional, cognitive, vocational and social development of
students.
(1) The type of Schools may include but are not limited to the following:
(i) Pre-primary (kindergarten)
(ii) Primary (grade school)

Rev. 0 5.5 - 320
(iii) Intermediate (middle school)

(iv) Secondary (high school)
(v) Technical institutes
(vi) College/university
2) Electrical
(a) Power
as an emergency shelter during natural disaster.
(3) Provision of power for kitchen/food service facilities. Consider
backup power for food storage.
(4) Provision of power for all educational equipment.
subdivide spaces for smaller gatherings or activities.
(b) Lighting
(1) Rooms shall be provided with individual lighting controls.
(2) Utilize diffuse, uniform lighting that eliminates glare and reduces
fatigue.
(3) Maximize day lighting while reducing glare and optimizing visual
comfort.
lighting levels to accommodate various space uses.
artificial light when the available natural light is sufficient.
lighting when the space is not occupied.
(7) Provision of theatrical dimming system for auditoriums.
(a) Communications
projectors, and flat panel monitors. Uses may include web-
meetings, teaching, and distance learning.
(2) Library requirements including student-access computer space,
audio books, and video resources.
devices.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(4) Consider space for literacy training, computer technology training,

and distance learning.
appropriate.
(10) Masterclock systems
(11) Bell systems
(1) Safety and security of the students shall be the highest priority in the
design of schools.
(2) Control access to the building and property from unauthorized
individuals and vehicles.
(3) Provide areas for emergency shelter in areas where natural
disasters are more prominent.
(4) Library resource check-out stations including RFID or magnetic
detection gates.
(5) Entrance security gates
(10) Intercom stations
(11) Security office
(14) Vehicular control systems
to address the code requirements assembly occupancies in the facility.
(d) BAS System
f. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2

g. References
1) Consult all appropriate educational bodies for any additional applicable
regulations, sanctions and design specifications. These include but are not
(a) Ministry of Education.
(b) Ministry of Higher Education.
(c) General Organization for Technical Education and Vocational Training.
C. Commercial
(a) Hospitality
(a) Goals
(b) Types of Facilities
(1) Hotel
(2) Timeshare
(3) Resort
(4) Conference Center
(5) Other
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for fitness equipment.
subdivide spaces for smaller gatherings or activities.
(5) Provision of sub-metering of electrical services for tenants of the
facility.
(6) Provision of power to equipment for pool and spa facilities.
(7) Provision of power to kitchen facilities. Include backup power as
required for food storage.
(b) Lighting

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3

lighting levels to accommodate various space uses. Lighting
controls shall have capability to adapt to various space
configurations.
(a) Communications
(1) Conference Center audio-visual and sound systems shall be
adequate for the expected uses including consideration of speakers,
projection screens, projectors, and flat panel monitors.
devices.
appropriate.
(5) Voice over IP telephone systems.
(6) Digital signage systems.
(1) Room card key access control and management systems
(7) Security office
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system as necessary to address the
code requirements for the various occupancies for the facility.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
(e) BAS System

c. Submittals
(d) Office
d. Design Considerations
(a) Define whether the building is a single-tenant or multi-tenant building.
(b) Define the building as a low-rise (1-2 stories), mid-rise (3-10 stories), or
high-rise (11 or more stories, typically over 23 m in height). Provide
building and zoning code categorization as well.
(c) Provide the necessary infrastructure to support the activities and function
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(2) Provision of sub-metering for multi-tenant occupancies.
(4) Provision of normal and backup power for smoke evacuation
systems which may be required in the building.
(5) Provision of normal and backup power for systems associated with
a high rise building.
(b) Lighting
(1) Implementation of task/ambient lighting scheme to provide individual
workstation control and reduced energy consumption.
(2) Provision of zone controls to facilitate operation for various space
configurations.
(3) Provision of daylighting controls for spaces with ample natural light.
(a) Communications

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5

devices.
appropriate.
(1) Control access to the building and property from unauthorized
individuals and vehicles.
(2) Emergency stairwell floor re-entry in high rise buildings where
required.
(4) Security information desks
(5) Perimeter access control systems including elevator floor access
where required
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
requirements for the facility. Address special provisions required for high
rise buildings.
(e) BAS System
e. Submittals
(b) Description of
features

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6

(d) Retail/Restaurants
f. Design Considerations
(a) Define the development as a:
(1) Single establishment
(2) Multiple service retail development
(3) Mixed-use development
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(2) Provision of power for kitchen/food service equipment. Consider
backup power for walk-in and bulk refrigerators and freezers
(4) Provision of power for illuminated signs, and displays associated
with advertising
(b) Lighting
(1) Ensure appropriate lighting fixtures and illumination levels are
provided for both preparation and eating areas
lighting levels to accommodate various space uses and time of day
activities
(a) Communications
projectors, and flat panel monitors
devices.
appropriate.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7

(8) Point of sale systems
(7) Security office
(8) Intrusion detection zone
(9) Parking control systems.
(10) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(b) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(c) BAS System
g. Submittals
(d) Theaters
h. Design Considerations
(a) Define the goals of the facility in terms of theater type and prospective
audience.
(1) Theater types may include but not be limited to the following:
(i) Motion picture theaters
(ii) Theaters for live performance

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8

2) Electrical
(a) Power
(3) Provision of power for audio visual and performance equipment
(4) Provision of power for illuminated signs and displays associated
with advertising of events
(b) Lighting
(1) Consider the theater type when selecting lighting systems.
(2) Provision of the appropriate control and dimming capabilities
appropriate for the theater type
(3) Provision of infrastructure for full theatrical lighting system for
facilities used for live performances
(a) Communications
(1) Sound Systems
(i) Digital sound, “surround sound”, and the character of the audio
portion of motion pictures have advanced rapidly. This requires
appropriate acoustic design within the theater and appropriate
acoustic separation.
(ii) Speaker arrays shall consider the inherent digital distribution of
film audio tracks, such as left, center, right, and multiple station
audio tracks.
(iii) Theater sound systems shall consider the appropriate sound
processor to go with the projection system.
(2) Video
(i) Digital technology: Consider provisions for the necessary digital
input including portable hard drives and encrypted files.
(ii) Older analog formats, DVD, Blu-Ray and other media may
need to be provided for.
(3) Consider the use when selecting sound systems.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9

(6) Security office
(d) Provision of fire detection and alarm system with voice communications
to address the code requirements for the assembly occupancies for the
facility. Interconnect the fire alarm notification with other sound and
communications systems.
(e) BAS System
i. Submittals
D. Residential
(a) Multi-Family Housing
1) Goals
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
loads in public areas of the facility
(3) Provision of power for all residential equipment
(4) Provision of power for fitness equipment
(5) Provision of power for community facilities and activity centers

Rev. 0 5.5 - 330
(6) Penetrations through walls for electrical devices shall be located to

avoid noise transmission between housing units.
(b) Lighting
(1) Consider motion sensors for the lighting for infrequently used
spaces.
(2) Selection of light sources which are appropriate for residential
occupancies.
lighting levels in common spaces to accommodate various space
uses and time of day activities
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(3) IP television systems
(1) Camera system in vestibule tied to occupant television or
computers, to allow observation of entrants
(2) Intercom system to lobby with electronic access triggered by the
building occupant
(3) Emergency call stations, if appropriate
(10) Security office
to address the code requirements for the facility
(d) Address special fire alarm provisions for high rise type buildings.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 1
(e) BAS System

c. Submittals
(b) Description of Features
(c) Description of Security measures
(d) Single-Family Housing
1) Goals
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(2) Provision of power for all residential equipment
(b) Lighting
(1) Consider motion sensors for the lighting for infrequently used
spaces
(2) Selection of light sources which are appropriate for residential
occupancies
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(3) IP television systems
(2) Perimeter access control systems as appropriate
(b) Provision of fire detection and alarm devices to address the code
requirements for a residence
(c) BAS System

Rev. 0 5.5 - 2
e. Submittals
E. Industrial
(a) General Industrial
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Creating an economically optimized facility that ensures the
safety of the environment, personnel, and surrounding
community.
(1) The type of Industrial facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Distribution
(ii) Manufacturing
(iii) Warehouse
(iv) Assembly
(v) Processing
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundant electrical component
(3) Provision of power for industrial equipment
(4) Provision of power for automated storage systems
(b) Lighting
(1) Lighting shall be designed appropriately for the process of the
facility and shall consider reducing worker fatigue.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 3

(4) Provision of fixtures with appropriate ratings for the installed
environment
(a) Communications
appropriate.
and emergency responder services
(7) Radio systems
with Continuous Zoom Lens (Depending of the Type of Project)
(a) Measurement and Control Systems
(b) Process Alert and Alarm Systems
(c) Reporting Systems
(d) PLC or DCS Control Systems
(e) SCADA Systems
(f) Systems Integration
(g) Management Information Systems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 4
(h) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(i) Provision of specialty gas detection and alarm system as may be
required for various occupancies
(j) Irrigation System
(k) BAS system
c. Submittals
(d) Chemical Processing
(a) Refer to General Industrial Subsection 5.5.4.E.1.a.1) for design
considerations pertaining to goals and purpose of the facility.
for the facility.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
redundant electrical component.
(3) Materials shall be chosen to prevent chemical corrosion.
(b) Lighting
environment.
(a) Communications
appropriate.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 5

(3) Voice over IP telephone systems.
(4) Digital signage systems.
(5) Public address and General Alarm system.
(7) Radio systems
(1) Consideration for the types of chemicals being used and or stored
and their volatility with other materials.
(3) Refer to the General Industrial Subsection 5.5.4.E.1.a.3)(b) for
design considerations pertaining to security for the facility.
(9)
(15) Provision of specialty gas detection and alarm system as may be
required for various occupancies
(e) SCADA Systems
(g) Safety Integrity Systems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 6
(h) Management Information Systems

(i) Industry Waste Water Lift Station
e. Submittals
f. References
(a) Chemical Engineers shall be consulted on all chemical processing
facilities.
F. Specialty Applications
(a) Military
the following:
(1) Creating a secured and private environment for the housing and
operation of the military or one of its branches.
(1) The type of Military facilities may include but are not limited to the
following:
(i) Administrative purposes.
(ii) Storage such as ammunition, vehicles, and/or equipment.
(iii) Base.
(iv) Housing.
(v) Training Facility.
(vi) Weapons and ammunition production.
2) Electrical
(a) Power
as an emergency shelter during natural disaster.
(3) Provision of power for security provisions at entrances to the facility.

Rev. 0 5.5 - 7
(b) Lighting
(1) Provision of ample security lighting throughout the facility.
environment.
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(7) Radio systems
(4) Layered access control systems corresponding to security zones.
with Continuous Zoom Lens.
(a) Irrigation Systems
(c) Potable Water System
c. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.5 - 8

(d) Water Treatment and/or Power Plants (Desalination)
(a) Goals
to the following:
(i) Uninterrupted water supply
(ii) Create an effective distribution system
(iii) Optimize supply capacity
(iv) High water quality and protection of supplies
(1) The type of Water Treatment and/or Power Plants may include but
are not limited to:
(i) Water treatment facility
(ii) Wastewater treatment plant
(iii) Captive Power Plant
2) Electrical
(a) Power
(1) Coordinate all incoming or outgoing utilities with the utility
infrastructure.
redundant electrical components
(4) Provision of power for pumping and treatment equipment
(5) Materials shall be chosen to prevent corrosion from chemicals.
(b) Lighting

Rev. 0 5.5 - 9

environment
(5) Materials shall be chosen to prevent corrosion from chemicals.
(a) Communications
appropriate.
(7) Radio systems
(1) Consideration for the types of chemicals being used/stored and their
volatility with other materials.
(2) Materials shall be chosen to prevent chemical corrosion
(e) SCADA Systems

Rev. 0 5.5 - 340

(g) Safety Integrity Systems (SIS) / Emergency Shutdown System (ESD)
(h) Management Information Systems
(i) Provision of fire detection and alarm system to address the code
(j) Provision of specialty gas detection and alarm system as may be required
for various occupancies
(k) Fire Suppression Control System
(l) Package PLC / Local Control system
(m) Instrument Asset Management System
e. Submittals

Rev. 0 5.5 - 341

Electrical Design Guidlines - GEM Revision 0 (October 2016 Issue)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical Design Guidlines - GEM Revision 0 (October 2016 Issue)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CHAPTER 5 DESIGN GUIDELINES

SECTION 5.5 ELECTRICAL

Section Title Page No.

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

2. Metropolitan Area Network.........................................................................................126

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

4. Process Control System (PCS) Architecture...............................................................235

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

6) Economy, considering overall building and plant cost as well as electrical

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

8) “Circuit Breaker” A device designed to open and close a circuit by non-

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

this standard, the word "luminaire" is restricted to apparatus used for

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

6) AFFL: Above Finished Floor Level

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

40) IESNA: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

74) SDCS: Saudi Electricity Company Distribution Construction Standard

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

(1) Protection of persons against access to hazardous parts inside the

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

3) Saudi Building Code 501 Mechanical Requirements

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

8) IEC 60364 Low-voltage electrical installation - Electrical installations of

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

34) IEEE STD 80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

59) SEC DPS-09, Distribution Planning Standards – General Guidelines for

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

TABLE 5.5.1.A: STANDARD VOLTAGES AND APPLICATIONS

All facility types, - this voltage is being discontinued

Commercial - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors,

400/230 Institutional - Lighting, Air conditioning, motors,

Industrial – Lighting, Air conditioning, and motors.

All facility types, this voltage is being discontinued

Industrial and Large Commercial applications.

Main Distribution in Community, Institutional, and

Main Distribution in Industrial Areas for Ras Al-Khair

Main Distribution in Industrial Areas for Jubail

Sub Transmission Network in Community and

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

Main Transmission Network Supply to Primary

Main Transmission Network Supply to Primary

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

(b) The cable ampacities are specified at certain ambient temperature. It is

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

2) Where a transformer serves non-linear, high-harmonic loads, the transformer

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

m. Power Factor Assessment and Calculations

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

u. Battery System Calculations

RCJ Guiding Engineering Manual

TABLE 5.5.1.B: WORKING CLEARANCES